Graupner and KG MC-32 ComputerSystem Graupner HoTT User Manual 33124 mx20 HoTT 1 EN indd

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG ComputerSystem Graupner HoTT 33124 mx20 HoTT 1 EN indd

Users Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1608395
Application ID	hV/YOryOnaxxfgiOFC3YuQ==
Document Description	Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	344.45kB (4305571 bits)
Date Submitted	2011-12-22 00:00:00
Date Available	2011-12-22 00:00:00
Creation Date	2011-12-12 11:41:03
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2011-12-12 12:03:50
Document Title	33124_mx20_HoTT_1_EN.indd
Document Author:	wbergbauer

33124.mc-32 HoTT.1.en
H O P P I N G
T E L E M E T R Y
T R A N S M I S S I O N
mc-32
Programming Manual
Table of contents
General notices
Table of contents ........................................................... 2
Environmental protection notices .................................. 3
Safety notices ................................................................ 4
Safety notices and handling regulations
for nickel-metal-hydride rechargeable batteries ............. 8
Foreword...................................................................... 10
Remote control set description .................................... 11
Recommended chargers ............................................. 13
Transmitter power supply ............................................. 14
Receiver power supply .......................................... 16
Joystick length adjustment........................................... 17
Opening the transmitter housing ................................. 17
Changing joystick behavior .......................................... 18
Transmitter description ................................................ 20
Operating elements ............................................... 20
Backside of the transmitter .................................... 21
Headset connector ................................................ 21
Mini-USB connector .............................................. 21
Data jack ............................................................... 21
DSC (Direct Servo Control) ................................... 22
Data storage / card slot ......................................... 22
Display and keypad ............................................... 24
Operating the "data terminal" ................................ 25
Shortcuts ............................................................... 26
Hidden menu columns........................................... 27
Hidden mode ......................................................... 28
Language selection and display contrast .............. 28
Joystick calibration ................................................ 29
Telemetry data display........................................... 32
Displayed warnings ............................................... 36
Function ﬁeld displays ........................................... 37
Position display for rotary controls, CTRL 7 & 8 .... 37
Entry lockout.......................................................... 37
Table of contents
Transmitter initialization ............................................... 38
Firmware update ................................................... 39
Receiver initialization ................................................... 42
Firmware update ................................................... 43
Installation notices ....................................................... 46
Receiver system power supply .............................. 47
Term deﬁnitions ........................................................... 50
Switch and control assignments .................................. 52
Digital trimming ............................................................ 54
Winged models ............................................................ 56
Receiver layout ...................................................... 57
Helicopter models ........................................................ 58
Receiver layout ...................................................... 59
Program descriptions
Loading a new memory location .................................. 60
"Model select" ............................................................ 63
"Copy / Erase" ............................................................ 64
Erase model .......................................................... 64
Copy model ¼ model ........................................... 64
Export to SD card .................................................. 65
Import from SD card .............................................. 66
Copy ﬂight phase................................................... 66
"Suppress menus" ..................................................... 67
"Suppress models" .................................................... 67
"Base setup model"
Winged model ....................................................... 68
Model name .................................................... 68
Stick mode ...................................................... 68
Bound receiver ................................................ 68
Binding receivers ............................................ 69
Receiver output ............................................... 70
RF transmit...................................................... 71
Range test ....................................................... 71
DSC output...................................................... 72
Cut-off ............................................................. 72
Helicopter model ................................................... 74
Model name .................................................... 74
Stick mode ...................................................... 74
Bound receiver ................................................ 74
Binding receivers ............................................ 75
Receiver output ............................................... 76
RF transmit...................................................... 77
Range test ....................................................... 77
DSC output...................................................... 78
Autorotation ..................................................... 78
Auto.C1 Pos..................................................... 79
Cut-off ............................................................. 79
"Model type" ............................................................... 82
"Helicopter type" ........................................................ 86
"Servo adjustment" .................................................... 90
"Stick mode"
Winged model ....................................................... 92
Helicopter model ................................................... 94
"Control adjust"
Winged model ....................................................... 96
Helicopter model ................................................. 100
Throttle limit function ...................................... 104
Idle setting ...................................................... 105
Throttle limit in combination with AR in the
"Stick mode" menu ...................................... 107
"Dual Rate / Expo"
Winged model ..................................................... 108
Helicopter model ................................................. 112
"Channel 1 curve"
Winged model ..................................................... 116
Helicopter model ................................................. 119
"Switch display" ....................................................... 122
"Control switch" ....................................................... 123
How do I program a ﬂight phase?.............................. 126
"Phase settings"
Winged model ..................................................... 128
Helicopter model ................................................. 132
"Phase assignment" ................................................ 134
"Phase trim" (winged model) .................................... 136
"Non-delayed channels" .......................................... 137
"Timers (general)" .................................................... 138
"Flight phase timers" ............................................... 142
What is a mixer? ........................................................ 145
"Wing mixers" ........................................................... 146
"Helicopter mixer" .................................................... 164
Adjusting the throttle and pitch curve .................. 175
Autorotation setting ............................................. 178
General remarks about freely progr. Mixers .............. 180
"Free mixers" ............................................................ 181
Linear mixers ...................................... beginning 185
Curve mixer ........................................ beginning 187
Examples............................................................. 190
"MIX active/phase" ................................................... 192
"Mix Only Channel" .................................................. 193
"Dual mixer".............................................................. 194
"Swashplate mixer".................................................. 196
"Fail-safe" ................................................................. 196
"Teacher / pupil" ....................................................... 198
Connection schematic ......................................... 201
Wireless HoTT system ........................................ 202
"Tx. output swap" ..................................................... 206
"Telemetry" ............................................................... 208
Setting& Data View.............................................. 209
Satellite operation of two receivers .............. 218
Sensor Select ...................................................... 220
RF Status View .................................................... 221
Voice Trigger ........................................................ 222
"Basic Settings" ....................................................... 224
"Servo display" ......................................................... 230
"Servo test"............................................................... 231
"Code lock" ............................................................... 232
"Info display" ........................................................... 234
Programming examples
Introduction ................................................................ 236
Winged model
First steps ............................................................ 238
Incorporating an electric drive ............................. 244
C1 joystick switchover between
electric motor and butterﬂy ............................ 247
electric motor and airbrake............................ 250
Timer activation by control or switch ................... 252
Parallel operating servos ..................................... 254
Using ﬂight phases
Example 1 ..................................................... 256
Example 2 ..................................................... 260
Control of temporal processes ............................ 266
Eight-ﬂap wing ..................................................... 268
Delta and ﬂying wing models............................... 272
F3A model ........................................................... 276
Helicopter model........................................................ 280
Environmentalprotection notices
The symbol on this product, its operating instructions
or packaging gives notice that this product may not
be discarded as common household waste at the end
of its service life. It must be turned over to a recycling
collection point for electric and electronic apparatus.
The materials can be recycled according to their
markings. You make an important contribution to
protection of the environment by utilizing facilities for
reuse, material recycling or other means of exploiting
obsolete equipment.
Batteries must be removed from the unit and disposed
of separately at an appropriate
collection point.
Please inquire with local authorities
about the responsible waste collection
locations.
Appendix
Appendix.................................................................... 290
FCC Information ........................................................ 293
Declaration of Conformity .......................................... 294
Warranty Certiﬁcate ................................................... 295
This manual serves only as a source of information and
can be changed without prior notiﬁcation. Graupner
accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or
inaccuracies which may be contained in the information
section of this manual.
Table of contents
Safety notices
Be sure to pay attention!
In order to enjoy your modeling hobby for a long time,
please read these instructions thoroughly and give
particular attention to the safety notices. You should
also register yourself at https://www.graupner.de/de/
service/produktregistrierung.aspx right away in order
to automatically receive current information per email
about your product.
If you are a beginner with remote controlled model
aircraft, ships or cars, you should really ask an
experienced model pilot for assistance.
If this remote control system changes ownership, these
instructions should surely be included with remote
control system.
Intended usage
This remote control system may only be used for the
purpose intended by the manufacturer - speciﬁcally - for
the operation of unmanned remote controlled models.
Any other usage is not permissible.
Safety notices
SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT
and
REMOTE CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT
TOYS
… because even small models can cause substantial
property damage and/or personal injuries if they are not
handled properly - even if caused by third parties.
Technical defects of an electrical or mechanical nature
can lead to unexpected startup of a motor and/or parts
being hurled through the air to pose a danger of injury to
you and to others.
Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely!
A short circuit condition may not only destroy parts
of the remote control system but, depending on
Safety notices
the circumstances and the battery energy involved,
may also pose acute danger of incineration or even
explosion.
All motor-driven parts, such as aircraft or ship
propellers, helicopter rotors, open gearboxes etc.
represent a constant danger. Contact with these parts
must be avoided. A rapidly turning aircraft propeller
can, for example, sever a ﬁnger. Also pay attention that
other objects do not come into contact with driven parts.
When a drive battery is connected or a motor is running:
never get into the danger zone of driving mechanisms.
Be sure to pay attention that motors do not start
up unintentionally while performing programming
operations. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery
terminals to motors before programming.
Protect all units from dust, dirt, moisture and other
foreign parts. Never expose these units to vibrations
or excessive hot or cold temperatures. Remote control
operation may only be performed under "normal"
outdoor temperatures, i. e. within a range of -15 ° C to
+55 ° C.
Avoid mechanical jarring and pressure stresses. Always
check units for damage to housings and cables. Do not
use units which have been damaged or become wet,
even after they are dry again.
Only those components and accessories which we
recommend may be used. Always use original Graupner
plug and jack connectors which are made for one
another out of the same materials.
When routing cables, pay attention that they are not
stressed, unduly kinked or broken. The sharp edges
of adjacent parts also represent a hazard for insulated
conductors.
Be sure that all plug and jack connections are ﬁrmly
seated. Do not pull on the cable to disconnect a plugged
connector.
No modiﬁcations whatsoever may be made to units.
Modiﬁcations will void the operating permit and all
insurance protection.
Receiver installation
The receiver is to be installed with a cushion of foam
rubber to afford protection against jarring; in aircraft
models behind a strong rib, for a car or ship model the
location must be protected against dust and spray water.
The receiver may not be mounted in direct contact with
the hull or chassis as this would allow motor vibrations
and/or roadway jarring to be transferred directly to the
receiver. When a receiver system is installed in a model
with a combustion motor, all receiver parts should
always be protected against the intrusion of exhaust
gasses and oil residue. Above all, this applies to the
model's ON/OFF switch, which is typically built into the
model's outer surface.
Position the receiver such that connecting cables to
the servos and the power supply are routed with a bit
of slack and that the receiver's antenna is at least 5 cm
away from any large metal parts or wiring except for
other receiver wires/cables. In addition to steel, this also
includes carbon ﬁber parts, servos, electric motors, fuel
pumps and all sorts of cables, etc.
Preferably, the receiver should be mounted in a readily
accessible location in the model that is well apart from
all electrically operated units. Under no circumstances
may a servo cable be wrapped around the antenna or
routed close to it.
Make sure that cables near the antenna cannot move
about during ﬂight.
Routing the receiver's antenna
The receiver and its antennas must be positioned as far
away as possible from drives of any kind. If the model's
hull is made of carbon ﬁber material, the ends of the
antennas must extend outside of the hull.
The orientation of antennas is not critical. Nevertheless,
a vertical (upright) installation of receiver antennas is
advantageous. In the case of diversity antennas (two
antennas), the second antenna should be oriented at a
90° angle to the ﬁrst antenna.
Servo installation
Always mount servos with the provided rubber vibrationdamper parts. Only in this manner can these parts be
protected against excessively hard vibrations.
Installing control rods
Control rods must be installed such that they operate
freely and smoothly. It is particularly important that all
rudder levers are able to move to their full limits, i.e. not
otherwise mechanically blocked.
In order to be able to stop a running motor at any time,
control rods must be adjusted such that the carburetor
tap is completely closed when the joystick and trim lever
are brought into their end idle position.
Pay attention that no metal parts, e. g. as a result of
rudder actuation, vibration, rotating parts, etc., rub
against one another. Metal-to-metal contact causes
electrical "noise" which can interfere with the correct
operation of the receiver.
Transmitter antenna orientation
Transmission ﬁeld strength is minimal in an imaginary
line extending straight out from the end of the
transmitter's antenna. This means that "pointing" the
transmitter's antenna directly toward the model will not
produce good reception but rather degrade reception.
When multiple remote controls are operating
simultaneously, pilots should position themselves in a
loose group. Pilots standing off to themselves not only
endanger their own models but those of others as well.
However, when 2 or more pilots using 2.4 GHz remote
control systems are closer than 5 m to one another this
can lead to return channel overdrive which, in turn, will
trigger a range warning much too early. Increase your
distance between one another until the range warning
ceases.
Pre-start checks
Before switching the receiver on, ensure that the gas
control is at its Stop/Idle position.
Always switch the transmitter on ﬁrst and then the
receiver.
Always switch the receiver off ﬁrst and then the
transmitter.
If this sequence is not maintained, such that the receiver
is still switched on when the corresponding transmitter
is switched to "OFF", then the receiver may respond to
other transmitters or general radio frequency noise. This
can cause the model to execute uncontrolled operations
that may cause personal injuries and/or property
damage.
In particular, for models equipped with a mechanical
gyro:
before switching off the receiver, disconnect the model's
power supply to prevent the motor from revving up
unintentionally.
The residual spin of a gyro often produces so much
voltage that the receiver may falsely interpret a
throttle signal! This will then cause the motor to
start up unexpectedly.
Range test
Perform checks for proper operation and range before
every session. Secure the model adequately in place
and ensure that no one is in front of the model.
Perform a complete functional test on the ground and
execute a complete simulated ﬂight to exclude the
possibility of system faults or problems with the model's
programming. When doing this, be sure to follow the
notices provided on pages 71 and77.
Never operate the transmitter in Model mode, i.e.
for ﬂying or driving, without an antenna. Be sure the
antenna is ﬁrmly seated in its socket.
Operating a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or car
Never ﬂy over spectators or other pilots. Never endanger
humans or animals. Never ﬂy in the vicinity of highvoltage wires. Do not operate the model in the vicinity of
sluice locks or where real boats or ships are operating.
Do not operate a model on public streets or highways,
paths or plazas, etc.
Monitoring transmitter and receiver batteries
You must stop running the model to recharge the
transmitter's battery no later than when low transmitter
battery voltage triggers the "Batt must be recharged!!"
display and acoustic signal.
Check the charge in batteries routinely, particularly the
receiver's battery. Do not wait until the movements of
controlled mechanisms are noticeably slower. Replace
expended batteries before they cause problems.
The battery manufacturer's charging instructions
Safety notices
Safety notices
are always to be followed, this includes mandatory
adherence to the length of charging time. Never leave
batteries being charged unattended.
Never attempt to charge primary batteries (nonrechargeable batteries) because they can explode.
All secondary batteries (rechargeable batteries) must
be charged before every session. To avoid short circuit
conditions, ﬁrst connect the charger cable's banana
plugs, polarity correct, into the charger and thereafter
connect the charger cable's plugs to the transmitter and
receiver batteries.
Disconnect all power sources from the model when it is
not to be used for an extended period of time.
Never attempt to use defective batteries, damaged
batteries or mixed-type battery combinations as a single
group. Do not use mixed combinations of old and new
batteries or batteries of different manufacture.
Capacity and operating time
The rule: "capacity is reduced with every successive
recharging", applies to all batteries. Internal resistance
increases at low temperatures to further reduce capacity.
As a consequence, the battery's ability to provide
current and hold its voltage is reduced.
Frequent charging or the use of battery maintenance
programs can also result in gradual loss of battery
capacity. Therefore the capacity of batteries should be
checked at regular intervals, not in excess of every six
months, and replaced if performance is found to be
signiﬁcantly deﬁcient.
Purchase only genuine Graupner batteries!
Interference suppression for electric motors
All conventional electric motors produce sparks between
their collector and brushes. Depending on the type of
Safety notices
motor involved, this may cause more or less interference
with the functionality of the remote control system.
The electric motors of a properly built system should
therefore have interference suppression features.
For electric drive models it is particularly important
that every one of its motors is provided with proper
interference suppression. Interference ﬁlters extensively
suppress such disturbances and should always be
included.
Follow the respective recommendations included in the
motor's operating and installation notices.
For further details about interference ﬁlters, refer to the
Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at
www.graupner.de.
Servo interference ﬁlters for extension cables
Order No. 1040
The servo interference ﬁlter is necessary when an
extended-length servo cable is used. This ﬁlter is
attached directly to the receiver output. In critical cases
a second ﬁlter can be attached to the servo.
Using electronic speed controllers
Choosing the right electronic controller is largely a
matter of matching controller performance to the motor
to be controlled.
In order to prevent an overload or damage to the speed
controller, its current rating should be at least half of
the maximum locked-rotor current draw of the motor to
which it is connected.
Particular attention is appropriate for so-called "tuning
motors". Because of their low-turns coils these motors
can draw a multiple of their rated current in a lockedrotor condition and this can lead to the destruction of the
speed controller.
Electric ignition systems
Combustion motor ignition systems also produce
interference that can negatively inﬂuence remote control
functionality.
Always supply power to an electric ignition system from
a separate, dedicated battery.
Use only interference-suppressed spark plugs, spark
caps and shielded ignition leads.
Mount the receiver sufﬁciently far away from ignition
system components.
Static charges
A remote control system will be destroyed by the
magnetic shock waves produced by a lightning strike even if the storm is miles away. Therefore …
… stop ﬂying right away if a storm is approaching.
Static charging via the antenna also represents a
lethal hazard.
Attention
• In order to fulﬁll FCC HF emission requirements for
mobile transmitters, a distance of at least 20 cm
must be maintained between this system's antenna
and other persons when this system is operating.
Operation of this system at a lesser distance is
therefore not recommended.
• To avoid disturbance caused by the electrical
characteristics and emissions of other transmitters,
keep at least a 20 cm distance from other
transmitters.
• Operation of the remote control system requires a
correct program setting for the given country in the
transmitter unit. This is necessary for compliance with
diverse regulations like FCC, ETSI, CE etc. Follow
the respective instructions provided for this with the
transmitter and receiver.
• Prior to every ﬂight, perform a complete functional
test, range test and execute a complete simulated
ﬂight in order to exclude the possibility of system
faults or problems with the model's programming.
• Never program the transmitter or receiver while the
model is being operated.
Care and maintenance
Never clean the housing, antenna, etc. with cleaning
agents, gasoline, water or similar means. Use only a dry,
soft cloth.
Graupner accepts no form of liability for loss, damage or
costs consequential to incorrect usage or operation or
which can be attributed to same.
Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation of
Graupner to provide damage compensation, regardless
of legal grounds, is limited to the invoice value of the
quantity of Graupner. goods contributing directly to the
damage-inducing event. This does not apply if Graupner
is found to be subject to unlimited liability pursuant to
binding legal stipulations with respect to intent or gross
negligence.
Components and accessories
As manufacturer of this equipment Graupner GmbH
& Co. KG recommends only components and
accessories which have been tested and approved by
Graupner for their suitability, functionality and safety.
If this recommendation is followed, Graupner accepts
responsibility for the product.
Graupner cannot accept any responsibility for the
parts or accessories of other manufacturers which
have not been approved and Graupner cannot
evaluate every individual product made by other
companies to assess if they are safe to use.
Liability exclusion / damage compensation
This manual serves only as a source of information and
can be changed without prior notiﬁcation. Graupner
accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or
inaccuracies which may be contained in this manual.
Graupner cannot monitor compliance with the assembly
instructions, the operating instructions or the conditions
and methods under which remote control components
are installed, operated, utilized or maintained. Therefore
Safety notices
Safety notices and handling instructions for nickel-metal-hydride rechargeable batteries
As applicable for all highly technical products,
observance of the following safety notices, along with
the handling instructions, is essential for a long service
life, fault-free operation, and harmless utilization.
Safety notices
• Individual battery cells and batteries are not toys and
must therefore not get into the hands of children.
Batteries/cells must be kept out of the reach of
children.
• Batteries are to be checked for ﬂawless condition
prior to every use. Defective or damaged cells/
batteries may no longer be used.
• Cells/batteries may only be utilized within the limits
speciﬁed by the technical data for the given battery
type.
• Batteries/cells may not be heated, burned, shortcircuited or subjected to overload current or
reverse polarity.
• Battery conﬁgurations formed by parallel
connected cells, combinations of old and new
cells, or cells of different production, size,
capacity, manufacturer, brand or cell type may
not be used.
• Remove batteries from the unit prior to long-term
storage periods (weeks or months). Always switch
off units whenever they are no longer in use (shortterm). Always charge batteries before it is too late.
• The battery to be charged must be placed on a noncombustible, heat resistant, non-conducting surface
during the charging process. Combustible or readily
ignited objects are to be kept away from the charging
conﬁguration.
Safety notices
• Batteries may only be charged under supervision.
The quick charge current rating for the given type of
battery must never be exceeded.
• If the battery heats up during charging above 60 °C
charging must be stopped immediately. Allow the
battery to cool off to about 30 °C before resuming the
charging process.
• Never charge batteries which are already charged,
batteries which are hot or batteries which have not
been discharged to their end-point voltage.
• No modiﬁcations may be made to the batteries.
Never solder or weld directly on battery terminals.
• The mistreatment of batteries presents a danger of
ignition, explosion, chemical burns and combustion
burns. Use of an extinguishing blanket, CO2-ﬁre
extinguisher or sand are suitable methods of
extinguishing such a ﬁre.
• Leaking electrolyte is caustic; do not allow it
to contact the skin or eyes. In the event of an
emergency, immediately rinse with a generous
amount of water and get the care of a doctor.
• Battery vent openings may never be blocked or
sealed, e. g. by solder. Soldering temperature may
not exceed 220 °C and not be applied for longer than
20 seconds.
• To avoid deformation, do not exert excessive
mechanical force.
• If a battery should become overcharged, proceed as
follows:
Simply disconnect the battery and place it on a noncombustible surface (e. g. masonry ﬂoor) until it has
cooled off. To avoid the hazards associated with an
explosion, never hold the battery in your hands.
• Pay attention that the charging and discharging rules
are followed.
General notices
Battery capacity is reduced by every charge/discharge
cycle. Storage can also be cause for a gradual reduction
of battery capacity.
Storage
Batteries should only be stored when they are not in a
completely discharged condition. They should be stored
in a dry room having an ambient temperature between
+5 °C to +25 °C. When stored for longer than 4 weeks,
cell voltage should not be more than 1.2 V.
Matching up individual batteries
• To match new batteries with older ones, put a full
charge on all of the batteries using a standard
charging process. As a rule of thumb, an empty
battery must be charged for 12 hours at a current
rate equal to one tenth of its speciﬁed capacity
("1/10 C" method). The batteries are then all charged
equally. Such a matching procedure should be
repeated about every 10th charge cycle so that
batteries are matched again, which contributes to
longer battery life.
• If it is possible to discharge individual batteries, this
should be done prior to every charging process.
Otherwise the battery pack should be discharged
to a voltage of 0.9 V per cell. For example, this
corresponds to a charge voltage of 3.6 V for the
4-cell pack used in the transmitter.
Charging
Charging is only permissible at speciﬁed current rates,
charging durations, temperature ranges and continuous
supervision. If a suitable quick charger is not available
on which the exact charging current can be set, the
battery can be charged by standard charging according
to the 1/10 C-method, see example above.
Whenever possible, transmitter batteries should
charged with the 1/10 C method because of the
differing charge states of the cells. However,
charging current may never be allowed to exceed
the maximum permissible rate speciﬁed in the given
transmitter's instructions.
Quick charging
• If your charger offers this option then set the delta
peak charge cutoff voltage to 5 mV per cell. However,
most chargers are set to a ﬁxed value of 15 …
20 mV per cell so they can be used for both NiCd
batteries as well as NiMH batteries If in doubt, ﬁnd
out if your charger is also suitable for NiMH batteries
by referring to the charger's operating instructions
or consulting a dealership. If you are unsure, charge
your batteries at half of the speciﬁed maximum
current rate.
Discharge
All batteries sold under the Graupner and GM-Racing
trade names are, depending on battery type, suitable for
a continuous maximum current load of 6 … 13 C (check
the manufacturer's data). In general, the higher the
continuous current load, the lower the battery's service
life will be.
• Use your battery until its performance degrades or
the under-voltage warning sounds.
Attention:
A cell voltage of 1.2 V should not be underrun during
a long storage period. If necessary, charge the
battery before putting it into storage.
• Reﬂex charging and charge/discharge programs
unnecessarily shorten a battery's service life and are
only useful in checking battery quality or to "revive"
old cells. It is also meaningless to charge/discharge a
battery before using it. The exception to this is if your
intention is to check the battery's quality.
Disposal of used batteries
Some countries have laws requiring that all used
batteries be turned over to an authorized collection
center.
Disposing of batteries along with common household
garbage is forbidden. Old batteries can be turned into
communal collection centers for disposal at no charge
or they can be returned to one of our dealerships or
anywhere else where batteries of that given type are
sold. Used batteries we have delivered can also be sent
back to us, at your cost, through the mail. Use the return
address below:
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Service: Used batteries
Henriettenstr. 94 - 96
D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck
This represents an essential contribution to
environmental protection.
Caution:
Damaged batteries require among other things, special
packaging, because they are very toxic!
Safety notices
mc-32
the newest generation of remote control technology
HoTT (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) is a synthesis
of know-how, engineering and testing done around the
world by experienced model pilots. HoTT technology
combines 2.4 GHz band transmission/reception with
bi-directional communications via a "return channel"
integrated into the receiver unit.
Based on the Graupner/JR computerized remote
control system mc-24 that was introduced in 1997,
the mc-32 HoTT remote control system has been
especially developed for experienced RC pilots All
conventional model types can be readily operated
with the mc-32 HoTT system, regardless of whether
the model is a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or land
vehicle.
Complex mixed-control functions of guiding surfaces are
often necessary for winged aircraft (rudder, elevators)
and helicopter models (swashplate). Thanks to this
computer technology it is possible to activate these
diverse functional requirements with a single "press
of a button". Simply select the given model type from
the mc-32 HoTT program and its software will
automatically assemble signiﬁcant mixed-control and
coupled functions. This eliminates the need for separate
modules in the transmitter to implement complex
coupled functions and also makes sophisticated
mechanical mixer mechanisms in the model
unnecessary. The mc-32 HoTT remote control system
offers the highest level of safety and reliability.
Its software is clearly structured. Functionally-related
options are clearly arranged by content in a simple
organization.
The mc-32 HoTT remote control system has 24
model memory locations. Additional ﬂight-phase-speciﬁc
settings can be stored in every model memory location.
10
Introduction
For example, such settings can be made for various
parameters that can be called up to implement particular
ﬂight maneuvers at the "press of a button".
The large graphic display is well organized and simple
to operate. The mixer's graphic representation is
exceptionally helpful.
Familiarization with the various functions in this remote
control system is quick, even for a beginner, because
of its clear, straightforward program structure. The user
makes his settings with the four-way, touch sensitive
buttons located to the left and right of the high-contrast
display. Thus, with only little practice, the pilot learns to
implement all of the remote controlled model options
with which he/she has experience.
This Graupner HoTT technique theoretically allows over
200 models to be operated simultaneously However,
because of the interspersed radio-frequency utilization
permitted by certiﬁcation for the 2.4 GHz ISM band, this
number is signiﬁcantly lower in practical application.
Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated
simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than would be the
case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz frequency bands.
The real limiting factor is – as often before – is still likely
to be the size of available operating space (i.e. airspace
for aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary
to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in
the vicinity (which is sometimes quite difﬁcult in broken
landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an
enormous boost for remote control operating security.
The integrated telemetry menu affords simple access
to data and HoTT receiver programming. For example,
this can be used to map receiver outputs, assign control
functions to multiple servos, and to coordinate the
magnitude and direction of multiple servo movements
with one another.
This handbook describes every menu in detail. There
are tips, many notices and programming examples to
supplement the descriptions and also explanations for
model speciﬁc technical terms, like transducer, dual
rate, butterﬂy, etc.
An appendix is provided which contains additional
information about the HoTT system. This manual is
rounded out with the conformity declaration and the
guarantee certiﬁcate for the transmitter.
Please observe the safety notices and technical notices.
Read the instructions carefully then test all functions by
simply attaching servos to the receiver included in the kit
for order no. 33032. When doing this, please observe the
corresponding notice provided on page 20. This will help
you learn the essential operating steps and functions of
the mc-32 HoTT in the least amount of time.
Always handle your remote controlled model with a
sense of responsibility so that you do not endanger
yourself or others.
The Graupner team wishes you much fun and success
with your mc-32 HoTT remote control system of the
newest generation
Kirchheim-Teck, September 2011
Computer System mc-32
12 channel remote control set in 2.4 GHz Graupner HoTT technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)
The superior functional security of Graupner
HoTT technology accomplished with bidirectional
communications between transmitter and receiver
with integrated telemetry, freely programmable
voice output via headset connector, and ultra-fast
response times.
Programming is simpliﬁed by a programming
technique implemented with capacitive touch
buttons.
High contrast, 8 line, blue illuminated graphic
display for perfect presentation of all parameter
settings and telemetry data. Storage of telemetry
data on a micro SD memory card.
Integrated real time clock
4096 steps of 12-bit resolution on the channel signal
assures extreme control sensitivity.
USB connection to read and write the model's
memories as well as for making ﬁrmware updates.
• Microcomputer remote control system in modern
2.4 GHz Graupner HoTT technology
• Bidirectional communications between transmitter
and receiver
• Five different languages:
German, English, French, coming soon per software
update Italian and Spanish.
• Ultra fast response times due to reliable, direct
transmission of data from the main processor to the
2.4 GHz HF module. No additional delays due to
routing over a module processor.
• Telemetry menu for display of telemetry data and
for programming optional attachment sensors and
receiver outputs
• The telemetry screen provides many programming
and evaluation functions to be presented directly in
the transmitters display
• Voice output can be called up via freely
programmable switches
• Digital servo cycle times of 10 ms selectable
• Short antenna, collapsible
• Operating and programming techniques are similar
to the proven concepts implemented in mc-19 to
mc-24
• High contrast, blue illuminated graphic display
assures perfect control of parameter settings like
model type, model memory, clocks and operating
voltage.
• Function encoder with two touch-sensitive, four-way
buttons permit simpliﬁed programming and precise
settings
• Key-lock function to prevent unintentional operation.
• 7 ﬂight phases can be programmed
Introduction - Remote control set
11
Computer System mc-32
12 channel remote control set with 2.4 GHz Graupner HoTT technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)
• 24 model memories with storage for all modelspeciﬁc programs and parameter settings
• 7 switches (2 three stage switches, 3 two stage
switches and 2 touch switches) and 3 digital
actuators are already built-in and can be used as
desired
• Free assignment of switches to switched functions by
simply switching the desired switch
• Simple programming of motor and brake switchover
for electric gliders on the K1 joystick.
• Internal realtime clock for time-stamping log ﬁles
• User-replaceable CR2032 buffer battery for the
internal realtime clock
• Model memory storage in a modern, non-volatile
backup system
• 12 control functions with simpliﬁed arrangement
of operating elements for supplementary functions
like switches and proportional transducers make
operating convenient
• Convenience mode selector for simpliﬁed switchover
between MODES 1 … 4 (Gas left/right, etc.)
All affected settings are also automatically switched
over.
• Graphic servo position display for fast, simple
overview and for checking servo movements
• Transmitter output swapping
• Extensive programs for winged aircraft and helicopter
models:
Winged aircraft menu for: 1 QR, 2 QR, 2 QR + 1, 2
and 4 WK as well as 4 QR + 2 and 4 WK, V tail unit,
delta/all-wing, 2 elevator servos
Surface mix: QR-diff, WK-diff, QR ¼ SR, QR ¼
WK, brake ¼ HR, brake ¼ WK, brake ¼ QR, HR
12
Introduction - Remote control set
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
¼ WK, HR ¼ QR, WK ¼ HR, WK ¼ QR and diff.
reduction
Heli menu for: 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-point linkage (1 Sv,
2 Sv, 3 Sv (2 roll), 3 Sv (140°), 3 Sv (2 nick), 4 Sv
(90°))
16 free mixers, 8 linear mixers, 4 curve mixers and 4
cross mixers
Swashplate limiter
±150 % servo adjustment for all servo outputs,
independently adjustable per side (Single Side Servo
Throw)
Sub-trim in the ±125 % range for setting all neutral
servo positions
Servo reverse can be programmed for all servos
Two stage DUAL RATE/EXPO system, individually
adjustable for speciﬁc ﬂight phase and switchable
during ﬂight
Stop watches/countdown timers with alarm function
Copy function for model memory
Built-in DSC jack for connecting ﬂight simulators or a
teacher/pupil system
Envisioned for a later update:
Voith-Schneider limiter, works similar to a swashplate
limiter
Door sequencer, e. g. for putting down landing gear
automatically or retractable powerplant with runout
controller
Nautical program
General HoTT features
• Maximum noise immunity due to optimized frequency
hopping and wider channel spread
• Intelligent data transfer with correction function
• Realtime telemetry evaluation
• Over 200 systems can be used simultaneously
• Update capability via USB interface guarantees
future viability
• Simple, very fast transmitter to receiver binding
• Binding with multiple receivers per model in parallel
operation is possible
• Extremely fast rebinding, even at maximum distance
• Range test and warning function
• Receiver under-voltage warning in the transmitter's
display
• Extremely wide receiver operating voltage range of
3.6 V to 8.4 V (fully functional to 2.5 V)
• Failsafe
• Arbitrary channel assignment (channel mapping), mix
functions and all servo settings can be programmed
in the telemetry menu
• Up to 4 servos can be controlled simultaneously as
a block at a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital servos
only)
mc-32 HoTT technical data
The Order No. 33124 set includes
Microcomputer transmitter mc-32 HoTT with builtin NiMH transmitter battery 4NH-2000 RX RTU ﬂat
(change reserved), plug-in charger and Graupner
bidirectional receiver GR-24 HoTT.
Recommended charger units (accessories)
Order
No.
Designation
6411
6463
6424
6466
6468
6469
6470
6475
6478
6480
Ultramat 8
Ultramat 12 plus
Ultramat 14 plus
Ultra Trio plus 14
Ultramat 16S
Ultra Trio Plus 16
Ultramat 18
Ultra Duo Plus 45
Ultra Duo Plus 60
Ultra Duo Plus 80
Input voltage 220 V
Input voltage 12 V
NiCd
NiMH
LiPo
lead battery
integr. balancer
appropriate for
the following
batteries
Transmitter charger cable, order no. 3022 and receiver charger cable,
order no. 3021 are also needed to charge batteries.
Other charger units and details about the listed chargers can be found
in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.
Frequency band
2.4 … 2.4835 GHz
Modulation
FHSS
Transmit power
see country setting, page 225
Control functions
12 functions, 4 of these can
be trimmed
Technical data, receiver GR-24 HoTT
Order No. 33512
Operating voltage
3.6 … 8.4 V*
Current draw
about 140 mA
Frequency band
2.4 … 2.4835 GHz
Modulation
FHSS
Antenna
Diversity antennas, 4
x about 145 mm long,
about 115 mm encapsulated
and about 30 mm active
Temperature range
-10 … +55 °C
Antennae
collapsible
Operating voltage
3.4 … 6 V
Current draw
about 800 mA
Plug-in servos
16
Dimensions
about 252 x 250 x 59 mm
Plug-in sensors
Weight
about 1700 g with transmitter
battery
Temperature range
about -10 … +55 °C
Dimensions
about 62 x 31 x 14 mm
Weight
about 26 g
Accessories
Order No. Description
1121
Neck strap, 20 mm wide
70
Neck strap, 30 mm wide
3097
Hand transmitter wind protection
* The speciﬁcation for permissible operating voltage range applies
only to the receiver. Please note in this context that receiver input
voltage is applied without regulation to connected servos but the
voltage range for most connectible servos (speed controls, gyros,
etc.) is only 4.8 to 6 V.
Teacher/pupil cable for mc-32 HoTT
see page 201
Replacement parts
Order No.
Description
2498.4FBEC 4NH-2000 RX RTU ﬂat
33800
HoTT transmitter antenna
Other accessories are listed in the appendix or can
be found in Internet at www.graupner.de. Feel free
to contact your dealer too. He will be glad to provide
advice.
Introduction - Remote control set
13
Operating notices
Transmitter power supply
The mc-32 HoTT transmitter has a highly capacitive,
rechargeable NiMH battery, 4NH-2000 RX RTU (Order
no. 2498.4FBEC), as standard equipment. (changes
reserved) However, the standard built-in battery is
not charged upon delivery of the transmitter.
When the transmitter is used, its battery voltage
should be monitored by way of the indicators provided
in the LCD display. If battery voltage drops below
the adjustable voltage setting (set via item "Batterie
warning" in the "Basic Settings" menu, page 226,),
default value 4.7 V, an audible warning signal will sound
and the message window shown below will appear in
the screen
0:00
GRAUBELE
Stop
#01
0:00
batter y Flug
needs «normal »
chargingK78 HoTT
4.6V10%
Mx
0.0V
0:22h
No later than now, operation must be terminated so the
battery can be charged again.
Notice:
Be sure that the correct battery type is set in the "Basic
Settings" menu, page 224! NiMH must be set as
standard.
Charging the transmitter's battery
The transmitter's rechargeable NiMH battery can be
recharged by connecting the charging jack located,
on the right side of the transmitter, with the included
charger (order no. 33116.2).
As a rule of thumb for charging time, an completely
14 Operating notices
discharged battery will require 12 hours to recharge at a
current rate equal to one tenth of its speciﬁed capacity.
For the standard transmitter battery and included
charger, this is a current rate of 200 mA. However,
you must yourself ensure that the charging process is
terminated when it should be …
The transmitter must be switched "OFF" during
the entire charging procedure. Never switch on the
transmitter when it is connected to the charger. Even
a brief interruption to charging can cause charging
voltage to rise to a level that will immediately damage
the transmitter with over-voltage. Also for this reason, be
sure all connectors are always plugged in securely and
have good contact.
into contact with one another when the other end of
the cable is plugged into the transmitter. In order to
prevent damage to the transmitter, charging current
should never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the
current at the charger.
Removing the transmitter's battery
To remove the transmitter's battery, ﬁrst unlatch the
cover of the battery compartment on the rear side of the
transmitter housing then remove the cover.
mc-32 HoTT charging jack polarity
The charger cables on the market from other
manufacturers often have different polarities. Therefore use
only an original Graupner charger cable, order no. 3022.
Take out the transmitter's battery then disconnect the
transmitter battery's connector by carefully pulling on the
supply line cable.
Charging with automatic chargers
The transmitter's charger jack does come standard
with reverse polarity protection but nevertheless it can
be used with suitable chargers for quick charging the
transmitter's battery.
Set the quick charger unit, according to its manual, for
a delta peak voltage difference of 5 mV … 20 mV or
equivalent such that it is adapted for quick charging
NiMH cells
First connect the charger cable's banana plugs to
the charger and only then connect the cable's other
end into the charging jack on the transmitter. Never
allow the bare ends of the banana plugs to come
Inserting the transmitter's battery
Hold the transmitter battery connector
such that the black or brown cable is
oriented toward the antenna side and
Transmitter
the empty jack of the battery connector connector polarity
is oriented toward the ﬂoor side then push the battery
connector in the direction of the board onto the three pins
sticking out out of the board inside the transmitter. (The
battery connector is protected against a reverse polarity
connection by two slanted edges, see illustration.)
Place the battery into its compartment and close the
cover.
Battery operation timer at the bottom left of the
screen
This timer shows the transmitter's cumulative operating
time since the transmitter's battery was last charged.
This timer is automatically reset to "0:00" when the
transmitter is switched on and its battery voltage is
signiﬁcantly higher than when the transmitter was last
used, e. g. because the battery was charged.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.9V
0:00h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«normal »
K78 HoTT
0.0V
Mx
Lithium battery, CR 2032
At the left side of the transmitter board there is a ﬁxture
for a lithium battery. The user can replace this battery
when necessary with another lithium battery of type
CR 2032:
This battery maintains the date and time settings during
a transmitter power supply outage, for example when
the transmitter's main battery is being replaced.
Operating notices
15
Operating notices
Receiver power supply
A selection of 4 and 5 cell NiMH battery packs having
different capacities are available to power the receiver. If
digital servos are in use, we recommend a 5 cell battery
pack (6 V) to afford adequate battery capacity. If analog
and digital servos are used in mixed operation, be sure
to pay attention to the given maximum permissible
operating voltage. A stabilized, adjustable power
supply for the receiver with 1 or 2 receiver batteries
can be provided, e. g. the PRX-unit, order no. 4136, see
appendix.
For reasons of safety, do not use battery boxes or dry
cell batteries.
The voltage of the on-board power supply will be
displayed at the bottom right of the transmitter's screen
while the model is in operation.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«nor mal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
If the adjustable warning threshold (default value 3.8 V)
set in the Telemetry menu, see page 217, is underrun,
an optical and acoustic under-voltage warning will be
issued.
Despite this feature, be sure to check the condition
of the battery at regular intervals. Do not wait for the
warning to be issued before recharging the battery.
Notice:
An overview of available batteries, chargers and current
source test instruments can be found in the Graupner
RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.
16
Operating notices
Charging the receiver battery
Charger cable, order no. 3021, can be plugged directly
onto the receiver's battery for charging. If the battery in
the model is connected by way of an order no. 3046,
3934, 3934.1 or 3934.3 power supply cable, then
charging can be accomplished via the charging jack or
special charging connector integrated into the switch.
The switch in the power supply cable must be in its
"OFF" position for charging.
Receiver battery connection polarity
General charging notices
• The charging instructions for the charger as well as
for the battery from its manufacturer to be observed.
• Pay attention to the maximum permissible charging
current speciﬁed by the battery's manufacturer. In
order to prevent damage to the transmitter, charging
current should never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit
the current at the charger.
• If the transmitter battery is nevertheless to be
charged at a current rate in excess of 1 A, then
it is imperative that this is done outside the
transmitter. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to
the transmitter's board due to overloading its printed
circuit paths and/or overheating of the battery.
• If an automatic charger is to be used for charging,
perform several test charging procedures to ensure
the ﬂawless functionality of its automatic shut-off.
This applies particularly if you want to charge the
standard installed NiMH battery with an automatic
charger unit intended for NiCd batteries Monitor the
charger's shut-off behavior if it has that option.
• Do not execute a battery discharge or battery
maintenance program through the charger jack. The
charger jack is not suitable for this purpose.
• Alway connect the charger cable to the charger ﬁrst
and then to the receiver or transmitter battery. This
avoids the possibility of shorting the bare banana
plug ends together.
• If the battery heats up signiﬁcantly, check the
battery's condition, replace the battery or reduce the
charging current.
• Never leave a charging battery unattended.
• Follow the safety notices and handling
instructions provided on page 8.
Joystick length adjustment
The length of both joysticks can be continuously
adjusted to adapt these transmitter controls to the pilot's
preference.
Hold the lower half of the knurled grip in place then turn
the upper section to release its counter-locked threads.
Now pull up or push down on the joystick's end to the
desired length. When the length is suitable, tighten the
counter-locked threads of the upper and lower sections
again.
Opening the transmitter housing
Carefully read the notices below before opening the
transmitter housing. It may be better if unexperienced
users ask a Graupner Service location to take care of
the procedures described below.
The transmitter should only be opened in the following
situations:
• to convert a neutralized joystick to a non-neutralized
joystick or a non-neutralized joystick to a neutralized
joystick.
• to adjust joystick return tension.
Switch off the transmitter before opening its cover
(power switch to "OFF").
Open the battery compartment as described on the
previous double-page, remove the battery and if a micro
SD card is inserted be sure to remove it too.
Once the battery and any micro SD card have been
removed, loosen the six countersunk screws on the rear
of the transmitter with a Phillips, size PH1, screwdriver,
see illustration.
Housing screw locations
Hold the two housing sections together by hand then
turn the transmitter upright over a suitable surface so
these 6 screws can fall out without getting lost. Now lift
up on the backplate carefully and turn it open to the right
like you would open a book.
A T T E N T I O N:
Two multi-conductor cables connect the backplate
with the transmitter electronics in the upper section.
These connections must not be damaged.
Important notices:
• Make no modiﬁcations of any kind to the circuitry
as this will void the guarantee as well as the
unit's ofﬁcial permit.
• Be sure not to touch the circuit boards with any
metallic objects. Do not touch contacts with your
ﬁngers.
• Never switch the transmitter on when its housing
is open.
When you close the transmitter again, be sure
that …
• … no cables are caught between housing edges
when the backplate is put into position.
• … both housing parts are properly seated with one
another before screwing them together. Never force
the housing sections together.
• Turn the screws down into the existing housing
threads without stripping them out.
• … reconnect the battery.
Operating notices
17
Operating notices
Converting joysticks
Neutralization
Both the left and the right joystick can be conﬁgured
for neutralized or non-neutralized operation as desired.
Open the transmitter housing as previously described.
To change the joystick's factory setting, locate the screw
shown in the ﬁgure below enclosed in a white circle.
Notice:
The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of
the left joystick so the corresponding screw for the right
joystick is on the right side just below the middle.
Now turn this screw down until the respective joystick
is free to move from limit to limit - or turn the screw out
until the joystick again completely self-restoring.
18
Operating notices
Brake spring and ratchet
The outboard screw of the two marked in the next ﬁgure
adjusts the braking force and the inboard screw adjusts
the strength of the ratchet for the respective joystick.
Joystick restoring force
The joystick's restoring force can also be adjusted to the
pilot's preference. The adjustment is located next to the
return springs, see markings in the ﬁgure below.
Spring force for the given direction of motion can be
adjusted by turning the respective screw with a Phillips
screwdriver.
• Right turn (clockwise)
= return harder,
• Left turn (counter clockwise) = return softer.
vertical
Notice:
The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of
the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right
joystick are located at the top left.
horizontal
Notice:
The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of
the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right
joystick are located to the right of the middle.
Operating notices
19
Transmitter description
Transmitter operating elements
Attaching the transmitter's neck strap
There is an eyelet on the top side of the mc-32 HoTT
transmitter (see ﬁgure at the right) to which a neck strap
can be attached. This anchor point has been chosen
because the transmitter is optimally balanced here when
it hangs from the strap.
Order No. 1121 Neck strap, 20 mm wide
Order No. 70
Neck strap, 30 mm wide
Important notice:
In its delivered conﬁguration, the transmitter can only
operate any servos attached to the receiver by way
of the two joysticks. For reasons of ﬂexibility, all other
operating elements (CTRL 6 … 8, SW 1 … 9) are
designated as "free" by the software. These other
operating elements can be freely assigned to actuators
as described in the text for the "Control adjust" menu
on page 96 (winged aircraft models) or page 100
(helicopter models).
20 Transmitter description
Transmitter rear side
Headset connector
The jack centered in the lower portion of the type
plate on the back of the transmitter is for connecting
conventional earplugs or a headset by way of a 3.5 mm
audio plug. (not included in the set)
The transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those
signals associated with the telemetry menu are output
via this connection. These announcements are made in
German language by default. More details about "Voice
output" can be found in the section "HIDDEN MODE"
beginning on page 28 and "Telemetry" beginning on
page 208.
The headset connector's volume control can be adjusted
in the "Voice volume" line of the "Basic Settings" menu,
see page 227.
Mini-USB connector
This connector socket is used to establish a connection
between the transmitter and a PC running a Windows
operating system (XP, Vista or Windows 7). The PC
software required, such as a suitable USB driver, can be
found on the download page for the given product on the
Graupner website at www.graupner.de.
Once the necessary software is installed on the PC, this
USB connection can be used to update the transmitter
or even just to set the date and time in the transmitter.
Data jack
For connecting the optionally available Smart-Box,
Order No. 33700.
Details about the Smart-Box can be found with the given
product in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet
at www.graupner.de.
Transmitter description
21
DSC
Data storage
Direct Servo Control
Card slot
The acronym "DSC" is a carryover which stands for the
original "Direct Servo Control" function. However, in
HoTT systems the "direct servo control" function is no
longer available via a diagnose cable due to technical
reasons.
The standard two-pole DSC jack in the mc-32 HoTT
transmitter is used as the teacher or pupil jack as well
as an interface to ﬂight simulators.
To ensure a proper DSC connection, please observe:
Make any necessary menu changes.
Refer to the section beginning on page 198 to
adapt the mc-32 HoTT transmitter to a teacher/pupil
system.
1. When operating a ﬂight simulator or when operating
the mc-32 HoTT transmitter as a pupil transmitter,
ALWAYS leave the transmitter's ON/OFF switch
in the "OFF" position as only in this position does
the transmitter's RF module remain inactive after
the DSC cable is inserted. This also reduces the
transmitter's power consumption somewhat.
The main status LED should now constantly
illuminate red and the transmitter's basic setup
screen should show the string "DSC pupil" on the
right just below the middle timer. At the same time,
the display of telemetry indicators will be suppressed.
PUPIL
#11
5.9V
0:01h
22
Stop
0:00
Flt
0:00
DSC
«normal »
HoTT
0.0V
Transmitter description
Thus the transmitter is ready for operation.
To the contrary, teacher mode for the mc-32 HoTT
transmitter requires that the transmitter be switched
on prior to plugging in the respective cable.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the desired unit
in compliance with the given operating instructions
for that unit.
Important:
Be sure that all connectors are seated ﬁrmly in
their respective sockets.
micro SD and micro SDHC
With the mc-32 HoTT transmitter switched off,
removing the battery compartment cover and the
transmitter's battery will make the card slot accessible
(located in the right sidewall of the battery compartment).
This card slot is intended for micro SD and micro SDHC
type memory cards.
Notice about ﬂight simulators:
Because of the myriad of ﬂight simulators available on
the market, it may be necessary to have the contact
layout of the audio plug or DSC module appropriately
modiﬁed by Graupner Service.
All conventional micro SD memory cards up to 2 GB and
micro SDHC cards up to 32 GB storage capacity can
be used. However, as a manufacturer we recommend
the use of memory cards no larger than 4 GB as this is
completely adequate for all normal situations.
The type of memory card referred to here became
known in conjunction with digital cameras and cell
phones. It is to be pushed into the slot with its contacts
upward, front facing the rear wall and latched in position
there. After re-installing the battery and closing the
battery compartment, the transmitter can be switched on
again. The stylized image of a memory card will appear
in the basic setup screen to indicate the presence of the
inserted memory card.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«nor mal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
Notice:
If a micro SD card is inserted, be sure to remove
it BEFORE taking off the transmitter's backplate.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the memory card.
Data acquisition / storage
The storage of data on the SD card is coupled to the
ﬂight timer. If this timer is started – when a suitable
memory card is inserted in the card slot and a telemetry
link to the receiver exists – both the timer and data
acquisition will stop when the ﬂight timer is stopped. The
ﬂight timer is started and stopped as described in the
section "Timers (general)" on page 138.
While data acquisition is ongoing, the on-screen card
image
will blink continuously at a slow rate.
The amount of data written on the memory card is
presented as a black bar graph which grows from left to
right as data ﬁlls the memory card.
After a data acquisition session is ﬁnished, there will
be an (empty) folder "Models" and a "LogData" folder
on the memory card. Within the "LogData" folder there
will be log ﬁles in sub-folders that are designated with
names in the format 0001_year-month-day.bin, 0002_
year-month-day.bin, etc. If a model memory folder is still
"unnamed" when the memory card is removed from the
transmitter and inserted into the card slot of a PC or
laptop, the respective log ﬁles can be found in a sub-
folder designated "NoName". There is a PC program
available on the transmitter's download web page at
www.graupner.de with which the stored data can be
evaluated on a compatible PC.
Importing voice ﬁles
As already mentioned in the section "Headsets" on
page 21, this connection can also be used to output
the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those
signals and announcements associated with telemetry
menu settings. These announcements are made in
German language by default. These announcements
are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a
transmitter-internal memory but they can be replaced
by a voice packet of a different language at any time.
More information about this can be found in the section
"HIDDEN MODE" beginning on page 28.
Importing/exporting model memories
Any model memory can be stored to an inserted memory
card or from an inserted card into the transmitter. This
feature is intended to support data exchange between
identical transmitters or even use as data backup.
More information about this can be found in the section
"Copying/deleting" beginning on page 64.
Notice:
Some special symbols that can be used in model names
are subject to speciﬁc restrictions associated with the
FAT or FAT32 ﬁle system used by the memory cards and
these special symbols will be replaced during the copy
process with a tilde (~).
Transmitter description
23
Display and keypad
optical indication of trim lever positions or, during activation
of speed controls CTRL 7 + 8, an alternative display of the
current positions of these controls
Model type indicator
(winged aircraft / helicopter)
Model name
Memory location 1 … 24
possible warnings, see page 36
Stopwatch in min:s
(upward/downward)
left touch pad
ef cd paging
ef simultaneously pressed:
Change to the servo
display menu
right touch pad:
ef cd
Paging / changing values
SET select / conﬁrm
ESC = cancel/return
ESC touched for about 1 s:
Change to the Telemetry menu
and return to basic display
simultaneous pressing of
ef or cd = CLEAR
Battery voltage and charge state bars
(if the preset threshold voltage is underrun, a warning will
appear – see "Warnings" on page 36 –, and an acoustic
warning tone will sound)
Battery time since last
re-charge in h:min
24
Flight timer in min:s
(upward/downward)
Transmitter description - Display and keypad
Receiver power supply voltage
Flight phase name
switchover between
ﬂight phases by switch
Signal strength indicator
Operating the "data terminal"
Entry keys ESC and SET
Display symbols
Displayed telemetry symbols
the active model memory has not yet "bonded"
with a HoTT receiver. More about the "Binding"
process, see page 69 or 75.
non-blinking: Switched off on RF transmitter side
blinking antenna symbol:
The last receiver bound to the active model is
inactive or out of range
>M x no telemetry signal to receive
signal strength indicator
>M
indicator for pupil signal strength on the teacher
>P
transmitter display
Keys left of the display
• ESC key
brief repeated pressing the ESC key will cause a
stepwise return to the function selection screen or
even further to the base screen. Any changes made
to settings remain.
Momentarily touching the ESC key for about 1 s
while in the base screen will open and close the
Telemetry menu.
• arrow keys ef cd
1. Momentarily pressing one of these keys will cause
analogous paging in the given arrow direction
through lists, e. g. through the model selection list
or the multi-function list or within menus though
the menu's lines.
2. Simultaneous pressing on ef will change the
transmitter's base screen and almost any menu
position to the "Servo display" menu.
Keys to the right of the display
• SET button
1. After switching the transmitter on, brieﬂy pressing
the SET key will cause a jump from the displayed
base screen to the Multi-function menu. In the
same manner a selected menu can now be called
up with the SET key.
2. Momentarily pressing the SET key from within
the Basic Settings menu will activate / deactivate
(conﬁrm) the given setting ﬁelds.
• arrow keys ef cd
1. "Paging" through the Multi-function menu and
the menu lines within the Basic Settings menu
analogous to the arrow keys of the left touch pad.
2. Select or set parameters in setting ﬁelds after they
have been activated by brieﬂy touching the SET
key, whereby the fc keys and ed are used for
the same corresponding functions. In this case it
is completely irrelevant which of these two keys
are used.
3. By brieﬂy pressing the cd keys simultaneously
or ef an altered parameter value for the active
entry ﬁeld will again be restored to its default
value (CLEAR).
Notice:
• Touching the given touch pad does not itself initiate
the given action but rather the end of the touch.
• In the event the touch pads do not exhibit any
functionality immediately after switching the
transmitter off and then on again right away, this is
not a fault. Just switch the transmitter off again then
wait for several seconds before switching it on again.
Transmitter description - Display and keypad
25
Shortcuts
The following key combinations can be used to directly
call up certain menus and options:
• CLEAR
Brief simultaneous activation of the cd keys or
ef on the right touch pad will restore the active
entry ﬁeld's changed parameter value back to its
default value.
• "Servo screen"
Brief simultaneous activation of the ef keys of the
left touch pad will cause a jump from the transmitter's
base screen or from almost any menu position to the
"Servo" menu, see page 230.
• "Telemetry" menu
Press the center ESC key in the left touch pad for
about 1 s to call up the "Telemetry" menu from the
transmitter's base screen, see text beginning on
page 208, or to return to the base screen again.
• Graphic display of telemetry data
Brieﬂy touching one of the arrow keys of the left
or right touch pad will cause a jump from the base
screen directly to the transmitter's graphic display
of telemetry data or will allow paging back and forth
between individual graphic displays.
Brieﬂy touching the centered ESC or SET key will
cause a return back to the base screen.
• "HIDDEN MODE"
(language selection and contrast)
Press and hold arrow keys cd of the left touch
pad then momentarily touch the SET key of the right
touch pad, see next double-page.
• Entry lockout
Entry lockout is activated and deactivated from the
base screen by simultaneously pressing the ESC
26
Transmitter description - Shortcuts
and SET keys for a little longer (about 2 s).
• Quick-Select
From the multi-function list, a jump can be made to a
"Structure overview" by a brief, simultaneous touch
on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad.
Menus are arranged in clear groups in this overview.
All menus
Memor y
Ser vo settings
Transm. controls
Switches
Flight phases
Timers
Mixers
Special funct.
Global functions
Now the desired group can be selected with the cd
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad …
All menus
Memor y
Ser vo settings
Transm. controls
Switches
Flight phases
… and then brieﬂy touching the center SET key in
the right touch pad. As soon as the key is released,
only the respective generic term for the given menu
will remain listed. For example:
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress menus
Suppress models
Concealed menu columns
Some menus have concealed columns to improve
legibility. Menus with concealed columns can be
recognized by virtue of a triangle pointing to the right in
the bottom left corner of the screen. For example, in the
menu "Servo settings":
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
This procedure is analogous for the other menus.
In this menu, e. g. the column "lim" +" (servo travel limit)
to the right of column "- travel +" is "concealed".
To reach this column, use the pointing triangle at the
bottom left of the screen to push the frame marker with
the arrow key f of the left or right touch pad to just
beyond the column for "- travel +":
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
150% 150%
150% 150%
150% 150%
150% 150%
150% 150%
lim +
To again return to the now-concealed column "- travel
+" or even further to the left, push the frame marker with
arrow key e of the left or right touch pad appropriately
to the left:
Transmitter description - Concealed menu columns
27
HIDDEN MODE
Language selection and display contrast
The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's "HIDDEN MODE" can
be reached from almost any menu position by pressing
and holding the cd arrow keys of the left touch pad
and the SET key of the right touch pad for about one
second until the screen shown below is displayed.
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
DEUTSCH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
CONTRAST
The screen's contrast characteristic can be adapted as
needed in this screen's "CONTRAST" line, as described
in more detail on pages 226/226, by tapping on the
center SET key of the right touch pad. Tapping again
on the SET or ESC keys will cause a return to line
selection.
The line …
LANGUAGE
… can be reached by tapping arrow key d in the left
or right touch pad. One of the transmitter's available
languages can then be selected from the screen which
appears.
¿HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
DEUTSCH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
Activate language selection by pressing on the center
28
Transmitter description - Hidden mode
SET key in the right touch pad.
¿HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
DEUTSCH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
Now the default language "GERMAN" can be replaced
with the desired language by making a selection with the
arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example:
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
Conﬁrm the selection by tapping again on the center
SET key in the right touch pad. All settings stored in the
transmitter remain intact after a change of language has
been made.
The following languages are available for selection at
the time this handbook was printed:
• German
• English
• French
The Italian and Spanish languages are planned for
inclusion at a later point in time. These will then be
made available by way of an update download from the
transmitter's web page at the Graupner website
www.graupner.de.
VOICE TRIGGER
As mentioned in section "Headsets" on page 21, the
transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals
and announcements associated with the telemetry
menu can be output by way of the headset connector.
These announcements are made in German language
by default. These announcements are summarized in
a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal
memory but they can be replaced by a voice packet of a
different language at any time.
The following languages are available for selection at
the time this handbook was printed:
• German
• English
• French
The Italian and Spanish languages are planned for
inclusion at a later point in time. These will then be made
available on the transmitter's download web page at the
Graupner website www.graupner.de.
The given active language packet can then be swapped
out either with the PC program (also available as a
download from the transmitter's web page at
www.graupner.de) or per SD card as described below.
Preparation
If not already done, insert the SD card or SDHC card
into the transmitter as described on page 22. Now
when the transmitter is switched on it will perform
some operations which will include the creation of a
"VoiceFile" on the memory card.
Take this memory card, which has now been prepared
by the transmitter, out of the transmitter and insert it
into a suitable card reader. If necessary, attach the card
reader to your PC or laptop. Now copy the language
packet downloaded from the transmitter's web page (e.g.
"voice_gb.vdf") into the folder created by the transmitter.
Now take the memory card out of the card reader and
re-insert it into the transmitter. Once the memory card is
inserted in the transmitter, switch the transmitter on with
RF switched off.
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
Language change
Use the left or right arrow touch key to select the line
"VOICE".
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
Activate language selection by pressing the center SET
key in the right touch pad.
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
Now use the right touch pad arrow keys to replace the
default language "DEUTSCH" with the language you
want. For example:
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
ENGLISH
STICK CALI.
Conﬁrm your selection with another tap on the center
SET key in the right touch pad. The selected language
packet will be loaded into the transmitter's memory.
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
ENGLISH
STICK CALI.
22/100%
The loading process is ﬁnished as soon as the progress
bar at the lower edge of the display disappears.
¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
ENGLISH
STICK CALI.
When this process is ﬁnished, switch off the transmitter.
All settings stored in the transmitter remain intact after a
change of language has been made.
Notice:
• If the warning …
RF
MUST BE
OFF
OK
… appears, then the transmitter's RF radiation is still
active. Jump to the "Basic settings" menu, select
the "RF transmit" line, select its "OFF" option and
then repeat the procedure
• If the warning …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
… appears then the transmitter does not detect a memory
card in its card slot or the card found cannot be read.
• If the warning …
MISSING
IMPORT
DATA
OK
… appears then the transmitter could not ﬁnd an
appropriate ﬁle on the inserted memory card.
JOYSTICK CALIBRATION
If you feel the neutral position of your self-calibrating
joysticks (controls 1 … 4) are not exactly 0 % of
their control travel, then this can be checked and, if
necessary, corrected as follows.
Jump to the "Model select" menu and initialize a free
model memory as described on page 60. Whether the
model to be initialized is a winged aircraft or a helicopter
is irrelevant.
Transmitter description - Hidden mode 29
+
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Otherwise the graph bars show current setting
percentages for joystick control functions which are not
self-neutralizing – typically for the "K1", throttle/brake or
throttle/pitch, control stick. For example, if the throttle/
brake control stick is in its "quarter-throttle" position, the
display would appear as shown below.
10
12
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
One after the other, put both joysticks into each of their
four possible limit positions without exerting force at
the limit position. In each of these eight possible limit
positions, the – side dependent – indication for exactly
-100 % or +100 % should be displayed. For example,
30
Transmitter description - Hidden mode
Regardless of the number of self-neutralizing joystick
functions available on your transmitter, if these checks
produce four 0 % results and eight 100 % results then
your transmitter's joysticks are optimally calibrated. You
can terminate this process then, if appropriate, delete
the model memory just created.
Otherwise jump (as described at the outset of the
previous double page) to the "Stick cali." line in the
"HIDDEN MODE" menu then brieﬂy touch the center
SET key in the right touch pad.
STICK CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
0%
0%
Now position the right joystick – without exerting extra
force – to its left limit corresponding with the on-screen
blinking arrow pointing to the left.
STICK CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
+100%
… and brieﬂy touch the center SET key in the right
touch pad. This concludes this example calibration of the
right joystick's left limit. The circle in the middle of the
stylized joystick plane will now blink as conﬁrmation of
the calibration.
STICK CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
– 50 %
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
–100 %
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
11
10
12
10
12
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
–100 %
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
11
STICK CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
11
if Control 2 is at its left limit and the other three joystick
functions are in their respective middle positions then
your transmitter's display should look like the one shown
below.
Wait for the notices which typically appear in the base
screen following a model change then jump to the
"Servo display" menu, for example by simultaneously
touching the ef keys of the left touch pad (WITHOUT
any interim change to trim settings or other program
settings).
If all four of your transmitter's joystick functions are still
self-neutralizing, this display should ideally look like the
one shown below.
+100%
The arrow keys ef of the right touch pad will now
allow you to cyclically select the four calibrated joystick
planes, e.g. the left/right plane of the right joystick.
Now release the self-neutralizing joystick so it can return
to its center position and then tap again on the center
SET key to calibrate the joystick's centered position. The
right arrow marker will begin to blink.
c
STICK CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
DEUTSCH
STICK CALI.
0%
Repeat the calibration process for the right limit of the
right joystick. The other joystick planes are calibrated
analogously.
Notice:
• Correct any bad calibrations by repeating the
respective process.
• Within a given joystick plane, each of the three
calibration positions can be selected directly with the
cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.
Brieﬂy touching the center ESC key of the left touch pad
will terminate the process and return to the sub-menu
"Stick cali.".
Transmitter description - Hidden mode
31
Telemetry data display
As described on page 220 in the context of sub-menu
"SENSOR SELECT" for the "Telemetry" menu …
RECEIVER
RX–S QUA: 100%
RX–S STR: 100%
RX–dBm:
33dBm
TX–dBm:
33dBm
L–PACK:
10ms
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Suppress:
TOG
… the output of sensors attached to the receiver can be
processed and activated for graphic presentation on the
screen. This data is then appropriately displayed by the
graphic indicators described below.
These graphic elements can be reached from the
transmitter's base screen by brieﬂy touching the e or f
keys of the left or right touch pad. Page back and forth
between individual graphic elements with the same keys
and return to the base screen again with the ESC key.
Notice:
The sequence of the following element descriptions
corresponds to their selection sequence when touching
the f key.
More details about the following named modules can be
found in the appendix and in Internet at www.graupner.
de in the web page for the given product.
32
Transmitter description - Telemetry data display
AKKU 1
0.0V
0.0A
0mAh
RX–VOLT:4.8
TMP
CHR–LOW
OUTPUT
TYPE:ONCE
V:4.6
+22°C
This screen presents the "RX DATAVIEW" of the
Telemetry menu's "SETTING & DATA VIEW", see page
209, with data processed and displayed graphically.
The displayed items are as follows:
(GENERAL + ELECTRIC modules)
Value
Explanation
This display depicts current voltage, current current
draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of "Batt 1"
connected to the General-Engine (Order No. 33610),
General-Air (Order No. 33611) or Electric-Air module
(Order No. 33620).
RX-S QUA
signal quality in %
SENSOR 1
RX-S ST
signal strength in %
RX-dBm
reception power in dBm
TX-dBm
transmit power in dBm
V PACK
Indicates the longest time span in ms
in which data packages are lost in the
transmission from the transmitter to the
receiver.
RX-VOLT
current operating voltage of the
receiver's power supply in volts
M-RX V
lowest receiver operating voltage since
last startup, in volts
TMP
the thermometer depicts the receiver's
current operating temperature
(GENERAL + ELECTRIC module)
SENSOR 1
0.0V
0°C
If attached, this display depicts currenly measured voltage
and temperature from a "T(EMP)1" temperature/voltage
sensor, Order No. 33612 or 33613 for General-Engine
(Order No. 33610), General-Air (Order No. 33611) or
Electric-Air module (Order No. 33620).
SENSOR 2
(GENERAL + ELECTRIC modules)
Vario
GPS
0 mm
0.0 s
SENSOR 2
0.0V
0°C
If attached, this display depicts currently measured
voltage and temperature from a "T(EMP)2" temperature/
voltage sensor, Order No. 33612 or 33613 for GeneralEngine (Order No. 33610), General-Air (Order No. 33611)
or Electric-Air module (Order No. 33620).
Rotary speed sensor
If attached, this display will depict altitude relative to
location or starting location (in m) as well as the current
ascent/decent rate (in m/s) from data provided by a
GPS-/Vario module (Order No. 33600) or Vario module
(Order No. 33601) connected to the receiver's telemetry
connection.
GPS
U/min
Kmh
If attached, this display depicts the speed measured
by a speed sensor, Order No. 33615 or 33616, for a
General-Engine (Order No. 33610), General-Air (Order
No. 33611) or Electric-Air module (Order No. 33620).
Notice:
The appropriate blade count must ﬁrst be set in the
module's telemetry menu before the correct speed can
be displayed.
0km/h
0DIS
0.0m/s
0ALT
If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the
data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order
No. 33600.
The displayed items are as follows:
Kmh
RXSQ
DIS
0m
ALT
0m
0.0m/1s
0m/3s
0m/10s
0°00.0000
0°00.0000
If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the
data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order
No. 33600.
Aside from the model's current position and speed, the
center section of this screen will also display current
altitude with respect to the starting location as well as
the model's current ascent/decent rate in m/1 s, m/3 s
and m/10 s, current reception quality and the model's
distance from its starting location.
The displayed items are as follows:
Value
Explanation
W/N/E/S
west / north / east / south
Kmh
speed
RXSQ
return channel signal strength
DIS
distance
ALT
current altitude with respect to starting
m/1 s
m/1 s ascent/decent rate
Value
Explanation
m/3 s
m/3 s ascent/decent rate
km/h
Speed
m/10 s
m/10 s ascent/decent rate
DIS
horizontal distance in m
m/s
ascent/decent rate in m/s
ALT
altitude relative to starting location in m
Transmitter description - Telemetry data display
33
VARIO
ELECTRIC AIR MODULE
m/1s
0.0
ALT
m/3s
0.0
m/10s
0.0
RXSQ
MAX
0m
MIN
0m
If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the
data acquired by a Vario module, Order No. 33601.
The displayed items are as follows:
Value
Explanation
ALT
current altitude
RXSQ
Signal strength of the signal received
by the receiver in %, see page 209.
MAX
the preset maximum altitude limit
relative to starting location at which,
when exceeded, will cause an audible
warning to be sounded
MIN
the preset minimum altitude limit
relative to the starting location at
which, when underrun, will cause an
audible warning to be sounded
m/1 s
m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3 s
m/3 s ascent/decent rate
m/10 s
m/10 s ascent/decent rate
34
Transmitter description - Telemetry data display
0.0V
0A
ALT
0m
BAT1
0m/1s
0.0V
0m/3s
T1
0°C
BAT2
0.0V T2
0°C
0.0V
0A
ALT
0m
BAT1
0m/1s
0.0V
0m/3s
T1
BAT2
0.0V T2
0°C
0°C
1L0.00
2L0.00
3L0.00
4L0.00
5L0.00
6L0.00
7L0.00
1H0.00
2H0.00
3H0.00
4H0.00
5H0.00
6H0.00
7H0.00
If attached to the receiver, this screen will display
the data acquired by an Electric-Air module, Order
No. 33620. More details about this module can be found
in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the
web page for the given product.
Depending on how this module is equipped with
sensors, this screen can permanently display the data
shown in the adjacent table.
The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and
BAT2), up to two temperature measurements (T1 and
T2), current altitude with respect to the starting location,
the model's ascent/decent rate in m/1 s and m/3 s and,
in the middle of the screen, the current draw currently
being taken from a power source.
Along the right edge of the screen is a table of
alternating values for cell voltages at balancer
connections (L) or voltages for up to 7 attached battery
cell packs (H).
The displayed items are as follows:
Value
Explanation
current voltage
current current
BAT1 / BAT2
battery 1 or 2
ALT
current altitude
m/1 s
m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3 s
m/3 s ascent/decent rate
T1 / T2
temperature of sensor 1 or 2
L or H
cell voltage of cells 1 … 14 (14 max)
L = balancer connection 1
H = balancer connection 2
GENERAL MODULE
BAT1 E FUEL F
0.0V
T1
BAT2
0.0V T2
0°C
0°C
CELL V
1:0.00
2:0.00
3:0.00
4:0.00
5:0.00
6:0.00
ALT
0m
0m1
0m3
POWER
0°C
0.0V
0.0A
0°C
BAT1 E FUEL F
0.0V
T1
BAT2
0.0V T2
If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the
data acquired by a General-Engine module, Order
No. 33601, or a General-Air module, Order No. 33611.
More details about these modules can be found in the
appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web
page for the given product.
Depending on how this module is equipped with
sensors, this screen can permanently display the data
shown in the table below.
The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1
and BAT2), the measurement results of up to two
temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a ﬁll level gage for
the fuel tank.
An alternating display along the screen's right edge will
display a list of current cell voltages for a LiPo battery
with up to six cells or operational data (current altitude
with respect to the starting location, ascent/decent m/1 s
and m/3 s, current current being drawn in amperes and
current voltage of the battery connected to the sensor).
The displayed items are as follows:
Value
Explanation
BAT1 / BAT2
battery 1 or 2
FUEL
fuel level / tank gage
E/F
empty / full
T1 / T2
temperature of sensor 1 or 2
CELL V
voltage of cells 1 … 6 (6 max)
ALT
current altitude
0m1
m/1 s ascent/decent rate
0m3
m/3 s ascent/decent rate
current draw i amperes
battery voltage
Transmitter description - Telemetry data display
35
Warning notices
Warning notices
BIND N/A
OK
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
Please select RF transmission
"ON" or "OFF".
battery
needs
charging
Operating voltage is too low
Fail Safe
setup
t.b.d.
Failsafe has not yet been
activated
MISSING
IMPORT
DATA
OK
Throttle
too
high !
RF
MUST BE
OFF
OK
36
"Bind not available"
A receiver has not yet been
bound to the currently active
model memory. Brieﬂy touching
the SET key will cause a direct
jump to the appropriate option.
A suitable language ﬁle
cannot be found on the
memory card
Helicopter throttle joystick or
limiter too high
Prompt to switch off RF
transmission
(language ﬁle can only be
loaded when RF is switched off)
Transmitter description - Warning notices
CAN‘T
RECEIVE
DATA
OK
No bound receiver in range
No
pupil
signal
Connection between teacher
and pupil is interrupted
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
No SD or SDHC memory card
in the card slot or card is not
legible
• Is the "wireless teacher/pupil connection" that was
active when the transmitter was last used to be
continued, CONT or switched off OFF?
TRAINER
Wireless Link
ACT
INH
• After being switched on, the transmitter has not
been used within the time limit preset in the "Poweron beep" line of the "Basic Settings" menu, see
page 227. The message …
Power on waning
is active!
… will appear in the screen, the center LED will
alternately blink red and blue and an acoustic
warning tone will sound.
If the transmitter continues unused it will
autonomously switch itself off after one minute.
• When battery voltage is too low, a model change is
blocked for reasons of safety. The screen will show
an appropriate message.
not possible now
voltage too low
Function ﬁelds in the display
Position indicator
SEL, STO, SYM, ASY,
Depending on the given menu, certain function ﬁelds will
appear on the bottom display line.
Proportional controls, CTRL 7 and 8
As soon as one of the proportional controls (CTRL 7 & 8)
in the middle console is turned, a small symbol will appear
to the left of the two vertical position indicators.
CLR SEL STO SYM ASY
A marked function is activated by tapping on the SET
key.
Function ﬁelds
• CLR (clear)
• SEL (select):
• STO (store):
• SYM
• ASY
•
•
delete
selection
store (e. g. control position)
set values symmetrically
set values asymmetrically
switch symbol ﬁeld
(assignment of all types of switches)
within a menu, change to the
second page (menu continuation)
Entry lockout
At the same time, for the duration of the control's
operation, the position indicator for the two vertical bars
in the middle will change from displaying current trim
position to a display of the respective current position of
the proportional controls CTRL 7 & 8.
Logically, the left proportional control (CTRL 7) is
displayed by the left bar indicator and the right bar
indicator displays the position of the right proportional
control (CTRL 8). The two horizontal bars continue to
show current trim positions of respective joystick trim
controls.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
Stop
Flt
0:00
0:00
K78 HoTT
M RX0.0V
The touch keys can be locked out to prevent unintended
access and operation of settings. This lockout is
established (when the mc-32 HoTT transmitter is
displaying its base screen) by simultaneously pressing
and holding both the ESC and SET keys for about two
seconds. This lockout condition is indicated by a key
symbol, located at the intersection point of the trim bars,
which is displayed in reverse video.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«normal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
The lockout is effective immediately but controls remains
operationally ready.
The lockout can be removed by again touching and
holding the ESC and SET keys for about two seconds.
A lockout condition is also removed the next time the
transmitter is switched on.
About 2 seconds after operating one of the proportional
controls has ended, the display will again revert to
display of current trim positions of the four trim controls
generated by the two joysticks.
Transmitter description - Function ﬁelds, position indicator and entry lockout
37
Putting the transmitter into operation
Preliminary remarks about the mc-32 HoTT transmitter
Preliminary remarks
Graupner's HoTT system theoretically permits
simultaneous operation of more than 200 models.
However, because of the interspersed radio-frequency
utilization permitted by certiﬁcation for the 2.4 GHz
ISM band, this number is signiﬁcantly lower in practical
application. Nevertheless, in general more models
can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band
than would be the case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz
frequency bands. The real limiting factor is – as often
before – is still likely to be the size of available
operating space (i.e. airspace for aircraft). Alone the fact
that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting
frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is
sometimes quite difﬁcult in broken landscapes, such as
on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for
remote control operating security.
Battery charged?
Since the transmitter is delivered with an empty (not
charged) battery, the battery must ﬁrst be charged
according to the charging instructions on page 14.
Otherwise a warning tone will be sounded when the
low voltage threshold, preset in the "Batterie warning"
line of the "Basic Settings",
is underrun. This low voltage
battery
threshold can be set, as
needs
charging
described on page 226. When
this threshold is underrun,
a warning tone will be sounded and an appropriate
message will be overlaid on the base screen.
Transmitter startup
After being switched on, the message shown below will
appear in the transmitter's screen for about two seconds.
38
Putting the transmitter into operation
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
Within this brief period you may be able to switch off RF
transmission by using the c or f key of the right touch
pad to shift the query's response from "ON" to "OFF"
such that the ON option is displayed in normal video and
the OFF option is highlighted in reverse video.
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
Now switch the RF module off by tapping on the center
SET key in the right key pad.
The center LED, which in the meantime has been
illuminating in blue, will change its color to red again and
the transmitter's display will show the screen depicted
below.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
0:33h
Stop
Flt
K78
0:00
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
The symbol combination means that the currently
active model memory has already "bonded" with a
Graupner HoTT receiver in the past but there is no
connection to this receiver at the moment. (In this
example, RF transmission has been switched off.)
If the transmitter were to be switched on without
switching off RF transmission, the center LED would
illuminate in blue and the symbolic transmitter antenna
in the screen would blink. At the same time, an acoustic
warning will sound until a connection is established with
the respective receiver. As soon as this connection is
established, the "x" at the base of the antenna symbol
will be replaced by a ﬁeld strength indicator, for example
, and the optical and acoustic warnings will stop.
If a telemetry connection has also been established for
the incoming signal, that is output by the receiver in the
model, then the right side of this same screen line will
display a similar indication of signal strength for this
reception of the receiver's transmitted signal (>M ) as
well as the current voltage of the receiver's power supply.
On the other hand, if the screen displays the symbol
and the center LED illuminates in red
combination
continuously then the currently active model memory is
not "bonded" to any receiver.
Under-voltage warning
If transmitter voltage drops below the adjustable
threshold speciﬁed in the "General Settings" menu,
see page 226 (default value, 4.7 V), an optical and an
acoustic under-voltage warning will be issued.
Important notices:
• The transmitter in the set is already preset, as
delivered, with default values which are correct
for operation in most European countries (except
France).
If the remote control system is to be operated in
France then the transmitter MUST be changed over
to "FRANCE" mode, see page 227. IN NO CASE may
the Universal/EUROPE mode be used IN FRANCE.
• The receiver included in the set with the mc-32
HoTT 2.4 transmitter (and already bound to the
transmitter by settings made in the factory) is
Transmitter ﬁrmware updates
capable of operating up to 12 servos.
In order to achieve the greatest possible
ﬂexibility but still preclude unnecessary
inadvertent operator errors, control channels 5 …
12 have not been assigned to any controls. This
means that servos connected by way of these
channels will remain in their middle positions
until an operator element has been assigned.
Practically all mixers are initially inactive for
this same reason. More about this can be found
on page 96 (winged aircraft) or 100 (helicopter
models).
• The fundamental procedure for initial
programming of a new model memory location
can be found on page 60 and the programming
examples that begin on page 236.
• When the remote control system is switched on,
being bonded or when making settings, that the
transmitter's antenna is always far enough away
from the receiver's antennas. If the transmitter's
antenna is brought too close to the receiver's
antennas this will cause receiver over-modulation
and its red LED will illuminate. At the same
time the return channel will drop out and, as a
consequence, the ﬁeld strength indicator in the
transmitter's screen will be replaced by an "x" and
the receiver's current battery voltage display will
show 0.0 V. The remote control is then in Fail-Save
mode, see page 196, i. e. when signal reception
drops out all servos will remain in their current
positions until a valid signal is again received.
In such a case, increase the distance (between
the transmitter and the model containing the
receiver) until the indicators are again "normal".
Transmitter ﬁrmware updates are made at one's own
risk by connecting the ﬁve-pole mini-USB connector on
the rear side of the transmitter to a PC running Windows
XP, Vista or Windows 7.
Current software and information is available in Internet
at www.graupner.de under the download link for the
given product.
Notice:
You will automatically be notiﬁed of new updates per
email after registering your transmitter at
https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung.
The USB cable delivered with the USB interface option,
Order No.7168.6, is also needed to make an update.
This cable's connector is plugged directly into the 5-pole
mini-USB connector socket on the rear side of the
transmitter
Updating mc-32 HoTT software
to be installed once.
2. Installing the software up-loader
Unpack ﬁle "Radio_grStudio_Install_VerXX.zip"
and start the actual installation program "Radio_
grStudio_Install_VerXX.msi" with a double-click then
follow the instructions.
This program is installed by default under "Start\
Programs\Graupner\ Radio_grStudio\Radio_
grStudio_Ver-SX.X".
3. Establishing a transmitter-to-PC connection
With the transmitter switched off, connect the USB
cable by way of its 5-pole mini-USB socket to the rear
side of the transmitter.
4. Updating mc-32 HoTT transmitter software
Start the "Radio_grStudio_Ver-SX.X" program from
the respective folder, by default at "Start\Programs\
Graupner\ Radio_grStudio\Radio_grStudio_VerSX.X".
Notice:
Be sure to check the charge status of your
transmitter's battery or charge its battery as a
precaution before every update. Also backup all
occupied model memories so they can be restored if
that should become necessary.
1. Installing drivers
Install the required driver software, included in the
"USB Drivers" folder of the program packet, onto
your PC or laptop so your computer can handle the
transmitter's integrated USB interface.
Start driver installation with a double-click on the
respective ﬁle and follow the on-screen instructions.
Once this software has been successfully installed,
the computer must be re-started. Drivers only need
Use the selection sequence "Menu", "Port Setup" or
open the "Controller Menu" and click on "Port select".
Putting the transmitter into operation
39
Now in the "Port select" window, select the COM
port connected to the USB interface. The correct port
can be recognized by its designation "Silicon Labs
CP210x USB to UART Bridge" in the "Device Name"
column. In the above example this would be the
"COM 3" port.
Now call up menu option "Firmware Upgrade" from
"Menu" or open the "Controller Menu" and click on
"Firmware Upgrade".
the desired ﬁrmware update ﬁle with a ".bin" ﬁlename
extension from the "Open ﬁle" window.
Firmware ﬁles are product-speciﬁcally coded, i. e. if
you should accidentally select a ﬁle which does not
correspond to the product (e. g. receiver update ﬁle
instead of a transmitter update ﬁle), the "Product
code error" popup window will appear and the block
the update process from starting.
Now switch on the transmitter then start the
transmitter update by clicking on the "Download
Start" button.
After a brief period a warning will appear stating
that the transmitter's RF transmission will now be
interrupted and that, because of this, any receiver
system currently in operation should be switched off.
Switch off your receiver system if it is switched on
then click on "Yes".
This will start the actual update process. A progress
bar will begin to operate above a sequence of
running text lines.
Click on the button labeled "File Browse" and select
40
Putting the transmitter into operation
Do not terminate the update process before the
progress bar has reached its right end and the
"Firmware Download Success" message appears.
Click on "OK". Subsequently switch off the transmitter
and disconnect the USB cable between the
transmitter and the PC or Laptop.
If the progress bar hangs up without showing any
further progress, close the program and repeat
the update process. Be sure to watch for any error
messages that may appear.
Your notes
41
Receiver initialization
Preliminary remarks about the GR-24 receiver
Receiver system
The mc-32 HoTT remote control set includes a type
GR-24, 2.4 GHz bidirectional receiver for connecting up
to 12 servos.
After switching on this HoTT receiver, should "its"
transmitter not be within range or switched off, then the
receiver's red LED will illuminate continuously for about
1 s then begin to blink slowly. This indicates the receiver
has not (yet) established a link to a Graupner HoTT
transmitter. If a link has been established, the green
LED will illuminate continuously and the red LED will
extinguish.
In order to establish a link to the transmitter, the
Graupner HoTT receiver must ﬁrst be "bound" to
"its" particular model memory in "its" Graupner HoTT
transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding".
This "binding" linkage is only necessary once for each
receiver/model memory combination. Refer to pages
69 or 74. The "binding" procedure has been done at
the factory for model memory 1 of the units delivered
together as a set so this "binding" procedure will only
be necessary to link additional receivers or if a memory
location change becomes necessary (and – e. g. after a
change of transmitter – can be repeated anytime).
On-board voltage display
The current voltage of the receiver's power supply will
be shown in the right side of the transmitter's screen
if a telemetry link exists between the receiver and
transmitter.
Temperature warning
Should the receiver's temperature sink below an
adjustable threshold (default value -10 °C) or rise
above an adjustable threshold (default value +55 °C),
42
Putting the transmitter into operation
an acoustic warning will be issued by the transmitter in
the form of a uniform beep of about 1 s duration. The
aforementioned threshold limits are stored and adjusted
in the receiver.
Servo connections and polarity
Graupner HoTT receiver servo connections are
numbered. The connectors used are keyed against
polarity reversal. Pay attention to the small side proﬁles
when plugging in these connectors. Never use force.
The two outer connections, having designations "11+B-"
and "12+B-" are intended for the battery connections.
These two connections plus the servo's respective
connections can be combined into a single connector at
each end by way of a V or Y cable, Order No. 3936.11.
Do not reverse the polarity of this connection.
Reversed polarity could destroy the receiver and
devices attached to it.
The supply voltage is bussed across (i.e. common
for) all numbered connections. The function of every
individual channel is determined by the transmitter
used, not by the receiver. It is not only the throttle servo
connection which is different for every manufacturer and
model type. For example, in Graupner remote control
systems the throttle servo is on channel 1 for winged
aircraft and on channel 6 for helicopter models.
Concluding notices:
• The signiﬁcantly greater servo resolution
characteristic of the HoTT system produces a
noticeably ﬁrmer response behavior in comparison
to previous technology. Please take the time to
familiarize yourself with this sensitive behavior.
• If you have a speed controller with integrated BEC*
arranged in parallel with the receiver battery, its
positive pole (red cable) may to be removed from the
3-pole connector. Be sure to look for notices about
this in the instructions for the speed controller used.
Use a small screwdriver to carefully lift the
connector's middle latch slightly (1),
pull on the red wire to remove its connector pin
red
from the connector (2)
then put insulation tape
around the removed connector pin to prevent possible short circuit conditions (3).
Follow the installation instructions on page 46 for the
receiver, the receiver antenna and for mounting the
servo.
Reset
To execute a reset of the receiver, press and hold the
SET button on the receiver's top-side while switching the
power supply on. Once power is on, release the button
again.
If a receiver reset is done while the transmitter is
switched off or on a receiver which is not bound, the
receiver's LED will slowly blink red for about 2 or
3 seconds and then a binding procedure can be started
right away on the transmitter.
If reset is done on a bound receiver and the
corresponding model memory is active in the powered
on transmitter, the LED will illuminate in green after
a brief period as an indication that your transmitter/
receiver system is again ready for operation.
Battery Elimination Circuit
Receiver ﬁrmware updates
Please note the following:
A receiver RESET will cause ALL receiver settings
- except for binding information - to return to their
factory settings.
Therefore if a RESET is triggered unintentionally,
any custom settings that had been present in the
receiver before the reset will have to be established
again by way of the Telemetry menu.
A deliberate RESET is recommended, especially if
a receiver is to be "transferred" into another model.
This is a rather simple method to eliminate settings
which are no longer applicable.
Receiver ﬁrmware updates are made by way of the
connector located on the side of the receiver and
the help of a PC running under Windows XP, Vista or
Windows 7. The optional USB interface cable needed
for this is Order No. 7168.6 along with adapter cable,
Order No. 7168.6A. The programs and ﬁles also needed
can be found in Internet on the Graupner website at
www.graupner.de under the downloads for the particular
product.
Notice:
After registering your receiver at https://www.graupner.
de/de/service/produktregistrierung, you will automatically
receive notiﬁcation of future updates per email.
Updating receiver ﬁrmware
Notice:
Before any update procedure, be sure to check the
charged status of the receiver's battery. If necessary,
charge the battery before beginning with an update.
1. Installing drivers
If not already done, install the required driver
software for the USB interface, Order No. 7168.6, as
described on page 39.
2. Establishing a receiver / PC connection
Connect the USB interface cable, Order No. 7168.6,
via the adapter cable, Order No. 7168.6A, with the
"- + T" connector on the receiver. These connectors
are protected against polarity reversal so pay
attention to the small proﬁles on the sides of
connectors. Do not use brute force, these connectors
should latch in rather easily.
Adapter lead
Order No. 7168.6A
If a central red wire is present,
cut through it.
Attention:
If the adapter cable is still has wires for all
three poles, cut the red insulated wire for the
middle connector pin of the adapter cable, Order
No. 7168.6A.
Afterward, make the USB interface connection to the
PC or laptop by way of the delivered USB interface
cable (PC USB/mini-USB). If the USB interface is
connect properly, a red LED on the interface board
should illuminate for a few seconds.
If not already off, now switch the receiver off.
3. Firmware update utility program
On the PC, start the "Graupner_Firmware_Update_
Utility_VerX.XX.exe" program with a double-click.
This program is located among the ﬁles in the
"Firmware-Updater" folder. (At the time of printing for
this manual, this program's current version is 1.18
and it can be started without ﬁrst being installed.)
Putting the transmitter into operation
43
Typically this ﬁle can be found in the folder whose
name is preﬁxed with the order number of the
receiver to be updated. This folder should contain
the ZIP ﬁle that was downloaded and unpacked.
Its ﬁlename should also be preﬁxed with the order
number of the receiver to be updated. For the
standard GR-12 receiver included in this set, the
folder would be designated "33512_12CH_RX". The
ﬁlename will appear in the corresponding window.
In the "COM Port Setup" group box, select the COM
port to which the USB interface is connected. If you
are not sure which selection is correct, press the
"Search" control, choose the connection labeled
"Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge" from the
popup window and then activate "OK". The "Baud
Rate" setting should be "19200".
Afterwards, click on the "Signal 2:Vcc3:Gnd" radio
button in the "Interface Type" group box.
Now click on the control labeled "Browse" that is
located at the top right corner of the window. From
the "Open ﬁle" window which appears, select the
appropriate ﬁrmware update ﬁle for your receiver.
Such ﬁles always have the ".bin" ﬁlename extension.
44
Putting the transmitter into operation
Firmware ﬁles are product-speciﬁcally coded, i. e. if
you should accidentally select a ﬁle which does not
correspond to the product (e. g. transmitter update
ﬁle instead of a receiver update ﬁle), the "Product
code error" popup window will appear and the block
the update process from starting.
Activate the control labeled "Program". Wait for the
progress bar to start. Depending on the speed of the
computer being used, this may take several seconds.
Now press and hold the receiver's SET button while
switching on the receiver's power supply. After a few
seconds the "Found target device …" message will
appear in the status display. Now you can release
the receiver's button. The actual ﬁrmware update
will begin autonomously after this message has
appeared.
However, if the receiver is not detected, the "Target
device ID not found" popup window will appear.
If this process terminates before reaching the 100 %
mark, switch off your receiver's power supply then try
to start the update process all over again. Do this by
performing the above steps again.
The status display and progress bar will show you
the progress of the ﬁrmware update. The update is
concluded when the text "Complete … 100 %" or
"Complete!!" appears in the bottom line of the status
display.
Both LEDs on the receiver will illuminate during the
update process. Upon successful conclusion of the
update process, the green LED will extinguish and
the red LED will begin to blink.
Switch off the receiver, remove the interface cable
and repeat the process for any other receivers you
have which must be updated.
4. Receiver initialization
Following a successful update process you MUST
perform a receiver initialization procedure before
using the receiver again. This is necessary for
reasons of safety.
Do this by pressing and holding the receiver's SET
button then switching the receiver's power supply
on. Now release the SET button again. When you
subsequently switch the receiver on again, the
receiver's green LED will illuminate continuously for
about 2 or 3 seconds. Except for binding information,
all other settings that may have been programmed
into the receiver will now be reset to factory defaults
and will have to be re-entered again if they are
needed.
Putting the transmitter into operation
45
Installation notices
Receiver installation
Regardless of which Graupner receiver system you use,
the procedure is always the same.
Please pay attention that the receiver's antennas must
be mounted at least 5 cm away from all large metal
parts or any wiring that is not directly routed out of
the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this also
includes carbon ﬁber parts, servos, fuel pumps and all
kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver should be
placed at a readily accessible location that is well away
from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may
servo cables be wrapped around the antennas or routed
close to it.
Please note that cables are subject to the acceleration
forces which occur during ﬂight and these forces may
cause such cables, to shift in position. Therefore be
sure the cables in the vicinity of the antennas are not
able to move. Such moving cables can cause reception
disturbances.
Tests have shown that vertical (upright) antennas
provide the best results during wide-range ﬂights. In the
case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the second
antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to the ﬁrst
antenna.
The GR-24 HoTT receiver connections designated
"11+B" and "12+B" are intended for battery connections.
If necessary, an addition battery connection for a
servo can be made if a V or Y cable is used, Order
No. 3936.11. The power supply is bussed across all
numbered connections so it can be attached at any
of these 12 connectors. However, due to additional
voltage losses associated with the traverse connectors,
connections 8, 9 and 10 should not be used for
connecting the receiver's battery.
46
Installation notices
The function of every individual channel is determined
by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However,
channel assignments can be changed in the receiver
by programming done in the "Telemetry" menu.
Nevertheless, it is recommended this be done on the
transmitter side via the "Transmitter output" option, see
page 206.
Several notices and suggestions for installing
remote control components into a model are
provided below.
1. Wrap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at
least 6 mm thick. Attach the foam rubber to the
receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected
against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing.
2. All switches must be installed such that they are not
affected by exhaust gasses or vibration. The switch
knob must be freely accessible over its entire range
of movement.
3. Mount servos on rubber bushes/spacers with hollow
brass bearings to protect them from vibration. Do
not tighten the fastening screws down too tight as
this would negate the vibration protection to be
provided by the rubber bush/spacer. Only when servo
fastening screws are properly tightened will this
arrangement provide security and vibration protection
for your servos. The ﬁgure below shows how a servo
is mounted properly. The brass bearings are to be
pushed into the rubber bushes/spacers from below.
Servo mounting lug
Retaining screw
Rubber grommet
Tubular brass spacer
4. Servo arms must be free to move throughout their
entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are no
objects which could hinder servo arm motion.
The sequence in which servos are connected to the
receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the
connection layouts provided for this on pages 57 and 59.
Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 … 9.
In order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos
connected to the receiver during startup
always ﬁrst switch on the transmitter
and then the receiver
and when ﬁnished with operation
ﬁrst switch off the receiver
and then the transmitter.
When programming the transmitter, be sure that
electric motors cannot start running without control
or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic
starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe,
disconnect the receiver's drive battery or, in the case of
a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply.
Receiver system power supply
Among other aspects, the safe operation of a model
depends on a reliable power supply. In the event that,
despite smooth operating rods, fully charged battery,
battery leads with adequate cross-section, minimum
contact resistances at connectors, etc., the transmitter
indicates repeated receiver voltage collapses or is
receiver voltage is generally too low; please give
attention to the following notices.
Give primary attention to fully charged batteries when
model operation is to be started. Be sure that the
contact surfaces of connectors and switches really are
low resistance. If necessary, measure the voltage drop
across installed switch cables when they are under
load because even new heavy-duty switches can cause
a voltage drop of up to 0.2 V. This value can increase
in contacts by factors as a consequence of aging and
oxidation. The constant vibrations and jarring also takes
its toll on contacts to produce a creeping increase of
contact resistance.
Servos present another possible problem source. Even
rather small servos like a Graupner/JR DS-281 can draw
up to 0.75 A of current when it is blocks under load. Just
four of these servos in a "foam" model can therefore load
down the on-board power supply by as much as 3 A …
Therefore you should choose a power supply which will
not break down under greater loads but rather always
deliver sufﬁcient voltage. To "calculate" necessary
battery capacity you should always ﬁgure on at least
350 mAh for every analog servo and at least 500 mAh
for every digital servo.
For example, from this point of view a battery with
1400 mAh would be the absolute minimum to power
a receiver system with a total of 4 analog servos. But
be sure to also consider the receiver itself into the
calculation because its bidirectional functionality will
draw about 70 mA of current too.
It is also a good practice to connect the receiver to
its power source with two cables rather than just one.
Cable "1" could be connected to the "12+B" receiver
connector as is usual and cable "2" could be connected
to the opposite end of the row at the connector labeled
"11+B". For example by using two power supply cables
to connect one switch or voltage regulator to the
receiver. Just use a V or Y cable, Order No. 3936.11
to accomplish this (see ﬁgure) if you should need one
or both of the receiver's connectors to attach a servo,
speed controller, etc. This double-connection technique
to switches and speed controllers not only reduces the
risk of a cable break but also ensures a more uniform
supply of power to the connected servo.
Aux. function
Y-lead
Order No. 3936.11
PRX stabilised
receiver power supply
Order No. 4136
NiMH 4-cell battery packs
In compliance with the aforementioned conditions, your
Graupner HoTT receiver system can be readily operated
with traditional 4-cell battery packs as long as the packs
have adequate capacity and voltage level.
NiMH 5-cell battery packs
Five-cell battery packs offer a greater voltage tolerance
than do 4-cell packs.
However, be aware that not every servo available on
the market is able to tolerate the voltage level output by
a 5-cell pack over the long term, this is particularly true
when the battery pack is freshly charged. Some of these
servos react to this with a noticeable "grinding" sound.
Therefore pay attention to the speciﬁcations of the
servos you use before making a choice for a 5-cell
battery pack..
LiFe 6.6 V batteries with 2 cells
From a contemporary perspective, these new cells are
the very best choice.
LiFe cells are also available in hard plastic casings to
protect them from mechanical damage. Like LiPo cells,
LiFe cells can be quick charged in suitable chargers and
they are comparatively robust.
This type of secondary cell battery is also rated for a
signiﬁcantly greater number of charge/discharge cycles
than, for example, LiPo batteries The nominal 6.6 V
output of a 2-cell LiFe battery pack does not present
a problem for either Graupner HoTT receivers nor for
those servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices
which have been speciﬁcally approved for operation in
this – higher – voltage range. Please note however
that practically all servos, speed controllers, gyros
and other devices built in the past and most such
devices currently still offered on the market have
only a permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Use
of these batteries in conjunction with these devices
demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator, e. g. the
PRX, Order No. 4136, see appendix. Otherwise there is
danger that attached devices will incur damage within a
short period of time.
LiPo 2-cell packs
For a given capacity, LiPo batteries are lighter than,
Installation notices
47
for example, NiMH batteries. LiPo batteries are also
available in hard plastic casings to protect them from
mechanical damage.
The comparatively high nominal voltage, 7.4 V, for a
2-cell LiPo pack does not present a problem for either
Graupner HoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed
controllers, gyros and other devices which have been
speciﬁcally approved for operation in this – higher –
voltage range. Please note however that practically
all servos, speed controllers, gyros and other
devices built in the past and most such devices
currently still offered on the market have only a
permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Use of these
batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use
of a stabilized voltage regulator, e. g. the PRX, Order
No. 4136, see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that
attached devices will incur damage within a short period
of time.
48
Installation notices
Your notes
49
Term deﬁnitions
Control function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, switch, control switch, ﬁxed switch
To make use of this mc-32 HoTT manual easier, a
number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this
manual have been deﬁned below.
Control function
A "control function" is a signal intended to affect a
given control action – initially independent of its signal
course in the – . For example, this could be for throttle,
ruder or aileron in a winged aircraft or pitch, roll or
crow for a helicopter. A control function signal can
be applied directly over a single control channel or
also through a mixer and then applied over multiple
control channels. A typical example of multiple control
channels is separately operated aileron servos or the
use of two roll or crow servos in helicopters. The control
function explicitly includes the inﬂuence of the control's
mechanical travel on the respective servo.
Control
"Controls" include all operating elements on the
transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot,
that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers etc.
connected to the receiver. This includes:
• both joysticks (control functions 1 through 4), even
though these four control functions can be freely
swapped around for both model types ("winged
aircraft" and "helicopters") by use of software "Mode"
settings, e. g. throttle left or right. The dual-axis
function for throttle/airbrake is often referred to as the
C1 control (channel 1).
• the three proportional rotary controls, which are
CTRL 6, 7 + 8,
• the switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, which are CTRL 9 and 10,
• switches SW 1 … 3 as well as 8 and 9, if assigned to
a control channel via the "Transm. controls" menu.
50
Term deﬁnitions
The proportional operating elements produce a direct
effect on servos which is commensurate with the
control's position whereas switch modules can only
effect a two or three increment change.
Function input
This is an imaginary point in the signal path and must
not be considered the same as the point on the circuit
board where the transmitter control is connected.
The choice of "controls arrangement" and settings
in the "Transm. controls" menu have their effect
"downstream" of this imaginary point of connection.
Thus differences between the physical control's number
and the number of the downstream control channel can
indeed emerge.
Control channel
From the point at which a signal contains all control
information necessary for a particular servo – whether
directly from the physical control or indirectly by way of a
mixer – the term "control channel" is used. This signal is
only yet to be inﬂuenced by settings made in the "Servo
adjustment" menu and the "Transmitter output" menu
before it leaves the transmitter's RF module.
Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still
be modiﬁed by settings made in the telemetry menu
before ﬁnally being applied as a control quantity for the
respective servo.
Mixers
The transmitter's software contains diverse mixer
functions. These can be used to apply one control
function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply
multiple control functions to a single servo. Please look
over the numerous mixer functions in the text beginning
on page 145 of this manual.
Switches
The three standard 2-position switches, SW 2, 3 and
8, the two 3-position switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, as well
as both pushbutton switches, SW 1 and 9, can also be
combined with control programming. However, these
switches are generally intended for switching program
options, e. g. to start and stop timers, to switch mixers
on and off, or as a teacher/pupil switchover, etc. Each
of these switches can be assigned any number of
functions.
Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.
Control switches
Since it is very practical to have some functions
automatically switched on or off for a certain control's
position (e. g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for acquisition
of model run time, automatic extension of spoilers and
other possibilities), four control switches have been
integrated into mc-32 HoTT software.
These software switches, designated "G1 … G4", are
triggered by setting a switch-point along the physical
control's course of travel. This "trigger setting" is simply
deﬁned with the press of a button. The switching
action can be correlated to the physical control's travel
direction by software.
Of course control switches can also be freely combined
with the aforementioned physical switches to solve even
more complex problems.
There is a series of instructive examples which make
this programming child's play. Learn about this by taking
advantage of the programming examples beginning on
page 226.
Fixed switches FXI and FX
This type of switch turns a function permanently on,
e. b. timers (closed ﬁxed switch) or off (open ﬁxed
switch) or they can provide a ﬁxed input signal for a
control function, e. g. FXI = + 100 % and FX = -100 %.
For example, in ﬂight phase programming, these ﬁxed
switches can be used to switch a servo or speed
controller between two settings.
Term deﬁnitions
51
Physical control, switch and control switch assignments
Principle procedure
The mc-32 Hott system exhibits maximum ﬂexibility
when it comes to assigning standard equipment
operating elements to speciﬁc functions.
Since the assignment of controls and switches is done
in the same way, even though different menus may be
involved, it is appropriate at this point to explain the
fundamental programming technique so that users can
concentrate on the particular contents when reading the
detailed menu descriptions.
Physical control and switch assignments
The "Control adjust" menu can be used to assign
transmitter inputs 5 … 12 to operate servos, both from
any given joystick direction (K1 … K4) as well as to
assign any other physical control designated "CTRL"
or switch designated "SW". After tapping on the center
SET key in the right key pad, the screen shown below
will appear.
Move desired switch
or control adj.
Now simply activate the desired control (joystick 1 … 4,
CTRL 6 … 10 or switch 1 … 3, 8 or 9).
push desired switch
into position ON
Important notice:
Controls to be assigned (particularly CONTROL 6 …
10) MUST be pre-assigned in the "Control adjust"
menu to one of the inputs 5 through 12!
Control assignment
Wherever programming permits a switch to be assigned,
a switch symbol will appear in the screen's bottom
display line.
Use the arrow keys in the left or right touch pad to select
the appropriate column.
How to assign a switch
1. Brieﬂy press the SET-T key in the right touch pad.
The message shown below will appear in the screen.
Move desired switch
to ON position
(ext. switch: SET
2. Now it is only necessary to put the selected switch
into the desired "ON" position or, as described at the
right in "Assignment of external switches", to select
a switch from the list of "External switches". This
concludes the assignment. The switch symbol to the
right of the switch's number indicates the current
state of the particular switch.
On the other hand, if you wish to assign a control in the
Since CTRL 9 and 10 as well as the 3-position
"Control switch" menu, page 119, the "activate desired
switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, are not only usable as
control" message will appear.
controls but also function as pure switches, there is a
total of 9 switches ("SW 1 … 9") available for use as
desired.
52 Physical control, switch and control switch assignments
Notice:
Rotary controls, CTRL 6 … 8, will not be recognized
until they "detent". Therefore these controls can be
turned back and forth until the correct assignment is
shown in the screen. If adjustment travel is insufﬁcient,
activate the control in the other direction.
Changing switch action
If the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite
action, put the switch or joystick in the desired OFF
position, again activate the switch assignment and
reassign the switch again so it will respond with the
desired action.
Clear switch
A switch which has been assigned as described under
point 1 can be cleared by simultaneously pressing the
cd or ef key combination brieﬂy in the right key pad
(CLEAR).
Assignment from the "external switch" list
Those menus in which the message …
Move desired switch
to ON position
(ext. switch: SET
… appears for switches designated with "SW" can be
used to assign so-called "external switches.
Do this by conﬁrming the message text with the SET
key. A new window will appear with a list of the four
control switches "C1 … C4", followed by two so-called
"FX" ﬁxed switches and the four inverted switches "C1i...
C4i".
Control/fix sw
C1 C2 C3 C4 FX
FXi C1i C2i C3i C4i
Use the arrow keys in the left or right key pad to select
the desired switch then assign it with a brief tap on the
center SET key of the right touch pad.
Notices:
• The two FX switches turn a function on "FXI" or off
"FX " permanently.
• All other switches mentioned can have multiple
assignments. Pay attention that you do not
UNINTENTIONALLY assign reciprocally conﬂicting
functions to a single switch. If necessary, note down
the given switch functions.
Application examples:
• Shut-off of an on-board glow plug heater upon
underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point
programmed for the C1 joystick. In this case the glow
plug heater switch is controlled by a transmitter mixer.
• Automatic switch on/off of the timer to measure pure
"ﬂight time" for a helicopter by way of a control switch
on the throttle limiter.
• Automatic switch off of the "AI ¼ Rud" when brake
ﬂaps are extended, for example to adapt the roll of
a model to the ground when making a landing on a
slope without inducing a change of ﬂight direction
due to inﬂuence on the rudder.
• Extending landing ﬂaps with elevator trim adjustment
during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is
moved beyond its switch point.
• Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the operating
time of electric motors.
The control switches, freely programmable in the
"Control switch" menu, can be incorporated into
switch programming, i. e. assigned to a function instead
of a "normal" switch. At those program locations
where switches can be assigned you always have the
opportunity to assign one of the control switches, C1...
C4, instead of a physical switch by selecting one of
these out of the list of "external switches".
Physical control, switch and control switch assignments
53
Digital trim
Functional description and description of C1 cut-off
54
Digital trim
1. Winged models
C1 trimming has a special cut-off trim function intended
especially for combustion motors. This cut-off trim
function is conﬁgured as follows. First put the motor into
a safe idle speed.
Now if you push C1 trim in a single motion toward its
"Motor cut-off" direction until it is in its furthest travel
position then an additional end-position marker will
remain in the display. When the motor is restarted you
can again immediately set the last idle speed with a
single movement in the direction of "more gas".
Current
trim position
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
2. Helicopter models
In addition to the "Cut-off trim" function described
below in "Winged aircraft models", C1 trimming also
has another characteristic which is made possible by
combining it with a so-called "Throttle limit" function see
page 104. As long as the throttle limit control remains in
the "left" half of its travel path, i. e. in the startup range,
C1 trimming acts on the throttle servo as idle trim and the
indication for idle trim is visible in the screen's display.
Last idle position
Current trim position
GRAUBELE
#01
Current trim position
stop
flt
Throttle limit control
0:00
0:00
Ch 1 trim lever
Stop
Flt
0:00
0:00
K78
2.4
M RX0.0V
Trim at motor OFF position
This cut-off trim will be deactivated when "None" is
entered on the "Motor at C1" line of the "Model Type"
menu, see page 82.
Notice:
Since this trim function is only effective in the "Motor
off" direction, the display illustrated above will change
appropriately if the C1 joystick's control direction for
minimum throttle is changed from "back" to "front" (on
which the above illustration is based) in the "Motor at
C1" line of the "Basic Settings" menu.
Idle direction
Digital trim with visible and audible indicators
Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. When
you give the trim lever a brief push (one "click"), the
neutral position of the associated joystick channel
changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever in
one direction, the trim value changes continuously in the
corresponding direction with increasing speed.
These changes can be made "audible" by way of different
frequency tones. This makes ﬁnding the mid-point during
ﬂight easy, without looking at the screen. When the midpoint is overrun, a brief pause will be inserted.
Current trim values are automatically stored when a
model memory change is made. Furthermore, digital trim
exercises ﬂight phase speciﬁc control within a memory
location (except for throttle/brake ﬂaps trim) – the socalled "C1" (channel 1) control function –.
This C1 trim includes yet another special function
for winged aircraft and helicopter models, it allows
the carburetor's idle setting to easily be found for a
combustion motor.
Since the trim functions described in these instructions
are only effective in the direction "Motor off", the
presentation in the screen of your transmitter may only
change with respect to individual throttle or Pitch-min
positioning of the C1 joystick in the "forward" or "back"
direction, such as throttle/pitch "left stick" or "right stick".
The illustrations in these instructions are always based
on "Throttle/Pitch right" for both types of models and
"Throttle back" for winged aircraft and helicopters.
5.2V
3:33h
K78
2.4
M RX0.0V
CTRL 6
Trim at
motor OFF position
However, in contrast to winged aircraft models, the
position indicator ( ) will be hidden and any preset idle
position will be deleted when the throttle limit control is
in the "right" half of its travel path.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
Stop
Flt
0:00
0:00
Throttle limit control
K78
M RX0.0V
2.4 CTRL 6
Notice for helicopters:
C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo, not the pitch
servo. Notice also that the helicopter throttle servo must
be connected to receiver output 6, see receiver layout
on page 59.
Your notes
55
Winged models
Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron
servos and four ﬂap servos on normal models or, for
V tail and ﬂying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/
elevator servos plus four ﬂap servos.
The majority of motorized and glider models belong to
the tail unit type "normal" and are equipped with one
servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons in addition
to a motor throttle or electronic speed controller (or for
brake ﬂaps in the case of a glider model). Beyond this,
tail unit type "2HRSv3+8" permits the connection of two
elevator servos to receiver outputs 3 and 8.
If ailerons, and conditionally the ﬂaps, are each actuated
with two separate servos then settings can be made for
differentiated control of all aileron and ﬂap pairs in the
"Wing mixers" menu, i.e. settings for downward ruder
throw independent of upward throw.
Finally, the position of ﬂaps can be controlled by a
control out of group CTRL 6 … 10. Alternatively, there
is a phase-dependent trim function available for ﬂaps,
ailerons and elevators in the "Phase trim" menu.
The "V tail unit" is to be selected from the "Model
type" menu if the model has a V tail unit instead of
a normal tail unit. This V tail unit selection provides
coupled elevator and ruder control functions for both
tail ﬂaps – each controlled by a separate servo – which
handles both elevator and ruder functionality.
For delta and ﬂying wing aircraft models, aileron and
elevator functionality is affected by way of a common
rudder ﬂap on the trailing edge of each side (right and
left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate mixer
functions for both servos.
Up to 7 ﬂight phases can be programmed into each of
the 24 model memory locations.
Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a
ﬂight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a
carburetor idle setting.
Two timers are always available for ﬂight operation. The
transmitter operating time expired since the last battery
charge is also displayed.
All transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW) can
be assigned in the "Control adjust" menu to inputs 5
… 12 with almost no restrictions.
The "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions for ailerons,
rudder and elevators are separately programmable and
each are convertible between the two variations on a
speciﬁc ﬂight-phase basis.
Airbrake-Function 1
AI
Ail e r o
ato
va
Flap
A il
v a tor
F la p E
va
Ele to
F lap
l e ro n
AI
er
Flap
Airbrake
Flap
FL
FL, FL2
Elevator
Airbrake
Elevator
FL
EL J FL
AI2
EL I FL
r Flap
right
left
Rudder/Elevator
V-Tail
right
RU I AI
EL I AI
56
Brake
Brake
FL
I I FL
FL2
left
le
Ai
on
dd
Ru
FL
FL I A
at or
E l ev
Ailero
n Rudder
er
Ele
FL
A il e ro
Fl ap
AI, AI2
Ele v
FL
Fla p
AI J
or
Brake
AI2
AI
Ai
le
ro
In addition to 8 freely allocatable linear mixers, 4
curve mixers ("Free mixers" menu) and 4 dual mixers
("Dual mixer" menu), there are also ﬂight-phase
dependent 6-point curves for control channel 1 (throttle/
brake), see "Channel 1 curve" menu).
Depending on the number of wing servos, ﬁxeddeﬁnition mix and coupling functions can be selected
from a list in the "Wing mixers" menu.
• Multi-ﬂap menu: control of ﬂaps as ailerons, the
inﬂuence aileron trim on ﬂaps controlled as ailerons,
ﬂap differentiation, ﬂap function throw magnitude for
all aileron and ﬂap pairs, ailerons controlled as ﬂaps,
elevator mixer ¼ ﬂaps
• Brake settings: butterﬂy, differential reduction,
elevator curves
• aileron ¼ rudder mixer
• ﬂaps ¼ elevator mixer
Winged models
AI
AI
Installation notices
Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the
sequence illustrated here.
Outputs which are not needed are simply left empty.
Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.
Winged aircraft with and without motor, having up to
4 aileron servos and up to 4 ﬂap servos …
… and tail plane type "normal" or "2 elevator
servos"
Free or right flap 2 or aux. function
Free or left flap 2 or aux. function
Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function
Free or right aileron 2 or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Right flap or free or aux. function
Flap or left flap
Right aileron or aux. function
Rudder
Elevator or 1st elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Airbrake or throttle servo
or speed controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
Free or left aileron 2 or aux. function
… and tail plane type "V tail unit"
Free or right flap 2 or aux. function
Free or left flap 2 or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Right flap or free or aux. function
Flap or left flap
Right aileron or aux. function
Right rudder / elevator
Left rudder / elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Airbrake or throttle servo
or speed controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
Because of orientation differences for installed servos
and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of
some servos may be initially backward. The table below
provides remedies.
Model
type
V tail
Servo actuation
direction
wrong
Rudder and
elevator reversed
Reverse the polarity of
servos 3 & 4 in the "Servo
adjustment" menu
Rudder correct,
elevators reversed
Swap the connections
for servos 3 & 4 on the
receiver
Elevators correct,
rudder reversed
Reverse the polarity of
servos 3 & 4 in the "Servo
adjustment" menu AND
on the receiver
Elevator and
aileron reversed
Reverse the polarity of
servos 2 & 3 in the "Servo
adjustment" menu
Elevator correct,
aileron reversed
Reverse the polarity of
servos 2 & 3 in the "Servo
adjustment" menu AND
on the receiver
Aileron correct,
elevators reversed
Swap servos 2 & 3 at the
receiver
Free or aux. function
Delta/ﬂying wing aircraft models with and without
motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos and
up to 2 ﬂap/elevator servos
Free or aux. function or right flap 2 / elevat
Free or aux. function or left flap 2 / elevato
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Free or right flap / elevator
Free or left flap / elevator
Free or aux. function
Free or rudder
Right elevon
Right elevon
Airbrake or throttle servo
or speed controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
Delta,
ﬂying
wing
Remedy
All "program descriptions" for menus relevant to a
winged aircraft model are marked with a winged aircraft
symbol …
Free or aux. function
… so only these menus need to be dealt with to program
a winged aircraft model.
Winged models
57
Helicopter models
The advanced developments incorporated into the
transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models
and their components like gyros, speed regulators, rotor
blades, etc. make it possible to master a helicopter even
in 3D acrobatic ﬂight. On the other hand, a beginner
needs only a few settings to get started with hovered
ﬂight training and then can take advantage of mc-32
HoTT features, step-by-step, with increasing expertise.
The mc-32 HoTT program can operate all
conventional helicopters having 1 … 4 servos for pitch
control.
Six ﬂight phases plus autorotation are available within
a model memory, see menus "Control adjust", "Phase
settings" and "Phase assignment".
As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the basic
screen's standard timers there are additional timers
as well as a lap counter with ﬂight-phase-dependent
stopwatch functionality which are available for selection
(menus "Timers (general)" and "Fl. phase timers").
Except for pitch/throttle trimming, digital trimming can be
stored as "global" for all ﬂight phases or as "ﬂight phase
speciﬁc". C1 trim permits easy location of an idle setting.
The control assignments of inputs 5... 12 can be made
common to every ﬂight phase or separate ("Control
adjust" menu).
A ﬂight phase copy function is helpful during ﬂight trials
("Copy / Erase" menu).
"Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions can be coupled
for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable in two
variations in every ﬂight phase.
There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There are
also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and these
can also be switched on or off, depending on the ﬂight
phase, in the "Mix active/Phase" menu. Beyond this,
58
Helicopter models
there are also 4 dual mixers available.
Available in the "Helicopter mixer" menu are ﬂightphase-dependent 6-point curves for pitch, throttle and
tail rotor mixer non-linear characteristics as well as two
independent swashplate mixers each for roll and nick.
Independent of this, the control curve of the channel
1 joystick can be deﬁned with up to 6 points in every
ﬂight phase. The beginner will initially only adapt the
hover ﬂight point to the control middle for the non-linear
characteristics.
Pre-programmed mixers in the "Helicopter mixer"
menu:
1. Pitch curve (6-point curve)
2. Channel 1 ¼ Throttle (6-point curve)
3. Channel 1 ¼ Tail rotor (6-point curve)
4. Tail rotor ¼ Throttle
5. Roll ¼ Throttle
6. Roll ¼ Tail rotor
Collective
Pitch Curve
7. Nick ¼ Throttle
8. Nick ¼ Tail rotor
9. Gyro suppress
10.Swash rotation
11.Swash limiter
The "Throttle limit" function (input 12 in the "Control
adjust" menu) allows the motor to be started in any
ﬂight phase. Control 6 – the proportional rotation control,
CTRL 6 top left – is assigned to input 12 by default. This
"throttle limiter" establishes – depending on its given
position – the maximum possible carburetor position.
This makes it possible for the motor to be controlled in
the idle range, if necessary even by the proportional
regulator. The throttle curves become effective only
when the proportional regulator is pushed toward the full
throttle direction.
Channel
Tail Rotor
Swashplate
Rotation
Roll Throttle
Pitch-Axis Throttle
Channel 1 Throttle
Tail Rotor
T hrottle
Roll Tail Rotor
Pitch-Axis Tail Rotor
Channel 1 Tail Rotor
Notice for those transitioning from older Graupner
systems:
In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo
connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6
(throttle servo) have exchanged places. Servos must
be connected to receiver outputs as illustrated at the
right in the bottom ﬁgure. Outputs which are not used
are simply left empty. More details about respective
swashplate types can be found on page 86 in the
"Basic settings" menu.
Installation notices
Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the
sequence illustrated here.
Outputs which are not used are simply left empty.
Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.
Notice:
A speed regulator is also to be connected to receiver
output "6" in order to take full advantage of the throttle
limiter's convenience and safety features, see text
beginning on page 104. See page 169 about this.
Receiver layout for helicopter models …
… with 1 to 3 swashplate servos
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Free or speed governor or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
All menus relevant to helicopter models are marked
in the "program descriptions" section with a helicopter
symbol …
… so only these menus need to be dealt with to program
a helicopter model.
Gyro gain
Throttle servo or speed controller
Free or aux. function
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis 1 servo
Roll 1 servo
Collective pitch or roll 2 or
Pitch-axis 2 servo
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
… with 4 swashplate servos
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Free or speed governor or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Gyro gain
Throttle servo or speed controller
Pitch-axis 2 servo
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis 1 servo
Roll 1 servo
Roll 2 servo
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
Helicopter models
59
Detail program description
Loading a new memory location
Anyone who has worked through to this part of
the manual has certainly already tried out a bit of
programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of
every menu should not be left out.
This section begins with the loading of a "free" memory
location, a procedure which would be performed if a new
model was being "programmed".
GRAUBELE
#01
5.9V
0:00h
Stop
Flt
K78
0:00
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
From the base screen, a jump to the "Multi-function list"
is made by tapping on the center SET button of the right
touch pad. (The center ESC button of the left touch pad
will cause a jump back to the base screen.) By default,
when the multi-function list is called for the ﬁrst time
after switching on the transmitter, the "Model select"
menu item will be active and displayed in reverse video.
If this is not the case, use the arrow keys (cd, ef) of
the left or right touch pad to select the "Model select"
menu item …
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress menus
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
… then (again) tap the center SET button of the right
key pad.
60
01
02
03
04
05
06
R12
In the transmitter's delivered state, the ﬁrst model
memory is initialized to the "winged aircraft" model
type and the receiver in the delivery is bound to this
model memory location, recognizable by the displayed
receiver code at the right end of the line. In the above
example, R12 is a code for the GR-24 receiver included
in the set. In contrast, a "non-bound" model memory
would appear with the code placeholder "---".
The remaining memory locations, marked
"ÄÄÄfreeÄÄÄ", are not occupied and thus also
"non-bound". If you wish to program a winged aircraft
model then, after leaving the "Model select" menu by
tapping on the center ESC button of the left touch pad,
programming of the model can begin right away … or
now use the c or d keys of the left or right touch pad
to select one of the free memory locations …
01
02
03
04
05
06
R12
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
… and then tap on the center SET key of the right touch
pad to conﬁrm the choice.
Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic model
type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter model".
Detail program description - Loading a new memory location
Select model type
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
Use the e or f of the left or right key pad to select
the basic model type then tap the center SET button
in the right key pad. This initializes the selected model
memory with the selected model type and the display
will return to the base screen. The memory location is
now accordingly occupied.
On the other hand, if you wish to begin with a helicopter
then use the c or d keys of the left or right key pad to
select a memory location labeled "ÄÄÄfreeÄÄÄ" and
tap brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right key pad
to conﬁrm your choice. You will be now be prompted to
select the basic model type, i.e. either "winged model" or
"helicopter model". Select the appropriate symbol with
the e or f keys of the left or right touch pad then tap
brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch pad to
conﬁrm your choice. This initializes the selected model
memory with the selected model type and you can now
program your model into this model memory.
Changing over to another model type is still possible if
you ﬁrst erase this memory location ("Copy / Erase"
menu, page 64).
Notice:
• If, from the base screen, the currently active model
memory is to be erased then immediately after the
erase action one of the two model types, "Winged"
or "Heli" must be deﬁned. You cannot avoid this
selection even if you switch the transmitter off. When
the transmitter is switched on again the undesired
occupation of the that model memory will have to be
erased from another memory location.
In contrast, if a non-active memory location is erased,
it will subsequently be marked as "999free999" in
the "Model select" menu.
• After the selected model memory is initialized with
the desired model type, the display will switch to the
base screen of the freshly occupied model memory.
At this time the warning …
notice that no failsafe settings have yet been made.
More about this can be found on page 192.
• If the screen should display the warning …
Throttle
too
high !
… then move the throttle joystick, or the limiter for
a helicopter, into its idle position; by default this is
rotary control CTRL 6.
The appearance of this warning also depends on
the "Motor at C1" or "Pitch min" in the "Model type"
menu, refer to page 80 or "Helicopter type" page 84
for the selected setting. For winged aircraft models,
select "None" to deactivate this message if you have
no motor to enter.
BIND N/A
OK
… will appear in the screen for a few seconds as
notiﬁcation that a "bond" to a receiver does not exist.
With a brief tap on the center SET button in the right
touch pad you can jump directly to the appropriate
option.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
Stick mode
RF BIND
n/a
n/a
OFF
RF transmit
BD1 BD2
Further details about binding a receiver can be found
on page 69 or 75.
• After the aforementioned "BIND. N/A" warning
message closes automatically, the warning …
Fail Safe
setup
t.b.d.
… will appear (also for just a few seconds) to serve
• If the transmitter already has occupied model
memories then submenus of the "Copy / Erase"
menu will display a pictogram of the selected model
type at the respective memory location followed by a
blank line or the model name which was entered in
the "Basic settings " menu (see page 68 or 74) and
any bond that may exist between a receiver and this
model memory.
• If battery voltage is too low, you cannot switch
models for safety reasons. A corresponding message
will appear in the display:
not possible now
voltage too low
As a basic principle, there are four different ways to
assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator,
rudder and throttle or brake ﬂaps for winged models
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch
for helicopter models, to the two joysticks. Just which
of these methods is used depends on the preferences
of the individual model pilot. This function is set for the
currently active model memory in the "Stick mode" line
of the "Basic settings, model" menu, page 68 or 74.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind
n/a
R12
Rcv Ch Map
n/a
SEL
A default value for this setting can be made for future
models in the generalized "Basic Settings" menu, page
216.
BASIC SETTINGS
Own
Stick mode
PPM10
DSC Output
Pitch min
back
SEL
It should be noted here once again that, in the interest
of greatest ﬂexibility in combination with the prevention
of unintentional operating errors, no controls are
preassigned to control channels 5 … 12 by default.
This means that, in the system's delivered state, only
servos attached to receiver outputs 1 … 4 can be
moved by the two joysticks and that any servos
attached to receiver connectors 5 … 12 (max)
will remain in their middle positions. When a new
helicopter model is initialized, servo 6 may perform a
movement – depending on the throttle limiter's position,
Detail program description - Loading a new memory location
61
CTRL 6 – . This condition changes for both model types
only after the respective assignments have been made
in the "Control adjust" menu.
On the other hand, if a newly initialized model memory
is to be put into operation then it MUST ﬁrst be
appropriately "connected" with one or more receivers
before the servos attached to the receiver/s can be
operated. More about this can be found in the section
"Binding" on page 69 or 75.
A fundamental description of programming steps for a
winged aircraft model can be found in the programming
examples section beginning on 226, or for helicopter
models beginning on page 270.
The menu descriptions below are arranged in the
sequence individual menus are listed in the multifunction list.
62
Detail program description - Loading a new memory location
Model select
Call up model 1 … 24
The basic operation of the transmitters keys was
explained on pages 24 and 25 and, on the previous
double-page, explanations were provided for navigating
to the multifunction list and about how to occupy a new
model memory. At this point we now wish to begin with
the "normal" description of individual menu items in the
sequence they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore
we will begin with the menu …
Model select
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress menus
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
As many as 24 complete model settings, including
digital trim values for trim levers, can be stored.
Trimming is stored automatically such that a switchover
from one model to another does not cause a loss of
current trim settings. To the right of the model number,
each occupied model memory line in this display shows
a pictograph of the model type as well as the model's
name entered for the model in its "Basic settings,
model" menu, page 68 or 74 and the code, if present,
for the receiver "bound" to the model memory location.
Select the "Model select" menu with the arrow keys of
the left or right touch pad then press brieﬂy on the SET
button in the right touch pad.
01
02
03
04
05
06
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
STARLET
BELL47G
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
R12
R12
R12
–––
not possible now
voltage too low
Now use the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch
pad to select the desired model memory from the list
and activate the selection by pressing the SET button.
Pressing the ESC button will cause a return to the
previous menu page without activating a model change.
Notice:
• If a model change causes a "Throttle too high"
warning to appear, the throttle/pitch joystick (C1) or
the throttle limiter is too far in the full throttle direction.
• If a model change causes the message …
BIND N/A
OK
… to appear then binding settings should be checked.
• If a model change causes the message …
Fail Safe
setup
t.b.d.
… to appear then respective failsafe settings should
be checked.
• If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover
cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An
appropriate message will appear in the screen.
Detail program description - Model select
63
Copy / Erase
Erase or copy model ¼ model, copy from or to SD card, copy ﬂight phases
Select the "Copy / Erase" menu with thecdarrow
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂy press the
STARLET
Mod.name
SET button.
Stick mode
n/a
n/a
RF BIND
Model select
OFF
RF transmit
Copy / Erase
SEL
Suppress menus
Suppress models
… to appear. A NO response will cause the process to be
Base setup model
canceled
and a return to the previous screen. Selecting
Model type
the YES response with theXarrow keys of the left or
right touch pad followed by conﬁrmation of the selection
Erase model
by brieﬂy pressing the SET button will erase the selected
model
memory.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Attention:
Suppress models
This erase process cannot be undone. All data in the
Base setup model
selected model memory will be erased completely.
Model type
Suppress:
TOG
Notice:
If the currently active model memory is to be erased,
Select the "Erase model" sub-menu with the cd arrow
a model type "Winged" or "Heli" must be deﬁned
keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂy press the
immediately after the erase process. On the other hand,
SET button.
if an inactive memory location is to be erased then it
Use the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
will subsequently appear in the model select screen as
select the model to be erased …
"ÄÄÄfreeÄÄÄ".
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Suppress:
TOG
… now the next time the SET button is pressed, it will
prompt the conﬁrmation request …
64
Detail program description - Copy / Erase
Copy model ¼ model
Select the "Copy model ¼ model" sub-menu with the
cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press
the SET button.
0s
0:00
Timer1
0s
Timer2
0:00
0s
Timer3
0:00
Lap time/tim tab
Lap Display
SEL SEL
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
Select the model to be copied with the cd arrow keys
of the left or right touch pad …
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
BIND. 1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… whereby a second activation of the SET button in the
right touch pad will allow the "Copy to model" window
for the destination memory to be selected with the
cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and then
conﬁrmed with yet another press of the SET button or
canceled with the ESC button. A memory location which
is already occupied can be overwritten.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
GRAUBELE
Mod.name
Stick mode
bind
RF BIND
n/a
R12
Rcv Ch Map
n/a
BD1 BD2
Once selection of the model memory has been
conﬁrmed by pressing the SET button, a conﬁrmation
request will appear.
modell really
01
ULTIMATE
¿¿¿ frei ¿¿¿
03
to be copied?
NO
YES
A NO response will cancel the process and return the
screen to the originating screen. If the f YES response
is selected and conﬁrmed by activating the SET button
then the selected source model will be copied into the
selected model memory destination.
Notice:
In addition to model data, binding data is also copied by
this process. This means that a receiver system which
was/is bound to the original model memory can also be
operated by its copy without establishing the bond again.
Export to SD
Select the "Export to SD" sub-menu with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad and press the SET
button.
Erase model
Copy model–>model
Expor t to SD
Impor t from SD
Copy flight phase
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
Notice:
• Should the notice …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
•
Select the model to be exported with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad.
expor t to SD-CARD:
R12
01
GRAUBELE
R12
ULTIMATE
02
R12
03
STARLET
04
–––
BELL47G
¿¿frei ¿¿
05
•
After conﬁrming the selected model memory by pressing
the SET button, a conﬁrmation request will appear.
•
modell
01
ULTIMATE
SD-Kar te
expor t ?
NO
YES
A NO response will cancel the process and return the
screen to the originating screen. However, if the f YES
response is selected then conﬁrmed by pressing the SET
button, the selected model will be copied to the SD card.
•
… appear instead of a screen for model selection,
there is no SD card in the transmitter's card slot, see
page 22.
In addition to model data, binding data is also copied
by this process. This means that a receiver system
which was/is bound to the original model memory
can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its
copy without establishing the bond again.
An exported winged aircraft model will be stored
on the memory card in the \\Models\mc-32 folder
with a ﬁlename format of "aModellname.mdl"
and a helicopter model with a ﬁlename format
of "hModellname.mdl". On the other hand, if a
"nameless" model is exported, its data will be stored
on the memory card under "ahNoName.mdl" or
"hNoName.mdl", as appropriate.
Some special characters that can be used in model
names are subject to speciﬁc restrictions associated
with the FAT or FAT32 ﬁle system used by the
memory cards and these special characters will be
replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).
A model ﬁle already on the memory having the same
name as the ﬁle to be copied will be overwritten
without warning.
Detail program description - Copy / Erase
65
Import from SD
Select the "Import from SD" sub-menu with the
cdarrow keys of the left or right touch pad and press
the SET button.
Erase model
Copy model–>model
Expor t to SD
Impor t from SD
Copy flight phase
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
impor t to model:
01
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
02
03
STARLET
04
BELL47G
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
05
by its copy without establishing the bond again.
R12
R12
R12
–––
After conﬁrming the selected model memory by pressing
the SET button, a conﬁrmation request will appear.
modell
Select the model to be imported from the SD memory
card with the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch
pad.
impor t from SD-CARD:
11/03/10
ALPINA
11/03/11
EXTRA
11/03/11
COBRA
11/03/12
BELL47G
¿¿frei ¿¿
05
Notice:
The export date posted at the right end of each model
name line is represented in the format "year/month/day".
After again pressing the SET button in the right touch
pad, the "import to model" window will appear Now
the destination memory location can be selected with
the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and
conﬁrmed by pressing the SET button or the process
can be canceled with the ESC button. A memory
location which is already occupied can be overwritten.
66
Detail program description - Copy / Erase
01
03
impor t ?
NO
Copy from phase
Select the "Copy from phase" sub-menu with the cd
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press the
SET button.
Erase model
Copy model–>model
Expor t to SD
Impor t from SD
Copy flight phase
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
ULTIMATE
¿¿¿free ¿¿¿
YES
A NO response will cancel the process and return the
screen to the originating screen. However, if the f YES
response is selected and conﬁrmed by pressing the SET
button then the selected source model will be imported
into the selected destination model memory.
Notice:
• If the message …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
… appears instead of a screen for model selection,
there is no SD card in the transmitter's card slot, see
page 22.
• In addition to model data, binding data is also
imported by this process. This means that a receiver
system which was/is bound to the original model
memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter
In the "Copy from phase" sub-menu …
Copy from phase:
=>
=>
… the ﬂight phase to be copied (1 … 7 for winged
aircraft models or 1 … 6 for helicopter models) is
selected with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad
then conﬁrmed by brieﬂy pressing the SET button in the
right touch pad. The next window to appear will be the
"Copy to phase" window. In that window the destination
is to be selected and then also conﬁrmed. As described
above, another conﬁrmation request will be issued.
Suppress menus
Hide menus in the multifunction
Select the "Suppress menus" menu with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂy press the
SET button.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress menus
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
In the menu which then appears, menu items which
are no longer needed or those which should not
be changed, can be blocked from appearing in th
multifunction list.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Suppress:
TOG
This reduces the appearance of the multi-function list
considerably, in some cases to only a few menus,
thus substantially improving the clarity of the function
selection list. Functions are not deactivated because
they are hidden. They will simply no longer appear in the
list. This also blocks direct access to these functions.
The function to be hidden or displayed is to be selected
with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then
its (hide/display) status switched-over by means of the
center SET button in the right touch pad.
Suppress models
Hiding model memory locations
Select the "Suppress models" menu with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂy press the
SET button.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Suppress:
TOG
Tip:
If you wish to forgo access-blockage to the multifunction list altogether, hide the "Code lock" menu
in the multi-function list by way of this menu as a
precautionary measure.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress menus
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Model memories which are rarely needed or to which
access is to be blocked for other reasons can be hidden
from the model selection list. This also clariﬁes the
overview layout for model selection.
A model to be hidden/displayed is selected with the
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then its status is
switched-over by means of the center SET button in the
right touch pad.
01
02
03
04
05
E12
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
E12
E12
STARLET
–––
BELL47G
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
Suppress:
TOG
A model memory which is "stricken through" will no
longer appear in the "Model select" menu.
Detail program description - Suppress menus and models
67
Base setup model
Model-speciﬁc base settings for winged aircraft models
Before programming speciﬁc parameters, there are
Select the desired characters with the arrow keys of the
some basic settings to be made which effect the
left touch pad. Move to select the next character position
currently active model memory.
by pressing the f arrow key of the right touch pad or its
center SET button. Simultaneously pressing the cd or
Select the "Base setup model" menu with the arrow
ef of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space
keys of the left or right touch pad then press the center
character at the position.
SET button in the right touch pad.
Positioning to any character position within the entry
Suppress models
ﬁeld can be done with the ef keys of the right touch
Base setup model
pad.
Model type
A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished
Ser vo adjustment
by
pressing the center ESC button in the left touch pad.
Stick mode
After
entering the model name it will appear in the base
Control adjust
screen of the "Model select" menu and in the sub-menu
for the "Copy /Erase" menu item.
Model name
Motor full throttle
Aileron left
Aileron left
Rudder left
Motor idle
Aileron left
"MODE 4" (throttle left)
Motor full throttle
Stick forward
Motor idle
Rudder right
Stick back
Stick back
Rudder left
Aileron left
Rudder left
Rudder left
Motor idle
"MODE 3" (throttle right)
Stick forward
Aileron right
Motor idle
Stick forward
Aileron right
Detail program description - Base setup model
Motor full throttle
Rudder right
68
Stick back
Rudder right
Mod Name GRAUB
"MODE 2" (throttle left)
Motor full throttle
Aileron right
!"#$%&’() +,–./012
?@ABCDE
3456789:;
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk
"MODE 1" (throttle left)
Stick forward
Aileron right
Change to the next screen page by pressing the SET
button brieﬂy. This will open a screen of characters for
entry of the model's name. A maximum of 9 characters
can be used to specify a model name.
Stick mode
Rudder right
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
Stick mode
n/a
RF BIND
n/a
RF transmit
OFF
BD1 BD2
Stick back
There are four fundamental options for assigning the
four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder and
throttle/brake ﬂap) for a winged aircraft model to the two
joysticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends
on the individual preferences of the individual model
pilot.
Select the "Stick mode" line with the cd arrow keys
of the left or right touch pad. The option ﬁeld will be
enclosed in a frame.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
GRAUBELE
Mod.name
Stick mode
n/a
RF BIND
n/a
OFF
RF transmit
SEL
Press the SET button. The currently displayed stick
mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the
arrow keys of the right touch pad to select from among
options 1 through 4.
Pressing simultaneously on the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will return the option selection
back to stick mode "1".
Pressing the SET button again will deactivate option
selection so that you can change to another line.
Bound receiver
Graupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" to
communicate exclusively with one particular model
(memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This
procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done
once for every new receiver/model memory location
combination (and can be repeated anytime).
Important notice:
During the binding procedure be sure the
transmitter's antenna is always far enough away
from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side,
keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise you
run the risk of a faulty connection to the return
channel and malfunctions will result.
"Binding" multiple receivers per model
Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired,
whereby respective mc-32 HoTT programs offer the
potential for managing a maximum of two receivers
directly and for dividing up the 12 control channels (max)
available on these two receivers as desired under menu
control. Refer to additional details further down in this
section. Binding two receivers is begun by ﬁrst binding
the individual receivers as described below.
In subsequent operation of the model only one of
these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to
the transmitter; the one which was activated in
the "Tel. RCV" line of the "Telemetry" menu. For
example:
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
BIND. 1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model
should therefore be connected to this receiver because
the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from
the return channel of the receiver activated on this line.
The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel
but are fully independent in slave mode.
"RF bind" of transmitter and receiver
Use the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad
to move to the screen's "RF bind" line" then select the
desired binding channel. For an example like that shown
in the figure below, choose "BD2" because the binding
channel designated as "BD1" in the screen's bottom line
is already used by default for the receiver which was
delivered with the set.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
GRAUBELE
Mod.name
Stick mode
bind
RF BIND
n/a
R12
Rcv Ch Map
n/a
BD1 BD2
If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red
LED on the receiver will blink.
Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while
the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then
after about another 3 seconds begins to blink red/green.
You can now release the SET button As long as this
LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode.
Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called
"receiver binding" process for the receiver to the
currently active model memory by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button of the right touch pad. At this time the
screen's display will begin to indicate the duration of the
"bond".
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
GRAUBELE
Mod.name
Stick mode
Finding ...bind
RF BIND
n/a
R12
Rcv Ch Map
n/a
BD1 BD2
If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within
about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green,
the binding process has been successfully completed.
Your model-memory to receiver combination is now
operationally ready. At this time the screen will now
display "bind" (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached).
For example:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
GRAUBELE
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind bind
Rcv Ch Map
R12 R08
BD1 BD2
On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver
blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding
process has failed. In this case the screen will continue
to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try
changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire
procedure.
Binding other receivers
The binding channel you have chosen is already bound
(as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding
channel. After initiating the RF bind process, instead
of displaying "BINDING", the message shown below
appears.
Detail program description - Base setup model
69
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name RF GRAUBELE
Stick mode
must be
RF BIND OFF bind bind
Rcv Ch Map
OK R12 R08
BD1 BD2
Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the
RF module as described on the page in section "RF
module". Afterward, return again to the "RF BIND" line
and restart the process to dissolve bond as described
on the previous page.
Alternatively you can brieﬂy switch off the transmitter
then, after switching it back on again, respond to the
message window that appears …
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
… with "OFF" …
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
… then conﬁrm the selection by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad. From the base
screen jump again into the "RF BIND" line of the "Basic
settings, model" menu and restart the binding process.
Dissolving a bond
Proceed as described above to initiate the binding
process but WITHOUT ﬁrst putting a receiver in binding
readiness.
Receiver change map
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
GRAUBELE
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind bind
Rcv Ch Map
R12 R08
BD1 BD2
As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding
receivers" section, the mc-32 HoTT offers both the
opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control
channels within a receiver and the opportunity to
distribute the transmitter's 12 control channels across
two receivers. This redistribution is subsequently
referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel
correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with
the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂy
press the center SET button in the right touch pad.
Channel mapping within a receiver
Analogous to the channel correlation function in the
"Telemetry" menu on page 212, described as "Channel
Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to
freely distribute the 12 control channels (inputs) to
the outputs (servo connections) of the bound receiver
speciﬁed by column BD1.
RECEIVER CH – BIND1
Out Ch 1
In Ch 1
Out Ch 2
In Ch 2
Out Ch 3
In Ch 3
In Ch 4
Out Ch 4
After selection of the desired output with the arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding
70
Detail program description - Base setup model
input ﬁeld will be framed. Press brieﬂy on the center
SET button in the right touch pad. The current setting is
displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input
channel (= transmitter output, see page 206) with the
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.
Notice:
The number of lines available in the list (outputs)
corresponds to the maximum number of servos which
can be attached to the given receiver.
BUT CAUTION: If, for example, you have already
speciﬁed "2AIL" in the "Aile/ﬂaps" line of the "Model
type" menu then the transmitter will have allocated
control function 2 (ailerons) for left and right ailerons to
control channels 2 & 5. The corresponding inputs (to the
receiver) in this case would be channels 2 & 5 and these
should be assigned accordingly, refer to the example
below.
Examples:
• You would like to control each aileron of a large
model with two or more servos.
Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo
connections) to one and the same input (control
channel). In the aforementioned case, to the
giveninput of one of the two default aileron control
channels (2 & 5) appropriate for the left or right wing.
• You would like to control the rudder of a large model
with two or more servos.
Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo
connections) to one and the same input (control
channel). In this case, the default rudder channel (4),
see ﬁgure bottom right.
Important notice:
By using the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's "Tx. output
swap " option the transmitter's 12 control functions
can be freely swapped in a similar manner or multiple
outputs can be assigned to the same control function.
To avoid confusion, it is strongly recommended that only
one of these two options is used.
Channel assignment on the second receiver
As already mentioned, the "Receiver channel mapping"
option can be used to freely distribute the mc-32
HoTT transmitter's 12 control channels across two
receivers, whereby the numbering sequence of outputs
(servo connections) begun in the "BD1" column for
bound "receiver 1" will be continued. For example, if
"receiver 1" has enough connectors for 12 servos then
the numbering of outputs in the "BD2" column (for the
second bound receiver) will begin with 13.
RECEIVER CH – BIND2
Out Ch13
In Ch12
Out Ch14
In Ch12
Out Ch15
In Ch12
In Ch12
Out Ch16
After selection of the desired output with the arrow
keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding
input ﬁeld will be framed. Press the center SET button
in the right touch pad The current setting is displayed
in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel
with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example,
suitable to the above rudder example.
RECEIVER CH – BIND2
Out Ch13
Input 4
Out Ch14
Input 4
Out Ch15
Input 4
Out Ch16
Input 4
Notice:
The number of lines available (outputs) corresponds to
the maximum number of servos which can be connected
to receiver 2 and their numbering is dependent on the
maximum number of servos which can be connected to
receiver 1.
RF transmit
This menu line provides an option for manually
switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off
to speciﬁc models while the transmitter is in operation.
For example, to save power while a model is being
programmed. If this line option was set to OFF, it
will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the
transmitter is switched on.
If necessary, use the cd arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad to reach the "RF transmit" line then activate
the option with by brieﬂy pressing the center SET button
in the right touch pad
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind bind
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
OFF
RF transmit
SEL
between OFF and ON. Again pressing the center SET
button in the right touch pad will complete the entry.
Range test
The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an
extent that a function test can be carried out even within
a distance of up to about 50 m.
Perform the range test on the Graupner HoTT system
according to the following instructions. If necessary,
have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.
1. Preferably the receiver already bound to the
transmitter should be installed into the model in its
intended position.
2. Switch remote control on and wait for the receiver's
green LED to light up. Now servo movements can be
observed.
3. Place the model on a level surface (pavement,
low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver
antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It
may be necessary to put something under the model
to raise it up enough for this.
4. Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some distance
from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at
the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's
end so that it is oriented vertically during the test.
5. If necessary, use the cd arrow keys of the left or
right touch pad to reach the "RF Range Test" line in
the menu then start range test mode by pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad.
The right arrow keys can now be used to choose
Detail program description - Base setup model
71
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
RF BIND
bind bind
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
RF transmit
OFF
RF Range Test
99sec
SEL
When the range test is activated, the transmitter's
output power will be signiﬁcantly reduced and the
blue LED on the antenna's socket will begin to
blink. At the same time, the timer display in the
transmitter's screen will start counting down and
every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.
GRAUBELE
#01
TEST 76s
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«nor mal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
9.
Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a
three-frequency tone will sound once every second.
After expiration of the range test's 99th second the
transmitter will again be switched to full output power
and the blue LED will again illuminate constantly.
Move away from the model while manipulating
the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an
interruption anytime while still within a distance of
about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.
If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary
to switch it on to further check noise immunity.
Continue moving away from the model until perfect
control is no longer possible.
Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test
72
Detail program description - Base setup model
6.
7.
8.
period with the still-operationally-ready model to
expire. After the range test is ended it should again
respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100
% the case, do not use the system. Contact your
area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner.
10.Perform the range test before each ﬂight and, in
doing so, simulate all servo movements which also
take place during ﬂight. The range must always be
at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model
operation.
Attention:
Never start the range test on the transmitter during
normal operation of the model.
DSC output
If necessary, use the cd arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad to reach the "DSC output" line of the menu
then activate this menu item by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
RF transmit
OFF
99sec
RF Range Test
DSC output
PPM10
SEL
Now you can use the right arrow keys to choose
between three types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM18"
and "PPM24". Pressing the center SET button in the
right touch pad again will complete the entry.
This choice primarily inﬂuences the maximum number
of control channels which can be attached to the DSC
(direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to
a ﬂight simulator or teacher/pupil system. This maximum
is control channels 1 ... 5 if "PPM10" is selected, control
channels 1 ... 9 for "PPM18" and control channels 1 ...
12 for "PPM24".
Cut-off
Depending on the "idle forward or back" choice made
in the "Motor at C1" line of the "Model type" menu, this
motor "cut off" option can be coupled to a switch for
throttling down a speed controller or to move a servo on
the carburetor of a motor to the OFF (or idle) position.
The motor OFF position (or idle setting) will then
be preset by the left column directly over the "SEL"
ﬁeld. The appropriate value for this entry ﬁeld is to be
established through trial and error
A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on
this preset position when a certain servo position or
threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is
done by setting the desired servo position (threshold
value) into the middle column, directly over the "STO"
ﬁeld then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch
function in the right column.
• If the percentage value speciﬁed for the middle
column is greater than the current servo position, i. e.
the current servo position lies below the threshold,
the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put
into its ON position.
• If the percentage value speciﬁed for the middle
column is less than the current servo position, i. e.
the current servo position is above the threshold, the
speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or
close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent
dictated by the value in the left column as soon as
the servo's position once underrunsthe threshold
(max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its
ON position.
The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in
this cut-off position only until the selected switch is
again changed over followed by a one-time throttle
servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset
threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control.
The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for
the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of
+150 % servo position setting in the middle column.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
RF transmit
OFF
RF Range Test
99sec
DSC Output
PPM10
cut off –100% +150% –––
SEL STO
Programming
To change the preset "cut-off" position of the throttle
servo, press the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now use the arrow keys of the left or right touch
pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off". If a
combustion motor is involved, be sure the throttle servo
does not perform mechanical runout, e. g. -125 %.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
OFF
RF transmit
RF Range Test
99sec
DSC output
PPM10
cut off –125% +150% –––
SEL STO
The – upper – preset value in the middle column
ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the
maximum possible positioning range of the servo or
speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in
the right column.
However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by which
an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed
controller with closed switch to switch into the cut-off
position, reduce the preset servo travel from +150 %
by placing the throttle servo or speed controller into
the desired position with the throttle/brake joystick then
press the center SET button in the right touch pad.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
OFF
RF transmit
99sec
RF Range Test
DSC output
PPM10
cut off –125% +100% –––
SEL STO
Finally, use the column at the right to specify a
switch with which you can cut off the motor directly
(emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
RF transmit
OFF
RF Range Test
99sec
DSC output
PPM10
cut off –125% +100% 8
SEL STO
Notices:
• Be sure the throttle servo does not run out
mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.
• A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily
increasing the travel for servo 1 in the "Servo
adjustment" menu to over 100 % then, after storing
the threshold, change servo travel back to the
original value.
Detail program description - Base setup model
73
Base setup model
"MODE 2" (throttle left)
Motor/Pitch
Nick
Roll
Tail
Roll
Motor/Pitch
Tail
Roll
Motor/Pitch
Motor/Pitch
Roll
"MODE 4" (throttle left)
Tail
Nick
Nick
Motor/Pitch
"MODE 3" (throttle right)
Nick
Roll
Motor/Pitch
Nick
Tail
Roll
Nick
Motor/Pitch
Tail
Motor/Pitch
Nick
Basically there are four different ways to assign the
four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor and
throttle/pitch to the two joysticks. Just which of these
is used depends on the preferences of the individual
model pilot.
Use the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad
Mod Name STARL
to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁeld will be
framed.
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
!"#$%&’() +,–./012
?@ABCDE
3456789:;
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk
74
TS-Nick
Roll
Change to the next screen page by brieﬂy pressing
the SET button in the right touch pad. This will open
a screen of characters for entry of the model's name.
A maximum of 9 characters can be used to specify a
model name.
"MODE 1" (throttle left)
Tail
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
Stick mode
n/a
RF BIND
n/a
RF transmit
OFF
BD1 BD2
Stick mode
Tail
Model name
Tail
Suppress models
Base setup model
Helicopter type
Ser vo adjustment
Stick mode.
Control adjust
Select the desired characters with the arrow keys of the
left touch pad. Move to select the next character position
by pressing the f arrow key of the right touch pad or its
center SET button Simultaneously pressing on the cd
or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a
space character at the position.
Positioning to any character position within the entry ﬁeld
can be done with the ef keys of the right touch pad.
A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished
by pressing the center ESC button in the left touch pad.
A model name entered in this manner will appear in the
base screen of the "Model select" menu and in the submenus of the "Copy / Erase" menu item.
Roll
Model-speciﬁc base settings for helicopter models
Before programming speciﬁc parameters, there are
some basic settings to be made which effect the
currently active model memory. Select the "Base setup
model " menu with the arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad then press the center SET button in the right
touch pad.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
STARLET
Mod.name
Stick mode
n/a
n/a
RF BIND
OFF
RF transmit
SEL
Press the SET button. The currently displayed stick
mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the
arrow keys of the right touch pad to select from among
options 1 through 4.
Pressing simultaneously on the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will return the option selection
back to stick mode "1".
Pressing the SET button again will deactivate option
selection so that you can change to another line.
Bound receiver
Graupner-HoTT receivers must be "instructed " to
communicate exclusively with one particular model
(memory) in a Graupner-HoTT transmitter. This
procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done
once for every new receiver/model memory location
combination (and can be repeated anytime).
Important notice:
During the binding procedure be sure the
transmitter's antenna is always far enough away
from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side,
keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise you
run the risk of a faulty connection to the return
channel and malfunctions will result.
"Binding" multiple receivers per model
Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired,
whereby respective mc-32 HoTT programs offer the
potential for managing a maximum of two receivers
directly and for dividing up the 12 control channels (max)
available on these two receivers as desired under menu
control. Refer to additional details further down in this
section. Binding two receivers is begun by ﬁrst binding
the individual receivers as described below.
In subsequent operation of the model only one of
these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to
the transmitter; the one which was activated in
the "Tel. RCV" line of the "Telemetry" menu. For
example:
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
BIND. 1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model
should therefore be connected to this receiver because
the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from
the return channel of the receiver activated on this line.
The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel
but are fully independent in slave mode.
"Binding" the transmitter and receiver
Use arrow keys cdof the left or right touch pad to
move to the screen's "RF bind" line then select the
desired binding channel. For an example like that shown
in the figure below, choose "BD2" because the binding
channel designated as "BD1" in the screen's bottom line
is already used by default for the receiver which was
delivered with the set.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
STARLET
Mod.name
Stick mode
bind
n/a
RF BIND
R12
Rcv Ch Map
n/a
BD1 BD2
If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red
LED on the receiver will blink.
Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while
the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then
after about another 3 seconds begins to blink red/green.
You can now release the SET button As long as this
LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode.
Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called
"receiver binding" process for the receiver to the
currently active model memory by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button of the right touch pad. At this time the
screen's display will begin to indicate the duration of the
"bond".
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
STARLET
Mod.name
Stick mode
Finding ...bind
n/a
RF BIND
R12
Rcv Ch Map
n/a
BD1 BD2
If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within
about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green,
the binding process has been successfully completed.
Your model-memory to receiver combination is now
operationally ready. At this time the screen will now
display "bind" (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached).
For example:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
STARLET
Mod.name
Stick mode
bind bind
RF BIND
Rcv Ch Map
R12 R08
BD1 BD2
On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver
blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding
process has failed. In this case the screen will continue
to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try
changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire
procedure.
Binding other receivers
The binding channel you have chosen is already bound
(as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding
channel. If, after initiating the RF bind process, the
message shown below appears in the screen instead of
displaying "BINDING"
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
75
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name RF STARLET
Stick mode
must be
RF BIND OFF bind bind
Rcv Ch Map
OK R12 R08
BD1 BD2
Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the
RF module as described on the page in section "RF
module". Afterward, return again to the "RF BIND" line
and restart the process to dissolve bond as described
on the previous page.
Alternatively you can brieﬂy switch off the transmitter
then, after switching it back on again, respond to the
message window that appears …
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
… with "OFF" …
Please select
RF on/off?
ON OFF
… then conﬁrm the selection by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad. From the base
screen jump again into the "RF BIND" line of the "Basic
settings, model" menu and restart the binding process.
Dissolving a bond
Proceed as described above to initiate the binding
process but WITHOUT ﬁrst putting a receiver in binding
readiness.
76
Receiver change map
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
STARLET
Mod.name
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind bind
Rcv Ch Map
R12 R08
BD1 BD2
As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding
receivers" section, the mc-32 HoTT offers both the
opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control
channels within a receiver as well as the opportunity to
distribute the transmitter's 12 control channels across
two receivers. This redistribution is subsequently
referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel
correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with
the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂy
press the center SET button in the right touch pad.
Channel mapping within a receiver
Analogous to the channel correlation function in the "
Telemetry " menu on page 212, described as "Channel
Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to
freely distribute the 12 control channels (inputs) to
the outputs (servo connections) of the bound receiver
speciﬁed by column BD1.
RECEIVER CH – BIND1
Out Ch 1
In Ch 1
Out Ch 2
In Ch 2
Out Ch 3
In Ch 3
In Ch 4
Out Ch 4
After selection of the desired output with the arrow keys
of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding input
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
ﬁeld will be framed. Press brieﬂy on the center SET
button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be
displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input
channel (= transmitter output, see page 206) with the
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.
Notice:
The number of lines available in the list (outputs)
corresponds to the maximum number of servos which
can be attached to the given receiver.
BUT CAUTION: If you wish to operate two servos with
one control function, for example such as transmitter
control function 2 (roll) which is divided up into
control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll servos by
"3Sv(2Roll)" in the " in the "Heli Type" menu; then
"map" transmitter outputs 1 & 2 (= inputs to the receiver)
accordingly.
Important notice:
By using the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's "Tx. output
swap" option, the transmitter's 12 control functions
can be freely swapped in a similar manner or multiple
outputs can be assigned to the same control function.
To avoid confusion, it is strongly recommended that only
one of these two options is used.
Channel assignment on the second receiver
As already mentioned, the "Receiver channel mapping"
option can be used to freely distribute the mc-32
HoTT transmitter's 12 control channels across two
receivers, whereby the numbering sequence of outputs
(servo connections) begun in the "BD1" column for
bound "receiver 1" will be continued. For example, if
"receiver 1" has enough connectors for 12 servos then
the numbering of outputs in the "BD2" column (for the
second bound receiver) will begin with 13.
RECEIVER CH – BIND2
Out Ch13
In Ch12
Out Ch14
In Ch12
Out Ch15
In Ch12
In Ch12
Out Ch16
After selection of the desired output with the arrow keys
of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding input
ﬁeld will be framed. Press the center SET button in the
right touch pad The current setting will be displayed
in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel
with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example,
appropriate for the above example with roll servos:
RECEIVER CH – BIND1
Out Ch13
In Ch 1
Out Ch14
In Ch 2
Out Ch15
In Ch12
Out Ch16
In Ch12
Notice:
The number of lines available (outputs) corresponds to
the maximum number of servos which can be connected
to receiver 2 and their numbering is dependent on the
maximum number of servos which can be connected to
receiver 1.
RF transmit
This menu line provides an option for manually
switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off
to speciﬁc models while the transmitter is in operation.
For example, to save power while a model is being
programmed. If this line option was set to OFF, it
will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the
transmitter is switched on.
If necessary, use the cdarrow keys of the left or right
touch pad to reach the "RF transmit " line then activate
the option by brieﬂy pressing the center SET button in
the right touch pad.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind bind
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
OFF
RF transmit
SEL
The right arrow keys can now be used to choose
between OFF and ON. Again pressing the center SET
button in the right touch pad will complete the entry.
Range test
The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an
extent that a function test can be carried out even within
a distance of up to about 50 m.
Perform the range test on the Graupner HoTT system
according to the following instructions. If necessary,
have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.
1. Preferably the receiver already bound to the
transmitter should be installed into the model in its
intended position.
2. Switch remote control on and wait for the receiver's
green LED to light up. Now servo movements can be
observed.
3. Place the model on a level surface (pavement,
low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver
antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It
may be necessary to put something under the model
to raise it up enough for this.
4. Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some distance
from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at
the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's
end so that it is oriented vertically during the test.
5. If necessary, use the cdarrow keys of the left or
right touch pad to reach the "RF Range Test" line in
the menu then start range test mode by pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
RF BIND
bind bind
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
RF transmit
OFF
RF Range Test
99sec
SEL
When the range test is activated, the transmitter's
output power will be signiﬁcantly reduced and the
blue LED on the antenna's socket will begin to
blink. At the same time, the timer display in the
transmitter's screen will start counting down and
every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.
STARLET
#02
TEST 76s
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«normal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a
three-frequency tone will sound once every second.
After expiration of the range test's 99th second the
transmitter will again be switched to full output power
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
77
and the blue LED will again illuminate constantly.
6. Move away from the model while manipulating
the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an
interruption anytime while still within a distance of
about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.
7. If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary
to switch it on to further check noise immunity.
8. Continue moving away from the model until perfect
control is no longer possible.
9. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test
period with the still-operationally-ready model to
expire. After the range test is ended it should again
respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not
100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your
area's Graupner GmbH Co. KG service partner.
10.Perform the range test before each ﬂight and, in
doing so, simulate all servo movements which also
take place during ﬂight. The range must always be
at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model
operation.
Attention:
Never start the range test on the transmitter during
normal operation of the model.
DSC output
If necessary, use the cd arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad to reach the "DSC output" line then activate
this menu item by pressing the center SET button of the
right touch pad.
78
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
RF transmit
OFF
99sec
RF Range Test
DSC output
PPM10
SEL
Now you can use the right arrow keys to choose
between three types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM18"
and "PPM24". Pressing the center SET button in the
right touch pad again will complete the entry.
This choice primarily inﬂuences the maximum number
of control channels which can be attached to the DSC
(direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to
a ﬂight simulator or teacher/pupil system. This maximum
is control channels 1 ... 5 if "PPM10" is selected, control
channels 1 ... 9 for "PPM18" and control channels 1 ...
12 for "PPM24".
Autorotation
Autorotation is that state of descending ﬂight in which
the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that the
rotor's speed matches the natural forces of air ﬂowing
through, like a windmill. This built-up energy can be
used for "recovery" lift to brake a descent by appropriate
blade pitch adjustment.
Autorotation is a means by which real and model
helicopters are able to land safely in emergency
situations, e. g. in the event of a motor failure. However,
the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar
with the helicopter's characteristics. Quick reaction and
good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor's
inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift.
When this technique is evaluated during competitions,
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
the motor must be switched off for autorotation. For
training purposes it is better to keep the motor running
at idle during autorotation.
The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the
autorotation ﬂight phase in which control of "throttle" and
"pitch" are separate and all mixers which have an effect
on the throttle servo are switched off. Corresponding
parameter settings are made in the "Helicopter mixer"
menu (see page 178); refer also to the "Principle of the
Auto. C1 Pos." topic which follows.
The "Autorotation" name is permanently assigned to
phase 1 and it is included in the base screen of all
ﬂight phase dependent menus. This name can NOT
be changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to
this option, as described on page 52. If a switch is
assigned, it will have absolute priority over all other
ﬂight-phase switches.
C1 Thr
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ? –100%
Normal
More about ﬂight-phase programming can be found
in the text beginning on page 164 in the "Helicopter
mixer" section.
Auto.C1 Pos.
(Autorotation C1 position)
The autorotation ﬂight-phase can alternatively be
activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch
joystick. To set such a threshold, use the cd arrow
keys of the left or right key pad to reach the "Auto.C1
Pos." line.
As soon as this line has been selected, the value ﬁeld
in its column directly above STO on the screen's bottom
line will be framed.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
RF Range Test
99sec
PPM10
DSC Output
Autorotation
–––
Auto.C1 Pos.
0% –––
STO
Move the C1 joystick into the desired threshold
switchover position then press the center SET button in
the right touch pad. The current value will be displayed,
e. g.:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
99sec
RF Range Test
PPM10
DSC Output
–––
Autorotation
-55% –––
Auto.C1 Pos.
STO
After this has been done, use the arrow keys to move
into the column above the switch symbol then assign a
switch to this ﬁeld, as described on page 52 in section
"Switches, controls and control switches". Preferably the
selection will be one of the two self-resetting switches,
SW 1 or 9.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
99sec
RF Range Test
PPM10
DSC Output
–––
Autorotation
-55% 9
Auto.C1 Pos.
STO
Once this activation switch is closed, the ﬁrst occurrence
of a threshold underrun will cause the program to switch
over to "Autorotation" and then remain independent of
C1 position in this ﬂight phase until the activating switch,
in this example SW 9, is again "OFF".
"Auto. C1 Pos." has precedence over all other ﬂightphase switches.
Corresponding parameter settings for …
• pitch servos
• throttle servo
• tail rotor servo
• swashplate rotation, if available
• gyro setting
… are made in the "Helicopter mixer" menu, see
page 64.
column over the "SEL" ﬁeld and its value is to be
established through trial and error.
A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on
this preset position when a certain servo position or
threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is
done by setting the desired servo position (threshold
value) into the middle column, directly over the "STO"
ﬁeld then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch
function in the right column.
• If the percentage value speciﬁed for the middle
column is greater than the current servo position, i. e.
the current servo position lies below the threshold,
the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put
into its ON position.
• If the percentage value speciﬁed for the middle
column is less than the current servo position, i. e.
the current servo position is above the threshold, the
speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or
close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent
dictated by the value in the left column as soon as
the servo's position once underruns the threshold
(max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its
ON position.
The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in
this cut-off position only until the selected switch is
again changed over followed by a one-time throttle
servo or speed controller movement beyond the
preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick
control.
The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for
the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of
+150 % servo position setting in the middle column.
Cut-off
Within the framework of autorotation settings for the
mc-32 HoTT transmitter's helicopter program, there
are parameters for an emergency "cut off" of the throttle
servo or motor actuator, refer to the programming
proposal on page 286. However, this option is not
available if an idle position is speciﬁed in the "Thr
setting AR" line of the "Helicopter mixer" menu
instead of an (emergency) OFF position; for example,
to avoid restarting the motor after every landing during
autorotation practice. In this case it is better to use this
option as a "cut off" rather than as an emergency OFF
solution.
Depending on the "forw./back" choice made for the
"Pitch min" line of the "Heli Type" menu, this motor "cut
off" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down
a carburetor servo to the cut-off (or idle) position.
This cut-off (or idle) position is speciﬁed by the left
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
79
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
DSC Output
PPM10
Autorotation
–––
-55% 9
Auto.C1 Pos.
cut off –100% +150% –––
SEL STO
Programming
To change the preset "cut-off" position of the throttle
servo, press the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now use the arrow keys of the left or right touch
pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off"
without a startup of the throttle servo. For example
-125 %:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
DSC Output
PPM10
Autorotation
–––
-55% 9
Auto.C1 Pos.
cut off –125% +150% –––
SEL STO
The – upper – preset value in the middle column
ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the
maximum possible positioning range of the servo or
speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in
the right column.
However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by
which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or
speed controller with closed switch to switch into the
cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel and - if
applicable, the throttle limiter - by placing the throttle/
pitch joystick into the desired position then press the
center SET button in the right touch pad.
80
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
PPM10
DSC Output
–––
Autorotation
-55% 9
Auto.C1 Pos.
cut off –125% +100% –––
SEL STO
Finally, use the column at the right to specify a
switch with which you can cut off the motor directly
(emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
DSC Output
PPM10
Autorotation
–––
-55% 9
Auto.C1 Pos.
cut off –125% +100% 1
SEL STO
Notices:
• Be sure the throttle servo does not run out
mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.
• A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily
increasing the travel for servo 1 in the "Servo
adjustment" menu to over 100 % then, after storing
the threshold, change servo travel back to the
original value.
Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter
Your notes
81
Model type
Establishing winged aircraft model type
This "Model type" menu is used to establish the
type of model to be programmed. This also activates
all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc.
in preparation for subsequent programming of the
speciﬁed model type.
"back":
Suppress model
Base setup model
Model type
Ser vo adjustment
Stick mode.
Control adjust
Press brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch
pad.
Motor at C1
After selecting the "Motor at C1" line with the cd arrow
keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding
entry ﬁeld will be framed.
M O D E L T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
Press brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to
select from among the following four options:
"none"
For operation of a model without a
propulsion.
The warning "Throttle too high", see
page 36, is deaktivated and the "Brake
82
Detail program description - Model type
"forw.":
settings" sub-menu of the "Wing
mixers" menu (beginning page 146) is
available without any restrictions.
The idle position for the throttle/brake
ﬂaps control stick (C1) is to the rear, i. e.
toward the pilot.
The warnings "Throttle too high", see
page 36, as well as the "cut off" option
in the "Basic settings, model" menu,
see page 72, are activated and the
"Brake settings" sub-menu of the "Wing
mixers", beginning page 146, will be
available if the entry in the "Motor"
column of the "Phase settings" menu,
page 128 for the currently active ﬂight
phase contains "none".
The idle position for the throttle/brake
ﬂaps control stick (C1) is at the front, i. e.
away from the pilot.
The warnings "Throttle too high", see
page 36, as well as the "cut off" option
in the "Basic settings, model", see
page 72, are activated and the "Brake
settings" sub-menu of the "Wing
mixers", beginning page 146, will be
available if the entry in the "Motor"
column of the "Phase settings" menu,
page 128 for the currently active ﬂight
phase is "none".
Notice:
• Be sure to pay attention during the programming
procedures that motors do not start up
unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel supply or
battery terminals to motors before programming.
• C1 trimming will operate according to your choice
between "normal" or only "back" or "fwd.", that is,
either over the control's entire travel path or only in
the respective idle direction.
• Pay attention to the "cut off trim" function described
on page 54.
Tail type
After selecting the "Tail type" line with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding
entry ﬁeld will be framed.
M O D E L T Y P E
None
Motor at C1
Normal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
+100% In 1
Brake Off
SEL
Press brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now select the type applicable to your model with
the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
"normal":
Elevators and rudder are each operated
by a single servo.
"V-tail":
Elevator and rudder control is affected
by way of two separate, articulated,
V-shaped rudders. The coupling function
for rudder and elevator control will be
automatically taken over by the program.
The relationship of rudder-to-elevator
proportion is set in the "Dual Rate /
Expo" menu, page 108 and servo travel
in the "Servo adjust" menu, page 90.
If differentiated rudder throw is also
desired then the V-tail should be
controlled instead by way of the "Dual
mixer" menu, page 194. In this case
however, the tail type entry speciﬁed here
must be "normal".
"Delta/ﬂ":
Aileron and elevator control is operated
by one or two servos per wing half.
However, elevator trimming is also
affected by selecting the "QR 2WK"
option – see below – but only on servos 2
& 3.
"2HRSv3+8": This option is intended for models
with two elevator servos. The servo
connected to output 8 will operate in
parallel with servo 3 to actuate elevators.
Elevator trimming affects both servos.
Notice about the "2HRSv3+8" option:
One control, which assigns input 8 by
way of the "Control adjust" menu, is
then disconnected from servo "8" by
software for reasons of safety i. e. it is
made ineffective.
Aileron/Flaps
After selecting the "Aile/ﬂaps" line with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding
entry ﬁeld will be framed.
M O D E L T Y P E
None
Motor at C1
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
+100% In 1
Brake Off
SEL
Press brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to
select the number of wing servos to be programmed for
the model.
Available
Control channel used
1QR
1QR 1WK
2|6
2QR
2+5
2QR 1WK
2+5|6
2QR 2WK
2+5|6+7
2QR 4WK
2 + 5 | 6 + 7 / 9 + 10
4QR 2WK
2 + 5 / 11 + 12 | 6 + 7
4QR 4WK
2 + 5 / 11 + 12 | 6 + 7 / 9 + 10
Depending on the option selected here, the given mixers
needed and their settings will be activated in the "Wing
mixers", menu beginning page 146.
Tips:
• Settings for all wing ﬂap pairs (QR and QR2, WK and
WK2) can be trimmed on a ﬂight-phase basis in both
the "Phase trim" menu and in the "Wing mixers"
menu, page 146.
• The functionality of all wing ﬂap pairs (QR and QR2,
WK and WK2) can also be operated by way of the
"Throttle/brake-ﬂap stick" if this stick has not been
assigned to other use, e. g. for certain brake settings,
see "Wing mixers" menu, page 146. To conﬁgure
this it is only necessary to assign "Control 1" to input
6 in the "Control adjust" menu, page 96. (If you
would rather operate ﬂaps with switches, one of the
transmitter's two or three position switches are good
for this purpose.)
Brake offset
This function not only has potential for gliders and
electric models but also for models with combustion
motors and landing ﬂaps.
The mixers described in the "Brake settings" line of
the "Wing mixers" menu can be operated by the C1
control stick ("input 1") or another transmitter operating
element which has been assigned to input 7, 8 or 9 in
the "Control adjust" menu. In this latter case, retain
the "GL" default setting for the "Type" column in the
"Control adjust" menu so the selected control can
operate independent of ﬂight phase.
In the majority of cases the default setting for "input 1"
will remain as it is and the brake will be operated by way
of the non-neutralizing C1 joystick.
However, use of input 7, 8 or 9 makes it possible to
operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by way
of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to be used
for something else.
The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired
position. This is done by placing the control for input 1,
7, 8 o 9 into the position at which the landing ﬂaps are to
be in their neutral position then ﬁxing this "Offset" point
there with STO.
M O D E L T Y P E
None
Motor at C1
Normal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
+90% In 1
Brake Off
STO SEL
If the offset point is not set at the far end of control
element travel, the remainder of travel to the end point
will be "free travel", i. e. this "free travel" will no longer
Detail program description - Model type 83
inﬂuence any mixer available for "Brake settings" in
the "Wing mixers" menu. This free travel ensures that,
even if the brake ﬂap control is not quite positioned to
its full end of travel, it will still stop all brake settings at
"neutral". At the same time, the effective control path is
automatically spread to 100 %.
Tip:
Preferably, the servo intended for operating any airbrake
ﬂaps that may be on the model should be connected to
the receiver output operated by the brake input channel,
e. g. connect airbrake servo onto (free) receiver output 8
if input 8 has been chosen for the "brake", etc. A second
airbrake servo is most conveniently operated by way of
a free mixer.
84
Detail program description - Model type
Your notes
85
Helicopter type
Establishing helicopter model type
This "Model type" menu is used to establish the
type of model to be programmed. This also activates
all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc.
in preparation for subsequent programming of the
speciﬁed model type.
Suppress models
Base setup model
Helicopter type
Ser vo adjustment
Stick mode
Control adjust
Press brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch
pad.
Swashplate type
Control of the swashplate will require an appropriate
program variant which corresponds to the number of
servos operating pitch control.
After selecting the "Swashplate" line with the
cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the
corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
HELI TYPE
Swashplate
1 Ser vo
no
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
right
Pitch min.
back
SEL
Press brieﬂy on the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting for number of pitch servos will
be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant
needed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
86
Detail program description - Helicopter type
"1 Servo":
The swashplate will be tipped with one
servo each for roll and nick. Pitch control
will be affected by a separate servo.
(Since helicopter models operated
with only 1 pitch servo will be operated
WITHOUT the transmitter's mixer
functions for pitch, nick and roll, the
"Swashplate mixer" menu item in the
Multifunction menu will be hidden.)
"2 Servos": Two roll servos will displace the
swashplate axially to affect pitch control;
nick control will be decoupled by a
mechanical compensation rocker.
"3Sv (2Roll)": Symmetrical three-point control of
the swashplate is affected at three
articulation points, each radially offset
from the others by 120°, which are
connected to one nick servo (at the
front orrear) and two roll servos (located
laterally at the left and right). All three
servos push the swashplate axially to
affect pitch control.
"3Sv (140)": Asymmetrical three-point control of
the swashplate is affected at three
articulation points connected to one nick
servo (rear) and two roll servos (front
left and right). All three servos push the
swashplate axially to affect pitch control.
"3Sv (2Nick)": Symmetrical three-point control as
described above but radially offset by
90°, one lateral roll servo and two nick
servos, front and rear.
"4Sv (90°)": Four-point swashplate control affected by
two roll servos and two nick servos.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will set the option back to
"1 Servo".
Swashplate type: 1 Servo
Swashplate type: 2 Servos
Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)
Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)
Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)
Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll
strain for different displacement positions due to travel
which deviates from one another.
Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on
the part of the pilot because, in order to linearize
the entire rotation travel for the servo arm, servo
travel can be appropriately reduced for small control
movements – similar to a substantial Expo setting – .
Rotor rotation
After selecting the "Rotor direct" line (rotor direction)
with the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad,
the corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
Notice:
Except for the "1 Servo" choice, swashplate mixer
proportions must also be set in the "Swashplate mixer"
menu, page 196.
Swashplate linearizing
After selecting the "Linear. swashpl." line with the
cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the
corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
HELI TYPE
Swashplate
3Sv(2rol)
no
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
right
Pitch min.
back
SEL
The "yes" entry will prevent undesired side effects
such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension
between swashplate servo rods.
This type of tension can arise when effected servos
HELI TYPE
Swashplate
3Sv(2rol)
no
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
right
Pitch min.
back
SEL
Once the choice for main rotor rotation direction is made
with the arrow keys, it is set by pressing the center SET
button in the right touch pad.
"right": The main rotor turns clockwise when viewed
from above.
"left":
The main rotor turns counter-clockwise when
viewed from above.
Simultaneously pressing the c d or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will set the option to "right".
right-hand
rotation
left-hand
rotation
This entry is necessary for correct operational
orientation of the torque and power compensation mixer
settings made in the "Helicopter mixer" menu:
Pitch,
C1 ¼ throttle,
C1 ¼ tail rotor,
Tail rotor ¼ throttle,
Roll ¼ throttle,
Roll ¼ tail rotor,
Pitch ¼ throttle,
Nick ¼ throttle,
Nick ¼ tail rotor.
Pitch min
After selecting the "Pitch min" (pitch minimum) line with
the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the
corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
HELI TYPE
Swashplate
3Sv(2rol)
no
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
right
Pitch min.
back
SEL
Detail program description - Helicopter type
87
The "Pitch min" line is used to adapt the direction of
operation for the throttle/pitch control stick to your
control preferences. All other helicopter program options
which involve throttle and pitch functions, e. g. throttle
curve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are dependent
on this setting.
Press the center SET button in the right touch pad.
The operating direction of the throttle/pitch joystick will
be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant
needed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
Pitch
• Since your models will typically be operated with the
same pitch-min direction, this speciﬁcation can be
conveniently preselected in the "transmitter-speciﬁc"
"Basic Settings" menu, page 224. This speciﬁcation
will be adopted automatically when a new model
memory is created in the "Helicopter type" menu but,
if desired, can be adapted on a model-speciﬁc basis
as described.
Expo throttle limit
After selecting the "Expo thro lim."line with the
cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the
corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
HELI TYPE
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
Pitch min.
Expo thro lim.
These mean:
"fwrd.": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick
(C1) is "forward", i.e. away from the pilot.
"back": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick
(C1) is "back", i.e. toward the pilot.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".
Notices:
• C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo.
• The so-called "throttle limiter" is set by default, see text
beginning page 104, such that the throttle limiter for full
throttle can be set independently of the pitch servo via
input "Th.L.12" in the "Control adjust" menu.
88 Detail program description - Helicopter type
no
right
back
0%
SEL
The "Throttle limit" function, described in the text for the
"Control adjust" menu on page 104, can be assigned
an exponential characteristic curve.
A pitch progression rate value between -100 % and
+100 % can be set with the arrow keys.
For example, this is meaningful when the throttle limiter
is to be regulated in parallel with the idle setting. Further
details about the throttle limiter can be found in the text
for the "Control adjust" menu on page 100.
#

&
$
An example of two Expo throttle limit curve characteristics
for 100 % servo travel.
continuous line:
negative expo values;
dashed line:
positive expo values
"
" $ &
Your notes
89
Servo adjustment
Servo direction, midpoint, travel and limit
This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization,
travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo
exclusively.
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Ser vo adjustment
Stick mode
Control adjust
Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad.
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
Begin setting servo parameters in the left column.
Basic procedure steps:
1. Select the desired servo, S1 ... S12, with the cd
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.
2. If necessary, use the ef arrow keys of the left or
right touch pad to reach the desired column then,
if desired, move the respective control out of its
midpoint to make an asymmetric setting.
3. Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The respective entry ﬁeld will be displayed in
inverse video.
4. Use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to set the
desired value.
5. Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
90
Detail program description - Servo adjustment
pad to complete the entry.
6. Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set any setting
which has been made back to the given default
value.
Important:
Servo designation numerals are based on the respective
receiver outputs to which they are connected, provided
that no swapping of transmitter and/or receiver outputs
has been speciﬁed. This means that even a change of
stick mode will not effect the numbering of servos.
Column 2 "rev"
The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to the
practical reality of the given model so that the assembly
of control rods and joints do not need to accommodate
a speciﬁc servo rotation direction. Rotation direction is
symbolized by the "=>" and "<=" character combinations.
Servo rotation direction must be speciﬁed before making
settings for the options which follow below.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the rotation direction
to "=>".
normal
normal
reversed
reversed
Column 3 "midpoint"
The servo midpoint setting is intended for adapting a
non-standard servo (a servo whose midpoint position
does not correspond to a pulse length of 1.5 ms, i.e.
1500 μs), as well as for minor adjustments, e. g. for the
ﬁne tuning of the neutral position of model rudders.
Independent of trim levers and any mixer settings, the
neutral point can be set in a range of -125 % to +125 %
within a maximum servo travel scope of ±150 %.
Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this
setting is always based directly on the respective servo.
Note that extreme adjustments of the neutral point can
lead to one-sided restrictions of servo motion because
both the electronic and the mechanical aspects limit
total travel to ±150 %.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys in
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁeld
displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value.
Column 4 "- Weg +"
This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or
asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 0 …
150 % of normal servo travel. The values set are based
on the settings that have been made for the "midpoint"
column.
Ser vo travel
To create a symmetric
tre adjustment
+1
25
travel path, i. e. control25
-1
side independent travel,
the respective control
(joystick, proportional
rotary control or switch) is
to be put into the position
which covers travel to
both sides of the marked
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys in
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁeld
displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value.
Servo travel
frame.
Notice:
It may be necessary to ﬁrst assign a control to a servo
attached to one of the 5 ... 12 control channels. If
necessary, this is to be done in the "Control adjust"
menu, see page 96 or 100.
To create an asymmetric travel path, the respective
control (joystick, proportional rotary control or switch) is
to be moved to the side to be set such that it covers only
the marked frame.
The value setting is activated by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad. The value
ﬁeld will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be
changed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
Pressing the center SET button in the right touch pad
will complete the entry.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys in
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed
parameter in the entry ﬁeld back to 100 %.
Important:
In contrast to settings made with the "Control adjust"
menu, all settings made in this menu affect exclusively
the respective servo, independent of how the control
signal for this servo is produced, i.e. directly by a control
stick or by way of any mixer functions.
The adjacent ﬁgure
shows and example of
a side-dependent servo
setting, -50 % and
+150 %.
Transmitter control travel
Column 5 "limit"
The "- lim +" column is reached by pushing the marked
frame with the f arrow key of the left or right touch pad,
analogous to the pointers at the bottom of the screen, to
the right beyond the "- trv +" column.
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
150% 150%
150% 150%
150% 150%
150% 150%
150% 150%
lim +
Example:
A servo is controlled separately by two controls over a
mixer and but, for model-speciﬁc reasons, must only be
operated over a servo travel path of 100 % because, for
example, the rudder would mechanically collide with the
elevator if moved more than 100 %.
As long as only one control is used at a time, this is
no problem. But this does become a problem when
the signals of both controls (e. g. aileron and rudder)
combine to form an overall travel in excess of 100 %.
The linkage and servos could be strained excessively …
To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited by
way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the rudder
used in the example, this would be a value slightly less
than 100 % – because it is assumed the rudder would
collide at 100 % – .
To create a symmetric, i. e. control-side independent
limit, the respective control (joystick, proportional rotary
control or switch) is to be put into the position in which
the marked frame covers both sides of the travel setting.
To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (joystick,
proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to
the side on which the marked frame only includes the
value to be changed.
Detail program description - Servo adjustment
91
Joystick setting
Setting stick mode 1 through 4
Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. With
each brief push (one "click") on a joystick it will change
its neutral position by one increment. Holding the stick
longer will cause trimming to run in the corresponding
direction at increasing speed.
The current position is shown on the screen and
adjustment is also made "audible" by various high
frequency tones. This makes ﬁnding the mid-point during
ﬂight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point
is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.
Current trim values are automatically stored when a
model memory change is made.
Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake
joystick, commonly referred to as control function "C1"
(channel 1) – digital trimming is effective within a model
memory location selectively as either a global parameter
(i. e. consistent in all ﬂight phases) or as a ﬂight-phase
speciﬁc parameter. This speciﬁcation as "global"
or "phase" is made in the "Joystick setting" menu
described here, whereas C1 trimming is always made
"globally", i. e. independent of ﬂight phases.
This setting is visualized in the base screen by a
"shadow" on trim bars:
• shadow present = global,
• no shadow = ﬂight phase dependent.
The following ﬁgure shows elevator trim – in the right
column with standard Mode 1 – as being ﬂight-phase
dependent.
92
Detail program description - Joystick setting
GRAUBELE
#01
«Nor mal »
5.2V
2:22h
Stop
Flt
0:00
0:00
K78
HoTT
5.5V
can be made with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
Column "Tr"
(trim)
Except for "channel 1", this column can be used to
switchover trim effect from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and
vice versa. For example:
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
the "Stick mode" menu item of the multifunction menu.
Ser vo adjustment
Stick mode
Control adjust
Dual Rate / Expo
Channel 1 cur ve
Switch display
GL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
"GL":
Open this menu item by pressing the center SET button
in the right touch pad.
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
PH
GL
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
This menu, adapted for winged models, permits the trim
effects of the four digital trim levers to be established
and control functions 1 through 4 to be selectively
"decelerated".
The desired line can be reached by using the arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate
function ﬁeld has been selected and then the center
SET button in the right touch pad is pressed brieﬂy, the
ﬁeld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting
The position of the respective trim lever
is effective for the given model "globally",
i.e. across any ﬂight phases which may be
programmed for it, page126.
"PH":
The position of the respective trim lever is
effective on a phase-speciﬁc basis and will
be automatically stored upon change of ﬂight
phase so that the setting is again available
following a return to this ﬂight phase.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) switches the entry back to
"GL".
Column "St"
(trim steps)
The four digital trim levers push the neutral point of the
respective joystick by one increment for each press
("click"). This is where the increment size (step) can be
adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim
travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps,
is always about ±30 % of control travel.
After selecting column "St" (Steps) and then the desired
trim control with the cd arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
For example:
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10,
with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example:
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
sides or separate for each control direction. This setting
has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In the case of
side-separate settings, the joystick is to be moved to the
respective side so that the inverse video ﬁeld will switch
between sides to the one for which the change is to be
made, – for example, even to ensure gentle rev-up of
the propulsion motor despite a (too) fast motion of the
C1 stick.
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
1.1s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor cutoff should always be "immediate".
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the change made to
the active ﬁeld back to "0.0 s".
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef arrow keys of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the change made
in the active ﬁeld back to "4".
Column "time"
The "time" column entries inﬂuence joystick acceleration
speed/s – if applicable, for each movement direction
for the four control sticks, 1 through 4, separately – .
This means that respective servos will then follow rapid
control position changes only at an accordingly delayed
rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control
function and therefore also any servos controlled by this
function.
The time can be programmed symmetrically for both
Detail program description - Joystick setting
93
Joystick setting
Setting stick mode 1 through 4
Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. With
each brief push (one "click") on a joystick it will change
its neutral position by one increment. Holding the stick
longer will cause trimming to run in the corresponding
direction at increasing speed.
The current position is shown on the screen and
adjustment is also made "audible" by various high
frequency tones. This makes ﬁnding the mid-point during
ﬂight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point
is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.
Current trim values are automatically stored when a
model memory change is made.
Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake
joystick – digital trimming is effective selectively either as
a global parameter, i. e. consistent in all ﬂight phases, or
as a ﬂight-phase speciﬁc parameter. This speciﬁcation
as "global" or "phase" is made in the "Joystick setting"
menu described here, whereas throttle trimming is
always made "global" by software, i. e. independent of
ﬂight phases.
This setting is visualized in the base screen by a
"shadow" on trim bars:
• shadow present = global,
• no shadow = ﬂight phase dependent.
In the following ﬁgure nick trimming is used as an
example of ﬂight-phase dependence – presented in its
default Mode 1 at the left – .
STARLET
#02
«Normal »
5.2V
2:22h
94
Stop
Flt
0:00
0:00
K78
HoTT
5.5V
Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
the " Stick mode " menu item of the multifunction menu.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress menus
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Open this menu item by pressing the center SET button
in the right touch pad.
Model select
Copy / Erase
Suppress models
Base setup model
Model type
Suppress:
TOG
This menu, adapted for helicopter models, permits
the trim effects of the four digital trim levers to be
established and control functions 1 through 4 to be
selectively "decelerated".
The desired line can be reached by using the arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate
function ﬁeld has been selected and then the center
SET button in the right touch pad is pressed brieﬂy, the
ﬁeld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting
can be made with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
Column "Tr"
(trim)
These setting variations are conﬁgured to accommodate
the needs of helicopter models, which is why the following
alternative options are available for the "Thr." line:
Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopter model
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
PH
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
"TL":
"throttle limit"
C1 trimming operates as idle trimming when
the "throttle limit" function regulates the motor
for starting, see "Control adjust" menu,
page 104.
"AR":
"autorotation throttle"
C1 trim operates as idle trim exclusively in the
"Autorot" ﬂight phase.
This makes it possible to assign a principle
(ﬁxed) preset AR throttle position in the
"Helicopter mixer" menu, page 164, e. g. for
use during autorotation practice, which can be
"varied" with the idle trim lever.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef
keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will
switch this option back to "TL".
On the other hand, the trim effects of respective digital
trimming controls for the lines "Roll", "Nick" and "Tail
rotor" can be switched over from "GL" to "PH" and vice
versa. Example:
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
TL
GL
GL
PH
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
"GL":
The position of the respective trim lever
is effective for the given model "globally",
i.e. across any ﬂight phases which may be
programmed for it, page 126.
"PH":
The position of the respective trim lever is
effective on a phase-speciﬁc basis and will
be automatically stored upon change of ﬂight
phase so that the setting is again available
following a return to this ﬂight phase.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch the entry back to
"GL".
Column "St"
(trim steps)
The four digital trim levers push the neutral point of the
respective joystick by one increment for each press
("click"). This is where the increment size (step) can be
adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim
travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps,
is always about ±30 % of control travel.
After selecting column "St" (Steps) and then the desired
trim control with the cd arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁeld will be framed.
Example:
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
TL
GL
GL
PH
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse
video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10,
with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example:
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
TL
GL
GL
PH
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to
the active ﬁeld back to "4".
Column "time"
The "time" column entries inﬂuence joystick acceleration
speed/s – if applicable, for each movement direction
for the four control sticks, 1 through 4, separately – .
This means that respective servos will then follow rapid
control position changes only at an accordingly delayed
rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control
signal and therefore also commensurately on any servos
controlled by the effected controls.
The time can be programmed symmetrically for both
sides or separate for each control direction. This setting
has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In this latter
case, the given stick control is to be moved to the
respective side so that the inverse video ﬁeld will switch
between sides to the one for which the change is to be
made.
A rash "Pitch" control movement would not operate
the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would the
two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would cause
a momentary control motion in the "nick" direction.
However, if response time for the "pitch" control function
were to be reduced by at least the positioning time for
the servo in the middle then all three servos would reach
their proper positions at the same time. The necessary
delay times typically amount to only a few tenths of a
second. For example:
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
TA
GL
GL
PH
Tr
St
0.2s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.2s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to
the active ﬁeld back to "0.0 s".
Example:
All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate
pitch control, e g. a "Pitch" control movement for a "3Sv
(2Roll)" swashplate. However, travel for the middle
servo is greater than that of the other two servos on the
shorter lever.
Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopter model
95
Control adjust
Fundamental operating steps for control and switch assignments
In contrast to the two joysticks which, when initialized
Ser vo adjustment
for a new model memory as a "Winged aircraft" model
Stick mode
type will already be conﬁgured to operate the servos
Control adjust
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4, these "other"
Dual Rate / Expo
operating elements initially remain inactive.
Channel 1 cur ve
Thus, at least in the system's delivered state, – as
Switch display
already mentioned on page 20 – or even after the
Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
initialization of a new model memory with the "Winged
pad.
aircraft" model type and its "binding" to the intended
receiver, only those servos connected to the two
Input 5 GL –––
0%
joysticks by way of receiver outputs 1 … 4 are able to
Input 6 GL –––
0%
be operated; any servos which may be connected to the
Input 7 GL –––
0%
receiver's outputs 5 … 12 will initially remain inactive in
Input 8 GL –––
0%
their middle positions.
normal
Even though this may seem inconvenient at ﬁrst glance,
typ
offset
it is indeed just this state which offers full freedom to
Aside from the two joysticks which operate control
select and assign these "other" operating elements as
functions 1 through 4, a standard mc-32 HoTT
desired and leaves any unused operating elements
transmitter is also equipped with other operating
harmlessly dormant without taking any action to
elements:
deactivate them. This has the advantage that:
• two 3 position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and SW
An unused operating element will have no inﬂuence
6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu as
on your model's operation even if inadvertently
"Ct9" and "C10".
operated; it will be inactive and therefore have no
assigned function.
• three proportional rotary controls: CTRL 6, 7 and 8.
Respectively designated "Ct6", "Ct7" and "Ct8" in the
These "other" operating elements can be freely
menu.
assigned to meet your needs and the features of your
model. They can be assigned to any function input in
• three 2 position switches: SW 2, 3 and 8.
the "Control adjust" menu, see page 50. But this also
Respectively displayed in the menu as "2", "3" and
"8" in combination with a switch symbol indicating the means that each of these operating elements can also
be assigned to multiple functions at the same time.
switching direction.
• two pushbutton switches: SW 1 and SW 9. Analogous For example, one and the same toggle switch, SW
X, assigned in this menu to an input, can at the same
to the aforementioned switches; designated as "1"
time be assigned to a "timer" as an On/Off switch in the
and "9" and displayed in combination with a symbol
"Timers (general)" menu...
indicating switching direction.
96
Detail program description - Control adjust
Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively made global
or ﬂight-phase speciﬁc (providing that ﬂight phases have
been deﬁned in the menus "Phase settings", page 128,
and "Phase assignment", page 134). The respective
names for the given ﬂight phases will then appear in the
bottom screen line, e. g. "normal".
Basic procedure steps
1. Select the desired input, E5 ... 12 with the cd arrow
keys of the left or right touch pad.
2. If necessary, use the ef arrow keys of the left or
right touch pad to change to the desired column.
3. Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad. The respective entry ﬁeld will be displayed in
inverse video.
4. Actuate the desired operating element or use the
arrow keys of the right touch pad to set the desired
value.
5. Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad to complete the entry.
6. Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef arrow
keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any
setting change back to its default value.
Column 2 "typ"
Analogous to the "Stick mode" menu already described,
this column can be used to select whether other settings
are to be made for the given input, e. g. "GL(obal)" or
"PH(ase speciﬁc)" and vice versa.
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
normal
GL
GL
GL
GL
–––
–––
–––
–––
typ
"GL":
"PH":
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
The given input's settings will be "globally"
effective for the respective model memory
across any ﬂight phases which may be
programmed.
The settings for this input will be effective on
a ﬂight-phase basis and must therefore be
explicitly set in each ﬂight-phase where it is to
be effective.
Notice:
More about ﬂight phases on page 126.
Column 3 "Control or switch assignment"
Use the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
select one of the inputs, 5 through 12.
Brieﬂy press the center SET button in the right touch
pad to activate the assignment.
Input 5 GL –––
0%
Eing.
–––
GL
0%
Move desired switch
Eing.
7 GL adj.
–––
0%
or control
Input 8 GL –––
0%
Nor mal
typ
offset
Now activate the desired control (CTRL 6 through 10)
or selected switch (SW 1 through 3, or 8 or 9) - whereby
a proportional rotary control will only be detected after
some "detenting" action has taken place and so may
have to be activated a bit longer. If adjustment travel is
insufﬁcient, activate the control in the other direction.
Two position switches can only switch back and forth
between their ﬁxed end states, e. g. motor ON or OFF.
On the other hand, the 3 position switches, SW 4/5 or
6/7, that can be incorporated in this "Control adjust"
menu as "Ct9" or "C10", also offer a middle position.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) for an active control or switch
assignment – see ﬁgure above – will reset the input back
to its "free" state.
Tips:
• When assigning switches, pay attention to the
desired switching direction and also that all unused
inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free" (if
applicable, across all ﬂight phases). This is necessary
to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused
controls cannot cause malfunctions.
• The travel setting described below allows the
appropriate end state to be established for an
assigned switch.
For example, the screen will now show either the
control's number or – in conjunction with a switch
symbol indicating the switching direction – the switch's
number .
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
GL –––
GL
GL Ct6
GL –––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Column 4 "offset"
The control midpoint for the given control, i. e. its zero
point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment
range lies between -125 % and +125 %.
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
GL –––
GL
GL Ct6
GL –––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys in
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁeld
displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".
Column 5 "-travel+"
This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or
asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 %
of normal servo travel.
Use the cd arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
select one of the inputs, 5 through 12.
To set symmetric travel, i. e. control-side independent
travel, the respective operating element (proportional
rotary control or switch) is to be put into a position which
Detail program description - Control adjust 97
covers travel to both sides of the marked frame.
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
To set asymmetric travel, the respective control
(proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to
the side on which the marked frame only includes the
value to be changed.
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
–travel+
The value setting is activated by brieﬂy pressing the
center SET button in the right touch pad. The value
ﬁeld will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be
changed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+111%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+111%
+100%
–travel+
98
+100%
+100%
+111%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+88%
+100%
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
–travel+
–travel+
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Nor mal
Detail program description - Control adjust
Another brief press of the center SET button in the right
touch pad will complete the entry.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible in
order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or
effect.
Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef keys in
the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changes
parameter in the inverse video entry ﬁeld back to
+100 %.
Important:
In contrast to the servo travel setting, control travel
setting effects all derived mixer and coupling functions,
i. e. inﬂuences all servos which can be actuated by way
of the respective control.
Column 6 "time"
A symmetric or asymmetric time delay between 0 and
9.9 s can be applied to each of the 5 ... 12 function
inputs.
Use the f arrow keys in the left or right touch pad to
push the marker frame to the right, beyond the "-travel+"
column.
To set a symmetric, (i. e. control-side independent) time
delay, the respective operating element (proportional
rotary control or switch) must be put into a position
which covers time to both sides of the marked frame.
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
To set an asymmetric time delay, the respective control
(proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to
the side on which the marked frame only includes the
value to be changed.
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
Notice:
Further suggestions for structuring timed ﬂows can be
found in the section "Control of timed ﬂows" on page 266.
Detail program description - Control adjust
99
Control adjust
Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment
"Helicopter" model type, the two dual axis sticks will – in
Ser vo adjustment
the absence of further conﬁguration – inﬂuence only
Stick mode
those servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and
Control adjust
6. Unlike these, the "additional" transmitter controls
Dual Rate / Expo
mentioned above are theoretically inactive at ﬁrst. (The
Channel 1 cur ve
exception here is the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control
Switch display
(throttle limiter), which also affects servo 6.)
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad:
One of the effects of this is that (as mentioned back
on page 20 ) with a factory-fresh unit, only the servos
Input 5 GL –––
0%
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and –depending on
Throt 6 GL –––
0%
the position of the throttle limiter– servo 6 can be moved
Gyro 7 GL –––
0%
using the two joysticks. (This also applies following
Input 8 GL –––
0%
the initialization of a new model memory with the
Input 9 GL –––
0%
"Helicopter" model type and its "binding" to the receivers
Input10 GL –––
0%
to be installed in the model.) The servos connected
0%
Input11 GL –––
to slots 5, 7 and 8, on the other hand, will simply stay
Th.L.12 GL Ct6
0%
"stuck" at their center points.
typ
offset
While this may appear more than a little awkward at
ﬁrst glance … this is the only way to ensure that you
In addition to the two dual axis sticks for control
can select any of the "additional" transmitter controls
functions 1 to 4, the mc-32 HoTT transmitter is
as you wish and, in addition, do not need to waste time
equipped with other controls as standard:
"disabling" control elements you do not require. This is
• Two 3-stage switches: SW 4/5 and CTRL 9, plus SW
because
6/7 and CTRL 10. On this menu, these are assigned
the only way to ensure an unwanted control element
as "Ct9" and "Ct10".
has no effect on your model, even if operated by
• Three proportional rotary controls: CTRL 6, 7 and 8.
accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. unassigned to a
Named as "Ct6", "Ct7" and "Ct8" on this menu.
function.
• Three 2-stage switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. Labeled
You can therefore use this "Control adjust" menu
accordingly as "2", "3" and "8" on the menu. A switch
exactly as you wish, to assign the "additional" control
icon indicating the switch direction is also shown.
elements as you want to any required function input; for
• Two push-button switches: SW 1 and SW 9.
further details, see page 50. Equally, this also means
Displayed as with the preceding switches, "1" and "9"
that you can assign individual transmitter controls to
with a switch icon indicating the switch direction.
multiple functions at the same time, if required. As an
Even with a newly-initialized model memory for the
example: the exact same rocker switch SW X that you
100 Detail program description - Control adjust
assign to an input on this menu can simultaneously be
assigned to "Timers" on the "Timers (general)" menu
as an "On/Off" switch, etc.
Note:
As a rule, input 6 must kept "free" for a helicopter model.
On this, see "Throttle" on the next double page.
Furthermore, if ﬂight phases have been deﬁned on
the "Phase settings" menu (page 128) and "Phase
assignment" menu (page 134), then all inputs must be
set either as global or ﬂight phase-speciﬁc. The names
assigned to each of these ﬂight phases are then shown
in the bottom line of the screen display, e. g. "Normal".
Basic procedure
1. Using the arrow keys cd on the left or right touch
pad, select the input you want: Input 5, Throt 6, Gyro
7, Input 8 … 11 or Th.L.12.
2. If necessary, use the arrow keys ef on the left or
right touch pad to select the column you want.
3. Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad.
The corresponding input ﬁeld is shown highlighted.
4. Activate your chosen transmitter control or use the
arrow keys on the right touch pad to set your chosen
value.
5. Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad
to complete data entry.
6. If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset any
settings made back to their respective default values.
Column 2, "typ"
Similarly to the "Stick mode" menu described
previously, this column can be used to deﬁne whether
further settings for the input in question are to have a
"GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-speciﬁc)" effect, as follows:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Nor mal
GL
GL
GL
GL
typ
"GL":
"PH":
–––
–––
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
The settings for the input in question affect all
ﬂight phases programmed (if any) and thus act
"globally" on the model memory in question.
The settings for this input take effect per
ﬂight phase and must therefore be conﬁgured
separately for each ﬂight phase.
Note:
See page 128 for more information on ﬂight phases.
Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch assignment"
Using the arrow keys cd on the left or right touch pad,
select an input: Input 5, Throt 6, Gyro 7, Input 8 … 11 or
Th.L.12.
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
activate the assignment option:
Input 5 GL –––
0%
GL
Gas
–––
0%
Move desired switch
7 GL adj.
Gyro
–––
0%
or control
Input 8 GL –––
0%
Nor mal
typ
offset
Now move your chosen transmitter control (CTRL 6
to 10) or selected switch (SW 1 to 3, 8 and 9). Note,
however, that the proportional rotary controls are only
identiﬁed after a few "turns": this means you need to
move them for slightly longer. If the control does not
have enough travel, move the control in the opposite
direction as required.
Once assigned, the 2-stage switches can be switched
back and forth only between their respective endpoints, e. g. headlights ON/OFF. In contrast, the 3-stage
switches SW 4/5 and 6/7 also permit a center control
position; these are conﬁgured as "Ct9" or "Ct10" on the
"Control adjust" menu.
If a switch has been assigned, then tapping the cd
or ef keys on the right touch pad at the same time
(CLEAR) bei aktivierter Schalterzuordnung – see screen
image above – will reset the input back to "free".
Tips:
• When assigning switches, pay attention to the
desired switching direction and also that all unused
inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free" (if
applicable, across all ﬂight phases). This is necessary
to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused
controls cannot cause malfunctions.
• The travel setting described below allows the
appropriate end state to be established for an
assigned switch.
The screen now shows either the control number
or – alongside a switch icon that shows the switch
direction – the switch number, e. g.:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Nor mal
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct7
GL
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Column 4, "offset"
In this column, you change the control center, i. e. the
zero point, for the transmitter control in question. The
adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct7
GL
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad
(CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset the value in
the highlighted ﬁeld back to 0%.
Column 5, "–travel+"
This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or
asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ± 125 %
of normal servo travel.
Using the arrow keys cd on the left or right touch pad,
select an input: Input 5, Throt 6, Gyro 7, Input 8 … 11 or
Th.L.12.
To conﬁgure symmetrical travel, i. e. one independent of
the control side, move the affected transmitter control
(proportional rotary control or switch) to a position at
which the marker frame encloses both sides of the travel
adjustment region:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
–travel+
Detail program description - Control adjust 101
To conﬁgure asymmetric travel, move the affected
transmitter control (proportional rotary control or switch)
to the side on which you wish to conﬁgure it, so the
marker frame encloses only the value you want to adjust:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
–travel+
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad
to activate value conﬁguration: The value ﬁeld is shown
highlighted. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to
change the values:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+111%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+111%
+100%
–travel+
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+111%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+88%
+100%
–travel+
Complete the conﬁguration by tapping the center SET
key on the right touch pad.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible in
order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or
effect.
102 Detail program description - Control adjust
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad
(CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset parameters
changed in the highlighted ﬁeld back to +100%.
Important:
In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the control
travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer and
coupling inputs, i. e. any and all servos that could be
actuated by the transmitter controls concerned.
Column 6, "– time +"
Each of the function inputs 5 … 12 can be assigned a
symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and
9.9. s.
Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
move the marker frame over the "– travel +" column and
to the right.
To conﬁgure a symmetrical time delay, i. e. one
independent of the control side, move the affected
transmitter control (proportional rotary control or switch)
as necessary to a position at which the marker frame
encloses both sides of the time adjustment region:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Nor mal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
To conﬁgure an asymmetric time delay, move the
affected transmitter control (proportional rotary control
or switch) as required to the side on which you wish
to conﬁgure it, so the marker frame encloses only the
value you want to adjust:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
Note:
Other suggestions for designing timed sequences
can be found under "Controlling timed sequences" on
page 266.
"Throt 6"
"Gyro 7"
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
GL
GL
GL
GL
typ
–––
–––
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
In the helicopter program, it is also theoretically possible
to assign any transmitter control (rotary proportional
controls and switches) to individual inputs.
However, please note here that some of the inputs
available on this menu are already assigned to
helicopter-speciﬁc functions, and therefore cannot be
re-assigned in this way.
If we consult the receiver assignment table on page 59,
for example, we see that the throttle servo (or speed
controller of an electrically-powered helicopter) must be
connected to receiver output "6", since control channel
"6" is reserved for motor power control.
Unlike a ﬁxed-wing model aircraft, however, the throttle
servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by
the throttle stick or other transmitter control, but by a
complex mixer system – see the "Helicopter mixers"
menu (from page 164). Furthermore, the "Throttle limit
function" described on the next page also inﬂuences this
mixer system.
Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the
"Throttle" line, or to its supplementary control signal,
would unnecessarily "confuse" this complex mixer
system. For this reason the "Throttle" input MUST be
left "free".
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Nor mal
GL
GL
GL
GL
typ
–––
–––
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature inﬁnitely
variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer
a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the
transmitter.
If the gyro you are using also has this feature, then
this menu option gives you the opportunity to specify
both "normal" gyro gain and, as appropriate, to specify
"heading-lock mode" in the "Offset" column in the
range of ±125%, plus a particular gain type within this
pre-selection, so as to be able to exploit maximum
stabilization for normal, slow ﬂight, but to reduce gyro
gain for fast circuits and aerobatics.
To proceed as described above, use ﬂight phase
switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro" line.
From the starting-point of these
predeﬁned – static – ﬂight phase-speciﬁc settings, you
can then use a transmitter control assigned to the "Gyro
7" line, e. g. one of the rotary potentiometers CTRL 7
or 8, to vary the gyro gain around the respective "offset
point": The center point of the control corresponds to
the setting speciﬁed by the offset. If the transmitter
control is moved from this center point in the direction
of full travel, gyro gain increases proportionally; it
diminishes when moved in the opposite direction. This
provides a fast and straightforward method of adjusting
gyro gain even in ﬂight – e. g. to suit changing weather
conditions – or to test-ﬂy optimum settings. In software
terms you can even limit the gyro gain range in both
directions by adjusting transmitter control travel.
In this context, ensure that you comply with the
instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you
risk making adjustments that render your heli
impossible to ﬂy.
Adjusting the gyro sensor
To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization
for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis,
observe the following:
• The controls should have as little friction and "play"
as possible.
• There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.
• Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo.
When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the
faster its response – a corresponding corrective change
to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro
gain adjustor can be moved without causing the tail of
the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's
stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower,
there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate
even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions
to gyro gain will need to be made – either by using the
default value under "Gyro" or the associated transmitter
control – to eliminate the oscillation.
If the model is ﬂying forward at high speed or hovering
in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing
effect of the vertical ﬁn combined with the gyro may
also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests
itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro
stabilization under all conditions, you should make use
of the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter
Detail program description - Control adjust 103
Throttle limit function
control using either the CTRL 7 or 8 proportional rotary
control.
"Thr.l 12"
As standard, the "Thr.l 12" input is assigned to the CTRL
6 proportional rotary control mounted on the top left of
the transmitter.
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Th.L.12
Nor mal
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct6
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
This pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to program
the two ﬂight phases that may be familiar to you from
using other remote control systems – namely "with
idle-up" and "without idle-up"" – ,since the mc-32
HoTT program offers a much more ﬂexible approach to
ﬁne-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational
speed below the hover point than "idle-up". If you
nonetheless prefer to program your helicopter "with idleup", then deactivate the "throttle limit" function described
below by setting input "Thr.l 12" to "free".
Meaning and application of "throttle limit"
As already mentioned under "Throttle", and in contrast
to ﬁxed-wing models, the power output of a helicopter's
drive system is not controlled directly using the C1
joystick, but only indirectly via the throttle curve settings
on the "Helicopter mixers" menu or – if your model
features a speed governor – by using this mechanism.
Note:
For separate ﬂight phases, you can of course use ﬂight
phase programming to set speciﬁc throttle curves.
Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto
result in the helicopter carburetor never approaching
104 Detail program description - Control adjust
anything near its idle speed under "normal" ﬂight
conditions, and that the motor can therefore neither be
started or stopped cleanly without some other means of
intervention.
The "throttle limit" feature resolves this problem
elegantly by using a separate transmitter control – by
default the CTRL 6 proportional control mounted on the
top left of the transmitter – to limit the throttle servo or
the output level of the speed controller. In this way, it is
possible to use the throttle limit control to "throttle back"
as you wish as far as the idle setting – at which point
the trim lever on the throttle/collective pitch stick takes
over – or to cut out an electrical drive system directly.
Conversely, the throttle servo or speed controller can
only open up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit
control has also released the full servo travel path.
The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the "travel"
column must therefore always be set to high enough
to ensure that the maximum setting of the throttle limit
control never restricts the full-throttle position that can
be obtained using throttle curve settings – which typically
means setting a value in the range +100% to 125%.
Input 9
Input10
Input 11
Th.L.12
Normal
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+125%
–travel+
The value on the (left-hand) minus side of the "travel"
column should be set so that the throttle limit control
can be used to safely cut out an electrical drive system
or close a carburetor down far enough that the glow
motor can also be cut out in conjunction with the
the – digital – C1 trim. You should thus (initially) leave this
value at +100%.
Furthermore, this variable "limiting" of throttle travel not
only gives you a convenient method for starting and
stopping the motor, but may also prove to have added
a not inconsiderable increase in safety! For example,
just imagine what could happen if you were carrying the
helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running and
you accidentally moved the C1 stick …
Accordingly, if the carburetor or speed controller is open
too far, an audible warning is heard as soon as you turn
on the transmitter, and the message below is shown on
the basic display:
Throttle
too
high !
Tip:
You can use the "Servo display" menu to observe
the inﬂuence of the throttle limit slider. This menu
can be accessed from almost any other menu by
simultaneously pressing the ef keys on the left touch
pad. Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the
throttle servo on the mc-32 HoTT!
Basic idle setting
Start by turning the throttle limiter – by default the
CTRL 6 proportional rotary control on the top left of the
transmitter – clockwise as far as it will go. Set the throttle/
collective pitch stick to the maximum pitch position and
also check the submenu "C1 ¼ Thr" on the menu …
"Helicopter mixers"
(pages 164 … 179)
… to ensure you have an active standard throttle curve.
If, for example, the standard throttle curve has already
been changed following the initialization of a model
memory, then this must be reset at least temporarily to
the values "Point 1 = -100%", "Point 3 = 0%" and "Point
5 = +100%":
C1 Thr
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ? –100%
Nor mal
Note:
As the throttle trim lever has no effect if the throttle
limiter is open, its position here is unimportant.
Now – without starting the glow motor – adjust the
throttle servo, preferably mechanically and optionally
using the servo 6 travel adjustment option in the
"Servo adjustments" menu, so that the carburetor is
completely open.
Now, close the throttle limiter completely by turning the
CTRL 6 proportional rotary control in an anti-clockwise
direction as far as it will go. Use the trim lever on the
throttle/collective pitch stick to move the trim position
marker to the "Motor OFF" position – see the ﬁgure in
the next column.
Note:
In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed,
the position of the throttle/collective pitch stick is
meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum
collective pitch position so that, when adjusting
carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be
used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter open)
and "Motor OFF" (throttle limiter closed).
Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the
carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just)
completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that the
throttle servo cannot travel mechanically to either of the
two extreme positions (full thr./Motor OFF).
To complete this basic conﬁguration, the idle trim
adjustment range must now be matched against point
"L" on the throttle curve. To do so, set point "L" for the
mixer "C1 ¼ Thr" on the "Helicopter mixers" menu
from about -65% to -70%:
C1 Thr
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point L –66%
Normal
To conﬁgure a smooth transition from the idle trim to the
throttle curve exactly, the collective pitch stick should
be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum position with
the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open.
The throttle servo must not move as well! Any further
adjustments to the throttle curve must of course be
made later in ﬂight.
The motor is always started with the throttle limiter fully
closed, whereby idle is set exclusively by using the trim
lever of the throttle/collective pitch stick.
Throttle limit in conjunction with digital trim
In conjunction with the CTRL 6 throttle limit rotary
control, the C1 trim sets a marker ( ) in the motor's
conﬁgured idle position, from which the motor can be
switched off via the trim. If, on the other hand, a further
Detail program description - Control adjust 105
marker is located at the end-point (see the partial
display screenshot shown below), then you can simply
click once to restore the original idle conﬁguration (see
also page 54).
This switch-off trim functions as an idle trim only in the
left half of the throttle limit rotary control's path. That
is: only within this range is the marker line set and also
stored.
Last idle position
Current trim position
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
stop
flt
Throttle limit control
0:00
0:00
K78
2.4
M RX0.0V
CTRL 6
Trim at
motor OFF position
For this reason, the marker is hidden and may even be
erased while the throttle limit rotary control points to the
right of its center position:
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
Stop
Flt
0:00
0:00
Throttle limit control
K78
M RX0.0V
2.4 CTRL 6
Notes:
• Since this trim function only takes effect in the
"Motor OFF" direction, the screen image shown
above changes appropriately if you alter the control
direction for the pitch minimum position of the C1
stick from "back" (as shown in the above image) to
106 Detail program description - Control adjust
"forward" in the "min. pitch" line on the menu "Base
setup model". The effects as shown also swap to
the other side if you swap pitch right (as shown in the
above screen images) to pitch left in the "Stick mode"
line on the "Base setup model" menu (see page 74).
• You can use the "Servo display" menu to observe
the inﬂuence of the throttle limit slider. This menu
can be accessed from almost any other menu by
simultaneously pressing the ef keys on the left
touch pad. Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls
the throttle servo on the mc-32 HoTT!
• A servo connected to output 12 can be used
independently of this for other purposes by means of
mixers, provided that you separate the servo from the
transmitter control at function input 12 on the "MIXonly channel" menu; see page 193.
• The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter
is shown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve
diagram on the second display page of the "Channel
1 ¼ Throttle" option on the "Helicopter mixers"
menu (see page 168). The output signal for the
throttle servo cannot be higher than the level set by
the horizontal bar:
The above diagram shows precisely this scenario: in
the above example, the throttle limit control is set to
-60% and thus restricts the movement of the throttle
servo to -60% of full travel.
Time delay for the throttle limiter
To safely avoid the carburetor opening too rapidly, you
should assign throttle limiter input 12 a time delay that
takes effect only in the direction of full throttle. This
applies especially if you are controlling the throttle limiter
using a switch and not the default CTRL 6 proportional
rotary control.
To set a delay time, proceed as follows: turn the throttle
limit control as far to the right as it will go or move the
relevant switch to the full-throttle position; then use the
arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to select the
"–time+" column:
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Th.L.12
Normal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
After brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad, you can then use the arrow keys on the left
or right touch pad to select your desired time delay, e. g.
5 seconds:
C1 Thr
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 2
0%
Nor mal
Throttle limiter
position
Throttle limit in conjunction with "Thr AR" on the "Stick mode" menu
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Th.L. 12
Nor mal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.0
– time +
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad or
the ESC key on the left touch pad to complete the setup
procedure.
As already explained on page 94, selecting "Thr AR" in
the "Thr." line on the menu …
"Stick mode"
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
(page 94)
TA
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
… makes the digital trim of the throttle/collective pitch
stick active only in the "Autorot" ﬂight phase. As a result,
in "normal" ﬂight phases, the C1 trim lever can be used
neither to control the motor's idling nor to stop the motor.
To ensure you still retain sufﬁcient adjustment options,
we recommend using "Expo throttle limit" here.
This sub-menu for this is found on the menu …
"Helicopter type"
HELI TYPE
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
Pitch min.
Expo thro lim.
(page 86)
limiter fully closes the carburetor, i.e. the motor is safely
switched off at this control position.
Following this, move the throttle limit control to its center
point and change the % value of the "Expo thro lim." line
in the "Helicopter type" menu (see page 86) until the
carburetor is in a position suitable for starting the motor.
Now start the motor, and adjust the value if necessary
until the motor idles reliably in this throttle limit control
position.
For the plus side of the "–travel+" column, increase the
value to +125% as described before, so that the fullthrottle position of the throttle servo is also released
reliably by the throttle limiter.
Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say,
4.0 seconds, so that the motor also picks up speed
gradually even if you move the proportional rotary
control too quickly to the right. Select the time preset
to correlate to how far the carburetor opens up at the
minimum collective pitch position. The value you set will
need ﬁne-tuning by practical testing.
no
right
back
0%
SEL
… and the exponential curve characteristic it conﬁgures
can adjust the control characteristics of the throttle limit
control so that the latter provides sufﬁciently ﬁne control
of the idle setting and can also stop the motor.
In this case you should turn the throttle limiter fully to
the left – unlike the previously described setting on the
"Control adjust" menu – and adjust the "–" side of the
"–travel+" column in the "Th.L.12" line so the throttle
Detail program description - Control adjust 107
Dual Rate / Expo
Conﬁgurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
between 0% and 125% of the normal full travel.
to the menu option "Dual Rate / Expo" in the multiExpo, on the other hand, enables ﬁner-grained control
function list:
of the model for values larger than 0% around the
center position of the primary control function (aileron,
Ser vo adjustment
elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full movement
Stick mode.
at the end-points of joystick travel. For values less than
Control adjust.
0%, the reverse is true: control increases around the
Dual Rate / Expo
neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points.
Channel 1 cur ve
The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within
Switch display
a total range of -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to
the normal, linear control characteristics.
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace,
offer another application. This is because the actual
––– 100%
Ail
control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational
Ele ––– 100%
angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control
Rud ––– 100%
surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually
DUAL
decreases – depending on the position of the linkage
point on the output disc. You can counteract this effect
SEL
with Expo values greater than 0%, so that angular travel
increases over proportionately as stick travel increases.
The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or
The Expo setting also affects the relevant control
controlling of control travels and characteristics for
function directly, whether this controls a single servo or
aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele) and rudder (Rud) (control
multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling
functions 2 … 4); it is switch-driven and ﬂight-phase
functions.
independent.
For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch
The "Channel 1 curve" menu (see p. 116f.) can be
assignment can be set up in any way desired, which
used to set an individual curve characteristic for control
therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions
function 1 (throttle/brake), featuring up to 6 separately
using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the
programmable points.
opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo
As with transmitter control travel adjustment on the
functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages
"Control adjust" menu, Dual Rate affects the relevant
– particularly for very high-speed models.
control function directly, whether it controls a single
The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics
servo or multiple servos – via mixer and coupling
directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical
functions of arbitrary complexity.
line follows the movement of the respective joystick, so
The control travels for each switch position can be set to
108 Detail program description - Control adjust
you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value
on the transmitter control.
Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo
settings
If you have set up ﬂight phases in the "Phase settings"
and "Phase assignment" menus and assigned each of
these a name – e. g. "normal" – the name in question
is displayed at the bottom left. In this scenario, you can
operate the corresponding switch to switch between
ﬂight phases.
Basic procedure
1. Switch to the desired ﬂight phase and then use
the arrow keys cd on the left or right touch pad
to select your chosen menu line, i.e. "Ail", "Ele" or
"Rud".
2. Using the arrow keys ef on the left or right touch
pad, select the right column or the as-yet invisible
column for Expo values (see page 27).
3. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad. The
corresponding input ﬁeld is shown highlighted.
4. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set your
chosen value.
5. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
complete data entry.
6. If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset any
settings made back to their respective default values.
Dual Rate function
If you want to be able to switch between two variants,
assign a switch in the column marked with the switch
icon
at the lower edge of the display, as described in
the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and
control switches" (page 52):
––– 100%
Ail
100%switch
HR
Move –––
desired
SR
100%
–––
to ON position
DUAL
(ext. switch: SET
normal
SEL
If you select the right-hand column at the lower edge
of the display marked with SEL and activate the value
ﬁeld by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or
right touch pad to alter the Dual Rate value shown in the
highlighted ﬁeld separately for each of the two switch
positions:
SEL
If you want to be able to switch between two variants,
assign a switch in the column marked with the switch
icon
at the lower edge of the display, as described in
the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and
control switches" (page 52):
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset a value
changed in the highlighted ﬁeld back to 100%.
Caution:
For safety reasons, you should not set Dual Rate values
lower than 20%.
Some examples of Dual Rate values:
Stick deflection
Dual Rate = 20%
Dual Rate = 50%
Dual Rate = 100%
Servo travel
Servo travel
Ail
100%
Ele ––– 100%
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
normal
SEL
–––
Ail
0%
0%
Ele –––
0%
Rud –––
EXPO
Ail
88%
Ele ––– 100%
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Servo travel
The switch so assigned appears on the display, together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching
direction.
With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu,
the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the
switch itself. However, this kind of control switch must
be deﬁned appropriately beforehand on the "Control
switches" menu (see page 123).
Whichever switch has been assigned …
the respective switch appears on the display together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective
direction when moved.
the word "DUAL" (shown roughly in the middle of the
display) changes to "EXPO":
3 111%
Ail
Ele ––– 100%
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Exponential function
If you want to be able to switch between two variants,
use the f key on the left or right touch pad to move
to the right beyond the Dual Rate value column, until
–––
Ail
0%
100%
Ele
–––
Move desired switch
SR
100%
–––position
to ON
DUAL SET
(ext. switch:
normal
SEL
The switch so assigned appears on the display, together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective
switching direction.
With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu,
the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the
switch itself. However, the control switch in question
must be deﬁned appropriately beforehand on the
"Control switches" menu (see page 123).
Whichever switch has been assigned …
the respective switch appears on the display together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective
direction when moved.
Detail program description - Control adjust 109
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset a value
changed in the highlighted ﬁeld back to 0%.
110 Detail program description - Control adjust
Servo travel
Servo travel
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals
100%.
Combining Dual Rate and Expo
If you have entered values for both the Dual Rate
and the Expo function, the effect from on function
is superimposed on the other, as shown in these
examples:
Stick deflection
Expo = –100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 125%
Servo travel
Ail
33%
0%
Ele –––
Rud –––
0%
EXPO
normal
SEL
Expo = –100%
Expo = +50%
Expo = +100%
Servo travel
If you select the right-hand column at the lower edge
of the display marked with SEL and activate the value
ﬁeld by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or
right touch pad to alter the Expo value shown in the
highlighted ﬁeld separately for each of the two switch
positions:
Now, for example, you have the opportunity to ﬂy with
a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one
direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the
other switching direction:
Some examples of Expo values:
Servo travel
Ail
0%
0%
Ele –––
Rud –––
0%
EXPO
normal
SEL
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo
To make an asymmetric setting, i. e. a Dual Rate or Expo
setting dependent on the direction of the respective
joystick, ﬁrst access the "Control switches" menu and
assign one of the C1 … C4 control switches – "C3",
for example – your chosen transmitter control, e. g.
control 3 for the elevator function. Leave the switching
point at the joystick's neutral position (0%), however.
Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select
the corresponding control function ("Elevator" in this
example).
Activate "Switch assignment" and tap the center
SET key brieﬂy on the right touch pad to switch to
the expanded switches. Here, use the arrow keys to
continue switching to the control switch "G3" that you
deﬁned previously:
––– 100%
Ail
HR
––– / 100%
Control
fix sw
SR
C1 –––
C2 100%
C3 C4 FX
DUAL
FXi C1i
C2i C3i C4i
normal
SEL
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to conﬁrm
the assignment of this switch:
––– 100%
Ail
Ele C3 100%
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
normal
SEL
Now use one of the arrow keys to move to the right
column and then move the elevator joystick to the
appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual
Rate value for each direction, e. g. for "Up elevator" …
––– 100%
Ail
77%
Ele C3
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
normal
SEL
… and "Down elevator":
––– 100%
Ail
Ele C3 111%
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Set the Expo values in the same way.
Detail program description - Control adjust 111
Dual Rate / Expo
Conﬁgurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
functions of arbitrary complexity.
to the menu option "Dual Rate / Expo" in the multiThe control travels for each switch position can be set to
function list:
between 0% and 125% of the normal full travel.
Expo, on the other hand, enables ﬁner-grained control
Ser vo adjustment
of the model for values larger than 0% around the center
Stick mode.
position of the primary control function (roll, pitch-axis,
Control adjust.
tail rotor), without forfeiting full movement at the endDual Rate / Expo
points of joystick travel. For values less than 0%, the
Channel 1 cur ve
reverse is true: control increases around the neutral
Switch display
position and diminishes towards the end-points. The
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a
the menu shown below:
total range of -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to
the normal, linear control characteristics.
Roll ––– 100%
Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace,
Nick ––– 100%
offer another application. This is because the actual
Tail ––– 100%
control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational
DUAL
angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control
surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually
SEL
decreases – depending on the position of the linkage
point on the output disc. You can counteract this effect
The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or
with Expo values greater than 0%, so that angular travel
controlling of control travels and characteristics for the
increases overproportionately as stick travel increases.
control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i. e. control
functions 2 … 4; it is switch-driven and ﬂight-phase
The Expo setting also affects the relevant control
independent.
function directly, whether this controls a single servo or
multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling
An individual curve characteristic for control function
functions.
1 (motor/collective pitch), featuring up to 6 separately
programmable points, can be set either on the "Channel For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch
1 curve" menu (page 119) or separately for throttle and
assignment can be set up in any way desired, which
collective pitch on the "Helicopter mixers" menu (see
therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions
p. 165f.).
using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the
opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo
As with transmitter control travel adjustment on the
functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages
"Control adjust" menu, Dual Rate affects the relevant
– particularly for very high-speed models.
control function directly, whether it controls a single
servo or multiple servos – via mixer and coupling
The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics
112 Detail program description - Control adjust
directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical
line follows the movement of the respective joystick, so
you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value
on the transmitter control.
Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo
settings
If you have set up ﬂight phases in the "Phase settings"
and "Phase assignment" menus and assigned each of
these a name – e. g. "normal" – the name in question
is displayed at the bottom left. In this scenario, you can
operate the corresponding switch to switch between
ﬂight phases.
Basic procedure
1. Switch to the desired ﬂight phase and then use the
arrow keys cd on the left or right touch pad to
select your chosen menu line, i.e. "Roll", "Nick" or
"Tail".
2. Using the arrow keys ef on the left or right touch
pad, select the right column or the as-yet invisible
column for Expo values (see page 27 ).
3. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad. The
corresponding input ﬁeld is shown highlighted.
4. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set your
chosen value.
5. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
complete data entry.
6. If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset any
settings made back to their respective default values.
Dual Rate function
If you want to be able to switch between two variants,
assign a switch in the column marked with the switch
highlighted ﬁeld separately for each of the two switch
positions:
Roll 3 111%
Nick ––– 100%
Tail ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Roll ––– 100%
100%switch
Nick
Move –––
desired
SR
100%
–––
to ON position
DUAL
(ext. switch: SET
nor mal
SEL
If you select the right-hand column at the lower edge
of the display marked with SEL and activate the value
ﬁeld by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or
right touch pad to alter the Dual Rate value shown in the
SEL
If you want to be able to switch between two variants,
assign a switch in the column marked with the switch
icon
at the lower edge of the display, as described
in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches
and control switches" (page 52):
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset a value
changed in the highlighted ﬁeld back to 100%.
Caution:
For safety reasons, you should not set Dual Rate values
lower than 20%.
Some examples of Dual Rate values:
Stick deflection
Dual Rate = 20%
Dual Rate = 50%
Dual Rate = 100%
Servo travel
Roll 3
100%
Nick ––– 100%
Tail ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Stick deflection
use the f key on the left or right touch pad to move
to the right beyond the Dual Rate value column, until
the word "DUAL" (shown roughly in the middle of the
display) changes to "EXPO":
0%
Roll –––
0%
Nick –––
0%
Tail –––
EXPO
Roll 3
88%
Nick ––– 100%
Tail ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Servo travel
The switch so assigned appears on the display, together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching
direction.
With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu,
the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the
switch itself. However, this kind of control switch must
be deﬁned appropriately beforehand on the "Control
switches" menu (see page 123).
Whichever switch has been assigned …
the respective switch appears on the display together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective
direction when moved.
Servo travel
icon
at the lower edge of the display, as described
in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches
and control switches" (page 52 ):
Stick deflection
Exponential function
If you want to be able to switch between two variants,
Roll –––
0%
100%
Nick
–––
Move desired switch
SR
100%
–––position
to ON
DUAL SET
(ext. switch:
normal
SEL
The switch so assigned appears on the display, together
with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective
switching direction.
With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu,
the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the
switch itself. However, the control switch in question
must be deﬁned appropriately beforehand on the
"Control switches " menu (see page 123).
Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective
switch appears on the display together with a switch icon
that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.
Detail program description - Control adjust 113
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset a value
changed in the highlighted ﬁeld back to 0%.
114 Detail program description - Control adjust
Servo travel
Servo travel
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals
100%.
Combining Dual Rate and Expo
If you have entered values for both the Dual Rate
and the Expo function, the effect from on function
is superimposed on the other, as shown in these
examples:
Stick deflection
Expo = –100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 125%
Servo travel
Roll 3
33%
0%
Nick –––
Tail –––
0%
EXPO
normal
SEL
Expo = –100%
Expo = +50%
Expo = +100%
Servo travel
If you select the right-handcolumn at the lower edge
of the display marked with SEL and activate the value
ﬁeld by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or
right touch pad to alter the Expo value shown in the
highlighted ﬁeld separately for each of the two switch
positions:
Now, for example, you have the opportunity to ﬂy with
a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one
direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the
other switching direction:
Some examples of Expo values:
Servo travel
0%
Roll 3
0%
Nick –––
0%
Tail –––
EXPO
normal
SEL
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo
To make an asymmetric setting, i. e. a Dual Rate or Expo
setting dependent on the direction of the respective
joystick, ﬁrst access the "Control switches" menu and
assign one of the C1 … C4 control switches – "C3", for
example – your chosen transmitter control, e. g. control
3 for the pitch-axis function. Leave the switching point
at the joystick's neutral position (0%), however. Now
return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the
corresponding control function ("Nick" in this example).
Activate "Switch assignment" and tap the center
SET key brieﬂy on the right touch pad to switch to
the expanded switches. Here, use the arrow keys to
continue switching to the control switch "G3" that you
deﬁned previously:
Roll ––– 100%
HR
––– / 100%
Control
fix sw
SR
C1 –––
C2 100%
C3 C4 FX
DUAL
FXi C1i
C2i C3i C4i
normal
SEL
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to conﬁrm
the assignment of this switch:
Roll ––– 100%
Nick C3 100%
Tail ––– 100%
DUAL
normal
SEL
Now use one of the arrow keys to move to the right
column and then move the pitch-axis joystick to the
appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual
Rate value for each direction, e. g. for "Pitch-axis up" …
Roll ––– 100%
77%
Nick C3
Tail ––– 100%
DUAL
normal
SEL
and "Pitch-axis down":
Roll ––– 100%
Nick C3 111%
Tail ––– 100%
DUAL
nor mal
SEL
Set the Expo values in the same way.
Detail program description - Control adjust 115
Channel 1 curve
Control characteristics for throttle/spoiler joystick
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen
to the menu option "Channel 1 curve" in the multigraph considerably simpliﬁes the process of setting and
function list:
adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you
set fewer reference points to begin with.
Ser vo adjustment
In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points –
Stick mode
namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick
Control adjust
travel ("L", low = -100% travel) and the top end of
Dual Rate / Expo
joystick travel ("H", high = +100% travel) – deﬁne a
Channel 1 cur ve
linear characteristic curve.
Switch display
First, switch to your chosen ﬂight phase, if necessary.
Open this menu item by pressing the center SET button
Setting reference points
in the right touch pad.
By moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake
joystick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current
Input
0%
joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on
Output
0%
the "Input" line (-100% to +100%). The point at which
Point ?
0%
this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and
normal
can be varied at the reference points within the range
-125% to +125%. The control signal altered in this
Since the carburetor response or the effect of the
way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling
airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make
functions.
compensatory adjustments to these in this menu.
In the example above, the joystick is at 0% of control
The menu therefore enables you to change the
travel and also generates an output signal of 0%, since
control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake joystick,
the characteristic curve is linear.
regardless of whether this control function affects the
Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between
servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects
the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance
multiple servos via various mixers.
between neighboring reference points must not be less
If you have used the "Phase settings" and "Phase
than approx. 25%.
assignment" menus (see pages 128 and 134) to
If necessary, use the left or right arrow key d to drag
specify ﬂight phases, this option can be adjusted per
the marker frame downwards, until it is at the "Point"
ﬂight phase. The ﬂight phase name – e. g. "normal" – is
line:
always shown at the bottom left of the screen.
The control curve can be deﬁned by up to 6 points
(termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere
116 Detail program description - Control adjust
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
0%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
Normal
Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in
the frame, then you can set the next reference point
by tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad.
Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the
value ﬁeld to the right of the reference point number is
highlighted:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
+50%
Input
+50%
Output
Point 1 +50%
Normal
The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4
reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is
irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously
renumbered automatically from left to right as they are
entered.
Deleting reference points
To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use
the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of
the reference point in question. As soon as the reference
point number and its associated value is shown on
the "Point" line (see screen image above), you can
activate the value ﬁeld on the "Point" line to highlight
it by simultaneously tapping the cd or ef keys on
the right touch pad (CLEAR) and then delete the value.
Complete the operation by brieﬂy tapping the center key
ESC on the left touch pad.
Changing reference point values
Move the joystick into the range of the reference point
that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 4 or "H" (high).
The number and current curve value of this point are
displayed. Activate the value ﬁeld by brieﬂy tapping
the center SET key on the right touch pad. The point
value ﬁeld is now highlighted and can be set within the
range -125% to +125%, and without inﬂuencing the
neighboring reference points.
Example:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
+50%
Input
–75%
Output
Point 2 –75%
Normal
In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has
been set to -75%.
Note:
If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference
point, please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick
position.
Trim point function
Alternatively, assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e.
highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys
ef on the left touch pad to jump to reference points
already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the
graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys
on the right touch pad can then be used to change the
reference point jumped to as described above, entirely
independently of the control position:
C1 Cur ve
Trim point
+50%
Input
–75%
Output
Point 2 –75%
Nor mal
Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center
key ESC on the left touch pad.
Trim offset function
Assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e. highlighted, you
can not only use the up or down arrow keys ef on the
left touch pad to jump to reference points already set
and change their values, but you can also use the cd
keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an
existing curve within the range ±25%:
C1 Cur ve
Trim offset
0%
Input
+50%
Output
Point 1 +50%
Nor mal
C1 Cur ve
Trim offset
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
0%
Normal
You can also exit from this function by tapping the center
key ESC on the left touch pad.
Trim x-axis function
This function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right
(f) arrow key on the right touch pad with an active
(i. e. highlighted) value ﬁeld. You can then use the arrow
keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point
horizontally or vertically as you wish.
C1 Cur ve
Trim X-axis
0%
Input
–33%
Output
0%
Point ?
Normal
Notes:
• If you reposition the point horizontally further away
from the current control position than approx. ±25%,
a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark
does not refer to the repositioned point, however:
instead, it signiﬁes that a further point can be set at
the current control position.
• Please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick
position and not to the position of the point.
Detail program description - Control adjust 117
Smoothing the Channel 1 curve
In the example below, sample reference points have
been set:
Reference point 1 to 0%
Reference point 2 to +25%
Reference point 3 to -75%
as described in the last section.
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
–50%
Input
0%
Output
Point 1
0%
Normal
This "jagged" curve proﬁle can be smoothed
automatically simply by pressing a button.
First – assuming a situation is conﬁgured as presented
above – tap the center ESC button on the left touch pad
to deactivate the value ﬁeld. Then use the arrow keys on
the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in
an upwards direction to the "Curve" line. Now brieﬂy tap
the center SET key on the right touch pad to activate the
value ﬁeld on the "Curve" line:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
–50%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
Normal
Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the
curve value from "off" to "on" and complete this setup
procedure by brieﬂy tapping the center SET the center
118 Detail program description - Control adjust
SET key on the right touch pad or the center ESC key
on the left touch pad:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve on
–50%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
Nor mal
Note:
The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes
only and are not at all representative of real throttle/
airbrake curves. For real-world application examples,
see the programming examples from page 242 onwards.
Channel 1 curve
Control characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stick
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen
to the menu option "Channel 1 curve" in the multigraph considerably simpliﬁes the process of setting and
function list:
adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you
set fewer reference points to begin with.
Ser vo adjustment
Please note that the curve characteristic you set
Stick mode
here acts as the input signal for speciﬁc mixers in the
Control adjust
"Helicopter mixers" menu (see page 164):
Dual Rate / Expo
Channel 1 cur ve
Switch display
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
Since the carburetor response or the effect of collective
pitch is often non-linear, you can make compensatory
adjustments to these in this menu.
The menu therefore enables you to change the control
characteristics of the motor/collective pitch stick,
regardless of whether this control function affects the
servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects
multiple servos via various mixers.
If you have used the "Phase settings" and "Phase
assignment" menus (see pages 128 and 134 ) to
specify ﬂight phases, this option can be adjusted per
ﬂight phase. The ﬂight phase name – e. g. "normal" – is
always shown at the bottom left of the screen.
The control curve can be deﬁned by up to 6 points
(termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere
Collective pitch
stick
"Helicopter mixers"
C1
curve
Collective pitch
C1 ¼ Thr
C1 ¼ Tail rotor
In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points –
namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick
travel ("L", low = -100% travel) and the top end of
joystick travel ("H", high = +100% travel) – deﬁne a
linear characteristic curve.
First, switch to your chosen ﬂight phase, if necessary.
Setting reference points
By moving the transmitter control (motor/collective pitch
stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph
between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current
joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on
the "Input" line (-100% to +100%). The point at which
this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and
can be varied at the reference points within the range
-125% to +125%. The control signal altered in this
way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling
functions.
In the example above, the joystick is at 0% of control
travel and also generates an output signal of 0%, since
the characteristic curve is linear.
Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between
the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance
between neighboring reference points must not be less
than approx. 25%.
If necessary, use the left or right arrow key d to drag the
marker frame downwards, until it is at the "Point" line:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
0%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
Normal
Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in
the frame, then you can set the next reference point
by tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad.
Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the
value ﬁeld to the right of the reference point number is
highlighted:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
+50%
Input
+50%
Output
Point 1 +50%
Normal
The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4
reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is
irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously
renumbered automatically from left to right as they are
entered.
Detail program description - Control adjust 119
Deleting reference points
To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use
the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity
of the reference point in question. As soon as the
reference point number and its associated value is
shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above),
you can activate the value ﬁeld on the "Point" line to
highlight it by simultaneously tapping the cd or ef
keys on the right touch pad (CLEAR) and then delete
the value. Complete the operation by brieﬂy tapping the
center key ESC on the left touch pad.
Changing reference point values
Move the joystick into the range of the reference point
that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 4 or "H" (high).
The number and current curve value of this point are
displayed. Activate the value ﬁeld by brieﬂy tapping
the center SET key on the right touch pad. The point
value ﬁeld is now highlighted and can be set within the
range -125% to +125%, and without inﬂuencing the
neighboring reference points.
Example:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
+50%
Input
–75%
Output
Point 2 –75%
Normal
In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has
been set to -75%.
Note:
If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference
120 Detail program description - Control adjust
point, please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick
position.
Trim point function
Alternatively, assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e.
highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys
ef on the left touch pad to jump to reference points
already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the
graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys
on the right touch pad can then be used to change the
reference point jumped to as described above, entirely
independently of the control position:
C1 Cur ve
Trim point
+50%
Input
–75%
Output
Point 2 –75%
Nor mal
Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center
ESC key on the left touch pad.
Trim offset function
Assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e. highlighted, you
can not only use the up or down arrow keys ef on the
left touch pad to jump to reference points already set
and change their values, but you can also use the cd
keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an
existing curve within the range ±25%:
C1 Cur ve
Trim offset
0%
Input
+50%
Output
Point 1 +50%
Normal
C1 Cur ve
Trim offset
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
0%
Normal
You can also exit from this function by tapping the center
ESC key on the left touch pad.
Trim x-axis function
This function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right
(f) arrow key n the right touch pad with an active (i. e.
highlighted) value ﬁeld. You can then use the arrow
keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point
horizontally or vertically as you wish.
C1 Cur ve
Trim X-axis
0%
Input
–33%
Output
0%
Point ?
Normal
Notes:
• If you reposition the point horizontally further away
from the current control position than approx. ±25%,
a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark
does not refer to the repositioned point, however:
instead, it signiﬁes that a further point can be set at
the current control position.
• Please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick
position and not to the position of the point.
Smoothing the Channel 1 curve
In the example below, sample reference points have
been set:
Reference point 1 to 0%
Reference point 2 to +25%
Reference point 3 to -75%
as described in the last section.
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
–50%
Input
0%
Output
Point 1
0%
Normal
This "jagged" curve proﬁle can be smoothed
automatically simply by pressing a button.
First – assuming a situation is conﬁgured as presented
above – tap the center ESC button on the left touch pad
to deactivate the value ﬁeld. Then use the arrow keys on
the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in
an upwards direction to the "Curve" line. Now brieﬂy tap
the center SET key on the right touch pad to activate the
value ﬁeld on the "Curve" line:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
–50%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
Nor mal
Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the
curve value from "off" to "on" and complete this setup
procedure by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the
right touch pad or the center ESC key on the left touch
pad:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve on
–50%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
Nor mal
Note:
The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes
only and are not at all representative of real throttle/
airbrake curves. For real-world application examples,
see the programming examples on pages 242 and 285.
Detail program description - Control adjust 121
Switch display
Displaying switch positions
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
page to the menu option "Switch display" in the multifunction list:
Channel 1 cur ve
Switch display
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Phase trim
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Control Switch
C1
C2
C3
C4
This feature is used to check the functions and give an
overview of SW switches 1 … 9 and the programmable
control switches.
If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed by
one of the display items changing from an OFF to an ON
symbol (or vice versa). To improve the legibility of this
screen, a closed switch ﬁeld is also shown highlighted
(i. e. it is shown on a dark background).
For control switches C1 … C4, activation of the
corresponding transmitter control – which must have
been previously assigned on the "Control switch" menu
– will reveal the control switch number and direction.
Note:
The switch numbering 1 to 9 as shown here
corresponds to the labeling of the switches on the
122 Detail program description - Control adjust
transmitter housing. The numbering of the switches
has no effect on the programming of the transmitter,
however.
Control switches
Programming the control switches
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
page to the menu option "Control switch" in the multifunction list:
Channel 1 cur ve
Switch display
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Phase trim
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
CONTROL SWITCH
0%
–––
C1 Gb1
C2 Gb1
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
With many functions, it makes sense not to trigger
their actuation by using one of the normal switches,
but to trigger them automatically by the speciﬁc, freely
programmable position of a transmitter control or joystick.
Typical applications:
• Activation or deactivation of an onboard glowplug
heating system depending on carburetor setting or
motor speed (in this case, the switch for glowplug
heating is controlled on the transmitter by a mixer)
• Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the
simple running time of electric motors
• Automated switch-off of a combi "aileron ¼ rudder"
mixer when extending the airbrakes, e. g. so as to
match the bank attitude of the model to the ground
slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction
of ﬂight also being affected by the rudder (if the mixer
were active).
• Lowering landing ﬂaps, adjusting elevator trim and/
or executing speciﬁc Dual Rate, Exponential and
Differential switchings when coming in to land, as
soon as the throttle joystick is moved beyond the
switching point. If required, a control switch can be
overridden using a separately assigned switch in the
5th column.
The mc-32 HoTT program is equipped with a total of
4 of these control switches ("C1" to "G4").
Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be assigned
you have the option not only of using the 9 possible
transmitter switches, but also of choosing and assigning
one of the "C1" … "C4" control switches from the list
of expanded switches – as described in the section
"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control
switches" on page 52.
Furthermore, combining a control switch with an
additional switch (as described later) also permits more
complex switching permutations.
5. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
move to the right and the column above STO.
6. Move the transmitter control to the desired switching
point and then brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the
right touch pad to save the switching point.
7. Complete the remaining settings such as switching
direction, etc.
8. Exit from the menu by using the center ESC key on
the left touch pad.
Basic procedure:
1. If no transmitter control is assigned, the
corresponding input ﬁeld in the column above the left
switch icon will be displayed empty.
2. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
select the line for the control switch you want (1 to 4).
3. Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad.
4. Move your selected transmitter control.
The associated transmitter control number appears
in the input ﬁeld of the column above the left switch
icon.
As an example, the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control
on the upper left is now to be assigned to the "C3"
control switch. Accordingly, turn the dial of this control in
any direction you want. As soon as this is detected, the
control name appears on the display:
Assigning a transmitter control to a control switch
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
select your chosen line (1 to 4). After completing the
activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping
the center SET key on the right touch pad, the following
message is shown:
CONTROL SWITCH
Gb1 desired
–75%
–––
G1 Move
Gb1 +75%
G2 control
–––
adj.
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
Detail program description - Control adjust 123
CONTROL SWITCH
0%
–––
C1 Ct6
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
Resetting a control switch back to "free"
To reset a control switch back to "free", make sure the
display is as below …
CONTROL SWITCH
Gb1 desired
–75%
–––
G1 Move
Gb1 +75%
G2 control
–––
adj.
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
… and then press the cd or ef keys on the right
touch pad (CLEAR) brieﬂy to erase the transmitter
control assignment.
Deﬁning the switching point
Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
move the marker frame into the STO (i.e. the STOre)
column.
Move the selected transmitter control to the position at
which the switching point – i. e. the switch between OFF/
ON – should trigger and brieﬂy tap the center SET key
on the right touch pad. The current position is displayed,
for example "+85%":
124 Detail program description - Control adjust
CONTROL SWITCH
–––
C1 Ct6 +85%
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
The switching point can be altered at any time by
tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad again.
Note:
Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter
control's travel end-point, since this makes reliable
switching impossible. Where a 3-stage switch (CTRL 9
and 10) is used to operate a control switch you should
therefore program the switching point beforehand using
one of the proportional rotary controls (CTRL 6 to 8):
First, assign the corresponding proportional control in
the 2nd column and set the switching point in such a
way that will ensure the subsequent conﬁguration for
the 3-stage switch will reliably exceed this value. If you
do not, the switching function will be unreliable, since
the control switch triggers only if a value unambiguously
fails to meet or exceeds the value set! To complete the
procedure, de-assign the transmitter control and then
assign the 3-stage switch.
Setting the switching direction
The switching direction of the control switch is changed
as required in the 4th column. Using the arrow key f on
the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame into
the SEL (i.e. the SELect) column. After brieﬂy tapping
the center SET key on the right touch pad, you can then
use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to set
the switching direction from "normal" to "reversed" and
vice versa:
CONTROL SWITCH
–––
C1 Ct6 +85%
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
CONTROL SWITCH
–––
C1 Ct6 +85%
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the switching direction
to "=>".
The current switch position of the control switch is
displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon next
to the number of the control switch.
Notes:
• In this example, control switch "C1" remains open
while transmitter control 6 (the throttle limiter for
a heli) is at less than +85% of full travel. It closes
once the switching point is exceeded, i.e. by a value
between +85% and the upper travel end-point.
• In the above example with the switching direction
reversed, control switch "C1" remains closed while
the transmitter control is at less than +85% of full
travel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded –
in this example, by a value between +85% and the
upper travel end-point – "C3" opens.
• FIf a control switch – e. g. "C1" – has multiple
assignments, you should bear in mind that the
switching direction set here applies to all C3
switches.
• The switch state can also be inverted by reversing
the control on the "Control adjust" menu.
Combining a control switch with one of the SW 1 …
9 switches
The control switch can be overridden by a further switch,
so that e. g. in certain ﬂight situations the function to be
triggered can be activated independently of the control
position and thus the position of the control switch.
Switch to the value ﬁeld in the 5th column, the column
above the right switch icon. In the simplest case, select
one of the switches SW 1 … 9 as described under
"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control
switches" on page 52. The number of this switch, e. g.
"2", appears on the display screen in the rightmost
column, together with a switch icon that indicates the
current state of the switch:
CONTROL SWITCH
+85%
C1 Ct6
C2
05%
–––
–––
C3
05%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
While this switch is open, the "C1" control switch is
active, i. e. it triggers at the switching point; if the switch
is closed, the control switch now remains permanently
closed as well, independently of the control position and
switching direction:
CONTROL SWITCH
C1 Ct6 –75%
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
This diversity of switching options certainly offers you
enough scope for specialized applications to suit any
type of model.
Combining two control switches
For more complex applications, however, it can prove
necessary to override this control switch with a second
control switch.
Example:
Instead of being assigned the CTRL 6 control as
before, the "C1" control switch is now assigned control
function 3 (transmitter control 3). The switching point
is at its center point, i.e. at 0%. The switch chosen in
the rightmost column is "C2", from the list of expanded
switches. We now assign one of the two center
proportional rotary controls to this control switch "C2",
on its own line – e. g. the right CTRL 8, whose switching
point lies at +50%:
CONTROL SWITCH
C1 Ct3
0%
C2
C2 Ct8
–––
+50%
–––
C3
0%
0%
C4
–––
STO SEL
Reading the switching directions given in the 4th column
of the display, control switch "C3" remains closed while
the joystick (K3) and/or "transmitter control 9" is/are
beyond the switching point.
Detail program description - Control adjust 125
How do I program a ﬂight phase?
The concept of ﬂight phase programming
General information on ﬂight phase programming
During a ﬂight, you will often want to apply different
settings – e.g. ﬂap or trim settings for a ﬁxed-wing
aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings for
a helicopter – at particular times in the ﬂight (e. g. takeoff, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With mc-32
HoTT, you can access such presets automatically using
switches or control switches.
Flight phases are also of great utility during ﬂight testing.
You can conﬁgure various set-ups and then switch
between them during the ﬂight: this enables you to
identify the most appropriate program set-up for your
model quickly and easily.
The basic programming procedure is a three-stage
process
1. First, you have to set up the different ﬂight phases,
i. e. you assign names to phases 1 … max. 7. Each
name is then shown in all phase-speciﬁc menus and
also on the basic display. To avoid abrupt transitions
when switching between the various phases, you can
also program a period of time during which a "soft"
transition to the next phase takes place.
For ﬁxed-wing aircraft programs, these settings
are made in the "Phase settings" menu. For heli
programs, you either start with the "Base setup
model" menu if you wish to set up autorotation or,
if not, you also start programming with the "Phase
settings" menu.
2. In the second stage, you use the "Phase
assignment" menu to set up the required "phase
switches".
126 Detail program description - Control adjust
3. Once these are set, you can then move to the ﬂight
phase-dependent menus (see the tables below) to
start programming the settings for the individual ﬂight
phases.
List of ﬂight phase-relevant menus for ﬁxed-wing
programs:
Menu
Page
"Control adjust"
96
"Dual Rate / Expo"
108
"Channel 1 curve"
116
"Phase settings"
128
"Phase assignment"
134
"Phase trim"
136
"Non-delayed channels"
137
"Fl. phase timers"
142
"Wing mixers"
146
"MIX active/phase"
192
List of ﬂight phase-relevant menus for helicopter
programs:
Menu
Page
"Control adjust"
100
"Dual Rate / Expo"
112
"Channel 1 curve"
119
"Phase settings"
132
"Phase assignment "
134
"Non-delayed channels"
137
"Fl. phase timers"
142
"Helicopter mixers"
164
"MIX active/phase"
192
All other menus are model-speciﬁc and thus cannot
be programmed separately for each ﬂight phase.
Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus apply
uniformly to all ﬂight phases for that speciﬁc model.
In some cases you may wish to use the "Suppress
menus" menu (see page 67) to remove the non-speciﬁc
menus from the multi-function list when programming
ﬂight phases. A practical example of ﬂight phase
programming can be found on page 256).
Detail program description - Control adjust 127
Phase settings
Setting up ﬂight phases
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
page to the menu option "Phase settings" in the multifunction list:
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Phase trim
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
this menu.
Within one model memory, the mc-32 HoTT lets you
program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for various
conditions met during the ﬂight. The grouped settings
are typically termed "ﬂight phases" and are programmed
in the corresponding menus.
Depending on the setting "Throttle min. forward/back"
or "None" in the "Motor on C1" line of the "Model type"
menu, your transmitter's display will look as follows after
accessing the "Phase settings" menu …
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
… either the columns "Motor" and "Sw. time" (switch
time) to the right of the column "ph. Tim." (ﬂ. phase
timers) or only the column "Sw. time" will be available for
your settings.
128 Detail program description - Control adjust
Setting up ﬂight phases
When you set up ﬂight phases for ﬁxed-wing aircraft
models, you start with this menu. You assign individual
phases a name and also assign a period of time for a
(soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending
on your model and your settings – switch times much
longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can
also set up several phases with names and transition
times even if you don't currently have a use for them,
since the decision as to which of the "occupied" phases
you activate is made only on the "Phase assignment"
menu, (page 134) when setting "phase switches".
The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which
one of the phases 1 … 7 has already been assigned to
a switch, plus the current status of that switch:
Symbol
Meaning
–
No switch assigned
Phase can be accessed via switch
¾
Indicates the phase currently active
Note:
The "Copy ﬂight phase" option on the "Copy / Erase"
menu is a useful aid when programming the various
ﬂight phases. First, you need to determine the
parameters for a speciﬁc ﬂight phase; these are then
copied to the next ﬂight phase, where they can then be
modiﬁed as appropriate.
"Name" column
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad
and use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to
assign the phases your require – phase 1 to max. phase
7 – appropriate names from the selection list.
The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is
entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish.
Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1",
the "Normal phase", which is always active if …
• no phase switch is set on the "Phase assignment"
menu or if
• no phase has been assigned to speciﬁc combinations
of switches.
The deﬁnition of the phase name "Normal" could
therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1".
The names themselves have absolutely no technical
signiﬁcance for programming; their only purpose is to
help you to identify which phase is active at any time
and are thus displayed in all ﬂight phase-dependent
menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.
"ph. Tim." column
In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen
display, other timers are also available, whose settings
are conﬁgured on the "Fl. phase timers" menu
(page 142).
Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2
The ﬂight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1" and
"Time2" run only in the ﬂight phase to which they have
been assigned in this menu. During other ﬂight phases
they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/
start switch then has no effect.
The lap counter, once started, continues to run through
changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped
during any ﬂight phase via the center ESC key on the
left touch pad.
While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap"
and a switch (SW), the two timers "Time1" and "Time2"
have the following meaning:
Time1 Only the times are measured at which the switch
or control switch assigned in the "Lap timer/
timer" line of the "Fl. phase timers" menu (see
page 142) is "closed". The frequency at which
the switch is activated is shown on the basic
display. This counter ﬁeld is highlighted as soon
as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened",
i. e. the timer is stopped:
GRAUBELE
#01
«Speed »
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
00
Lap
K78 0:00.0
5.5V
If required, you can then use the arrow keys to
access and read the times at which switches
were made.
Application:
Measurement of e. g. motor switch-on times, if
the same switch also actuates the motor.
Time2 "Time2" stores both the "Off" and the "On" times
for the associated switch, i. e. each actuation of
the switch restarts the time count again and the
counter is incremented by "1".
Each time count can be stopped by using the
center ESC key on the right touch pad, without
activating the switch itself. Activating the switch,
in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts
the "Time2" timer.
In order to read out the time memory by using the
arrow keys, the "Time2" timer must ﬁrst be stopped
by using the ESC key on the right touch pad.
Application:
In addition to the motor runtimes, for example,
the unpowered glide times between these could
also be recorded.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the display of stopped
timers on the basic display.
"Motor" column
Note:
This column is only available if "Forward/back" is
entered on the line "Motor on C1" on the "Model type"
menu.
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Nor mal
+ Launch
+ Dist.
–
–
Name
¾
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
motor
"Yes" The motor connected to receiver output 1 will
be controlled by the C1 joystick (throttle/brake
stick).
The brake system to be set up on the "Wing
mixers" menu is deactivated:
BRAKE SETTINGS
off
Normal
normal
"No"
The motor connected to receiver output 1
is decoupled from the C1 joystick (throttle/
brake stick) and is held in its OFF position – as
speciﬁed by the setting "Throttle min. forward /
back" – automatically.
The brake system to be set up on the "Wing
mixers" menu is activated and is actuated by
the C1 joystick.
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
Normal
WK2
AILE WK
Note:
The settings available depend on the number of control
surface servos selected on the line "Ailerons/Camberchanging ﬂaps in the "Model type" menu.
"Sw. time" column
When you switch between ﬂight phases, it is advisable
to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft"
transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly,
there is also the option of specifying different times for
different switches – e. g. from a phase into Phase 3 and
the same phase into Phase 1.
Detail program description - Control adjust 129
Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
move the marker frame over the "ph. Tim." column – and
"Motor" column, if applicable – to the right.
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Nor mal
+ Launch
+ Dist.
–
–
Name
¾
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
Sw.time
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
highlight the value ﬁeld. You can then select switch times
between 0 and 9.9 s in this ﬁeld.
Example:
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Nor mal
+ Launch
+ Dist.
–
–
Name
¾
4.0s
3.0s
2.0s
0.1s
0.1s
Sw.time
The switch time is set to 4.0 s when switching from any
phase to Phase 1 "Normal".
When switching from e. g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the
switch time is set to 2.0 s and to 3.0 s when switching
from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 "Launch".
Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when
(e. g.) switching between highly contrasting ﬂight phases,
such as e. g. between aerobatics and normal ﬂight.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the time to 0.1 in the
active value ﬁeld.
130 Detail program description - Control adjust
Note:
The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all
settings that are speciﬁc to ﬂight phases, and thus to
all mixers activated in the "Wing mixers" menu (see
page 146). Accordingly, the transition between ﬂight
phase-speciﬁc mixers does not occur abruptly. If you
want individual servos to be switched without a delay,
however, deﬁne these accordingly in the "Non-delayed
channels" menu (see page 137).
Detail program description - Control adjust 131
Phase settings
Setting up ﬂight phases
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
page to the menu option "Phase settings" in the multifunction list:
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
Auto
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
¾
Autorot
–
–
–
–
Name
ph.Tim.
Within one model memory, the mc-32HoTT lets you
program up to 6 discrete groups of settings for various
conditions met during the ﬂight. These are in addition to
the auto-rotation ﬂight phase that can be set up in the
"Base setup model" menu. The grouped settings are
typically termed "ﬂight phases" and are programmed in
the corresponding menus.
Setting up ﬂight phases
When you set up ﬂight phases for helicopter models,
you start with this menu. You assign individual phases
a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft)
transition into each phase. Note that – depending on
your model and your settings – switch times much longer
than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also
set up several phases with names and transition times
132 Detail program description - Control adjust
even if you don't currently have a use for them, since
the decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you
activate is made only on the "Phase assignment" menu
(page 134) when setting "phase switches".
The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which
one of the phases 1 … 6 has already been assigned to
a switch, plus the current status of that switch:
Symbol
Meaning
–
No switch assigned
Phase can be accessed via switch
¾
Indicates the phase currently active
Note:
The "Copy ﬂight phase" option on the "Copy / Erase"
menu is a useful aid when programming the various
ﬂight phases. First, you need to determine the
parameters for a speciﬁc ﬂight phase; these are then
copied to the next ﬂight phase, where they can then be
modiﬁed as appropriate.
"Name" column
The ﬁrst line, and thus the ﬂight phase with top priority,
is reserved for auto-rotation ﬂight – see the "Base setup
model" menu. Accordingly, the predeﬁned name cannot
be changed.
Use the arrow keys to move to the line "Pha1". Brieﬂy
tap the center SET key on the right touch pad and use
the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to assign
each of the phases your require – phase 1 to max.
phase 6 – an appropriate name from the selection list.
The order in which phases 1 to max. 6 are assigned is
entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish.
Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1",
the "Normal phase", which is always active if …
• no phase switch is set on the "Phase assignment"
menu or if
• no phase has been assigned to speciﬁc combinations
of switches.
The deﬁnition of the phase name "Normal" could
therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1".
The names themselves have absolutely no technical
signiﬁcance for programming; their only purpose is to
help you to identify which phase is active at any time
and are thus displayed in all ﬂight phase-dependent
menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.
"ph. Tim." column
In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen
display, other timers are also available, whose settings
are conﬁgured on the "Fl. phase timers" menu
(page142).
Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2
The ﬂight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1" and
"Time2" run only in the ﬂight phase to which they have
been assigned in this menu. During other ﬂight phases
they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/
start switch then has no effect.
The lap counter, once started, continues to run through
changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped
during any ﬂight phase via the center ESC key on the
left touch pad.
While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap"
and a switch (SW), the two timers "Time1" and "Time2"
have the following meaning:
Time1 Only the times are measured at which the switch
or control switch assigned in the "Lap timer/
timer" line of the "Fl. phase timers" menu (see
page 142) is "closed". The frequency at which
the switch is activated is shown on the basic
display. This counter ﬁeld is highlighted as soon
as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened",
i. e. the timer is stopped:
STARLET
#01
«Speed »
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
00
Lap
0:00.0
K78
5.5V
If required, you can then use the arrow keys to
access and read the times at which switches
were made.
Application:
Measurement of (e. g.) ﬂight phases with
increased motor speed, if the same switch is
used to actuate ﬂight phase switching.
Time2 "Time2" stores both the "Off" and the "On" times
for the associated switch, i. e. each actuation of
the switch restarts the time count again and the
counter is incremented by "1".
Each time count can be stopped by using the
center ESC key on the right touch pad, without
activating the switch itself. Activating the switch,
in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts
the "Time2" timer.
In order to read out the time memory by using
the arrow keys, the "Time2" timer must ﬁrst be
stopped by using the ESC key on the right touch
pad.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the display of stopped
timers on the basic display.
"Sw. time" column
When you switch between ﬂight phases, it is advisable
to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft"
transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly,
there is also the option of specifying different times for
different switches – e. g. from a phase into Phase 3 and
the same phase into Phase 1.
For safety reasons, however, the transition to the autorotation ﬂight phase ALWAYS occurs without any time
delay. The angled bracket ">" in the "Sw. time" column at
the end of the "Auto" line indicates that a delay can be
set when transitioning FROM (!) auto-rotation INTO (!)
another phase.
Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
move the marker frame over the "ph. Tim." column to the
right.
Auto
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Autorot
+ Nor mal
+ Hover
– Speed
–
Name
¾
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
Sw.time
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
highlight the value ﬁeld. You can then select switch times
between 0 and 9.9 s in this ﬁeld.
Example:
Auto
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Autorot
+ Normal
+ Hover
– Speed
–
Name
¾
5.5s
3.0s
2.0s
4.0s
0.1s
Sw.time
A delay of 5.5 s applies when switching FROM autorotation into any other phase. A delay of 0.0 s always
applies when switching TO auto-rotation.
The switch time is 3.0 s when switching from any other
phase to Phase 1 "Normal".
When switching from e. g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the
switch time is set to 4.0 s.
Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when
(e. g.) switching between highly contrasting ﬂight phases,
such as e. g. between aerobatics and normal ﬂight.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the time to 0.1 in the
active value ﬁeld.
Note:
The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all
settings that are speciﬁc to ﬂight phases, and thus to
all mixers activated in the "Wing mixers" menu (see
page 146). Accordingly, the transition between ﬂight
phase-speciﬁc mixers does not occur abruptly. If you
want individual servos to be switched without a delay,
however, deﬁne these accordingly in the "Non-delayed
channels" menu (see page 137).
Detail program description - Control adjust 133
Phase assignment
Setting up ﬂight phases
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option "Phase assignment" in the multifunction list:
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Phase trim
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior.
A B
C D E F
1 nor mal
will have set up names for your phases. On this menu –
which is identical for both model types – you must now
specify the switches or switch combinations that you
want to use to trigger each phase. One exception for heli
menu: one of the two auto-rotation switches must be set
on the menu "Base setup model".
Please note the following priorities:
• If you have not yet assigned any ﬂight phase
switches to any phase names, you will always ﬁnd
yourself in ﬂight phase "1". Accordingly, by the time
you start programming ﬂight phases, you should
therefore have already given this ﬂight phase the
phase name "Normal".
• Independently of the switch positions of phases
assigned to switches using this menu, the autorotation phase – applicable only to the "Helicopter"
model type and whose switch is assigned on the
"Base setup model" menu – always (!) takes
precedence. Accordingly, as soon as the autorotation switch in question is activated, the following
warning appears:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior.
A B
Autorot D E F
always be assigned from the center point position.
For this reason, use switch "A" and/or switch "B" only if
you wish to change from any other ﬂight phase – apart
from the heli's auto-rotation phase – directly into the
phase that is assigned to this switch.
Programming ﬂight phase switches
Once you have conﬁgured your desired switch position,
"A" to "F", using the arrow keys on the left or right
touch pad, a switch (whether a "normal" switch or an
expanded switch) is then assigned as described in the
section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and
control switches" (page 52).
• The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant:
you must ensure only that you assign what are, for
you, the "correct" switches. (In the heli program, for
example, you should also take care to ensure you do
not use this menu to re-assign any auto-rotation switch
already assigned on the " Base setup model" menu.)
Example: 4 ﬂight phases with phase priority
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior.
C D E F
A B
6 7
1 Normal
Note:
A phase name appears to the right of the phase number
at the bottom right of the display only if you have
assigned the name beforehand on the "Phase settings"
menu.
On the "Phase settings" menu – described above
separately for ﬁxed-wing and helicopter models – you
134 Detail program description - Control adjust
1 nor mal
• Phase switch "A" is given priority over all subsequent
switch positions, from "B" to "F"
• Phase switch "B" is given priority over all subsequent
switch positions, from "C" to "F"
• The two 3-stage switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, should
Assigning ﬂight phases to switch positions
You have now assigned names to the ﬂight phases (1
… max. 7) on the "Phase settings" menu and also
programmed switches on this menu, but … at the bottom
right of the display screen, you only see "<1 normal >" –
regardless of the positions the switches are in!?
Use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to
move the marker frame down and to the right and then
brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior.
C D E F
A B
6 7
1 Nor mal
Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches
that you have assigned, and assign one of the ﬂight
phase names from the list you selected beforehand on
the "Phase settings" menu to this switch position or
combination.
Here, for example, we assign the "Launch" phase to the
closed ("I") priority switch "A" …
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
prior.
combi
C D E F
A B
6 7
2 Launch
… if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase
regardless of the "C" … "F" switch positions, because
the same switch activates an electric motor, etc.
Use the same approach to set the other switches or
combinations of switches.
Theoretically – for the situation where all three are
closed – you could use the three single switches shown
in the example to deﬁne an additional ﬁfth ﬂight phase
on the "Phase settings" menu. However, since this
example assumes just four ﬂight phases, you can leave
the default phase name as "1 Normal" for this switch
position.
You can leave this menu in the familiar way by pressing
the center ESC key on the left touch pad.
Tips:
• If you have named more phases than you currently
have switches deﬁned for then this is not really
problematic. You can repeat and change your switch
assignment as you wish at any point in time. And you
can also name additional phases at any time and
then assign switches to them.
• When assigning switches, check whether the
switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure
that you avoid duplicate assignments.
Important notice:
Before a phase switch is assigned, the model
settings conﬁgured are now to be found in the ﬂight
phase "1 Normal", i. e. all ﬂight phase-dependent
menus are reset to the standard conﬁgurations for
all other ﬂight phases.
To avoid having to start from scratch in every ﬂight
phase, you can copy over these standard settings
by using the command "Copy ﬂight phase" on the
"Copy / Erase" menu to replace them with ﬂight
data obtained from the "Normal" ﬂight phase. You
then need only to make further ﬂight phase-speciﬁc
changes to the settings.
Detail program description - Control adjust 135
Phase trim
Flap settings speciﬁc to ﬂight phases
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option "Phase trim" in the multi-function
list:
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Phase trim
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
¿ Normal
normal
0%
ELEV
Depending on the settings made on the "Aile/ﬂaps"
line from the "Model type" menu (page 82) and on the
"Phase settings" menu, this menu makes available a
set of control functions – 1 for EL …
¿ Normal
Normal
0%
ELEV
… and up to 4 for EL, RU, AI and AI2 – for the
conﬁguration of trim settings that are speciﬁc to ﬂight
phases. The setting of the ﬂight phase switches – to be
deﬁned beforehand on the "Phase assignment" menu
136 Detail program description - Control adjust
– determines the line that is chosen. An asterisk marks
the ﬂight phase currently active. At the same time, the
name of the respective ﬂight phase is also shown at the
bottom left of the screen. You can enter settings only for
the currently active ﬂight phase, e. g.:
Nor mal
¿ Launch
Ther mal
Dist.
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Launch
ELEV
AILE
"ELEV" column In this column, you can store a phasespeciﬁc elevator trim setting.
Important notice:
Settings made in this column have an
immediate effect on elevator trim and,
accordingly, the trim setting display. In
turn, the elevator trim lever affects the
values of this column either "globally"
or "phase-speciﬁcally", depending on
the "global/phase" setting made on the
"Elev" line of the "Stick mode" menu.
"AILE", "FLAP", "FLAP2"
The values in these columns (max. 3)
are identical to those in the "Fl.pos" (ﬂap
position) line on the "Multi-ﬂap menu"
within the "Wing mixers" menu. For this
reason, any changes made always affect
the other menu directly – and vice versa.
Normal
¿ Launch
Thermal
Dist.
Launch
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP FLAP2
Note:
If present, you can access the "FLAP" and "FLAP2"
columns by using the arrow keys ef on the left or right
touch pad to go beyond the right edge of the screen and
back, as appropriate.
After selecting the appropriate column, by using the
arrow keys on the left or right touch pad and then
brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right touch
pad, you can then use the arrow keys to set the values
independently of one another, within a range of ±150%.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the highlighted value ﬁeld back to 0%.
Non-delayed channels
Channel-dependent delays to switching
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option "Phase trim" in the multi-function
list:
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Phase trim
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to
move the "z" onto the corresponding channel and then
brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad.
The switch icon changes from "normal" to "non-delay"
and vice versa. For example:
NONDELAYED CHANNELS
non-delay
nor mal
7 8 9 10 11 12
Control switch
Phase settings
Phase assignment
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
Nor mal
Note:
To access channels 7 … 12, follow the description on
page 27: use the arrow keys ef on the left or right
touch pad to go beyond the right edge of the screen and
back, as appropriate.
NONDELAYED CHANNELS
non-delay
normal
1 2 3 4 5 6
Nor mal
On the "Phase settings" menu, you will have set the
necessary switch times for ﬂight phase transitions.
In this menu, you can now deactivate the transition delay
set previously, per ﬂight phase and for individual control
channels – e. g. for the motor channel for electric models
or heading-lock systems for heli gyros, etc.
Switch over to the corresponding ﬂight phase. This is
shown at the bottom left of the display.
Detail program description - Control adjust 137
Timers (general)
Timers on the basic display
The default transmitter display shows a total of three
timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on the
left of the display, plus a "Top" and a "Centr" timer on the
right of the display:
GRAUBELE
#01
5.9V
0:00h
0:00
0:00
Stop
Flt
K78
HoTT
0.0V
A further, ﬂight-phase speciﬁc timer can also be
conﬁgured, depending on your settings in the two menus
"Fl. phase timers" (page 142) and "Phase settings"
(pages 128 and 132). This optional ﬂight phase timer
– such as the lap time timer – appears underneath the
"Centr" (ﬂight time) timer:
GRAUBELE
#01
«Speed »
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
00
Lap
K78 0:00.0
5.5V
To conﬁgure the "Top" and/or "Centr" timer, use the
arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to access the
menu option "Timers (general)" in the multi-function list:
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Wing mixers
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
138 Detail program description - Control adjust
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Helicopter mixer
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to open
the menu shown below:
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr : Flight
12:34h –––
1:23h
0:00
0:00
Timer
"Model time"
This timer shows the currently recorded total access
time to the currently active model memory. If necessary,
you can also inﬂuence the automated time recording
using a switch assigned at the right of the display, and
use this switch to activate and deactivate the "Model
time" timer as required. This switch is assigned (and
erased again as required) as described in the section
"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control
switches" on page 52.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the time to "0:00h".
"Batt. time"
This operating hours timer records the transmitter's
total switch-on time since the last time the battery was
charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery. A
switch cannot be assigned to this function.
This timer is automatically reset to "0:00h" when the
transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is
signiﬁcantly higher than the last time it was switched on,
e. g. as a result of a charge process or the installation of
a replacement battery.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will also reset the time here to
"0:00h".
"Top" and "Centr"
These two timers are located at the top right of the basic
display (see the screen image immediately to the left)
and can be assigned a different name; their function and
mode of operation varies according to the name you
give them. Independently of the name each is given,
the "Top" and "Centr" timer can be programmed to run
any length of time forwards or backwards – see further
below.
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad,
select the line for the "Top" or "Centr" timer. Tap the
center SET key on the right touch pad brieﬂy to activate
the selection of a timer type:
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr :Flight
12:34h –––
1:23h
0:00
0:00
SEL
Timer
Now use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to
select your desired timer and complete your selection
by once again tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad:
"Stop (watch)" or "Motor (runtime)"
Both of these two timer variants can be started and
stopped using any of the available switches.
The timer deﬁned as "Stopwatch" or "Motor runtime"
sums the "ON" times continually, so that once your
aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all
switch "ON" times since the timer was last reset.
"Flight (time)"
This timer is designed for measuring the ﬂight time: it
can be started with an assigned switch and stopped
(once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic
display by tapping the center ESC key on the left touch
pad. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to its
starting value by tapping the cd or ef keys on the
right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR).
If you wish to assign a control switch, you must ﬁrst
deﬁne the switch on the "Control switch" menu and
specify the switching point along the travel of the
transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then
be started by "opening the throttle" or by opening the
throttle limiter for heli models.
Note:
The combination of the ﬂight time timer and stopwatch
means that you can glance at the display at any time
and see how long you have been ﬂying since the timers
were started, plus the total motor runtime within this
particular period of ﬂight time.
"Frame(time)"
The timeframe timer is intended primarily for use by
competition pilots, who are frequently given a timeframe
within which they must complete certain tasks. The timer
is started in precisely the same way as the ﬂight time
timer. To stop the timer, ﬁrst ensure the timer switch is
at its OFF position. Then, press and hold the arrow keys
cde,and then press the center ESC key.
Switch assignment
Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
move the marker frame next to the triangle as shown in
the screen image shown below to the rightmost column
of the relevant line:
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr : Flight
SEL
12:34h –––
1:23h
0s –––
0s –––
Alar m
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr : Flight
SEL
12:34h –––
1:23h
0s C1
0s C1
Alarm
The stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below the
switching point and resume running above the switching
point. The same is not true for the ﬂight time timer,
however, which also starts the ﬁrst time the switching
point is exceeded. It can be stopped (by tapping the
center ESC key on the left touch pad) only once the
stopwatch is stopped; it can then be reset to its starting
value by tapping the cd or ef keys on the right
touch pad at the same time (CLEAR).
Here, you assign a switch as described in the section
"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control
switches" (page 52).
Typical application:
The "stop watch" and "ﬂight timer" are both to be started
simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as a userdeﬁned switching point is exceeded.
For this purpose, you will deﬁne e.g. "C1" on the
"Control switch" menu (page 123 ). To complete the
procedure, you select this from the expanded switches
(see the section "Assigning transmitter controls,
switches and control switches" on page 52) and assign
it to both these lines:
Detail program description - Control adjust 139
Switching between "forwards" and "backwards"
Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)
Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown on
the basic display is started with the initial value of "0:00",
then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and 59 s and
then restart from 0:00.
Timer runs backwards (countdown function)
In the – left – minutes ﬁeld, select a start time between 0
and 180 min …
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr : Flight
12:34h –––
1:23h
180:00
0:00
SEL
Timer
… and in the – right – seconds ﬁeld, select a start time
between 0 and 59 s (or any combination of these):
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr : Flight
12:34h –––
1:23h
180:59
0:00
SEL
Timer
Procedure
1. Select the desired input ﬁeld using the arrow keys
ef on the left or right touch pad.
2. Now tap SET in the center of the right touch pad.
3. Make your time selection in the highlighted minutes
or seconds ﬁeld, using the arrow keys on the right
touch pad.
140 Detail program description - Control adjust
4. Complete your input by tapping the center SET key.
5. If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset any
settings made back to "0" or "00".
6. After switching back to the basic display (by tapping
the center ESC key on the left touch pad as many
times as required), make sure the stopwatch is
stopped and then tap the cd or ef keys on
the right touch pad (CLEAR) so that the stopwatch
switches over to the "timer" function. Look to the top
right in the following screen image:
GRAUBELE
#01
5.9V
0:00h
Stop
Flt
K78
10:01
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
After the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch
starts at the initial value set and runs backwards
("countdown function"). Once the timer reaches zero it
does not stop, but continues to run to enable you to read
off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00. To make this
absolutely clear, the timer is shown highlighted.
"Alarm" timer
The "Alarm" column is accessed by using the arrow
key f on the left or right touch pad to move the marker
frame over the "Timer column to the right. In the
"Alarm" column, you can deﬁne a time between 5 and
90 seconds (in 5-second increments) before zero is
reached: at this point an audible signal will be emitted,
which eliminates the need for you to check the screen
continually during the ﬂight.
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr : Flight
SEL
12:34h –––
1:23h
0s –––
0s –––
Alarm
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad
at the same time (CLEAR), this will reset any settings
made back to "0 s".
Audible signal sequence
30 s before zero:
Triple beep
Single beep every two seconds
20 s before zero:
Double beep
Single beep every two seconds
10 s before zero:
Single beep
Single beep every second
5 s before zero:
Single, higher-frequency beep
every second
Zero:
Extended audible signal and
screen switches to highlighted
display
Resetting timers when stopped
Tapping the cd keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the display of
previously stopped timers on the basic display.
Notes:
• Timers that are running backwards are shown on the
basic display with a ﬂashing colon (:) between the
minutes and the seconds ﬁelds.
• A typical application, "Timer activation via the C1
joystick", can be found on page 252).
• If you change timer functionality, these changes are
made active by pausing the timer(s) and then tapping
the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at the
same time (CLEAR) to reset them.
• Remember that the timer switches also remain active
during programming.
• On the basic display, simultaneously tapping the
cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at the same
time (CLEAR) will reset the previously stopped timer
to its programmed initial value – see the "Alarm"
timer section.
Detail program description - Control adjust 141
Fl. phase timers
Selecting and setting
The discussion of the "Phase settings" menu on page
134 has already described how timers can be assigned
to a ﬂight phase. The same section has also described
the properties of "Time1" and "Time2". This section
now proceeds to describe "Clk 1, 2 and 3", plus the "lap
counter/timetable" timer.
The additional, ﬂight phase-speciﬁc timer selected is
displayed on the basic display underneath the "center"
timer, as shown below:
GRAUBELE
#01
«Speed »
5.2V
2:22h
Stop
Flt
Clk1
K78
0:00
0:00
0:00
HoTT
5.5V
In this menu …
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Wing mixers
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
Non-delayed chan
Timers (general)
Fl. phase timers
Helicopter mixer
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
… you can now program "Clks 1 … 3" as stopwatches
(i. e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm
timers (i. e. timers that run backwards). You can assign
142 Detail program description - Control adjust
any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the
"lap counter/timetable" timer:
0s
0:00
Timer1
0s
Timer2
0:00
0s
Timer3
0:00
Lap time/tim tab
Lap Display
SEL SEL
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
The ﬂight phase timers "Clks 1 … 3" and the
"Time1"/"Time2" timers (described in the "Phase
settings" section, pp. 128 and 132) run only in the ﬂight
phase to which they have been assigned. They are also
shown as appropriate on the basic display. During other
ﬂight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the
assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.
The lap counter, once started, continues to run through
changes of phase (as discussed further below),
however, although it can be stopped during any ﬂight
phase via the center ESC key on the left touch pad.
Clks 1, 2 and 3
These timers are started and stopped via a switch or
control switch. To do so, ﬁrst use the arrow keys to select
the appropriate column via the switch icon at the bottom
right. Then set the switch that you want by brieﬂy tapping
the center SET key on the right touch pad, as described
in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches
and control switches" (p. 52). Here, too, a control switch
offers you the option of activating the timer via one
of the joysticks or proportional rotary controls. The
switching point along the transmitter control travel is set
on the "Control switch" menu (page 123).
Remember that the timer switches also remain active in
programming mode.
Switching between "forwards" and "backwards"
Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards)
In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value "0:00"
(min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If it
reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it will
re-start at "0:00".
"Countdown" (timer runs backwards)
Following the activation of the corresponding value ﬁelds
(by tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad),
if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min) and/or a time
in seconds (maximum 59 s, right ﬁeld) is set, then the
timers will run backwards from this initial value following
the activation of the assigned switch (see section
"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control
switches" on page 52), i.e. a "countdown" function will
apply. Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop,
however, but continues to run (highlighted) so you can
read off the time elapsed after reaching zero.
Note:
Timers that are running backwards are shown on the
basic display with a ﬂashing colon (:) between the
minutes and the seconds ﬁelds.
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the values entered in
the currently active ﬁeld to zero.
Alarm timer
0s
0:00
Timer1
0s
Timer2
0:00
0s
Timer3
0:00
Lap time/tim tab
Lap Display
SEL SEL
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
The input ﬁeld in the "Alarm" column is activated by
tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad. In
this ﬁeld, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch
pad to deﬁne a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in
5-second increments) before zero is reached: at this
point an audible signal will be emitted, which eliminates
the need for you to check the screen continually during
the ﬂight.
Audible signal sequence
30 s before zero: Triple beep
Single beep every two seconds
20 s before zero: Double beep
Single beep every two seconds
10 s before zero: Single beep|
Single beep every second
5 s before zero:
Single, higher-frequency beep
every second
Zero: Extended audible signal and
screen switches to highlighted
display
Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad at
the same time (CLEAR) will reset the values entered in
the currently active ﬁeld to "0s".
Note:
If timer functionality has been changed at any point, then
the new changes to settings are made active only after
the timer(s) have been stopped on the basic display and
by then tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR) to reset them.
Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this
third, phase-speciﬁc timer is reset to its starting value
by simultaneously tapping the cd or ef keys on
the right touch pad (CLEAR). It is stopped in all ﬂight
phases at the same time, even if it has not been stopped
separately in the other ﬂight phases.
Lap counter/timetable
0s
0:00
Timer1
0s
Timer2
0:00
0s
Timer3
0:00
Lap time/tim tab
Lap Display
SEL SEL
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
On the "Lap time/tim tab" line, assign a switch only
as described in the section "Assigning transmitter
controls, switches and control switches" (page 52).
Preferably, you should make use of one of the two
momentary switches (SW 1 or 9) at this point: in this
way, the lap count is incremented each time by one lap
while simultaneously (and automatically) the lap time
elapsed during this lap is stopped (and recorded). This
momentary switch simultaneously starts the stopwatch
for the next lap. As the timer is triggered, the lap or
switch impulse counter is shown highlighted.
GRAUBELE
#01
«Speed »
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
11
Lap
0:00.0
K78 2:33.4
5.5V
"Time1" and "Time2" operate in the same manner; for
more details please read the section on the "Phase
settings" menu option.
Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed,
each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and
59.9 seconds.
To stop the timer in question, tap the center ESC key on
the left touch pad on the basic display after the ﬂight is
over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now shown in
"normal" mode:
GRAUBELE
#01
«Speed »
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
Lap
22
0:00.0
4:33.2
K78
5.5V
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch pad
at the same time (CLEAR), this resets the counter to
"00" and deletes the stored times. However, the timers
must have been stopped before this.
Notes:
• If you have selected a normal switch to operate the
lap counter, take care to ensure that this switch is set
to "OFF" before you press the center ESC button on
the left touch pad.
Detail program description - Control adjust 143
• If you should forget to switch off the lap counter in a
phase which is now not currently active, simply press
the center ESC button on the left touch pad.
To swap between the basic display and the "Lap
Display" …
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 00:00.0
01:23.4
08 00:00.0
02:34.5
09 00:00.0
03:45.6
10 00:00.0
04:56.7
11 00:00.0
05:67.8
12 SEL
00:00.0
06:78.9 SEL
… go to the line …
Lap Display
0s
0:00
Timer1
0s
0:00
Timer2
0s
0:00
Timer3
Lap time/tim tab
Lap Display
SEL SEL
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
… and use the switch assigned. You assign this switch
as described in the section "Assigning transmitter
controls, switches and control switches" (page 52).
144 Detail program description - Control adjust
What is a mixer?
Basic functionality
With many models, a mix of the model's functions
is often desirable, i. e. coupling aileron to rudder or
coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder
control surfaces with the same functionality are to be
controlled together using a single servo. In all cases,
the signal ﬂow at the "output" of the control function on
the transmitter control side "branches" – i. e. also "after"
transmitter control options such as e. g. "Dual Rate /
Expo", "Control adjust", "Channel 1 curve", etc. – in
order for the signal to have its predeﬁned effect on
the "input" of a different control channel and thus on a
further receiver output.
Also ensure you read the general remarks on "free
mixers" in this handbook (p. 180).
Example: V-tail mixer
4,8 V
C 577
Servo
C 577
4,8 V
Right rudder / elevator
Servo
Left rudder / elevator
Best.-Nr. 4101
er
dd
Ru
er
dd r
Ru vato
Ele
Control channels
(receiver outputs)
V-tail mixer
Best.-Nr. 4101
Ru
Ele dder
vat
or
vat
Ele
Control function inputs
Elevator stick
Rudder stick
The mc-32 HoTT transmitter software contains a
large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as
standard, which are designed to mix together two (or
more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer named in
the example just above can be activated in the "Tail" line
of the "Model type" menu by selecting "V-tail".
In addition, for each model memory in the ﬁxed-wing
and heli programs, the software makes available a total
of eight freely programmable linear mixers, four freely
programmable curve mixers and four dual mixers.
Detail program description - Control adjust 145
Wing mixers
Calibrating the wing ﬂap system
Within the menu tree of the menu …
Fl. phase timers
Wing mixers
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
… the sub-menus and options available depend entirely
on the number of aileron and ﬂap servos set up on the
"Model type" menu (page 82) …
M O D E L T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
2AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
… which means that the only settings listed are the
ones that can actually be conﬁgured. This not only
makes the menu more compact but also avoids potential
programming errors.
With a preset of e. g. "2AIL" (no ﬂaps), the "Wing
mixers" menu will be shown as follows:
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
0%
0% –––
AI
nor mal
If you have conﬁgured several ﬂight phases on the
menus "Phase settings" (page 128) and "Phase
assignment" (page 134), and assigned these names,
146 Detail program description - Control adjust
then the ﬂight phase name, e. g. "Normal", will appear on
the lower edge of the display:
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
AI
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
•
•
All options can then also be programmed speciﬁc to a
ﬂight phase.
Comments:
• Using the menu "Model type" (page 82), control
of the airbrake mixers can be reprogrammed from
control input 1 to 7 or 8 to 9, and the associated
offset point can also be set.
• If you wish to set up a "butterﬂy" system, with the
ailerons raised and the ﬂaps (if present) lowered, this
is achieved by entering the appropriate settings on
the "Butterﬂy" line on the "Brake settings" sub-menu.
• If you would like to alternate between the C1 stick
controlling an electric drive system and a butterﬂy
system, then you can use the options in the "Motor"
column on the "Phase settings" menu – see the
example on page 248.
• You can also use the opportunity to set switch times
for a "soft" transition from ﬂight phase to ﬂight phase
on the "Phase settings" menu (see page 128).
• If your model features multiple wing ﬂaps and a
"crow / butterﬂy system" (see below), but without
additional airbrakes, then you can separate output
1 (usually freed up by the above system) from
control function input 1 (throttle/brake stick) on the
•
•
"MIX-only channel" (see page 193) and use it for
another purpose with the help of a "free mixer" (see
page 190).
If you set "2AIL" on the "Model type" menu (page
82), then the ﬂight phase-dependent ﬂap functionality
can be achieved by making appropriate offset
settings for input 5 on the "Control adjust" menu
(page 96).
For almost any menu option, you have the option
of checking your settings by switching to the servo
display screen, which is accessed by simultaneously
tapping the arrow keys ef on the left touch pad.
Caution:
The vertical lines on the "Servo display" move in
the same direction for ailerons and in the opposite
direction for ﬂaps.
Note that if two ﬂap servos have been selected,
any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be
decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in
operating the ﬂaps. The same applies to input 10 and
the selection "2AIL 4FL".
A range of options are available for positioning ﬂaps.
You can …
a) … simply accept one position per ﬂight phase, by
setting only the corresponding trim values.
b) … vary the ﬂaps positioned as at a) by using any
transmitter control, assigned to "Input 6" on the
"Control adjust" menu (page 96) – possibly also
made ﬂight phase-dependent by selecting "PH" in
the "Type" column. Preferably, this should be one
of the CTRL 6 … 8 proportional rotary controls.
The selected transmitter control directly controls
the two ﬂap servos located on receiver outputs 6
and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos
connected to outputs 9 and 10 – assuming that
corresponding ﬂaps have been speciﬁed on the
"Aile/ﬂaps" line on the "Model type" menu. This
transmitter control indirectly controls the ﬂap
position of the ailerons via the percentage value
entered in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") column on the
"FLAP" line of the multi-ﬂap menu.
To be able to provide more ﬁne-grained control of
ﬂap positions, however, you should reduce travel
to about 25% on the "Input 6" line of the "Control
adjust" menu.
c) … alternatively, you can also leave the default
entry of "0%" in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") column on
the "FLAP" line of the multi-ﬂap menu, and use
the "Control adjust" menu to assign both input
6 and input 5 to the same transmitter control. You
can then set the degree to which both ﬂap pairs
are affected – optionally making this ﬂight phasedependent by selecting "PH" in the "Type" column
– with the respective travel adjustment.
Basic programming procedure
1. Select the desired line by using the arrow keys cd
on the left or right touch pad.
Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of the
display will either show the "Next page" icon ( ) or
a switch icon.
2. Depending on the line selected, you will either switch
to the next page – on which you carry out the same
procedure as below – or the desired value ﬁeld is
activated by tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad.
3. Use the arrow keys to set the mixer ratio or degree of
differential.
To conﬁgure symmetrical mixer values, move the
transmitter control or joystick to its center position, so
that the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁelds. To
conﬁgure asymmetric values, move the transmitter
control/joystick to the corresponding side.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible,
in order to be able to adjust the respective function to
the direction of servo rotation or ﬂap orientation.
4. Tapping the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the values
entered in the currently active (highlighted) ﬁeld to
the default value.
5. Complete your input by tapping the center ESC key
on the left touch pad or the center SET key on the
right touch pad.
Assigning switches
The wing mixers "AI ¼ RU" and "FL ¼ EL" can be
optionally switched on and off by using a switch or
an expanded switch. Accordingly, when selecting the
respective line, the familiar switch icon (
) appears on
the lower edge of the screen.
Accordingly, specify the input 1, 7, 8 or 9 and the offset
corresponding to your customary piloting in the "Brake
offset" line on the "Model type" menu – see page 82.
When selecting "input 1", please note also that you
may need to specify your desired "Throttle min" position
"forward/back" before establishing the offset point in the
"Motor at C1" line.
Note:
If the offset is not set right at the end of the transmitter
travel, the rest of the travel is a "dead zone", i. e. the
transmitter control does not inﬂuence any mixers on the
"Brake settings" sub-menu. Otherwise, the mixer travel is
expanded back to 100% automatically.
All other mixers on the "Wing mixers" menu have their
neutral point with the control at its center, i. e. they have
no effect at this control position. The value set is mixed
in at full travel.
Switching delays
The delay time or switch time conﬁgured on the menu
"Phase settings" (page 128) for the respective ﬂight
phase also affects all wing mixers and thus avoids
abrupt changes to ﬂap conﬁgurations when switching
between the ﬂight phases.
Mixer neutral points
(offset)
For all mixers on the "Brake settings" submenu, the
"brake offset" to be set on the "Model type" menu is to
be conﬁgured to the transmitter control position at which
the airbrakes are retracted.
Detail program description - Control adjust 147
Mixer functions
The individual options on the "Wing mixers" menu
option are discussed below, separately for single-, dualand multi-ﬂap models. Before we start, a number of
remarks on the differentials for ailerons and ﬂaps:
Aile. diff. or Diff.
(Aileron differential)
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
0% –––
AI
RU
0%
0% –––
EL
AI
Nor mal
AI
AiI-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Normal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
AILE
For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on
an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that
generated by the same aileron when it is oriented
upwards by the same amount. One effect of this unequal
distribution of drag produces is a yawing motion around
the vertical axis and, accordingly, a "turning away"
from the intended direction of ﬂight, which is why this
undesirable side effect is also termed "adverse yaw".
This effect is naturally greater on the comparably long
aerofoils possessed by model gliders, compared to e. g.
powered aircraft models, which generally have relatively
short moment arms. For the former, it must normally
be compensated for by making a simultaneous rudder
deﬂection in the opposite direction. However, this rudder
148 Detail program description - Control adjust
deﬂection also generates drag and therefore further
reduces the aircraft's efﬁciency.
If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the
aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented
downwards a smaller deﬂection than the aileron
oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can
be reduced – and possibly entirely negated. However,
the basic precondition for this is that each aileron must
have its own servo present, which can therefore also
be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In addition, the
shorter linkage paths produce an additional beneﬁt:
reproducible aileron conﬁgurations that also exhibit less
"play".
0% (normal)
50% (differential)
100% (split)
Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only commonly
need to be designed and built in when constructing
the model but also produce a slightly increased "play"
in the control system for strong differentials, the
transmitter-based differential typically used today offers
considerable beneﬁts.
The degree of differential can be changed at any
time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances, the
downward deﬂection of an aileron – in what is termed
a "split" position – can be suppressed entirely. This
approach not only reduces or even suppresses "adverse
yaw", but can, in certain circumstances, even generate
a positive yaw: in such cases, an aileron command will
generate a yaw about the vertical axis in the direction
of the turn. For large glider models in particular, this
approach lets such aircraft ﬂy "clean" turns using just
the ailerons, which is not otherwise possible unaided.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it
possible to set a differential appropriate for each side,
regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron
servos. While "0%" corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e.
no differential, "-100%" or "+100%" represents the "split"
function.
For aerobatic ﬂying, low absolute values are required to
ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal
axis when an aileron command is given. Values near
to the center (-50% or +50%) are typical for facilitating
turns in thermals. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is
popular with slope ﬂyers, where ailerons alone are often
used for turning the model.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Note:
Negative values are not usually necessary if channels
are assigned properly.
Diff.
(camber-changing ﬂap differential)
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP2
In the "cAId" line on the multi-ﬂap menu, you can set
the extent to which the ﬂaps act as ailerons and follow the
aileron joystick; the value is entered as a percentage. The
ﬂaps differential – to be set on the line "Diff." (two lines
below) – works in a similar way to the aileron differential,
i.e. where an aileron command acts on the ﬂaps, the
respective deﬂection downwards can be reduced.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible
to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless
of the direction of rotation of the servos. A value of 0% is
equal to normal linkage, i. e. the servo travel downwards is
the same as the travel upwards. A value of -100% to +100%
means that travel downwards will be reduced to zero for
aileron commands affecting the ﬂaps ("split" mode).
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Note:
Negative values are not usually necessary if channels
are assigned properly.
Model type: "1AIL"
If you have entered "1AIL" for the "Aile/ﬂaps" line on the
"Model type" menu (page 82 ), then the "Wing mixers
menu" on your transmitter will match the following
screen image:
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
Nor mal
From the ﬁrst line on this display screen, you can switch
to the sub-menu by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key
on the right touch pad …
Brake settings
Note:
The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you
entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the
currently active ﬂight phase in the "Motor" column of the
"Phase settings" menu (see page 128). Switch the ﬂight
phase if required:
BRAKE SETTINGS
Elevat cur ve
Nor mal
nor mal
Since you cannot set up a butterﬂy or aileron differential
in a model with only a single aileron servo, this
menu offers no further conﬁguration options with the
exception of a "pointer" to the "Elevat curve" sub-menu.
Accordingly, we proceed immediately further from here
by once again tapping the center SET key on the right
touch pad:
Ele
Brake
Cur ve off
Input
–100%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
Normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need
to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are
extended, you can program an appropriate automatic
mixer affecting the elevator at this point.
For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please
refer to menu option "Channel 1 curve" (page 116
onwards).
Aileron ¼ Rudder
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
Normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows
commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular
in connection with aileron differential to suppress
adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂy "clean"
curves. You can of course still issue separate commands
to the rudder.
The adjustment range of ±150% lets you set the
Detail program description - Control adjust 149
direction of deﬂection as appropriate. Optionally, this
mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of
the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 … 8) or
a control switch. This means you can then also control
the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required.
Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deﬂected
to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and
you will ﬁnd that setting a value of around 50% is usually
highly appropriate.
Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the
neutral point of the aileron joystick.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Model type: "1AIL 1FL"
If you have entered "1AIL 1FL" for the "Aile/ﬂaps"
line on the "Model type" menu (page 82), then the
"Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the
following screen image:
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
FL
0% –––
0%
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
From the ﬁrst line on this display screen, you can switch
to the sub-menu by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key
on the right touch pad …
Brake settings
Note:
The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you
entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the
currently active ﬂight phase in the "Motor" column of the
"Phase settings" menu (see page 128). Switch the ﬂight
phase if required:
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
Elevat cur ve
Nor mal
FLAP
Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now
enter a suitable value in the "Crow" line to lower the ﬂap
when you activate the brake control – which is typically
150 Detail program description - Control adjust
the C1 joystick.
To conﬁgure the setting, ﬁrst position the brake control in
the brake position at full travel (i.e. its end-point). Then,
brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad and
enter a suitable value using the arrow keys on the left or
right touch pad. To ensure a sufﬁciently strong braking
effect, note that you should try to lower the ﬂap as low
as is mechanically possible.
From the second line on this display screen, you can
switch to the sub-menu "Elevat curve" by brieﬂy tapping
the center SET key on the right touch pad:
Brake
Ele
Cur ve off
Input
–100%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
Normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need
to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are
extended, you can program an appropriate automatic
mixer affecting the elevator at this point.
For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please
refer to menu option "Channel 1 curve" (page 116
onwards).
Aileron ¼ Rudder
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
FL
0% –––
0%
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows
commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular
in connection with aileron differential to suppress
adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂy "clean"
curves. You can of course still issue separate commands
to the rudder.
The adjustment range of ± 150% lets you set the
direction of deﬂection as appropriate. Optionally, this
mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of
the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 … 8) or
a control switch. This means you can then also control
the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required.
Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deﬂected
to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and
you will ﬁnd that setting a value of around 50% is usually
highly appropriate.
Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the
neutral point of the aileron joystick.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Elevator ¼ ﬂaps
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
FL
0% –––
0%
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
To provide support for the elevator for tight turns
and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the
ﬂap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The
mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂaps are
deﬂected downwards when the elevator is oriented
upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented
elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. Optionally, this
mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of
the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 … 8) or
a control switch.
To conﬁgure symmetrical mixer values, move
the elevator joystick to its center position, so that
the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁelds. To
conﬁgure asymmetric values, move the joystick to the
corresponding side.
Values in the range -150% to +150 are possible, so as
to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or
direction of ﬂap deﬂection.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
The "typical" values conﬁgured for this mixer are singledigit or low two-digit values.
possibly ﬂight phase-dependent – then this also affects
this mixer.
Depending on the position of the ﬂap control, either
a symmetrical or asymmetric setting within the range
±150% is possible.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by
assigning a switch in the right column.
The values conﬁgured for this mixer are typically in the
single-digit range.
Flaps ¼ elevator
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
FL
0% –––
0%
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim)
compensation when a ﬂap command is given. This
typically enables you to adjust the model's airspeed
automatically when ﬂaps are lowered.
If you have used the "Control adjust" menu (page 96)
to assign input 6 a transmitter control or switch –
Detail program description - Control adjust 151
Model type: "2AIL"
If you have entered "2AIL" for the "Aile/ﬂaps" line on the
"Model type" menu (page 82), then the "Wing mixers
menu" on your transmitter will match the following
screen image:
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
AI
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
From the ﬁrst line on this display screen, you can switch
to the sub-menu by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key
on the right touch pad …
Brake settings
Note:
The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you
entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the
currently active ﬂight phase in the "Motor" column of the
"Phase settings" menu (see page 128). Switch the ﬂight
phase if required:
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
Normal
WK2
AILE WK
Depending on the model type selected, you will now
have appropriate conﬁguration options available in
the lines "Crow" and "D(ifferential) red(uction)" for the
152 Detail program description - Control adjust
"AILE" column. You should utilize these options by …
• … moving the transmitter control for "Brake"
(see description for "Model type" menu on page
82 – typically the C1 joystick – to its braking end-point.
Then switch to the "Crow" line, brieﬂy tap the center
SET key on the right touch pad and use the arrow
keys on the left or right touch pad to set a value that
moves the aileron upwards as far as possible to
brake the model, or – if you are using airbrakes as
the main braking system – the aileron should be set
to elevate only minimally to provide an extra braking
effect.
Note:
To reliably prevent the servos mechanically striking
their end-stops – which draws a heavy current – you
can set an appropriate limit value in the "– lim +"
column of the "Servo adjustments" menu (page 90).
• … then, ﬁnally, moving to the "D. red" line and setting
a % value that is greater than or equal to the "Aile.
diff." value that you set (or have yet to set) on the
display page "before" this one.
In this way, you can suppress the aileron differential
when braking, thus ensuring that you can count on
sufﬁcient aileron response despite your ailerons
being deﬂected upwards.
From the lowest line, "Elevat. curve", you can switch to
setting the "Elevat. curve" mixer by brieﬂy tapping the
center SET key on the right touch pad:
Ele
Brake
Cur ve off
Input
–100%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
Normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need
to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are
extended, you can program an appropriate automatic
mixer affecting the elevator at this point.
For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please
refer to menu option "Channel 1 curve" (page 116
onwards).
Aileron differential
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
AI
0%
0% –––
Normal
The adjustment range of ±100% makes it possible to
set the correct direction of differential, regardless of the
direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0%"
corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential on
the transmitter, "-100%" or "+100%" represents the
"split" function.
For aerobatic ﬂying, low absolute values are required to
ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal
axis when an aileron command is given. Values near
to the center (-50% or +50%) are typical for facilitating
turns in thermals. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is
popular with slope ﬂyers, where ailerons alone are often
used for turning the model.
0% (normal)
50% (differential)
100% (split)
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Note:
Negative values are not usually necessary if channels
are assigned properly.
Aileron ¼ rudder
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
AI
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows
commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular
in connection with aileron differential to suppress
adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂy "clean"
curves. You can of course still issue separate commands
to the rudder.
The adjustment range of ± 150% lets you set the
direction of deﬂection as appropriate. Optionally, this
mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of
the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 … 8) or
a control switch. This means you can then also control
the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required.
Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deﬂected
to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and
you will ﬁnd that setting a value of around 50% is usually
highly appropriate.
Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the
neutral point of the aileron joystick.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
a control switch.
To conﬁgure symmetrical mixer values, move the
elevator joystick to its center position, so that the
marker frame surrounds both value ﬁelds. To conﬁgure
asymmetric values, move the transmitter control to the
corresponding side.
Values in the range -150% to +150 are possible, so as
to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or
direction of aileron deﬂection.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit
range.
Elevator ¼ aileron
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
AI
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
To provide support for the elevator for tight turns
and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the
aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator. The
mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂaps are
deﬂected downwards when the elevator is oriented
upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented
elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. Optionally, this
mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of
the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 … 8) or
Detail program description - Control adjust 153
Model type: "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL"
If you have entered "2AIL 1FL" for the "Aile/ﬂaps"
line on the "Model type" menu (page 82), then the
"Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the
following screen image:
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
If, on the other hand, you have entered "2/4AIL
1/2/4FL" for the "Aile/ﬂaps" line on the "Model type"
menu (page 82), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your
transmitter will show the following:
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
0% –––
AI
RU
0%
0% –––
FL
EL
Nor mal
opposite direction for ﬂaps.
Model type: "2 AIL 1 FL"
If you connect the servos to the receiver as described
on page 57 and select them appropriately on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI"
and "FL" refer to the following ﬂaps:
AI
left
FL
FL
AI
right
Since the options available on the wing mixer menu
and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂap
servos speciﬁed on the "Model type" menu (page 82),
the list contains only the set-up options that are possible
for your model conﬁguration.
Regardless of the combination of aileron and ﬂap servos
you choose, all of the parameters available can be
adjusted separately for each ﬂight phase.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Note:
For almost any menu option, you have the option of
checking your settings by switching to the servo display
screen, which is accessed by simultaneously tapping
the arrow keys ef on the left touch pad. If you do, note
however that the vertical lines on the "Servo display"
move in the same direction for ailerons and in the
Nor mal
154 Detail program description - Control adjust
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Before we address the details of this menu we would
like to provide a brief explanation of the different display
modes for the multi-ﬂap menu:
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
Normal
FLAP
In addition, the settings for "Aile(ron) diff(erential)" are
not found on the "multi-ﬂap menu", as with "2AIL 2/4FL",
but one level higher in the "Wing mixers" menu – see the
screen-shot at top left.
Model type: "2AIL 2FL"
If you connect the servos to the receiver as described
on page 57 and select them appropriately on the "Model
type menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI"
and "FL" refer to the following ﬂaps:
AI
left
FL
left
FL
right
AI
right
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
Accordingly, with values preset to "2AIL 1FL", the
options to set aileron functions for ﬂaps will be hidden
and it will be possible to move only one column to the
right, into the column "FLAP":
Since the options available on the "wing mixer menu"
and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂap
servos speciﬁed on the "Model type" menu (page 82),
the list contains only the set-up options that are possible
for your model conﬁguration.
This means that if values are preset to "2AIL 2FL", then
all conﬁguration options for the aileron pair …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
… are shown, and – one "step" to the right – all options
for the ﬂap pair as well:
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
Moving one further column to the right, however – to the
"FLAP2" column – is not possible.
Model type: "2AIL 4FL"
If you connect the servos to the receiver as described
on page 57 and select them appropriately on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI",
"FL" and "FL2" refer to the following ﬂaps:
… are shown, and – one further "step" to the right – all
options for the second ﬂap pair as well:
AI
left
FL
left
FL2
left
FL2
right
FL
right
Since the options available on the "wing mixer menu"
and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂap
servos speciﬁed on the "Model type" menu (page 82 ),
the list contains only the set-up options that are possible
for your model conﬁguration.
This means that if values are preset to "2AIL 4FL", then
all conﬁguration options for the aileron pair …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
AI
right
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP2
Model type: "4AIL 2FL"
If you connect the servos to the receiver as described
on page 57 and select them appropriately on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI",
"AI2" and "FL" refer to the following ﬂaps:
AI
left
AI2
left
FL
left
FL
right
AI2
right
AI
right
AILE
… are shown, and – one "step" to the right – all options
for the ﬁrst ﬂap pair …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
Since the options available on the "wing mixer menu"
and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂap
servos speciﬁed on the "Model type" menu (page 82 ),
the list contains only the set-up options that are possible
for your model conﬁguration.
This means that if values are preset to "4AIL 2FL", then
all conﬁguration options for the ﬁrst aileron pair …
FLAP
Detail program description - Control adjust 155
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
type" menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI",
"AI2", "FL" and "FL2" refer to the following ﬂaps:
AI
left
AI2
left
FL
left
FL2
left
FL2
right
FL
right
AI2
right
AI
right
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
FLAP
AILE
… are shown, and – one "step" to the right – all options
for the second aileron pair …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE2
… are shown, and – one further "step" to the right – all
options for the ﬂap pair as well:
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
… and "FLAP2":
Since selecting "4AIL 4FL" means choosing the
maximum number of control surface servos, the
columns "AILE" …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
… and "AILE2" …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE2
Model type: "4AIL 4FL"
If you connect the servos to the receiver as described
on page 57 and select them appropriately on the "Model
156 Detail program description - Control adjust
0%
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
… are supplemented by the columns "FLAP" …
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP2
Delta/ﬂying wing type models with more than two
wing ﬂaps
If you have selected the "Delta/ﬂ" tail type and selected
the number of wing ﬂaps in the "Aile/ﬂaps" line on the
"Model type" menu (following the instructions given
in that section), then the two ailerons will normally not
move when you move the elevator joystick – and the
same will be true for the inner ﬂaps (FL) and FL2 (if
present). The reason for this is the default mixer ratio of
0% for all wing ﬂaps, set for the "EL ¼ FL" mixer that is
to be found on the multi-ﬂap menu:
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
Accordingly, you must ﬁrst specify your desired elevator
control on the "EL ¼ FL" line. Take care to ensure that
up/down activation occurs in the right sequence.
Note:
The "Brake settings" sub-menu (see next double page)
is also suitable for setting up the butterﬂy (crow) function
with delta and ﬂying wing models. In ﬁne-tuning the
deﬂection of the ﬂap pairs AIL, FL and (if present) FL2,
however, ensure that the moments created by one pair
of ﬂaps compensate the moments created by the other
pair of ﬂaps in each case. For example: the "up" effect of
ailerons when deﬂected up should be compensated by a
"down" effect from ﬂaps when they are lowered.
Multi-ﬂap menu
Important notice:
Depending on the ﬂap pairs speciﬁed in the "Model
type" menu, this menu will present the column "AILE2"
and/or the columns "FLAP" and "FLAP2" in addition
to the "AILE" column. Since both the columns "AILE"
and "AILE2" and the columns "FLAP" and "FLAP2" are
identical except for the label shown at the bottom right,
further display of the columns "AILE2" and "FLAP2" is
avoided below for reasons of saving space.
VAIW
(Not shown for "2AIL 1FL".)
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Nor mal
(Aileron ¼ ﬂaps)
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP
FLAP
In the line "VAIW"you can set the percentage extent to
which the wing ﬂap pair "FLAP" (and, if present, "FL2")
follow when an aileron command is given (the value
can be entered separately for each ﬂight phase). (In the
"AILE" column it is also possible to adjust the deﬂection
of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally, however, the
ﬂaps should follow the ailerons with less of a deﬂection,
i. e. the mixer ratio should be smaller than 100%.
The adjustment range of -150% to +150% means the
direction of deﬂection can be adjusted, depending on
the direction of rotation of the servos, to suit the ailerons.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen image).
Ail-tr.
(Not shown for "2AIL 1FL".)
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
AILE
AILE
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Nor mal
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Normal
In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which
aileron trim is to affect "AILE", "FLAP" and – if present
– "FLAP2".
The available range of values is -150% to +150%,
relative to the adjustment range of the trim lever.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen image).
Diff.
(Differential for aileron function)
(With "2AIL 1FL", found one level higher on the "Wing
mixers" menu – see screen image on previous double
page.)
(aileron trim)
Detail program description - Control adjust 157
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Normal
regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and
ﬂap servos.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen image).
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
AILE
ﬂ.pos
0%
0%
0%
0%
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Normal
(wing ﬂap position)
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Nor mal
FLAP
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
FLV (Effects of ﬂap controls)
In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which
the settings for input 6 (as made on the "Control
adjust" menu, page96, and potentially dependent on
ﬂight phase) will affect the wing ﬂap positions of the
aileron and camber-changing ﬂaps.
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
Normal
+100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
AILE
On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the
differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing ﬂaps – if the
latter are being activated as ailerons.
AI
FL
FL2
FL2
FL
AI
0% (normal)
50% (differential)
100% (split)
If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel,
please read the appropriate explanation at the start of
this section on page 148.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes
it possible to set the correct direction of differential
158 Detail program description - Control adjust
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP
Here, you set the ﬂight phase-speciﬁc wing ﬂap
positions for all of the ﬂaps present on the model in
question. In this way, you can specify the ﬂap positions
that apply to each ﬂight phase.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it
possible to set the correct direction of travel regardless
of the direction of rotation of the aileron and ﬂap servos.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen images).
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
Normal
0%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
FLAP
For each ﬂap pair, you can deﬁne either a symmetrical
or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control
accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side.
If you leave (or have left) each travel adjustment at
+100% on the "Control adjust" menu (page 96), then
values between 5% and 20% should generally be
sufﬁcient.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen images).
Note:
By default, NO transmitter control is assigned to input 6
on the "Control adjust" menu. However, you can assign
a transmitter control or switch to this input at any time
– also in a ﬂight phase-dependent way – thus enabling
different ﬂap settings within a ﬂight phase; see also
example 2 on page 260.
EL ¼ FL
(Elevator ¼ ﬂaps)
To provide support for the elevator for tights turns
and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the
ﬂap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The
mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂaps are
deﬂected downwards when the elevator is oriented
upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented
elevator – i.e. in opposite directions.
For each ﬂap pair, you can deﬁne either a symmetrical
or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control
accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side.
Values in the range -150% to +150% are possible:
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen images).
The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit
range.
Important general notice:
Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their
mechanical end-stops when large deﬂections
are set! This is especially relevant in relation to
the functions "VAIW", "VFLW" and possibly
"VFL2W". Use the "- lim +" option (travel limit)
available on the "Servo adjustments" menu
(page 90), as required.
Brake settings
Notes:
• The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you
entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the "Model
type" menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the
currently active ﬂight phase in the "Motor" column of
the "Phase settings" menu (see page 128). Switch
the ﬂight phase if required:
• The "brake mixers" described below can also –
and should also – be conﬁgured to be speciﬁc to
individual ﬂight phases.
Crow
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
Nor mal
AILE FLAP FLAP2
The "Crow" mixer function is actuated by control function
1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input that you have
assigned on the "Brake Off" line on the "Model type"
menu (see page 82).
M O D E L T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Normal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
Brake off
+90% In 1
STO SEL
Note:
On the "Model type" menu (see page 82), you should
also deﬁne the offset, i. e. the direction of operation.
The offset should be set to about +90% of stick travel
(if the C1 stick is used, this is generally located at the
forward position of the stick). To extend the ﬂaps, the
stick must therefore be moved back towards the pilot.
The remaining joystick travel of around 10% then has no
effect, although it is not "lost", since the control travel is
automatically expanded back to 100%.
Use the select ﬁelds for the AILE, FLAP and – if present
– FL2 columns to deﬁne the extent and direction to
which the corresponding pairs of ﬂaps are to follow
when the airbrake control (control function 1, 7, 8 or
9) is operated. If the model does not feature separate
airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output free
or use the "MIX-only channel" menu to set this to "MIXonly", to be able to use it elsewhere.
Values in the range -150% to +150% are possible.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to the
default value (see screen image).
Detail program description - Control adjust 159
• "AILE" column
When braking the model as it comes in to land,
neither of the two aileron ﬂaps should ever be
deﬂected more than half of the possible travel
upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available to
control the model along its longitudinal axis (aileron
function).
AI
FL
FL2
FL2
FL
AI
• "FLAP" (and "FLAP2") column
As the model is braked on the landing approach,
both pairs of ﬂaps can be set to deﬂect by different
amounts, e. g.:
AI
FL
FL2
FL2
FL
AI
If the airbrake mixers are set as described above, then a
special ﬂap combination – also referred to as the "crow
position" or "butterﬂy" – can be conﬁgured: With this
airbrake setting, both ailerons move moderately upwards
while the ﬂaps move as far as possible downwards.
A further mixer – see below, under the section "Elevat
curve" – is then used to trim the elevator in such a way that
the model's airspeed changes very little compared to the
normal ﬂight position. Otherwise, there is a danger that the
model loses too much speed and then, after the braking
system is retracted (e. g. to extend a landing approach that
was too short, for example), pancakes or even stalls.
A tip for "seeing" the effect of brakes:
lift the ﬂaps and look over and under the surface from
the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted
ﬂap, the greater the braking effect achieved.
AI
FL
FL2
FL2
FL
AI
AI
FL
FL2
FL2
FL
AI
• Combining AILE and FLAP for "Crow"
160 Detail program description - Control adjust
• To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach
is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect the
second servo to a free output of your choice – for
example, output 8. You then also assign this output
to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the "Control
adjust" menu (page 96) – see screen image:
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
normal
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct1
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
As you do, leave the settings for offset, travel, etc. at
their default values. Also leave the default value at
"GL" in the "typ" column, since the second airbrake,
like the ﬁrst, should be active in the same way across
all ﬂight phases.
AI
FL
Servo 1
Servo 9
FL
AI
Tips for activating airbrakes:
• If you have installed a servo for operating
conventional wing-mounted airbrakes in addition to
the aileron and ﬂap servos, the simplest method of
controlling it is to connect it to the receiver output
whose input you have selected for the brake function,
i. e. either 1, 7, 8 or 9 – assuming it it is free. If this is
not possible, then as an alternative you can set a free
mixer, which connects up the brake control channel
you have selected with the airbrake servo channel.
You can assure yourself that this works as stated
by accessing the "Servo display" menu, which you
can access from almost any menu level by brieﬂy
pressing the ef keys on the left touch pad at the
same time (see page 230):
1
11
+100 %
0%
0%
0%
+100%
0%
10
12
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
If this relatively simply variant should prove
impossible for whichever reasons, then the
alternative is a solution with two free mixers – and
potentially involving the "MIX-only channel" menu
(see page 193).
In either case, however, the airbrake travels must
then be ﬁne-tuned on the "Servo adjustment" menu
(see page 90).
D.red.
(Differential reduction)
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
AILE FLAP FLAP2
Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterﬂy
(crow) conﬁguration. Namely: that with the use of aileron
differential, the aileron effect can be strongly (negatively)
affected by the aileron elevation. This is ﬁrstly because
further deﬂection of the one aileron upwards is
(almost) no longer possible and secondly because the
downward-deﬂected aileron – depending on the elevation
and degree of differential conﬁgured – is often unable to
achieve even its "normal" position.
To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered
in this way as far as possible, you should ensure that
you make use of the automated "Differential reduction"
feature. This feature continuously reduces the degree of
aileron differential as the airbrake system is extended.
The feature is conﬁgurable and can even be set to
suppress differential entirely.
A value of 0% means that the "aileron differential" set
at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that
equals the % value set for aileron differential means the
differential is fully eliminated once the butterﬂy function
is at maximum travel, i. e. with ﬂaps fully extended.
Setting a reduction value greater than the aileron
differential conﬁgured will eliminate the latter even
before the full travel of the airbrake joystick.
Values can be set in the range 0 to150%.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Elevat curve
(Brake ¼ elevator)
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
If the airbrake control – to be set to 1, 7, 8 or 9 on the
"Brake Off" line of the "Model type" menu (page 83) – is
used to extend the ﬂaps as described previously for the
"Brake settings" menu, this will often have a negative
effect on the aircraft model's airspeed. This mixer can
be used to compensate this type of effect by applying a
corrective value to the elevator.
By brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right touch
pad, you can switch to the display screen as shown below:
Ele
Brake
Cur ve off
Input
–100%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
Normal
Conﬁguration notes for "Elevat curve" (brake ¼ EL)
The offset that you have conﬁgured on the "Model type"
menu (page 82) affects this mixer:
The vertical line on the display that indicates the
position of the airbrake control only moves from
the edge of the graph when the conﬁgured offset is
exceeded. Simultaneously, the airbrake control travel is
automatically expanded back to 100%, as described for
the "Model type" menu.
Accordingly, the mixer's neutral point always lies on the
left edge, independently of the offset conﬁgured.
Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the
opposite end-point in accordance with the requirements.
Note that the approach taken to conﬁguring this 5-point
curve mixer follows the same principles as already
described (within the scope of the "Channel 1 curve"
menu, page 116) as applicable to the curve mixers, i. e.:
Brake
EL
Cur ve on
Input
–19%
Output
–6%
Point 1
–7%
Normal
Detail program description - Control adjust 161
In each case, you should test the setting selected at
the appropriate altitude and re-adjust as required. As
you do, however, ensure that your model does not slow
down excessively with the braking system extended!
Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the braking
system is retracted, e. g. to extend a landing approach
that was too short, for example, your model pancakes or
even stalls.
Aileron ¼ rudder
Aileron differential
(Only for "2AIL 1FL". If "2AIL 2/4 FL" is selected,
included on the multi-ﬂap menu, see page 157.)
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows
commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular
in connection with aileron differential to suppress
adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂy "clean"
curves. You can of course still issue separate commands
to the rudder.
The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that
the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is
deﬂected upwards.
Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the
neutral point of the aileron joystick.
The adjustment range of ± 150% lets you set the
direction of deﬂection as appropriate. Optionally, this
mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of
the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 … 8) or
a control switch. This means you can then also control
the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
A value of around 50% is generally an excellent starting
point.
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff
AI
0% –––
RU
Nor mal
On this line you can set the aileron differential for the
two aileron servos.
If you are unsure about the meaning of differential
travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the
start of this section on page 148.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes
it possible to set the correct direction of differential
regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and
ﬂap servos.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
162 Detail program description - Control adjust
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Nor mal
Flap ¼ elevator
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Normal
When setting camber-changing ﬂaps, one side-effect
can be to generate moments causing movement around
the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may also be
desirable that e. g. your aircraft model opts for a more
pacey ﬂight style with the ﬂaps slightly raised. This mixer
can be used to achieve both results.
With this mixer, the extension of the ﬂaps – depending on
the value conﬁgured – automatically ensures the elevator
position follows suit. Symmetrical or asymmetrical
settings relative to the neutral point of the ﬂap control
are possible.
If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by
assigning a switch in the right column.
Values can be set in the range ±150%. The "typical"
values conﬁgured for this mixer are single-digit or low
two-digit values.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Note:
If you have used the "Control adjust" menu to assign a
transmitter control or switch, as described under ʆ" on
page 159, then the latter will also affect this mixer.
Detail program description - Control adjust 163
Helicopter mixers
Flight phase-speciﬁc setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor
On this menu …
the auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter mixing
and coupling functions shown in the screen-shot
Fl. phase timers
above are available for setting up the model helicopter.
Helicopter mixer
These functions are described in the ﬁrst part of this
Free mixers
comprehensive chapter.
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
General information on mixers,
Dual mixer
(see also pages 145 and 180)
An arrow "¼" indicates a mixer. A mixer "branches off"
… all of the ﬂight phase-speciﬁc helicopter mixers are
the signal ﬂow of a control function at a particular point,
described, with the exception of the mixers for autoin order to use this ﬂow to cause a predetermined effect
rotation ﬂight (discussed from page 178 onwards.)
on a further control channel and, ultimately, the receiver
These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a model
output. The "Nick ¼ Tail" mixer, for example, means
helicopter.
that the tail rotor servo will be conﬁgured to follow
For ﬂight phase programming, see the menus:
commands from the pitch-axis joystick.
• "Base setup model", page 74
Basic programming procedure:
• "Phase settings", page 132
1. Select the mixer by using the arrow keys on the left
• "Phase assignment", page 134
or right touch pad.
When you actuate a switch for a speciﬁc ﬂight phase,
Depending on the mixer, the lower line of the display
then the associated ﬂight phase, e. g. "Normal", is
" icon, which indicates that
will show SEL or the "
displayed at the lower left edge of the display screen:
you need to move to a second page.
Pitch
2. The linear mixer ratios can be set directly by brieﬂy
C1
Throttle
tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad:
Tail
C1
Use the arrow keys to conﬁgure the mixer ratio.
Throttle
0%
Tail
Otherwise you will need to switch to the second
Roll
0%
Throttle
screen page where you can set up the appropriate
Roll
0%
Tail
curve mixer.
Nick
Throttle
0%
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
Tail
Nick
0%
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
Gyro suppress
0%
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
Swash rotation
0°
3. Complete the conﬁguration by tapping the center
OFF
Swash limiter
Normal
SET key on the right touch pad again.
4.
You can page back by tapping the center ESC key on
In each of these ﬂight phases – with the exception of
the left touch pad.
164 Detail program description - Control adjust
Description of helicopter mixers
To conﬁgure collective pitch curve settings and the two
mixers "Channel 1 ¼ Throttle" and "Channel 1 ¼ Tail
rotor", curve mixers are available in all ﬂight phases.
Accordingly, these mixers also permit the programming
of non-linear mixing ratios along the path of joystick
travel, if required. Switch to the display screen for curve
settings by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the
right touch pad – see discussion below.
The curve is set up basically in the same way as the
Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe
it again here in detail using pitch conﬁguration as an
example, to save you having to leaf through the manual.
In the remaining lines, ﬁrst activate the value ﬁeld and
then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to
set a mixer value in the value ﬁeld (now highlighted).
The settings available are rounded off with the "swash
limiter" option: These option can be conﬁgured to
limit the maximum deﬂection of the swashplate servo.
Together, these settings conﬁgure the basic set-up of
the helicopter model.
In the "Autorotation" ﬂight phase as described on page
178, however, the mixers "C1 ¼ Throttle" and "C1
¼ Tail" are not needed and therefore switched to a
conﬁgurable default value.
If you want to reset any changed parameters to
their default values, you can do so at any time by
simultaneously tapping the cd or ef keys on the
right touch pad (CLEAR).
Collective pitch (Collective pitch curve (C1 ¼ Pitch))
If necessary, use the arrow keys cd on the left or right
touch pad to move to the "Pitch" line. Now brieﬂy tap the
center SET key on the right touch pad:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
Output
Point ?
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
Unlike the "Channel 1 curve" menu, however, this
display relates only to the control curve of the pitch
servos: the "Channel 1 curve", on the other hand, affects
all servos controlled via the throttle/collective pitch stick.
Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve"
option thus functions as an input signal for the
collective pitch curve programmed here: In the
graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the
throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows
the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.
The control curve can be deﬁned (separately per ﬂight
phase) by up to 6 points, termed "reference points",
placed at any point along the joystick travel.
Initially, however, fewer reference points are adequate
for setting up the collective pitch curve. We recommend
beginning with three reference points to start with. These
three points – namely the two end-points "Pitch low (L)"
(= -100% control travel) and "Pitch high (H)" (= +100%
control travel) plus a point at the center of control travel
still to be set – deﬁne an initial linear proﬁle for the
collective pitch curve.
Programming details
First, switch to your chosen ﬂight phase, e. g. "Normal".
The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move the
vertical line in the graph between the two end-points
"Point L" (minimum pitch at -100%) and "Point H"
(maximum pitch at +100% control travel): at the same
time, the current joystick position is shown numerically
on the "Input" line (-100% to +100%).
The point at which the vertical line crosses the curve is
termed the "Output", and can be varied at the maximum
of 6 reference points within the range -125% to +125%.
A control signal modiﬁed in this way affects only the
collective pitch servos.
In the example to the left, the joystick is at exactly 0% of
control travel and also generates an output signal of 0%,
since the characteristic curve is linear.
Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between
the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance
between neighboring reference points must not be less
than approx. 25%.
Setting reference points
If necessary, use the left or right arrow key d to drag
the marker frame downwards, until it is at the "Point"
line:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
Output
Point ?
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
Move the joystick. If the display shows a framed
question mark, then you can set the next reference point
by tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad.
Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by its number and
the value ﬁeld to the right of the reference point number
is highlighted:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
Output
Point 1
Normal
0%
0%
0%
The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4
reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is
irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously
renumbered automatically from left to right as they are
entered.
Conﬁguring reference points
To conﬁgure a point, use the joystick to move the vertical
line onto the point you wish to change. The number
and current curve value of this point are displayed on
the left side of the display, on the "Point" line. Brieﬂy
tap the center SET key on the right touch pad. Use the
arrow keys on the right touch pad to change the current
curve value shown in the highlighted ﬁeld. The possible
range is -125% to +125% and changes do not affect
neighboring reference points.
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
0%
+75%
Output
+75%
Point 1
Normal
In this sample screen image, reference point "1" has
been set to +75%.
If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At
-50%, for example …
Detail program description - Control adjust 165
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
–50%
–12%
Output
–12%
Point 1
Normal
… and/or a further point at +50%:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
+50%
+88%
Output
+88%
Point 3
Normal
To do so, use the joystick to move to the corresponding
area. As soon as a "?" appears in the frame on the
"Point" line, the respective point can be set by pressing
the arrow keys on the right touch pad. Just as with other
points, this can be conﬁgured …
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
+50%
–50%
Output
–50%
Point 3
Normal
… or, by tapping the arrow keys cd or ef on the
right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR), can be
deleted once again.
The "L" and "H" points, on the other hand, CANNOT be
deleted.
166 Detail program description - Control adjust
Trim point function
Alternatively, assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e.
highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys
ef on the left touch pad to jump to reference points
already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the
graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys
on the right touch pad can then be used to change the
reference point jumped to as described above, entirely
independently of the control position:
Pitch
Trim point
Input
+50%
Output
–75%
Point 2
–75%
Nor mal
Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center
ESC key on the left touch pad.
Trim offset function
Assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e. highlighted, you
can not only use the up or down arrow keys ef on the
left touch pad to jump to reference points already set
and change their values, but you can also use the cd
keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an
existing curve within the range ±25%:
Pitch
Trim offset
0%
Input
+50%
Output
+50%
Point 1
Nor mal
Pitch
Trim offset
Input
Output
Point 1
Normal
0%
0%
0%
You can also exit from this function by tapping the center
ESC key on the left touch pad.
Trim x-axis function
This function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right
(f) arrow key on the right touch pad with an active
(i. e. highlighted) value ﬁeld. You can then use the arrow
keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point
horizontally or vertically as you wish.
Pitch
Trim X-axis
0%
Input
–33%
Output
0%
Point ?
Normal
Notes:
• If you reposition the point horizontally further away
from the current control position than approx. ±25%,
a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark
does not refer to the repositioned point, however:
instead, it signiﬁes that a further point can be set at
the current control position.
• Please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick
position and not to the position of the point.
Smoothing the collective pitch curve
In the example below, sample reference points have
been set …
Reference point 1 to +50%
Reference point 2 to +75%
Reference point 3 to -50%
… as described in the last section.
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
+50%
–50%
Output
–50%
Point 3
Normal
This "jagged" curve proﬁle can be smoothed
automatically simply by pressing a button.
First – assuming a situation is conﬁgured as presented
above – tap the center ESC button on the left touch pad
to deactivate the value ﬁeld. Then use the arrow keys on
the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in
an upwards direction to the "Curve" line. Now brieﬂy tap
the center SET key on the right touch pad to activate the
value ﬁeld on the "Curve" line:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
0%
–50%
Output
–50%
Point 2
Normal
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
+50%
–50%
Output
–50%
Point 3
Nor mal
Sample collective pitch curves for various ﬂight phases:
Pitch
Cur ve on
Input
+50%
–50%
Output
–50%
Point 3
Nor mal
Notes:
• If the joystick does not coincide with the exact
reference point, please note that the percentage
value on the "Output" line always relates to the
current joystick position.
• As with the other screen images on these pages, the
following screen shot shows a control curve created
purely for the purposes of illustration. Please note,
therefore, that the curve characteristics displayed
do not in any way represent real-life collective pitch
curves.
+100%
+100%
Output
+100%
Output
Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the
value ﬁeld from "off" to "on" and complete this setup
procedure by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the
right touch pad or the center ESC key on the left touch
pad:
Output
Deleting reference points
To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use
the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of
the reference point in question. As soon as the reference
point number and its associated value is shown on
the "Point" line (see screen image above), you can
activate the value ﬁeld on the "Point" line to highlight
it by simultaneously tapping the cd or ef keys on
the right touch pad (CLEAR) and then delete the value.
Complete the operation by brieﬂy tapping the center key
ESC on the left touch pad.
-100%
-100%
-100%
Control travel
Control travel
Control travel
Hover
Aerobatics
3D
C1 ¼ Throttle
(Throttle curve)
C1 Throttle
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
Normal
Unlike the "Channel 1 curve" menu, however, this
display relates only to the control curve of the throttle
servo: the "Channel 1 curve", on the other hand, affects
all servos controlled via the throttle/collective pitch stick.
Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1
curve" menu thus functions as an input signal for
the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph,
the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/
collective pitch stick and therefore follows the
current Channel 1 curve characteristic.
The throttle curve can also be deﬁned (separately
Detail program description - Control adjust 167
168 Detail program description - Control adjust
program offers a much more ﬂexible approach to ﬁnetuning and optimizing increases to system rotational
speed below the hover point than the "idle-up" approach
taken by older mc radio control units.
Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start
the carburetor motor, i. e. so that the carburetor can
be adjusted within the idle range only by using the idle
trim. Ensure that you follow the safety instructions on
page 177 at all times. If the throttle is set too high when
switching on the transmitter, you will receive audible and
visible warnings!
STARLET
Stop
ThrottleFlug
#02
«Normal »too
high!
99%
5.2V
K78
2:22h
0:00
0:00
5.5V
The following three graphs show (typical) 3-point throttle
curves for various ﬂight phases, such as hovering
aerobatics and 3D ﬂight.
Sample throttle curves for various ﬂight phases:
+100%
+100%
Output
+100%
Output
Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive system
with speed CONTROLLER
This setting relates only to the control curve of the
throttle servo or the speed controller.
Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped
with a speed governor is discussed in the following
section.
As with the conﬁguration of the collective pitch curve
(see previous page), the throttle curve can also be
deﬁned by up to 6 points.
• In each case, set the control curve so that when the
throttle/collective pitch stick is in its end position,
the carburetor is fully open or the controller of an
electrically-powered helicopter is set to maximum
(except for auto-rotation ﬂight, see page 178).
• For the hover point, which is normally at the control
center, the carburetor setting or power control for the
speed controller must be matched to the collective
pitch curve so that the correct system rotational
speed is obtained.
• At the minimum position of the throttle/collective
pitch stick, the throttle curve must ﬁrst be conﬁgured
so that a glow motor runs at a speed considerably
higher than idle speed and the clutch is ﬁrmly
engaged.
The starting and stopping of the motor – whether
glow or electric – always takes place using the
throttle limiter (see below) within the respective
ﬂight phase.
This makes it unnecessary to program the two ﬂight
phases that may be familiar to you from using other
remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and
"without idle-up", and with the associated "waste" of a
ﬂight phase for this purpose – since the mc-32 HoTT
Output
per ﬂight phase) by up to 6 points, termed "reference
points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.
The reference points are deﬁned, adjusted and erased
in the usual way, as explained in the previous section on
the collective pitch curve. Start by deﬁning the throttle
curve with three points, namely the points "L" and "H"
at the extremes, plus the Point "1" still to be set in the
control center in order to match the motor power curve
to the collective pitch curve.
-100%
-100%
-100%
Control travel
Hover
Control travel
Aerobatics
Control travel
3D
Notes on using the "throttle limit" function:
• You should make use of the throttle limit function as
a general rule (menu "Control adjust", page 104).
This will fully isolate the throttle servo from the
throttle curve with the throttle limit proportional rotary
control turned fully to the left; the motor will be idling
and respond only to C1 trim. This option permits you
to start and also stop the motor from within any ﬂight
phase.
Once the motor has started, turn the throttle limiter
slowly in the direction of the opposite end-point, so
you can once again activate the throttle servo fully
using the throttle/collective pitch stick. To stop the
throttle limiter limiting the throttle servo at its top endpoint, you should access the "Th.L.12" line on the
"Control adjust" menu and set the control travel to
+125% on the plus side of the "travel" column. Leave
the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone,
however, to conﬁgure this setting globally for all ﬂight
phases.
For a more ﬁnely-tuned control travel curve for the
throttle limit control, you can also use the "Expo
throttle limiter" (page 107). This gives you the option
of deﬁning the idle setting at the throttle limit control's
center position, as readily determined both visually
and audibly.
Set the throttle limiter to its center position and adjust
the "EXPO thro lim." value as far as is needed until
the motor is idling smoothly with the proportional
rotary control set at its center point. In this position,
the motor will then start without any problems. To
switch off, you will turn the throttle limit control – thus
without also using C1 switch-off trim – to its rearmost
end-point. As you do, ensure that the affected servo
cannot hit an end-stop mechanically.
The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is
made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram:
C1 Throttle
Cur ve off
0%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
Nor mal
The output signal for the throttle servo can never
be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In this
example, it is thus max. ~50%.
• Since electric drive systems have no need for an
idle setting, the basic conﬁguration of settings for
an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves
making sure that the control range of the throttle
limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment
range of the speed controller (usually -100% to
+100%) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore,
adjust the "travel" setting of the throttle limiter as
appropriate on the "Th.L.12" line of the "Control
adjust" menu. Leave the default value of "GL" in
the "Type" column alone, however, to conﬁgure this
setting globally for all ﬂight phases.
Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however, must
take place in ﬂight – as with a glow-powered heli.
• If you wish to record the ﬂight time of a (glowpowered) heli, you can assign a control switch to the
throttle limit slider, and then use this to switch a timer
on and off; see page 123.
For auto-rotation ﬂight, an automatic switch-over
is made from this mixer to a conﬁgurable default
value; see page 178.
Helicopter with speedGOVERNOR
Unlike speed controllers, which merely adjust the
output level – in a way similar to a carburetor – a
speed governor keeps the speed of the system it is
controlling constant by regulating the output provided
autonomously. For glow-powered helis, the governor
therefore controls the throttle servo itself as appropriate
– or the speed controller of an electric heli in a
comparable way. Accordingly, speed governors do not
therefore require a traditional throttle curve but a speed
setting. A deviation from the preset speed will therefore
only take place if the level of output required exceeds
the maximum level available.
Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a
speed governor; see the receiver assignments on page
59. If this connection is in use, however, then the throttle
limiter function is unavailable, since this exclusively
affects the then unoccupied output 6, via the mixer
"C1 ¼ Throttle".
To still make use of the comfort- and safety-related
features of the throttle limiter, you should ignore the
general connection advice and connect the speed
governor to receiver output 6. You then need only adjust
the throttle curve appropriately, so this can take over the
role of the "usual" transmitter control.
Since in this case the "throttle curve" only regulates the
target speed of the motor controller and this target motor
speed should typically remain constant over the entire
collective pitch adjustment range, the "C1¼ Throttle"
mixer must be used to set a horizontal line – i.e. every
(pitch) input value will result in the same ("throttle")
output value – whose "height" is deﬁned by the target
motor speed.
First, therefore, the reference points "1" to "4" – if
Detail program description - Control adjust 169
present and set – are erased. Following this, the
reference points "L" (input = -100%) and "H" (input
= +100%) are then each set to the same value, for
example:
C1 Throttle
Cur ve off
–100%
Input
+30%
Output
+30%
Point L
Normal
The value to be set depends both on the speed
governor used and on the target motor speed that is
desired, and can, of course, be varied according to the
ﬂight phase.
For auto-rotation ﬂight, an automatic switch-over
is made from this mixer to a conﬁgurable default
value; see page 178.
170 Detail program description - Control adjust
C1 ¼ Tail
(Static torque compensation)
C1 Tail
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
Nor mal
The default approach here is to preset a torque
compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a uniform
0%, as is required for a gyro sensor working in "heading
lock mode" – see the screen image above.
Important notice:
In this context, ensure that you comply with the
instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you
risk making adjustments that render your heli
impossible to ﬂy.
If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in the
"normal" operating mode, or if it only has what is termed
"normal mode", then conﬁgure the mixer as follows:
As with the conﬁguration of the collective pitch curve
(see page 165), the control curve of the tail rotor can
also be deﬁned by up to 6 points. If required, therefore,
you can modify the mixer at any time and preset both
symmetrical and asymmetric mixer ratios both above
and below the hover point. Before you do, however,
ensure you have entered the correct direction of rotation
for the main rotor on the "Helicopter type" menu.
C1 Tail
Cur ve off
+100%
Input
+30%
Output
+30%
Point H
Normal
Starting with values of -30% for point "L" and +30% for
point "H", the mixer is to be conﬁgured in such a way
that the helicopter, even during prolonged vertically
ascending or descending ﬂights, does not deviate from
the yaw axis as a result of the main rotor's altered
torque while hovering. For hovering, trim should take
place only via the (digital) tail rotor trim lever.
For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is essential
that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been
set up correctly, i.e. that the rotor speed remains
constant over the collective pitch's full adjustment range.
This third curve mixer applies only to the control curve
of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/collective pitch
stick is moved, whereas the "Channel 1 curve" (see
page 119) acts on all servos that are affected by the
throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that the output signal
of the "Channel 1 curve" option also functions as an
input signal for the tail rotor curve programmed here:
In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the
throttle/collective pitch stick and follows the current
Channel 1 curve characteristic from the "Channel 1
curve" menu.
In the auto-rotation ﬂight phase this mixer is
automatically switched off.
Tail rotor ¼ throttle
Pitch
C1
Throttle
Tail
C1
Throttle
Tail
Roll
Throttle
Nor mal
rotor deﬂection. Set the mixer value so that there is no
fall-off in system rotational speed.
Roll ¼ Throttle and Nick ¼ Throttle
0%
0%
SEL
While the tail rotor normally compensates for the effect
of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also used to
control the helicopter around the vertical axis. Increasing
tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding adjustment
to motor power, however, to avoid a fall-off in system
rotational speed.
This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle follows
the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one side only,
to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is increased.
Values in the range 0% to +100% are therefore possible.
The direction depends on the main rotor's direction of
rotation (left or right), and this must ﬁrst be set correctly
on the "Helicopter type" menu. For left-hand rotation
systems, the throttle follows the tail rotor when the tail
rotor joystick is moved to the left, and vice versa for
right-hand rotation systems.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
In the auto-rotation ﬂight phase this mixer is
automatically switched off.
Set-up notes:
To set the mixer value accurately you should either ﬁrst
ﬂy several high-speed pirouettes against the direction of
main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind is blowing, hover
at right angles to the wind with a sufﬁciently large tail
Tail
C1
Throttle
Tail
Roll
Throttle
Roll
Tail
Nick
Throttle
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
Increasing collective pitch is not the only change that
requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control
movements also require this, i. e. if the swashplate is
tilted in any direction. The mc-32 HoTT program lets
you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for roll
and pitch-axis controls.
This offers particular advantages in aerobatic ﬂying, e. g.
when ﬂying a roll: here, with moderate collective pitch
values and the carburetor only about half-open, cyclic
control travels are nonetheless executed that require
much higher performance from the motor.
The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to
+100%. The correct mixer direction is automatically
taken into account.
If you tap the cd or ef keys on the right touch
pad (CLEAR) at the same time, this will reset values
changed in the active (highlighted) ﬁeld back to 0%.
In the auto-rotation ﬂight phase this mixer is
automatically switched off.
Roll ¼ Tail and Nick ¼ Tail
Roll
Throttle
Roll
Tail
Nick
Throttle
Tail
Nick
Gyro suppress
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a
corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor:
major cyclic control movements also require this, e.g.
if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too,
the mc-32 HoTT program lets you conﬁgure settings
for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis)
separately.
For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involve
very large control deﬂections in the pitch-axis
controls, e. g. the "Bo-turn" (vertical pull-up followed
by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops,
the uncompensated torque present in these ﬂights
causes the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree
around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of the
maneuver.
These two mixers permit static torque compensation to
be activated by the swashplate tilting in any direction.
The mixers work by always increasing tail rotor thrust,
starting from the center point of the roll and pitch-axis
sticks, i.e. they always generate a tail rotor deﬂection
in the same direction regardless of the direction of the
command.
The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to
+100%.
The mixer direction is determined automatically by your
deﬁnition of the direction of main rotor rotation on the
Detail program description - Control adjust 171
Nick
Throttle
Tail
Nick
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
SEL
Important: in normal situations, this function should
not be used if your model is ﬁtted with a modern
gyro system. In this context, ensure that you comply
with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not,
you risk making adjustments that render your heli
impossible to ﬂy. This menu has nonetheless been
retained in order to cater to a full range of requirements
and ﬂying habits.
With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor ("gyro")
can be varied according to the tail rotor joystick position;
this assumes the use of a gyro system whose gyro gain
can be controlled from the transmitter via an auxiliary
channel. This channel will be channel 7 for Graupner
radio control systems. The gyro suppression function
reduces gyro gain in a linear progression as the
pilot increases the tail rotor deﬂection. Without gyro
suppression – i.e. when set to 0% – the gyro effect is
constant, regardless of the joystick position.
With a transmitter control assigned on the "Gyro 7" line
on the "Control adjust" menu (page 103), however,
e. g. one of the CTRL 7 or 8 proportional rotary controls,
the gyro gain can also be inﬁnitely varied (optionally
172 Detail program description - Control adjust
Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the neutral
point, and gyro suppression is set to 100%, the gyro
gain is reduced to zero as the tail rotor deﬂection
increases. For values between 100% and the maximum
value of 199%, the gyro can be fully suppressed –
depending on the transmitter control position – well
before full deﬂection of the tail rotor; see the diagram on
the next page.
For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no. 3277,
both the upper and the lower values are set via rotary
controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain at the
bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the maximum
gain at the top end-point of the slider; the transition
between these two values occurs roughly in the middle
of the slider travel.
In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO
3000 gyro systems feature proportional, inﬁnitely
variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below for typical
diagrams.
As an example, the option to conﬁgure ﬂight phasespeciﬁc – and static – gyro gain gives you the opportunity
to exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow ﬂying,
but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics.
Samples of various gyro settings and conﬁguration
notes
• Linear gyro suppression: 0% to 199%.
With the tail rotor joystick in the center position,
the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected
transmitter control. Using a proportional rotary
control, the effect is inﬁnitely variable between zero
("min") and maximum ("max"), provided transmitter
control travel is not restricted. With full tail rotor
deﬂection, the effective gyro gain is as follows:
"current control position
minus
gyro suppression value".
Accordingly: at 0% gyro suppression, gyro gain
is constant for tail rotor joystick movement; at
50% suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half if
the assigned transmitter control is moved to the
+50% position (as shown here); and only at >150%
suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider at
this position, well before full tail rotor deﬂection.
Exemple:
+50 %
Range of
transmitter
control 7
Gyro suppression
according to the ﬂight phase) between minimum and
maximum gain. In this case, gyro gain is maximum at full
deﬂection of the slider, and zero at the opposite endpoint.
Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gain range
on both sides by altering the transmitter control travel.
Depending on the transmitter control position, the gyro
gain at full travel on the tail rotor joystick is:
"current control position
minus
gyro suppression value".
Í Gyro gain Î
"Helicopter type" menu, page 86.
In the auto-rotation ﬂight phase this mixer is
automatically switched off.
centre
right
left
Stick deflection tail rotor
• Linear gyro suppression with reduced control travel,
e. g. -50% to +80% of full travel.
Gyro gain is inﬁnitely variable within these transmitter
Range of
transmitter
control 7
Exemple:
+80 %
Í Gyro gain Î
control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration, we
plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor deﬂection
for various parameter values of gyro suppression.
centre
right
left
Stick deflection tail rotor
Adjusting the gyro sensor
To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization
for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis,
observe the following:
• The controls should have as little friction and "play"
as possible.
• There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.
• Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo
When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the
faster its response – a corresponding corrective change
to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro
gain adjustor can be moved without causing the tail of
the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's
stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower,
there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate
even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions
to gyro gain will need to be made to eliminate the
oscillation.
If the model is ﬂying forward at high speed or hovering
in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing
effect of the vertical ﬁn combined with the gyro may
also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests
itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro
stabilization under all conditions, you can make use of
the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter using
a transmitter control assigned to input "7", in connection
with gyro suppression and/or the two settings on the
Gyro NEJ-120 BB.
Swashplate rotation
Further notes on gyros with conﬁgurable multilevel gyro
gain (e. g. NEJ-120 BB)
Since you cannot specify the gyro gain from the
transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control, the
gyro's own control 1 must be used to set the (weaker)
gyro gain (e. g. for aerobatics) and control 2 the stronger
gyro gain (e. g. for hovering ). Even though a proportional
rotary control is used for control function 7, only a
switch-over between these two values takes place and
the setting is therefore not proportional.
You should therefore advance control 2 to the point
where the model is on the brink of oscillating when
hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to
the point where the model does not oscillate with its
tail even when ﬂying at maximum speed into a strong
headwind. Depending on the state of the weather
and the ﬂight program planned, you can also switch
over the gyro gain from the transmitter – also with
gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor deﬂection if
required.
Some rotor head control systems make it necessary
to incline the swashplate in a different direction from
the intended inclination of the rotor plane when a cyclic
control command is given. If your model features a
four-bladed main rotor, for example, you may need to
use this menu to set up a software-driven 45° rotation
of the control linkage to the right, so that the pushrods
from the swashplate to the rotor head can be set exactly
vertical, ensuring that the blade control system works
correctly, without unwanted differential effects. This
eliminates the need to make mechanical changes to
the control linkages. Negative angles equate to a virtual
rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive angles a
virtual rotation to the right.
Nick
Throttle
Tail
Nick
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
SEL
Swashplate limiting
Nick
Throttle
Tail
Nick
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
SEL
This function works like a circular mechanical surround
acting upon the stick which controls the swashplate,
restricting the normally square stick travel to a circular
range. In fact, if the helicopter is set up in such a way
Detail program description - Control adjust 173
that the deﬂections for roll and/or pitch-axis exploit the
maximum travel mechanically possible, e. g. for 3D helis,
then the total tilt applied to the swashplate if full roll
and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously
will be considerably greater (141% in numerical terms).
The swashplate mechanism may then strike its endstops and in the worst case the ball-links could even be
disengaged.
The mc-32 HoTT transmitter contains a conﬁgurable
software function for limiting the total swashplate travel,
i.e. it restricts the tilt angle of the swashplate from 100%
(the travel is limited to the value obtainable either with
roll or pitch-axis alone) to 149% (no effective limit). In
addition, the function can be set to "Off" and hence
completely deactivated. The swash limiter can also be
conﬁgured per model and per ﬂight phase.
This software solution is therefore much more ﬂexible
than a physical circular surround attached to the stick
unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll
and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common
stick unit.
The sketch shown alongside
illustrates the effect when set
to 100%: the cross-hatched
area of travel is curtailed and
appears as a "dead zone".
If this function is used, "Dual
Rate" should be set to 100%
and Dual Rate values above
100% should also not be
used. If not, and you set a
swashplate limit of 100%, for example, then swashplate
movement will be restricted even if roll and pitch-axis
commands are given separately.
174 Detail program description - Control adjust
Adjustment range: 100 ... 149% and "Off".
Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curve
Practical approach
Note:
The hover point should normally be set to the center
position of the throttle / collective pitch stick. For
some special cases, however, e. g. for "3D" ﬂight,
you may wish to program hover points that deviate
from this standard. For example: one point for
normal ﬂight attitude above the center and one point
for inverted ﬂight attitude below the center.
Idle setting and throttle curve
Note:
Since electric drive systems have no need for an idle
setting, motor idling does not need to be calibrated.
Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective pitch curve(s),
however, must take place as for glow-powered helis.
The idle setting described in detail on pages 105 to
107 always takes place with the throttle limiter closed –
normally with the trim lever of the C1 function and only
in special cases is the throttle limiter itself also utilized
(as standard, the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control).
The programming of a corresponding value for the "L"
point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed
of the motor, without inﬂuencing the hover conﬁguration.
Here, for example, you can use ﬂight phase
programming in order to conﬁgure a range of throttle
curves. This increased system rotational speed
below the hover point proves to be useful in certain
circumstances, for example for fast, steep landing
approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for
aerobatics.
The screen image depicts a curve
with a slightly changeable throttle
setting below the hover point at
the control center.
OUTPUT
Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems
are based on separate servos, they are always operated
together by the throttle/collective pitch stick (except
during auto-rotation ﬂight). This coupling is performed by
the helicopter program automatically.
In the mc-32 HoTT program, the trim lever of control
function 1 acts principally only on the throttle servo.
However, in the "Stick mode" menu (see page 94)
you can determine whether this should be used for idle
trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for idle
trimming during the auto-rotation phase ("throttle AR").
The process of ﬁne-tuning throttle and collective
pitch, i. e. setting the motor power curve to match the
collective blade pitch setting, is the most important
aspect of setting up a model helicopter. The mc-32
HoTT software provides for independent conﬁguration
of the throttle, collective pitch and torque compensation
curves, in addition to the C1 control curve ("Channel 1
curve" menu, page 119).
While these curves can be modeled using up to
six points, fewer points are generally sufﬁcient. We
recommend starting with three-point curves to begin
with. This involves setting individual values for the center
point and other (optional) reference points, and for the
two end-points ("L", "low", and "H", "high") of the throttle/
collective pitch stick: together, these deﬁne the control
curves.
Before setting the throttle and collective pitch function,
however, you should accurately calibrate the mechanical
linkages for all the servos, following the set-up
instructions for the helicopter in question.
Control travel
Different throttle curves are programmed for each ﬂight
phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up for both
hovering and aerobatics:
• Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle
control response and low noise when hovering
• Higher rotor speed for aerobatics with motor power
set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle
curve must also be adjusted in the hover range.
Basic set-up procedure
While the mc-32 HoTT transmitter permits the
electronic conﬁguration of collective pitch curve and
throttle curves to a large degree, ﬁrst ensure that you
have correctly set all of the model's mechanical linkages
as speciﬁed by the helicopter manual. Experienced
helicopter pilots will be glad to help you with this basic
set-up.
The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle is
just past the fully open setting with collective pitch set to
maximum or, for electric helis, with the speed controller
set to full. When the throttle limiter is closed, however,
it must be possible to just close off the carburetor using
the C1 trim lever (rapid throttle setting of the "digital
trim", see page 54), without the servo mechanically
striking its end-stop. For electric helis, it must be
possible to cut the electric motor's speed controller
safely with the throttle limiter closed.
Take great care when conﬁguring these settings, by
adjusting the control linkage as required and/or altering
the linkage point on the servo or carburetor lever. Only
then should you optimize throttle servo ﬁne-tuning
electronically.
Caution:
Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and
Detail program description - Control adjust 175
+100%
OUTPUT
a) Rotational speed is too
high
Remedy: Decrease the
carburetor opening by
reducing the value of point
"1" on the graph page of
the "C1 ¼ throttle".
-100%
b) Rotational speed is too low
Remedy: Decrease the
blade angle of attack pitch
by reducing the value of
point "1" on the "Pitch"
graph page.
+100%
Hover
point
-100%
Control travel
Important:
These settings must be reconﬁgured until the model
hovers at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/
collective pitch stick at its center point. The conﬁguration
of all other model parameters depends on these settings
being made correctly!
+100%
OUTPUT
Control travel
1. The model does not lift off until the collective
pitch stick is above the center point.
a) Rotational speed is too low
Remedy: On the graph
page of the "C1 ¼
throttle", increase the
value for point "1".
Hover
point
OUTPUT
With this basic set-up complete, the motor should
be started in accordance with the motor operating
instructions: idling can then be conﬁgured using the trim
lever of the throttle/collective pitch stick. The idle position
that you set is displayed on the transmitter's basic
display by a horizontal bar alongside the display of the
C1 trim lever position. Refer to the description of digital
trim on page 54 of this manual.
The model should lift off the ground with the collective
pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover roughly
at the expected rotational speed. If this is not the case,
proceed as follows:
Hover
point
pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective
pitch setting (point "H") now provides you with a simple
method of achieving constant system rotational speed
from hovering right through to maximum climb.
First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving
the collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to
the hover conﬁguration, motor speed should remain
unchanged.
If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the drive
system working at full power and therefore no further
power increase is possible, then reduce maximum
blade pitch angle at full deﬂection of the collective
pitch stick, i.e. the value of point "H". Conversely, you
should increase the angle of attack if the motor speed
increases during the climb. On the "Pitch" graph page,
you should therefore use the collective pitch stick to
move the vertical line to point "H" and change its value
accordingly, using the arrow keys cd on the right
touch pad.
+100%
OUTPUT
2. The model lifts off before the center point is
reached.
safety precautions applicable to handling motors
and helicopters before starting the motor for the
ﬁrst time!
Hover
point
-100%
Control travel
+100%
OUTPUT
b) Rotational speed istoo
high
Remedy: Increase the
blade angle of attack pitch
by increasing the value
of point "1" on the "Pitch"
graph page.
Hover
point
-100%
Control travel
Standard set-up
Standard set-up is completed on the basis of the basic
set-up described above, whereby the model hovers
in normal ﬂight at the correct rotational speed with
the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center point:
This means a set-up with which your model is capable
of hovering and ﬂying circuits in all phases while
maintaining a constant rotational speed.
Climb settings
The combination of throttle hover setting, collective
176 Detail program description - Control adjust
This diagram shows only the
changes when setting the
maximum collective pitch value.
-100%
Control travel
Then bring the model back to hover, which should, in
turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center point.
If the hover point is now achieved only by moving the
collective pitch stick from the center point towards
"higher" values, then you should compensate for this
hover deviation by slightly increasing collective pitch for
hover – i.e. for point "1" – until the model once again
hovers with stick at its center. Conversely, if the model
hovers below the mid-point, correct this by reducing the
angle of attack appropriately.
You may also ﬁnd that it is necessary to correct the
carburetor opening for the hover point (point "1") at "C1
¼ throttle".
This diagram shows only the
change to the hover point, i. e.
collective pitch minimum and
maximum are both left at -100%
or +100%.
OUTPUT
+100%
-100%
Control travel
Continue adjusting these settings until you really do
achieve a constant rotational speed over the full control
range between hover and climb.
Descent setting
The descent setting should now be conﬁgured by
placing the model in a steady descent from forward ﬂight
at a considerable altitude by fully reducing collective
pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (point
"L") so that the model descends at an angle of 60° …
70°. On the "Pitch" graph page, you should therefore
use the collective pitch stick to move the vertical line
to point "L" and change its value accordingly, using the
arrow keys on the right touch pad.
OUTPUT
+100%
This diagram shows only the
changes when setting the
minimum collective pitch value.
Hover
point
-100%
Control travel
Once the model can ﬂy this maneuver properly, set the
value for "Throttle min" – the value for point "L" on the
graph page for "C1 ¼ throttle" – so that the rotational
speed neither increases nor decreases. This completes
the set-up procedure for throttle and collective pitch.
Some important closing remarks
Before starting the motor, ensure that the throttle limiter
is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor now
responds only to the C1 trim lever. If the carburetor is
open too far when you switch on the transmitter, you will
receive a visual and audible warning. Otherwise, if the
carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the
motor starts, there is a danger that the motor will run up
to speed immediately after starting, and the centrifugal
clutch will engage immediately.
Accordingly, you should
always hold the rotor
head ﬁrmly when starting.
However, if you should accidentally start the motor with
the carburetor too far open, the golden rule is this:
Don't panic!
Keep hold of the rotor head!
Don't let go!
Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even if
this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst case
scenario).
YOU are responsible for ensuring
that the helicopter never ﬂies off
in an uncontrolled manner.
The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the
motor itself are negligible, if you compare these to
the injuries and damage that an uncontrolled model
helicopter can cause if it is allowed to ﬂy around with its
blades spinning wildly.
Always make sure that nobody else
is standing near the helicopter
where they could be injured.
In addition, you must never switch abruptly from idle
to the ﬂight setting by suddenly increasing system
rotational speed. This will cause the rotor to accelerate
very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch
and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are generally
mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will be unable
to keep pace with such rapid acceleration; they will
respond by swinging far out of their normal position and
may even cause a boom strike.
After starting the motor, you should therefore use the
throttle limiter to increase the system rotational speed
slowly. If you have assigned a switch to the throttle
limiter, always ensure that you use the "Control adjust"
menu (page 100) to program a time constant of about
5 seconds for running up the system rotational speed
(opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however, program
a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave the default
value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to
conﬁgure this setting globally for all ﬂight phase
Detail program description - Control adjust 177
Helicopter mixers
Auto-rotation settings
Auto-rotation permits both full-size and model
helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motor
should fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail, cutting
the motor and landing using auto-rotation is also the
only possible way to avoid a high-speed, uncontrollable
rotation around the vertical axis and a resulting
catastrophic crash. Accordingly, switchover TO the autorotation phase takes place immediately.
When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is made,
the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as follows:
Pitch
Thr setting AR
Tailoffset AR
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Autorot
–90%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
During auto-rotation ﬂight, the main rotor is no longer
driven by the motor, but only by its own momentum
and the the airﬂow through the rotor disc caused by the
rapid descent. Since the energy stored by a rotor kept
spinning in this way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter
ﬂares, pilots must not only have experience in handling
helicopter models but must also consider carefully how
the relevant functions should be conﬁgured.
The advanced pilot should therefore practice autorotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be
able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at
competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can can land
the helicopter undamaged from a great height if the
motor should fail. For this purpose, the program provides
a range of adjustment options designed to help the
pilot ﬂy a motorized model in its unpowered state. Note
178 Detail program description - Control adjust
that the auto-rotation settings comprise a complete
seventh ﬂight phase, which provides access to all the
ﬂight phase- speciﬁc conﬁguration options, and to trims,
collective pitch curve settings, etc., in particular. The
following functions have special features not present in
the powered ﬂight phases:
Collective pitch (Collective pitch curve (C1 ¼ Pitch))
In powered ﬂight, the maximum blade pitch angle
is limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation,
however, it is limited only by the point at which airﬂow
ceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum
collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure sufﬁcient
thrust when ﬂaring the helicopter even as rotational
speed is falling off. To do so, brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad to switch to the "Pitch" graph
page and then use the joystick to move the vertical line
to point "H". Start by setting a value that is about 10%
to 20% larger than your "normal" maximum value for
collective pitch. Initially, however, do NOT set a value
that is considerably greater than for normal ﬂight, since
if you do so, the behavior of the collective pitch controls
may then be very unfamiliar following the switchover.
Indeed, there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer
during the ﬂare and the model will balloon: this will case
the rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude
and the model will then crash to the ground. You can
always re-adjust the value later after ﬂying some test
auto-rotations.
The minimum value for collective pitch can differ from
that set for normal ﬂight. This depends on the pilot's
usual style for normal ﬂight. For auto-rotation, however,
you must always set a sufﬁciently generous minimum
value for collective pitch at point "L" to ensure your
model can be brought out of forward ﬂight at moderate
speed into a descent at an angle of around 60–70°
when collective pitch is reduced to a minimum. If, like
most heli pilots, you have conﬁgured this kind of setting
for normal ﬂight anyway, then you can simply copy this
value across.
If, however, you normally let your model "fall" at a
shallower angle, then you should increase the value at
point "L", and vice versa.
Approach angle
in strong
wind
in moderate
wind
no wind
Approach angle for
various wind conditions
75°
60°
45°
As a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not positioned
right at the bottom of its travel for auto-rotation. Instead,
it is typically between the hover position and the
bottom end-point, offering the pilot the option of further
adjusting pitch inclination using the pitch-axis controls.
You can shorten the approach by pulling back on the
pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch, or
extend the approach by pushing forward on the pitchaxis stick and gently increasing collective pitch.
Throttle setting AR
Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow motor
completely during competitions, this is rather less
advisable during training sessions, since you would then
need to restart the motor following each practice autorotation landing.
During the training phase, you should therefore set the
value on this line so that a glow motor is held at a safe
idle during the auto-rotation phase without the clutch
engaging; electric drive systems should be set safely to
"Off".
Note:
You may wish to make use of the "Motor Stop" option
on the "Base setup model" menu as an alternative
"Emergency STOP" function.
Depending on the friction and running resistance of the
gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly, however. This
relatively slight torque must then be corrected if necessary
by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value
will always be a ﬁgure between zero degrees and a pitch
angle opposed to the pitch angle in normal ﬂight.
Tail rotor AR
In normal ﬂight, the tail rotor is set so that it
compensates for motor torque while the model is
hovering. It therefore generates some a certain amount
of thrust even in its normal position. The level of thrust is
then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by
the various mixers which provide all manner of torque
compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used to
compensate for varying weather conditions, ﬂuctuations
in system rotational speed and other inﬂuences.
For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not driven
by the motor, but by the "windmill" principle. Since this,
in turn, does not generate any torque for which the tail
rotor must compensate, all corresponding mixers are
switched off automatically.
Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also means
the above-mentioned thrust is superﬂuous, however, a
different tail rotor conﬁguration is also required:
Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground in
a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving system
switched on, select the ﬂight phase "Auto-rotation" and
then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now change the
value on the "Tail rotor" line until the tail rotor blade angle
of attack is zero degrees. Viewed from the tail, the tail
rotor blades should be parallel to one another.
Detail program description - Control adjust 179
General notes on freely programmable mixers
The previous pages have described a wealth of readyto-use built-in coupling functions, in the context of the
two menus "Wing mixers" and "Helicopter mixers".
The fundamental signiﬁcance of mixers and the principle
by which they work are described on page 145. The
following section presents you with information relating
to "free mixers".
In addition to the pre-programmed mixers previously
mentioned, the mc-32 HoTT offers a number of freely
programmable mixers in every model memory, whose
inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can be conﬁgured to suit
your exact requirements:
• 8 linear mixers, numbered M1 to M8
• 4 curve mixers, numbered K9 to K12
These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most
applications and are invariably sufﬁcient when you
incorporate the pre-programmed coupling functions
offered. On the "Mix active/phase" menu (see page
192), you are also free to specify which of these
12 mixers is activated or deactivated separately for each
ﬂight phase.
For the "free mixers", the signal present at any control
function (1 to 12) can be assigned as the input signal.
For the "switch channel" (see further below), the signal
from any switch can be utilized. The signal that is
present at the control channel and passed to the mixer
input is always inﬂuenced by its own transmitter control
and by any control characteristic that may have been
set, e. g. those speciﬁed by the "Dual Rate / Expo",
"Channel 1 curve" and "Control adjust" menus.
The mixer output acts on a control channel (1 to 12,
depending on receiver type) that can also be assigned
freely. Before this channel routes the signal to the servo,
it can be inﬂuenced only by the "Servo adjustments"
180 Detail program description - Control adjust
menu, i.e. by the the servo reverse, neutral point offset,
servo travel and servo travel limit functions, and also
possibly by " Tx. output swap ".
One control function can be used for any number of mix
inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several mixers
should be switched to act in parallel.
Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to
affect one and the same control channel. Particularly in
the latter case, however, it is very important to ensure
that the servo concerned does not strike its mechanical
end-stops when several mixer signals accumulate
to an excessive extent. For safety's sake it may be
worth setting an appropriate travel limit on the "Servo
adjustments" menu in such cases.
For more complex applications, mixers can be switched
in sequence. In this case, it is not the (transmitter) signal
at the "output" of a control function which forms the input
signal of the "series-wired" mixer, but the (mixed) signal
"further back" at the "input" of a control channel. The
following description of the free mixers includes several
examples of this type.
In the software, one "free mixer" is always initially
activated. If you wish, however, the mixer can also be
assigned an ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many
functions to which switches can be assigned, you must
be careful to avoid undesirable multiple assignments.
The two key mixer parameters are:
• … the mixer ratio, which deﬁnes the extent to which
the input signal acts on the output of the control
channel connected to the mixer output.
If you are using linear mixers, the mixer ratio can be
set as symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can
also be conﬁgured with up to 6 points to suit your
application, enabling the implementation of highly
non-linear curves.
• … the neutral point of a mixer, which is also
referred to as the "offset".
The offset is the speciﬁc point along the travel of a
transmitter control (joystick, CTRL 6 … 8 proportional
controls or switches 1 … 9) at which the mixer no
longer inﬂuences the control channel connected to
its output. Normally, the neutral point is the center
point of the transmitter control. However, the offset
can also be set at any other point along the control
travel. Since there are no restrictions on the design
of the curve mixers, setting a mixer neutral point only
makes sense for the 8 linear mixers.
Switch channel "S" as a mixer input
Occasionally, however, only a constant control signal is
required at the mixer input. A typical application would
be a slightly increased "up-elevator" trim when the aerotow release is closed – fully independently of its normal
trim setting.
In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-tow
release and the mixer; it is then used not only to open
and close the release, but also to pass the desired trim
signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. To identify this
special arrangement, this mixer input control function in
the program is designated "S" for "Switch channel".
In addition, if the corresponding "target channel" should
now no longer be inﬂuenced by its "normal" transmitter
control, then you should isolate the latter from the
function input of the affected control channel on the
"MIX-only channel" menu (page 193). In the menu
description that follows, an example is also given to
illustrate this function.
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
Free mixers
to the menu option …
Fl. phase timers
Wing mixers
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
Fl. phase timers
Helicopter mixer
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
… on the multi-function list. Brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.
Freely-programmable linear and curve mixers
Regardless of the model type you have selected, each
of the 24 model memory slots will offer you eight linear
mixers (M1 … M8) …
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Typ
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
fr zu
… and 4 curve mixers (K9 … K12), which also offer you
the option of setting non-linear control characteristics:
M8
C9
C10
C11
C12
Typ
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
fr zu
In addition, the "MIX active/phase" menu (page 192)
enables you to enable and disable particular mixers
separately for speciﬁc ﬂight phases. On the "Free
mixers" menu, the blocked mixers are then
suppressed in the corresponding ﬂight phase. If
you are hunting for a mixer that is not shown, you
should therefore switch to the appropriate ﬂight
phase!
In this ﬁrst section, however, we will concentrate on how
to program the ﬁrst screen page of the "free mixers". We
will then move on to the method of programming mixer
ratios, both for linear mixers and curve mixers, as found
on the second screen page of this menu.
Basic programming procedure
1. Select the mixer you want by using the arrow keys
cd on the left or right touch pad.
2. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad. The
input ﬁeld on the line marked "fr" at the lower edge of
the screen is now shown highlighted.
3. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to select
the "fr" mixer input.
4. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad; using
the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad, switch
to the column marked "to" on the lower edge of the
screen and then tap the center SET key on the right
touch pad once again.
The input ﬁeld "to" is shown highlighted.
5. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to select
the "to" mixer output.
6. Tap the center SET key on the right touch pad.
Optionally, use the arrow key e on the left or right
touch pad to switch to the column marked "ty" on
the lower edge of the screen, in order to include
the trim of the respective joystick in the mixer input
signal ("Tr" for trim) and/or to add series switching for
mixers …
… and/or use the arrow key f on the left or right
touch pad to switch to the column marked with the
on the lower edge of the screen.
switch icon
Here, tap the center SET key on the right touch
pad once again and assign a switch, following the
description given in the section "Assigning transmitter
controls, switches and control switches" (page 52).
7. Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
switch to the column and then tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad.
Detail program description - Control adjust 181
8. Deﬁne the mixer ratios on the second screen page.
9. Return to the ﬁrst page by using the center ESC key
on the left touch pad.
"fr"
After selecting a mixer line and then tapping the center
SET key on the right touch pad to highlight the value
ﬁeld, use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to select
one of the control functions: 1 … 12 or S.
For the sake of legibility, control functions 1 … 4 are
marked as follows when setting wing mixers:
C1
Throttle/airbrake stick
AI
Aileron stick
EL
Elevator stick
RU
Rudder stick
… and, for the heli program:
Throttle/collective pitch stick
Roll stick
Pitch-axis stick
Tail rotor stick
Note:
If you select control functions 5 … 12 for ﬁxed-wing
models or 5, 7 … 12 for heli models, do not forget
to assign a transmitter control in each case on the
"Control adjust" menu!
"S" as switch channel
Selecting "S" (switch channel) in the "fr" column has
the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer
input, e. g. in order to add a little more "up-elevator" trim
when the aero-tow release is closed, as mentioned on
182 Detail program description - Control adjust
the previous page.
After assigning a control function or the "S" switch
channel in the "fr" column, the following is also displayed
…
"to"
… on the lower edge of the screen.
You use the input ﬁeld in this column to route the
destination of the mixer, i. e. the mixer output, to one of
the control channels. At the same time, additional ﬁelds
also appear on the bottom line of the screen:
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Tr
ty
C1
??
fr
EL
EL C4
EL
??
to
In this example, four mixers have already been deﬁned.
The second mixer is already familiar to us in principle as
"Elevat curve" from the "Brake settings" sub-menu on the
"Wing mixers" menu, and the third is familiar from the
"Tail" line ("2ELSv3+8") on the "Model type" menu. As a
general rule, however, you should ﬁrst make use of the
pre-programmed mixers. However, if you need asymmetric
mixer ratios, want to go as far as programming non-linear
curves or need to offset the mixer neutral point, then you
should set or leave the pre-programmed mixers at "0%"
and replace their use with free mixers.
Erasing mixers
If you need to erase a previously-deﬁned mixer, select
the appropriate line with the arrow keys cd on the
left or right touch pad, switch to the "fr" column if you
need to with the arrow keys efand then brieﬂy tap the
center SET button on the right touch pad:
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Tr
ty
C1
??
fr
EL
EL C4
EL
??
to
The ﬁeld in the "fr" column for the mixer you want to
delete will now be shown highlighted: tap both of the
arrow keys cd or ef on the right touch pad at the
same time (CLEAR):
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
C1
??
??
Typ fr
Tr
EL
EL C4
??
EL
??
zu
Mixer switches
In the sample screen image shown above, switches "4"
and "2" have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and 4 and
to mixer 2 of the control switch "G4".
The switch symbol to the right of the switch number
shows the current switch state.
Any mixers that have not been assigned any switch,
as shown in the line on the bottom of the screen
marked with a switch icon
, are on by default!
A switch must be assigned to the fourth mixer if you wish
to switch between two ﬁxed mixer values (still to be set)
that correspond to the two end-points of a (proportional)
transmitter control. Accordingly, the "switch channel" mixer
cannot also be switched "on" or "off" as with the other
mixers.
Forward
Only effective if C1 stick is forward
Back
Only effective if C1 stick is back
… or on the "Pitch" line of the "Stick mode" menu for
helicopter models:
a) WITHOUT series switching:
4,8 V
Linear, over full trim lever travel
Example:
Two mixers (MIX 6 ¼ 7 and 7 ¼ 8):
C 577
None
??
??
??
to
Best.-Nr. 4101
Effect on mixer output
ty
??
??
??
fr
Servo
Trim
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
MIX 1
4,8 V
The effect of the C1 trim lever on the mixer output will
depend on the function assigned to it on the "Model
type" menu (page 82), in the "Motor on C1" column for
ﬁxed-wing models …
MIX 2
4,8 V
Servo
C 577
Servo
Best.-Nr. 4101
4,8 V
C 577
Best.-Nr. 4101
MIX 1
C 577
Servo
4,8 V
MIX 2
Best.-Nr. 4101
Switching mixers in series
As already explained on page 180, you can also
switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched
in "sequence", the "input signal" of a control channel
already on its way to the servo "branches off" and is
directed to a further channel. In the "ty" column, select
the right angle bracket " " – or "Tr ", if the trim should
also act simultaneously on the mixer input:
C 577
EL
EL C4
EL
??
to
Only effective at minimum position of the
assigned throttle limit control (CTRL 6
proportional rotary control as standard)
Best.-Nr. 4101
ty
C1
??
fr
GA
(throttle autorotation)
Servo
Tr
Linear, over full trim lever travel
4,8 V
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
AR
(throttle limit)
C 577
Including the trim
For control functions 1 … 4, you can also conﬁgure
things so that the trim generated by the digital trim lever
of the respective joystick affects the mixer input. In this
case, brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch
pad and then use the arrow keys to select "Tr" in the
highlighted ﬁeld:
Effect on mixer output
Servo
"Ty"
b) The same mixers WITH series switching:
Trim
Best.-Nr. 4101
If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 … G4) as
a switch, then please note that you must deﬁne this
appropriately BEFOREHAND on the "Control switch"
menu. If you do not, you will assign an undeﬁned control
switch and therefore one that functions as a ﬁxed switch.
In this highly simpliﬁed example, if mixer 2 is switched in
series, then it does not "take over" solely the transmitter
signal of control function 7 – as shown under a) – but,
instead, the entire (mixed) signal present at the servo
side of control channel 7, as shown under b). It then
directs this in accordance with its conﬁgured mixer ratio
forwards to control channel 8. In this case, the effect of
transmitter control "6" extends as far as output "8". This
kind of serial linkage can be extended as far as you
wish. For example, another mixer "8¼12" can be
used to route the control signal from "6" as far as output
"12", taking into consideration the associated mixer
ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link, each
separate mixer can still be controlled via the transmitter
control assigned to the mixer input. Fixed-wing and
helicopter mixers also work in the same way, when set
up to switch "in sequence".
Including phase trim
If you wish to apply the trim values of the FLAP channel
("6") or the FLAP2 channel ("9") as stored on the
"Phase trim" menu – and dependent on ﬂight phase –
then ﬁrst tap the center SET key on the right touch pad
and use its arrow keys to select "P":
Detail program description - Control adjust 183
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
ty
??
??
??
??
fr
11
??
??
??
??
to
Depending on the mixer value conﬁgured, a mixer can,
as shown in the example above, route the signal from a
ﬂap control present (e.g.) on input 6 to control channel
11, while also applying the FLAP trim value set on the
"Phase trim" menu (page 136) for the respective ﬂight
phase.
Other special features of free mixers
Mixer input = mixer output
If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its
output, e.g. "C1 ¼C1", you can achieve some very
special effects in conjunction with the option of switching
a free mixer on and off in any way you like. Typical
examples for this feature can be found at the end of this
section as example 2 on page 190, plus others in the
section "Controlling timed sequences" on page 266.
Tip:
If you separate a control function, e.g. "9", from control
channel 9" using the "MIX-only channel" menu (see
page 193), then the servo response is deﬁned only
by the mixer ratio (yet to be speciﬁed) of the mixer
programmed on the same channel. This enables you
to set up linear curves using mixers M1 … 8 or 6-point
control curves using curve mixers K9 … 12 for any
transmitter control, as described in the "Channel 1
curve" menu, and also include them in ﬂight phase
switching if required. This method of "linking" is then
184 Detail program description - Control adjust
not only also switchable, but can even be subject to a
delay, by assigning an appropriate delay in the "– time
+" column of the "Control adjust" menu. For more
information, see the programming example entitled
"Controlling timed sequences" on page 266.
Mixer output affecting default software coupling of
aileron, camber-changing ﬂap or collective pitch
servos
Before we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must
ﬁrst give some thought to what happens if we permit a
mixer to affect the default software coupling of aileron,
camber-changing ﬂap or collective pitch servos:
• Fixed-wing models:
Depending on the number of wing servos set on
the "Aile/ﬂaps" line of the "Model type" menu,
control channels are connected together via special
mixers as follows: channels 2 and 5 for the "Aileron"
function; channels 6 and 7 for the "Flap" function; and
channels 9 and 10 for the FLAP2 servos (if present).
If mixer outputs are programmed to affect these kinds
of couplings, then their effect on the respective ﬂap
pair derived from the "receiving" control channel must
be accounted for:
Mixer
Effect
N.N.* ¼ 2
The servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an
aileron function
N.N.* ¼ 5
The servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a
ﬂap function
N.N.* ¼ 6
The servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a
ﬂap function
N.N.* ¼ 7
The servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an
aileron function
N.N.* ¼ 9
The servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a
ﬂap function
N.N.* ¼ 10 The servo pair 9 + 10 responds with
an aileron function
N.N.* ¼ 11 The servo pair 11 + 12 responds with
a ﬂap function
N.N.* ¼ 12 The servo pair 11 + 12 responds with
an aileron function
• Model helicopters:
With heli mixers, collective pitch control may be
provided by up to 4 servos connected to receiver
outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on helicopter type.
The software links these together to control collective
pitch, roll and pitch-axis.
Elsewhere than the "Helicopter mixers" menu,
it is not advisable to mix a free mixer into these
channels, since some extremely complex interactions
can result from such attempts. One of the few
exceptions is "Collective pitch trim using a separate
transmitter control" – see example 3 on page 190.
Important notices:
• With serial links in particular, remember that
that the travels of the individual mixers are
cumulative if multiple stick commands are made
simultaneously: there is a risk that the servo(s)
may strike a mechanical end-stop. If necessary,
reduce "servo travel" to avoid this; alternatively,
set "Travel limit" on the "Servo adjustments"
menu and/or reduce mixer values.
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
• Use the option available to you at any time of
switching to the "Servo display" efmenu (see
page 230). This menu is reached from almost any
menu option on the transmitter's basic display
by brieﬂy tapping the keys on the left touch
pad at the same time. This menu gives you the
opportunity to check the effects of all of your
settings on a single screen.
Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point
Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of
the mixer functions, the following section describes how
to program linear and non-linear mixer curves.
For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves
are programmed on a second page of the screen
display. Use the arrow keys cd on the left or right
touch pad to select the desired mixer line. If necessary,
use the touch pad's arrow keys to move to the right
column ( ), and then brieﬂy tap the center SET key on
the right touch pad in order to access the graph page.
Mixers M1 … 8: Setting linear mixer values
As a practical example, we will now deﬁne a linear mixer
curve to resolve the following problem:
For our motorized aircraft model, the two servos connected
to receiver outputs 6 and 7 – deﬁned on the "Aile/ﬂaps"
line of the "Model type" menu as "… 2FL" – are to
be deployed to activate landing ﬂaps. That is: when a
transmitter control is moved, they must deﬂect downwards
only. This requires a simultaneous elevator trim, however.
First, use the "Control adjust" menu to assign a control
such as the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control to input
6. Comment: in this case, a transmitter control on input
6 will control the two servos connected to receiver
outputs 6 and 7 as ﬂaps, by default – as you can see by
consulting the above table. Leave the default value of
"GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to conﬁgure
this setting globally for all ﬂight phases – as is the case
for the free mixer.
"Control adjust" menu
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Tr
ty
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
nor mal
GL –––
GL Ct6
GL –––
GL –––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Note:
Note that if two ﬂap servos have been selected, any
transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled
in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the
ﬂaps. However, in the interests of safety, you should
make a habit of leaving all inputs not currently required
to "free", or of resetting these back to "free"!
Start by moving this transmitter control to its left endpoint and adjust the landing ﬂaps so that they are
retracted or closed in this position. If you now move
the dial to the right, the ﬂaps should move downwards;
if not, you will need to adjust the direction of servo
rotation.
We now turn our attention to the ﬁrst mixer shown in the
screen image on page 182 ("6 ¼EL"), to which switch 4
was assigned:
EL
EL C4
??
EL
??
to
C1
??
??
fr
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
open the second screen page:
L.MIX 1
EL
OFF
If this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been
activated using the assigned toggle switch – "4", in this
example. If so, operate the switch:
L.MIX 1
Mix input
0%
0%
Offset
0%
SYM
ASY
EL
The solid vertical line represents the current position of
the transmitter control on input 6. (In the above diagram,
located at the left edge, since the CTRL 7 transmitter
control assigned to input 6 in this example (see previous
page) is turned fully to the left.) The dotted vertical line
in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the
mixer neutral point – see under "Offset", below. The solid
horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has
Detail program description - Control adjust 185
the value zero over the entire stick travel; accordingly,
the elevator will not yet follow the movement of the ﬂaps.
First, the …
Offset (mixer neutral point)
… should be deﬁned. To do so, use the arrow key d
on the left or right touch pad to move to the line under
"Offset":
L.MIX 1
Mix input
0%
0%
Offset
0%
STO
SET
EL
The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram
indicates the position of the mixer neutral point
("Offset"), i.e. the speciﬁc point along the control travel
at which the mixer does NOT inﬂuence the control
channel connected to its output. The default position for
this point is at the control center.
However, since in our example the ﬂaps should be
closed or retracted with the proportional rotary control
turned fully to the left, and since the elevator should
also not be further inﬂuenced in this position, we must
relocate the mixer neutral point to precisely this point. To
do so, turn the transmitter control used (in this example,
CTRL 7) fully to the left if you have not already done
so, and then brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right
touch pad. The dotted vertical line moves across to this
point, the new mixer neutral point, which by deﬁnition
always retains the "initial" value of zero.
However, to illustrate our example better we now
wish to set this "Offset" value to only -75%.
186 Detail program description - Control adjust
L.MIX 1
Mix input
0%
0%
Offset
–75%
STO
SET
EL
Notes:
• By selecting SET with the arrow key f on the left or
right touch pad and then tapping the center SET key
on the right touch pad …
L.MIX 1
Mix input
0%
0%
Offset
–75%
STO
SET
EL
… you can then use the arrow keys on the left or
right touch pad to set or readjust the offset value
manually in increments of 1%.
• By selecting SET and then activating the value ﬁeld
by tapping the center SET key on the right touch
pad – – see screen image shown above – – you can
then reset the mixer neutral point back to the control
center automatically by simultaneously tapping the
two arrow keys cd or ef on the right touch pad
(CLEAR).
Symmetrical mixer ratios
The next task is to deﬁne the mixer values above and
below the mixer neutral point – – – starting from its current
position. Move to the value ﬁeld on the line beneath the
"Mix input" line, using the arrow key c on the left or right
touch pad if necessary: If required, use the arrow keys
ef on the left or right touch pad to select the SYM ﬁeld,
so as to conﬁgure the mixer value symmetrically with the
offset point just set. After brieﬂy tapping the center SET
key on the right touch pad, you can then use the arrow
keys on the right touch pad to set a value from -150% to
+150% in the two highlighted ﬁelds. Note that the mixer
value set always refers to the input signal of the respective
transmitter control (control signal)! Negative mixer values
reverse the direction of the mixer.
Simultaneously tapping the two arrow keys cd or ef
on the right touch pad (CLEAR) will erase the mixer
ratio in the highlighted ﬁeld.
The "optimum" value in our example will certainly need
ﬂight-testing.
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+20% +20%
Offset
–75%
SYM
ASY
EL
Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75% of control
travel: as a result, the elevator ("EL") will exhibit a
(slight) down-elevator effect even at the neutral point
of the landing ﬂaps and this is naturally undesirable.
Accordingly, you should reposition the mixer neutral
point to -100% of control travel, as described earlier.
6
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+20% +20%
Offset
–100%
STO
SET
EL
If you were now to reset the offset currently set at -100%
back as far as 0% of control travel – by selecting the
SET ﬁeld with the arrow keyfon the left or right
touch pad, activating the value ﬁeld and then tapping
the two arrow keys cd or ef on the right touch pad
(CLEAR), then you will receive the following screen:
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+20% +20%
Offset
0%
STO
SET
EL
Asymmetric mixer ratios
In many cases, however, we require different mixer
values on each side of the mixer neutral point.
First, reset the offset of the mixer used in the example
"6 ¼ EL" to 0%, if required (see screen image above).
Using the arrow key f on the left or right touch pad,
select the ASY ﬁeld and then tap the center SET key
on the right touch pad. If you now move the proportional
rotary control assigned to input 6 – in this example,
CTRL 7 – in each of the corresponding directions,
you can use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to
conﬁgure the mixer ratios for each of the two control
directions, i.e. left and right of the conﬁgured offset point:
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+55% +20%
Offset
0%
SYM
ASY
EL
Note:
If you are using a switch channel mixer of the "S ¼ N.N.*"
type, then you need to actuate the assigned switch. The
vertical then jumps between the left and right side.
Setting the curve mixers K9 … K12
These four curve mixers enable you to deﬁne extremely
non-linear mixer curves by placing up to 4 freely
positionable points between the two endpoints "L" (low
= -100% control travel) and "H" (high = +100% control
travel) along the control travel.
If you have already read the description of the "Channel
1 curve" menu, or the method of programming 6-point
curves on the "Helicopter mixers" menu, you can
safely skip the following description.
Programming details
The control curve is deﬁned by up to 6 points, known as
"reference points". In the default software conﬁguration,
2 reference points are already deﬁned, namely only the
two end-points, "L" and "H"; see the next screen image.
The following section applies to "any" mixer to which we
wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic.
The examples shown in the following section
are merely illustrative, however, and they do not
represent real-life mixer curves.
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
Input
–45%
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
normal
10
Setting reference points
When you move the transmitter control assigned to the
mixer input – here control function 8 – a vertical line
in the graph follows the movement between the two
end-points. The current control position is also shown
numerically on the "Input" line. The point at which this
line intersects with the curve in question is named the
"Output" and can be varied between -125% and +125%
by setting reference points; see further below. This
control signal acts on the mixer output.
In the above example, the transmitter control is on input
8 at -45% of control travel. The output signal continue to
show 0%, however, since no value has yet been entered.
Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between
the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance
between neighboring reference points must not be less
than approx. 25%.
If necessary, use the left or right arrow keys on the left
or right touch pad to drag the marker frame downwards,
until it is on the "Point" line:
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
Detail program description - Control adjust 187
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
Input
–45%
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
normal
10
When you now brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the
right touch pad, the "?" is replaced by a point number
and the value ﬁeld to the right is activated:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
Input
–45%
0%
Output
0%
Point 1
10
Using the arrow keys on the right touch pad you can now
change the point value within the range of ±125%, e. g.:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
Input
–45%
+50%
Output
+50%
Point 1
normal
10
Note:
If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference
point, please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.
Continue in this way to set other reference points. Note
that the order in which you generate the (maximum) 4
reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is
188 Detail program description - Control adjust
irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously
renumbered automatically from left to right as they are
entered.
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
Input
+35%
–55%
Output
–55%
Point 2
nor mal
10
Erasing reference points
To erase one of the reference points between "L" and
"H", use the transmitter control in question to move the
vertical line onto or into the vicinity of the reference point
in question. The reference point number and associated
reference point value are shown on the "Point" line. The
value ﬁeld is highlighted, see screen image above.
If necessary, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch
pad to move the marker frame onto the "Pitch" line. Now
brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad.
The value ﬁeld is shown highlighted.
Now tap the two arrow keys cd or ef on the right
touch pad at the same time (CLEAR).
The selected reference point is erased, and the
numbering of the remaining reference points is updated
as required. Brieﬂy tap the center ESC key on the left
touch pad to complete the procedure.
Note that the reference points "L" and "H" cannot be erased.
Changing reference point values
To change reference point values, use the associated
transmitter control to move the vertical line onto the
point you wish to change: "L", 1 … 4 or "H". The number
and current curve value of this point are displayed. After
activating the value ﬁeld on the "Point" line by brieﬂy
tapping the center SET key, use the arrow keys on the
right touch pad to change the current curve value shown
in the highlighted ﬁeld. The possible range is -125% to
+125% and changes do not affect neighboring reference
points. Brieﬂy tap the center ESC key on the left touch
pad to complete the procedure.
Trim point function
Alternatively, assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e.
highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys
ef on the left touch pad to jump to reference points
already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the
graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys
on the right touch pad can then be used to change the
reference point jumped to as described above, entirely
independently of the control position:
C.MIX 9
Kur
Trimvepoint
Input
+35%
–55%
Output
–55%
Point 2
normal
10
Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center
ESC key on the left touch pad.
Trim offset function
Assuming the value ﬁeld is active, i. e. highlighted, you
can not only use the up or down arrow keys ef on the
left touch pad to jump to reference points already set
and change their values, but you can also use the cd
keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an
existing curve within the range ±25%:
C.MIX 9
Kur
Trimveoffset
Input
+35%
–30%
Output
–30%
Point 2
normal
C.MIX 9
Kur
Trimveoffset
Input
+35%
–80%
Output
–80%
Point 2
normal
10
10
You can also exit from this function by tapping the center
ESC key on the left touch pad.
Trim x-axis function
This function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right
(f) arrow key on the right touch pad with an active
(i.e. highlighted) value ﬁeld. You can then use the arrow
keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point
horizontally or vertically as you wish.
C.MIX 9
aus
Kur
TrimveX-axis
Input
0%
–55%
Output
–55%
Point ?
normal
10
Notes:
• If you reposition the point horizontally further away
from the current control position than approx. ±25%,
a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark
does not refer to the repositioned point, however:
instead, it signiﬁes that a further point can be set at
the current control position.
• Please note that the percentage value on the
"Output" line always relates to the current joystick
position and not to the position of the point.
Smoothing the curve
This "jagged" curve proﬁle can be smoothed
automatically simply by pressing a button.
Then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad
to move the marker frame in an upwards direction to the
"Curve" line, as required. Now brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad to activate the value ﬁeld on
the "Curve" line:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
Input
0%
–12%
Output
0%
Point
nor mal
Examples:
1. To open and close an aero-tow, the switch SW 2 has
already been assigned to control channel 8 on the
"Control adjust" menu:
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
normal
10
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL
typ
10
Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the
curve value from "off" to "on" and complete this setup
procedure by brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the
right touch pad or the center ESC key on the left touch
pad:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve on
Input
0%
–12%
Output
0%
Point ?
nor mal
Note:
The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes
only and are not at all representative of real mixer
curves. For real-world application examples, see the
programming examples on pages 242 and 285.
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Subsequent aero-tow ﬂying has proven that you
always have to ﬂy with the up-elevator held slightly in
during the tow. The solution will be to set up a mixer
that applies slight up-elevator trim to the elevator
servo connected to receiver output 3 when the aerotow release is closed. The screen-shot will be familiar
from page 182: here, the fourth linear mixer has been
set up for this function, with the switch channel "S"
as mixer input: Move the selected switch to the OFF
position and then switch …
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Tr
ty
C1
??
fr
EL
EL C4
EL
??
to
Detail program description - Control adjust 189
… to the mixer conﬁguration page.
On this page, use the arrow key d on the left or
right touch pad to select the line under "Offset" and
then tap the center SET key on the right touch pad.
Depending on the travel adjustment selected on the
"Control adjust" menu and the switch position, the
offset value jumps to +X% or -X%, e. g.:
L.MIX 4
Mix input
0%
0%
Offset
+100%
STO
SET
EL
Now use the arrow c key on the left or right touch
pad to move to the line under "Mix input" and then
tap the center SET key on the right touch pad. The
value ﬁelds are now highlighted. After you have
moved the selected switch to the mixer ON position,
use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the
required symmetrical mixer ratio.
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+10% +10%
Offset
+100%
SYM
ASY
EL
2. If you have a multi-ﬂap wing featuring a "crow or
butterﬂy system" with (additional) airbrakes, and you
wish to test the effect of this braking system with and
without airbrakes, then you should simply set channel
1 to "MIX-only" …
190 Detail program description - Control adjust
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
only
nor mal
1 2 3 4 5 6
… and follow this by programming a free mixer "C1
¼ C1", so as to restore your ability to control the
airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to
this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer
on and off as you please.
3. The ﬁnal example applies to model helicopters:
In the helicopter program, if you wish to assign
collective pitch trim via one of the CTRL 6 … 8
proportional rotary controls, use the "Control
adjust" menu to assign one of these transmitter
controls to (e.g.) "Input 9". (Leave the default value
of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to
conﬁgure this setting globally for all ﬂight phases
– as will be the case for the free mixer yet to be
programmed. Finally, you then simply deﬁne a free
mixer "9 ¼ 11" with a symmetrical mixer ratio of e. g.
25%. Due to the internal coupling, this transmitter
control then acts equally on all of the model's
collective pitch servos without affecting the throttle
servo.
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+25% +25%
Offset
0%
SYM
ASY
Decouple the assigned transmitter control from
control channel 9 on the "MIX-only channel" menu,
however, to ensure that any servo connected to
receiver output 9 can no longer be operated by this
transmitter control; see also page 193.
Detail program description - Control adjust 191
MIX active/phase
Selecting mixers for ﬂight phases
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option …
Fl. phase timers
Wing mixers
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
Fl. phase timers
Helicopter mixer
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
… on the multi-function list. Brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.
MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE
LinearM1
6 EL yes
LinearM2
C1 EL yes
LinearM3
8 yes
LinearM4
EL yes
SEL
normal
The "free mixers" on the previous menu can be enabled
and disabled for speciﬁc ﬂight phases. You therefore
have complete freedom in assigning speciﬁc mixers only
to speciﬁc ﬂight phases.
Switch to your chosen ﬂight phase and use the arrow
keys to page through this menu. The mixers on the
"Free mixers" menu are displayed in the center column.
Following the activation of the value ﬁeld by brieﬂy
tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad, if the
192 Detail program description - Control adjust
respective mixer is set to "--" by using the arrow keys on
the left or right touch pad, then this mixer is deactivated
in the ﬂight phase shown at the bottom of the display
and, simultaneously, removed from the list on the "Free
mixers" menu:
MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE
LinearM1
6 EL yes
LinearM2
C1 EL –––
LinearM3
8 yes
EL yes
LinearM4
SEL
Speed
If you "lose" a mixer in this way from the "Free mixers"
menu …
M1
M3
M4
M5
M6
ty
??
??
fr
EL
EL
??
??
to
… then you should either switch through the ﬂight
phases until it appears again … or, alternatively, switch
to this menu and temporarily reactivate the mixer you
are looking for:
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Tr
ty
C1
??
fr
EL
EL C4
EL
??
to
MIX-only channel
Separating control functions from control channels for all ﬂight phases
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
adjust " menu.
to the menu option …
Conversely, a joystick, transmitter control (CTRL 6 …
10) or switch (SW 1 … 3, 8 and 9) "robbed" of its servo
Fl. phase timer
in this way can of course be used anywhere else as a
Wing mixers
transmitter control – even in a ﬂight phase-speciﬁc way.
Free mixers
See the programming examples to the right and on
MIX active/phase
pages 255 and 266.
MIX-only channel
A joystick, transmitter control (CTRL 6 … 10) or switch
Dual mixer
(SW 1 … 3, 8 and 9) robbed of its servo by setting the
channel to "MIX only" will then namely affect mixer
Fl. phase timer
inputs only …
Helicopter mixer
… and the servo connected to a channel set to "MIX
Free mixers
only" is then also only accessible from the mixers
MIX active/phase
programmed to its control channel, i.e. "(with) MIX(ers)
MIX-only channel
only".
Dual mixer
Accordingly, for any channel set to "MIX only", you can
… on the multi-function list. Brieﬂy tap the center SET
utilize both its control function and its control channel
key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.
entirely independently of one another for any special
functions you need; see the examples at the end of this
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
section.
Use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to
only
select the desired channel from 1 to 12 (z) and then
normal
brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad,
1 2 3 4 5 6
so as to switch as you please between "normal" ( ) and
"only" mode ( ):
On this menu, you can interrupt the normal signal ﬂow
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
between the control function on the input side and the
control channel on the output side: the "traditional"
only
transmitter control/servo connection no longer applies.
nor mal
One particular use of the options offered by this ﬂight
7 8 9 10 11 12
phase-independent menu might to reliably keep one of
the control channels "free" in all ﬂight phases, as these
control channels can be assigned a transmitter control
or switch for speciﬁc ﬂight phases on the " Control
Examples:
• For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the
butterﬂy function (page 160) is generally used as
a landing aid. Just as with "normal" airbrakes, this
is generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the
(airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1 is
then generally absent as a rule, receiver output 1 is
still not "free", since the control signal of the brake
stick is still present at this location.
Its control signal – – which in this example is not
required – can be decoupled from control channel
"1", and thus "free up" this channel from the C1 stick
signal, by setting channel 1 to "MIX only" on the
"MIX-only channel" menu. This makes it possible
to use control channel "1", together with receiver
connection "1", at any time for other purposes, via
freely-programmable mixers – e. g. to connect up a
speed controller.
• If your model has built-in airbrakes, however, and
you would like to perhaps test the performance of a
butterﬂy system with and without airbrakes, simply
set channel 1 to "MIX only" and program a free mixer
"C1 ¼ C1", so as to restore your ability to control the
airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to
this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer
on and off as you please.
Detail program description - Control adjust 193
Dual mixers
4,8 V
Servo
C 577
Best.-Nr. 4101
Left rudder / elevator
Servo
C 577
4,8 V
Right rudder / elevato
Best.-Nr. 4101
de
er
dd r
Ru vato
Ele
Control channels
(receiver outputs)
Ru
Ele dder
vat
or
Control function inputs
V-tail mixer
Rudder stick
Fl. phase timers
Helicopter mixer
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
… a same-sense "c c" and an opposite-sense "c
d" control function, although they permit any channel
to be used and offer differential travel for the opposing
function.
… on the multi-function list. Brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.
DUAL MIXER
Mixer1 ??
??
Mixer2 ??
??
Mixer3 ??
??
??
Mixer4 ??
Typ
zu
vat
Ele
Fl. phase timers
Wing mixers
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
Elevator stick
Ru
Same-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channels
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option …
0%
0%
0%
0%
Diff.
Similarly to a V-tail mixer, the four ﬂight phaseindependent dual mixers couple …
194 Detail program description - Control adjust
Note:
The symbols "c c " and " c d" indicate that the
corresponding inputs act upon the two servos coupled
by the mixer in the same and opposed directions
respectively – they do not indicate the servos' direction
of rotation! Accordingly, if wing ﬂaps are deﬂected in
the wrong direction, simply swap the two inputs around
or use the servo reverse function from the "Servo
adjustments" menu; see page 90.
In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is
supplemented by other "dual mixers" for the two aileron
servos at receiver outputs 2 and 5 and for the ﬂap pairs
at outputs 6 and 7 (and 9 and 10 plus 11 and 12, if
present). These are activated via the aileron stick and
the transmitter control that has been assigned to input
"6" on the "Control adjust" menu.
In the same way, the four freely-programmable dual
mixers on this menu can be used to couple two further
control functions, a feature that would otherwise only
be possible with time-consuming programming of free
mixers.
Here, we will use a "V-tail with rudder differential" as
our example to explain the programming of a dual mixer
(see also the example on page 255):
DUAL MIXER
Mixer1 EL RU
Mixer2 ??
??
Mixer3 ??
??
??
Mixer4 ??
Typ
zu
+25%
0%
0%
0%
Diff.
Depending on activation, both servos operate either as
elevators or rudders. Differential travel is effective only
when a rudder command is given, in accordance with
dual mixer assignment. In this case, both associated
trim levers are effective. No additional free mixers are
required for this arrangement. When using this mixer,
however, the tail type MUST be entered as "normal"
on the "Model type" menu.
Example:
Model with two rudders, with differential travel and
outward movement (e. g. swept-back ﬂying wing):
DUAL MIXER
Mixer1
RU
Mixer2 ??
??
Mixer3 ??
??
??
Mixer4 ??
Typ
zu
+75%
0%
0%
0%
Diff.
When a rudder command is given, the second servo
connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of
programming, differential travel can be conﬁgured for
the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the rudder stick
affects both servos. If the rudders are also required to
deﬂect outwards when the airbrakes are activated, then
you should assign the C1 stick (transmitter control 1) to
input 8 on the "Control adjust" menu. Finally, move to
the "Offset" column and adjust the offset value until both
rudders return to the neutral position. You may also need
to "play" a little with the offset and travel adjustment
settings.
Tip:
You can use the "Servoanzeige" menu to check
all of the settings made in this way. This menu
can be accessed from almost any other menu by
simultaneously pressing the ef keys on the left touch
pad.
Detail program description - Control adjust 195
Swashplate mixer
Collective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixer
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option …
Helicopter mixer
Free mixers
MIX active/phase
MIX-only channel
Dual mixer
Swaschplate mixer
… on the multi-function list. Brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad to open this menu option:
SWASH MIXER
Pitch
+61%
+61%
Roll
Nick
+61%
SEL
Note:
If "1 servo" is selected on the "Swashplate" line on the
"Helicopter type" menu, this option is not shown on the
multi-function list.
On the "Swashplate" line on the "Helicopter type"
menu, you have already deﬁned the number of servos
that are installed in your helicopter for collective pitch
control; see page 86. This information is used to
automatically couple together the functions for roll,
pitch-axis and collective pitch, so that you do not need
to deﬁne any other mixers yourself.
If you have a model helicopter which only has a single
collective pitch servo, this "Swashplate mixer" menu
option is of course superﬂuous, since the software
will control the three swashplate servos for collective
196 Detail program description - Control adjust
Fail-safe
pitch, pitch-axis and roll independently of one other,
i.e. without a mixer. In this scenario, this menu
option is therefore no longer available to you from the
multi-function list. With all other swashplate linkages
employing 2 … 4 collective pitch servos, the mixer ratios
and directions are set up by default, as can be seen
above. The preset is +61% in each case, but the value
can be varied from -100% to +100% if required, by
brieﬂy tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad
and using the arrow keys.
Simultaneously tapping the two arrow keys cd or ef
on the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the mixer ratio
in the highlighted ﬁeld back to its default value of +61%.
If the swashplate control system (collective pitch,
roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the joysticks
properly, you should alter the mixer directions ("+" or "-")
before trying to correct the directions of servo rotation.
Note:
Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the
servos mechanically striking their end-stops.
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option …
Dual mixer
Fail-safe adjust
Teacher / pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Swashplate mixer
Fail-safe adjust
Teacher / pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
… on the multi-function list. By brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, this menu item opens:
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
1 2 3 4 5 6
DELAY : 0.25s
STO
The higher level of operating safety exhibited by the
HoTT system when compared to traditional PPM
technology results from the fact that the microprocessor
built into the HoTT receiver not only exclusively
processes the signals of "its" transmitter, but can
also clean up "dirty" control signals that it receives.
Only when these signals become too error-prone or
garbled due to outside interference does the processor
automatically replace the disrupted signals with the
last received correct signal, temporarily stored in the
receiver. This feature is conﬁgured by the settings as
described below. This feature also suppresses brief
interference caused by e. g. local drops in ﬁeld strength,
which otherwise result in the familiar "glitches". In this
case, the red LED lights up on the receiver.
If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the
active model memory but have not yet carried out the
fail-safe programming, you will see a warning message
on the screen when you switch on the transmitter:
Fail Safe
setup
t.b.d.
Programming procedure
The "Fail Safe" function determines the behavior of the
receiver if communication between the transmitter and
the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 … 12 can
optionally …
1. preserve the current position ("hold"):
if communication is disrupted, all servos programmed
to "hold" mode remain at the positions judged to
be the last valid positions by the receiver until the
receiver picks up another valid control signal, or
2. move to a freely selectable position ("Pos") if
interference should occur, following the expiry of the
"time delay".
Use the arrow keys ef on the left or right touch pad
to select the desired servo connection from 1 to 12 (z)
and then brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch
pad, so as to switch as you please between the "hold"
( ) and "Pos" mode ( ):
FAIL SAFE
Successful storage of the positions is conﬁrmed brieﬂy
on the screen:
Pos
hold
FAIL SAFE
1 2 3 4 5 6
STO
DELAY : 0.25s
Following this, use the arrow keys ef on the left or
right touch pad to select the "DELAY" option shown at
the bottom of the display …
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
7 8 9 10 11 12
STO
DELAY : 0.25s
… and then brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right
touch pad. Now use the touch pad's arrow keys to make
your choice from the four possible time delays (0.25 s,
0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s) offered.
Simultaneously tapping the arrow keys cd or ef on
the right touch pad (CLEAR) ) will reset the highlighted
ﬁeld back to its default value of 0.25 s.
Following this, use the arrow keys ef on the left
or right touch pad to select the STO ﬁeld at the
bottom right of the screen. Then, use the associated
transmitter controls to move the servos, which you have
switched to position mode, into the desired positions
SIMULTANEOUSLY.
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad
to store these positions as the fail-safe setting for the
receiver, so that it can revert back to them if interference
is experienced.
Position
stored
7 8 9 10 11 12
STO
DELAY : 0.25s
Pos
hold
Caution:
Ensure you make use of this safety net by at least
programming the following for a fail-safe incident:
for glow-powered models, set the motor throttle
position to idle; for electric models, set the motor
function to stop, or "Hold" for heli models. If
interference should occur, the model is then less
likely to ﬂy off on its own and cause damage to
property or even personal injury. Consider asking an
experienced pilot for advice.
Detail program description - Control adjust 197
Teacher/pupil
Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer lead
Teacher-pupil settings
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to
the menu option "Teacher/pupil" on the multi-function list:
Up to twelve control functions of the teacher transmitter
"Teach" can be transferred to the pupil transmitter
Dual mixer
"Pupil", either individually or in any combination.
Fail-Safe adjust
The lower display line, named "Teach", therefore refers
Teacher / pupil
to the transmitter controls permanently connected
Tx. output swap
to inputs 1 … 4 (dual axis stick functions for ﬁxed-wing
Telemetr y
and heli model) and the CTRL 6 to 10 controls that are
Basic settings
assigned or can be assigned to inputs 5 … 12 (optionally
ﬂight phase-speciﬁc) on the "Control adjust" menu.
Swaschplate mixer
Fail-Safe adjust
Note:
Teacher / pupil
The assignment of transmitter controls on the "Control
Tx. output swap
adjust" menu is possible only when the trainer mode
Telemetr y
connection is inactive.
Basic settings
Use the arrow keys ef on the left or right touch pad
to select the transmitter controls from 1 to 12 (z) to
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
transfer to the pupil and then brieﬂy tap the center SET
open this menu option:
key on the right touch pad in each case, so as to switch
TRAINER /Pupil
between "Teach" (Teacher)" ( ) and "Pupil"
( ):
Pupil
TRAINER /Pupil
Teach
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pupil
n/a
SW: ––– BIND:
Teach
The screen image shown above shows the menu in its
1 2 3 4 5 6
initial state: No transmitter controls have been released
n/a
SW: ––– BIND:
by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned ("SW: ---"
To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then
bottom left in the screen image).
assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display.
To do so, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch
pad to move the marker to the bottom left, to the right of
"SW:" Here, assign a switch as described on page 52.
Preferably, you should utilize one of the two momentary
198 Detail program description - Control adjust
switches, SW 1 or SW 9, so as to be able to revert
control back to the teacher transmitter at any time.
TRAINER /Pupil
No
Pupil pupil
Teach signal
7 8 9 10 11 12
n/a
SW: 9
BIND:
Since at this early stage of programming a trainer
system it is unlikely that an operational pupil transmitter
is connected to the teacher transmitter, the transmitter
responds immediately to the switches closed during the
switch assignment process with appropriate visual and
audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open
the switch you have just assigned:
TRAINER /Teach
Pupil
ÄTeach
SW: 9
7 8 9 10 11 12
n/a
BIND:
Note:
The switch assignment just described also determines
the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil
functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil
transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this
menu. The header line therefore also switches from
"TRAINER /Pupil" to "TRAINER /Teach" once a
switch has been assigned.
The model to be controlled by the pupil must be
programmed completely – i. e. with all its functions
including trims and any mixer functions – in one of
the model memories of the mc-32 HoTT teacher
transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in question
must also be "bound" to the teacher transmitter, since the
latter ultimately controls the model, even in pupil mode.
ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE mc-32
HoTT teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE PLUGGING
THE CONNECTION CABLE INTO THIS UNIT. If you do
not, the RF module will not be enabled.
The mc-32 HoTT teacher transmitter can be
connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even
transmitters using the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range.
If the pupil-side connection does NOT utilize a twopole DSC socket, however, but a three-pole trainer
socket from the Graupner range (for example), then the
fundamental precondition for a correct connection
to a pupil transmitter is that the modulation type
PPM (18 or 24) must ALWAYS be conﬁgured in the
pupil transmitter, regardless of the modulation type
used in the teacher transmitter.
Pupil transmitter set-up
The model to be controlled by the pupil must be
programmed completely – i. e. with all its functions including
trims and any mixer functions – in one of the model
memories of the teacher transmitter. If present, the HoTT
receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to
the teacher transmitter. In principle, however, an mc-32
HoTT pupil transmitter can also be connected to a teacher
transmitter from the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range.
Almost any transmitter with at least 4 control functions
from previous and current Graupner series can be used
as a pupil transmitter. More detailed information can be
found in the RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.
de website.
If required, the pupil transmitter should be ﬁtted with the
connection module for pupil transmitters. This is to be
connected to the transmitter board in accordance with
the supplied installation instructions.
Information on the pupil modules required in each case
can be found in Graupner's RC main catalog and on the
www.graupner.de website.
The connection to the teacher transmitter is made using
the appropriate lead; see the following double page.
The control functions of the pupil transmitter MUST
act directly on the control channels, i. e. the receiver
outputs, without intermediary mixers.
If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter,
it is best to activate a free model memory with the
required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the
model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1
… 4) and "Throttle min. forward/back" to suit the pupil's
preferences. All other settings are left at their default
values, however. If you have selected the "Helicopter"
model type, you must also set the throttle/ collective
pitch direction and idle trim on the pupil transmitter. All
other settings, including mixer and coupling functions,
are conﬁgured exclusively on the teacher transmitter,
which in turn transmits them to the model.
With "D" and "FM" type transmitters, you must also
check the direction of servo rotation and stick mode,
and adjust as necessary by swapping the corresponding
leads. All mixers must also be switched off or set to
"zero".
When assigning control functions, the usual conventions
must be observed:
Channel
Function
Motor throttle/collective pitch
Aileron/roll
Elevator/pitch-axis
Rudder/tail rotor
If you wish to transfer other control functions to the pupil
transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual
axis sticks (1 … 4), access the "Control adjust" menu
on the pupil transmitter and assign transmitter controls to
the inputs that correspond to the control numbers 5 … 12
released on the teacher transmitter's "Teacher/pupil" menu.
Important:
• If you should forget to assign a transmitter
control on the pupil side, then the affected servo
or servos will remain in the center position when
the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.
• The pupil transmitter must always be operated in
PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection type
used between the teacher transmitter and the model.
• If the transmitter is connected using a DSC
socket on the pupil side, ALWAYS leave the
pupil transmitter's On/Off switch in the "OFF"
position: this is the only way to guarantee that
no RF signal is sent from the pupil transmitter's
transmitter module , even after the DSC lead has
been plugged in.
Trainer mode operations
Both transmitters are connected to one another using
a suitable lead (see summary on next page): The plug
marked "M" (master) must be inserted into the socket
on the teacher transmitter, and the plug marked "S"
(student) into the pupil transmitter's socket. (Note that
not all leads may have such "M" and "S" labeling.)
Detail program description - Control adjust 199
Important notices:
• Check that the model aircraft is operational
and check that all functions issue the correct
commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.
• The ends of the trainer lead, usually marked as
either "S" or "M", terminate in a three-pole TRS
jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC system
socket, as it is not suitable for this application.
The DSC socket is exclusively designed for a
trainer lead with 2-pole TRS jacks.
Checking functionality
Activate the assigned trainer mode switch:
• The trainer mode system is working properly if the
display now changes from "¾Teach" to "¾Pupil".
• If the center LED rapidly ﬂashes blue/red, however,
and the unit beeps at the same time, then the pupilteacher transmitter connection has been lost.
The basic display also displays the following warning
notice …
No
pupil
signal
… and the left side of the screen display on the
"Teacher/pupil" menu changes to show "-Pupil".
In this case, all control functions are retained by
the teacher transmitter automatically, regardless of
switch position: this ensures the model is always
under control.
Possible faults:
• Pupil transmitter not ready
• Interface in pupil transmitter not correctly connected
in place of the RF module
200 Detail program description - Control adjust
• Cables connected wrongly: see right for cable
connections
• Pupil transmitter not switched over to PPM (10, 18,
24) mode
Other possible faults:
• Teacher transmitter not properly "bound" to HoTT
receiver in training model
Trainer leads
4179.1
For trainer mode operation between any two
Graupner transmitters equipped with a DSC
socket (identiﬁable by the two-pole TRS
jacks at each end of the lead)
3290.7
Trainer lead for connecting a teacher
transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mc-32
HoTT) or a transmitter retroﬁtted with the
optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24)
) to a Graupner pupil transmitter with an
optoelectronic pupil socket (identiﬁable by
the label "S" on the end with the three-pole
TRS jack).
3290.8
Trainer lead for connecting a pupil
transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mc-32
HoTT) or a transmitter retroﬁtted with the
optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24)
to a Graupner teacher transmitter with an
optoelectronic teacher socket (identiﬁable by
the label "M" on the end with the three-pole
TRS jack).
For further details about the cables and modules for
teacher and pupil transmitters mentioned in this section,
please consult the respective transmitter handbook,
the Graupner RC main catalog or the www.graupner.de
website.
Trainer mode with the mc-32 transmitter
Due to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest information
Teacher transmitter mc-32 HoTT
TT
Pupil transmitter mc-32 HoTT
Trainer lead
order no. 4179.1
Trainer lead
order no. 3290.8
Trainer lead
order no. 3290.7
Trainer lead
order no. 4179.1
Teacher transmitter
with DSC socket
mx-12 HoTT, mx-16 HoTT,
mc-32 HoTT
Teacher transmitter with teacher
module order no.
3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22
mc-19(s, iFS + HoTT) up to
mc-24, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s
Pupil transmitter
with DSC socket
mx-12(s)HoTT, mx-16s/
iFS/HoTT, mc-32 HoTT,
mx-22(iFS), mx-24s and, if
equipped with DSC socket order
no. 3290.24, mc-19(s + iFS),
mc-22(s + iFS) and mc-24
Pupil transmitter with pupil module
order no. 3290.3, 3290.10, 3290.33
D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM
6014, mc-10 … mc-24, mx22(iFS), mx-24s
Note:
The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter
combinations at the time of going to press.
Detail program description - Control adjust 201
Wireless HoTT system
The mc-32 HoTT trainer mode system can also be
operated wirelessly. To do so, the teacher transmitter
must be "connected" to a pupil transmitter as described
below. Prior to this, however, the training model's
receiver must be bound to the PUPIL transmitter. This
conﬁguration is possible between transmitters that have
the "BIND:" option available on the "Teacher/pupil"
menu.
Preparing for training mode
Teacher transmitter
The training model must be programmed completely –
i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer
functions – in one of the model memories of the HoTT
teacher transmitter. The model to be used for training
must therefore be under the complete control of the
teacher transmitter. The ﬁnal step in preparation,
however, is to bind the training model to the pupil
transmitter. For a detailed description of the bind
procedure, please consult pages 69 and 74.
Pupil transmitter
If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter,
it is best to activate a free model memory with the
required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the
model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode
1 … 4) and "Throttle (or collective pitch) min. forward/
back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other options are
left at their default values. All other settings, including all
mixer and coupling functions, are conﬁgured exclusively
on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them
to the model.
When assigning control functions, the usual conventions
must be observed:
202 Detail program description - Control adjust
Channel
Function
Motor throttle/collective pitch
Aileron/roll
Elevator/pitch-axis
Rudder/tail rotor
If you wish to transfer other control functions to the pupil
transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual
axis sticks (1 … 4), access the "Control adjust" menu
on the pupil transmitter and assign transmitter controls to
the inputs that correspond to the control numbers 5 … 12
released on the teacher transmitter's "Teacher/pupil" menu.
Important:
If you should forget to assign a transmitter control
on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos
will remain in the center position when the transfer
is made to the pupil transmitter.
Preparing the teacher and pupil transmitters
Once you have bound the training model to the pupil
transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On
both transmitters, use the arrow keys on the left or right
touch pad, page to the "Teacher/pupil" menu option on
the multi-function list:
Dual mixer
Fail-Safe adjust
Teacher / pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Swaschplate mixer
Fail-Safe adjust
Teacher / pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
open this menu option:
TRAINER /Pupil
Pupil
Teach
1 2 3 4 5 6
n/a
SW: ––– BIND:
The screen image shown above shows the menu in its
initial state: No transmitter controls have been released
to the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned ("SW: ---"
bottom left in the screen image).
Pupil transmitter
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, move
the marker frame to the "BIND" input ﬁeld. If you can
see a switch to the right of "SW:", then this MUST ﬁrst
be erased, see screen image:
TRAINER /Pupil
Pupil
Teach
1 2 3 4 5 6
n/a
SW: ––– BIND:
Teacher transmitter
Up to twelve control functions of the teacher transmitter
"Teach" can be transferred to the pupil transmitter
"Pupil", either individually or in any combination.
The lower display line, named "Teach", therefore refers
to the transmitter controls permanently connected
to inputs 1 … 4 (dual axis stick functions for ﬁxed-wing
and heli model) and the CTRL 6 to 10 controls that are
assigned or can be assigned to inputs 5 … 12 (optionally
ﬂight phase-speciﬁc) on the "Control adjust" menu.
Use the arrow keys ef on the left or right touch pad
to select the transmitter controls from 1 to 12 (z) to
transfer to the pupil and then brieﬂy tap the center SET
key on the right touch pad in each case, so as to switch
between "Teach" (Teacher)" ( ) and "Pupil"
( ):
TRAINER /Pupil
Pupil
Teach
1 2 3 4 5 6
n/a
SW: ––– BIND:
To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now assign
a trainer mode switch. To do so, use the arrow keys on
the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame
to the bottom left, to the right of "SW:" now assign a
switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter
controls, switches and control switches" (page 52).
Preferably, you should utilize one of the two momentary
switches, SW 1 or SW 9, so as to be able to revert
control back to the teacher transmitter at any time:
TRAINER /Pupil
No
Pupil pupil
Teach signal
7 8 9 10 11 12
n/a
SW: 9
BIND:
Since at this stage of programming the wireless trainer
system no connection yet exists to a pupil transmitter,
the transmitter responds immediately to the switches
closed during the switch assignment process with
appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You
should therefore re-open the switch you have just
assigned:
TRAINER /Teach
Pupil
ÄTeach
7 8 9 10 11 12
n/a
SW: 9
BIND:
TRAINER /Teach
Pupil
ÄTeach
SW: 9
7 8 9 10 11 12
n/a
BIND:
Binding the pupil transmitter to the teacher
transmitter
Note:
During the bind process, the two transmitters should
not be very far apart. You may ﬁnd you need to change
the positions of the transmitters and then start the bind
process again.
Initiate the "BINDING" process from the pupil transmitter
by tapping the center SET key on the right touch pad …
TRAINER /Pupil
– Pupil
ÄTeach
Note:
The switch assignment just described also determines
the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil
functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil
transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this
menu. The header line therefore also switches from
"TRAINER /Pupil" to "TRAINER /Teach" once a
switch has been assigned.
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, now
move the marker frame to the right, to "BIND: n/a":
SW: 9
7 8 9 10 11 12
BIND: Binding
… and repeat this immediately on the teacher
transmitter:
TRAINER /Teach
Pupil
ÄTeach
SW: 9
7 8 9 10 11 12
BIND: Binding
As soon as this process is complete, both screens will
Detail program description - Control adjust 203
show "ON" instead of the ﬂashing "BINDING":
TRAINER /Pupil
– Pupil
ÄTeach
SW: 9
7 8 9 10 11 12
BIND:
ON
TRAINER /Teach
Pupil
ÄTeach
SW: 9
7 8 9 10 11 12
BIND:
ON
You can return to the basic display on both screens and
start the training session after carefully checking all of
the relevant functions.
If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays
"ON", this means the binding process has failed: try
changing the positions of both transmitters and then
repeat the entire procedure.
Important notice:
Check that the model aircraft is operational and
check that all functions issue the correct commands
BEFORE setting up trainer mode.
During the …
Training session
… the teacher and pupil can maintain a more "relaxed"
distance from one another. The "reach of signal"
(max. 50 m) should not be exceeded under any
circumstances, however, nor should anyone else be
standing between the teacher and the pupil, since these
204 Detail program description - Control adjust
persons could reduce the connection range of the return
channel used by the two transmitters. Furthermore, you
should remember that the return channel assigned for
wireless trainer mode functionality is normally used for
telemetry connections: accordingly, it will not be possible
to transmit any model telemetry data.
In this operating mode, the basic display of the teacher
transmitter is as shown below …
GRAUBELE
#01
«Nor mal »
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
RF –Teach
K78 HoTT
5.5V
… and the pupil transmitter's display will look something
like this:
PUPIL
#01
«nor mal
4.9V
3:33h
»
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
RF –Pupil
K78 HoTT
5.5V
If, however, the connection between the teacher and
pupil transmitters should be lost during the training
session, then the teacher transmitter will automatically
assume control of the model.
If the trainer mode switch is in the "Pupil" position when
connectivity is lost, then the center LED on the teacher
transmitter will ﬂash blue/red while the signal is lost and
audible warning signals will also be given. The basic
display also displays the following warning notice:
No
pupil
signal
If only the character string "HF –" starts ﬂashing on
the transmitter's basic display, however, and (quieter)
audible warning signals are given, the pupil signal has
still been lost, but the trainer mode switch is set to the
"Teacher" position.
In both cases, your ﬁrst step should be to reduce the
distance between the two transmitters. If this does not
help, then you should land immediately and establish
the cause.
If both transmitters are operational and the receiver
system is switched off, then the teacher transmitter's
instead of the
basic display will show the "familiar"
two icons
. The antenna icon will also ﬂash and an
audible warning signal will sound twice per second.
Resuming trainer mode
If you switch off one or both transmitters during the
session – for whatever reason – then the basic display
of the transmitter(s) shows the following question after
being switched back on:
Please select
trainer link?
ACT
INH
If you either conﬁrm "INH" by tapping the center SET
key on the right touch pad, or alternatively wait for
approx. two seconds until the message disappears,
then you will reset the transmitter in question back to
its "normal" operating mode. You will then have to reestablish a connection between the teacher and pupil
transmitters.
If, on the other hand, you use the arrow keys on the left
or right touch pad to select "ACT" …
Please selcet
trainer link?
ACT
INH
… and conﬁrm this selection by tapping the center SET
key on the right touch pad, then the existing teacher
connection is restored. The same approach is used if the
transmitter is conﬁgured as a pupil transmitter.
Detail program description - Control adjust 205
Tx. output swap
Swapping the outputs on the transmitter
Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page
to the menu option "Tx. output swap" on the multifunction list:
Dual mixer
Fail-safe adjust
Teacher / Pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Swashplate mixer
Fail-safe adjust
Teacher / Pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the right touch pad to
open this menu option.
Tx. output swap
To achieve maximum ﬂexibility regarding receiver socket
assignment, the mc-32 HoTT program offers you the
option of swapping servo outputs 1 to 12 as you please.
This option lets you distribute the transmitter's 12
"control channels" to any of the transmitter outputs 1
… 12. If you do, you must remember that the "Servo
display" screen – accessible from almost any menu
option by simultaneously tapping the e and f keys
on the left touch pad – refers exclusively to the "control
channels" as preset by the receiver socket assignment:
it therefore does NOT take any output swaps into
account.
206 Detail program description - Control adjust
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
Tx Ch 1
Output 1
Tx Ch 2
Output 2
Output 3
Tx Ch 3
Tx Ch 4
Output 4
SEL
Use the arrow keys cd on the left or right touch pad to
select the channel/output combination that you wish to
change and then brieﬂy tap the center SET key on the
right touch pad. You can now use the right arrow keys
to assign your selected (control) channel to the desired
output, conﬁrming this with the SET key …
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
Tx Ch 6
Output 1
Tx Ch 2
Output 2
Output 3
Tx Ch 3
Tx Ch 4
Output 4
SEL
… or, by tapping the arrow keys cd or ef on the
right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR), you can
restore the original assignment.
Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel
adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must
always be performed in accordance with the original
receiver socket assignment!
Example:
In the mc-32 HoTT helicopter program, the outputs
for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo are
swapped around, compared to some older GRAUPNER/
JR mc units. The throttle servo now occupies transmitter
output "6" and the collective pitch servo output "1".
Perhaps, however, you wish to retain the previous
conﬁguration? In this case, you will swap over channels
1 and 6 as appropriate, so that (control) channel 6 is
located on output 1 and vice versa – as shown above:
Note:
The "Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) function
integrated into the telemetry menu on the
mc-32HoTT receiver can also be used to distribute up
to 12 control channels from the transmitter to multiple
receivers. The function can also be used to map the
exact same control function to multiple receiver outputs:
this can be used to conﬁgure two servo controls per
aileron surface instead of just the one, for example, etc.
To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly
recommend using only one of the options at a time.
Detail program description - Control adjust 207
Telemetry
The transmitter and receiver data as well as the data
for optional telemetric sensors (see Appendix) can be
viewed and programmed in the "Telemetry" menu.
The receiver data is transmitted to the transmitter
through the return channel integrated in the HoTT
receiver.
One telemetry sensor can be connected through the
telemetry input to each of the receivers GR-12S HoTT
(Order No. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (Order. No. 33506),
GR-16 (Order. No. 33508) and GR-24 HoTT (Order. No.
33512).
The corresponding "Telemetry" menus always keep
these and future receivers up to date with the latest
version and ensures enhancement with future functions
or languages.
Note:
After registering your product at https://www.graupner.
de/de/service/produktregistrierung you are automatically
informed of new updates.
Important information:
• This manual depicts the available functions at the
time of printing.
• As already indicated in the section "Connection
of multiple receivers" on page 69 and 74, multiple
receivers can be connected as necessary for each
model. During the later operation, however, only
the receiver which was activated in the line "TEL.
EMPF." of the "Telemetry" menu, is capable
of establishing a telemetric connection to the
transmitter! However, that also means the inverse,
that only this receiver can be addressed through the
Telemetry menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection
must be changed before settings can be made on a
208 Detail program description - Control adjust
speciﬁc receiver:
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
BIND. 1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
• When adjusting the settings of the remote
control, make absolutely sure that the transmitter
antenna is always far enough away from the
receiver antennae! To be on the safe side, keep
them at least one meter apart. Otherwise you
run the risk of a faulty connection for the return
channel and malfunction as a result.
• Since the telemetric data between transmitter and
receiver is only exchanged after the fourth data
package, the data transmission requires a certain
amount of time for technical reasons, so the reaction
to the operating keys and changes to settings take
place with a delay. Therefore, the delay is not due to
an error.
• Programming on the model or on sensors may only
take place if the model is on the ground. Only carry
out the settings with the motor switched off and
the battery disconnected! Otherwise, undesired
programming cannot be ruled out.
For example, a servo test initiated accidentally
could cause the model to crash and cause personal
injury and/or property damage. Observe the safety
instructions on pages 4-7 of this manual and the
individual respective manuals.
• All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction
reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings, etc.)
made through the "Telemetry" menu are only saved
in the receiver and, therefore, are adopted along with
it in the course of the conversion of a receiver to a
different model, if applicable. Therefore, to be on the
safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you want
to use the receiver in a different model; see "Reset"
on page 43.
• Only program the servo direction reversal, servo
travel, mixer and curve settings through the mc-32
speciﬁc standard menus "Servo adjustment" page
90, "Dual Rate / Expo" page 108 and 112, "Channel
1 curve" page 116 and 119, etc. Otherwise, the
settings superimpose one another, which can lead to
complexity or even problems in the later operation.
• With the channel assignment function of the
Telemetrymenu integrated in the mc-32 HoTT, control
functions can also be assigned with distribution to
multiple receivers or multiple receiver outputs can
even be assigned with the same control function,
such as the ability to activate two servos per aileron
instead of only one individual servo, etc. We also
recommend exercising extreme during the
programming.
SETTINGS/DISPLAYS
Telemetry
The menus comprised under the heading "Telemetry"
can be called up from the default display of the
transmitter mc-32 HoTT by pressing the central ESC
key of the left touch pad for approx. one second. The
same menus can, like other menus of the transmitter,
also be opened in the multifunction list by pressing the
central SETkey on the right touch pad:
Dual mixer
Fail-safe adjust
Teacher / pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Swashplate mixer
Fail-safe adjust
Teacher / pupil
Tx. output swap
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Basic operation
The operation of the "Telemetry" is essentially the
same as that of the other menus of the transmitter
mc-32 HoTT. The few differences are described in the
following:
You can switch between the individual pages of the
Telemetry menu with the arrow keys ef of the left
or right touch pad. The corresponding directional
indications can be found at top right of each display
page in the form of angled brackets (<>); see the
following ﬁgures. If only one angled bracket is visible,
you are on either the ﬁrst or last respective page. In this
case, changing pages is only possible in the indicated
direction.
Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are
identiﬁed with the aforementioned angled bracket (>). By
pressing the arrow keys of the cd of the left or right
tough pad, the ">" pointer jumps one line forward or one
line back. Lines which you cannot jump to cannot be
changed.
In order to change a parameter, brieﬂy press the
central SET key of the right touch pad (the parameter
is represented inversely), change the value within the
permissible adjustment range with the arrow keys of the
right touch pad and adopt the value by pressing the SET
key again. By brieﬂy pressing the central ESC key of the
left4-way pad, you return to the starting position.
Now select the desired submenu with the arrow keys
cd of the left or right touch pad. However, if the
message …
CAN‘T
RECEIVE
DATA
OK
… appears instead of the desired submenu after
pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, no connection has been established to the
receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system
or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as
described on page 68 and 74 or activate it as described
under "Important Notices" on the previous page.
On the ﬁrst display page of the submenu overwritten
with …
RX DATAVIEW
…
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
rcv ch1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… no settings can be made. This page is only provided
for information:
RX DATAVIEW
S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM
S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C
L PACK TIME 00010msec
R-VOLT
:05.0V
L.R-VOLT:04.5V
SENSOR1 :00.0V
00°C
SENSOR2 :00.0V
00°C
Value
Explanation
S-QUA
Signal quality in %
S-dBm
Reception power in dBm
S-STR
Signal strength in %
R-TEM.
Receiver temperature in °C
L PACK TIME Indicates the time in ms in which the
longest data package is lost during the
transmission from the transmitter to the
receiver
R-VOLT
Current operating voltage of the
receiver in volts
Detail program description - Control adjust 209
L.R-VOLT
Lowest operating voltage of the
receiver since it was last turned on, in
volts
SENSOR1
Indicates the values of the optional
telemetric sensor 1 in volts and °C
SENSOR2
Indicates the values of the optional
telemetric sensor 2 in volts and °C
Signal quality (S-QUA)
The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent "live" over the return
channel of the receiver to the transmitter and indicates
the signal strength in %.
Reception power (S-dbm)
The reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative
values, which means a value of zero is the maximum
value (= best reception) and the lower the values are,
the poorer the reception power! The range test before
operation, among other things, is important for this.
Note:
With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is
reversed: The higher the number following the minus
symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception
power of -80 dBm, for example , is poorer than one with
-70 dBm.
Perform the range test as described on page 71 and
77 before each ﬂight and, in doing so, simulate all servo
movements which also take place during the ﬂight. The
range must be at least 50 m on the ground with the
range test activated. At this distance, the value shown
under "S-dBm" in the "RX DATAVIEW" display may
not be greater than -80 dBm in order to guarantee safe
operation. Your should never be operated with a lower
value (e. g. -85 dBm). Check the installation of the
210 Detail program description - Control adjust
receiver system and the position of the antenna.
The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm
during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the
model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning
(peep tone interval 1 s) is triggered before this value is
reached in order to guarantee safe operation.
Signal strength (S-STR)
The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In
general, an acoustic range warning (peep tone interval
1 s) is issued as soon as the receiver signal becomes
too week in the return channel. However, since the
transmitter has a signiﬁcantly higher transmission power
than the receiver, the model can still be safely operated.
For the sake of safety, the distance to the model should
be reduced until the warning tone goes silent again.
Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)
Make sure that your receiver remains within the
permissible temperature range during all ﬂight
conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).
The receiver temperature limit at which a warning is
issued can be adjusted in the submenu "RX SERVO
TEST" under "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C and
"ALARM TEMP" (-20 … +10 °C). When the value
is undercut or exceeded, an acoustic signal follows
(continuous peep tone) and "TEMP.E" appears at the
top right of all "RX" receiver submenus. In addition,
the parameter "R-TEM" is shown inversely on the "RX
DATAVIEW" display page.
Data packages (L PACK TIME)
Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data
packages are lost in the transmission from the
transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the longest
time span in which the remove control system has
entered into fail-safe mode.
Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)
Always check the operating voltage of the receiver.
Never operate or even start your model if the operating
voltage is too low.
The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted
between 3.0 and 6.0 volts in the submenu "RX SERVO
TEST" under "ALARM VOLT". If this range is undercut,
an acoustic signal is issued (repeating double peep tone
(long/short)) and "VOLT.E" appears at the top right of
all "RX" receiver submenus.| In addition, the parameter
"R-VOLT" is shown inversely in the "RX DATAVIEW"
submenu.
The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed in
the default display, see page 24.
Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)
"L.R-VOLT" indicates the minimum operating voltage of
the receiver since the last time it was switched on.
If this voltage should deviate signiﬁcantly from the
current "R-VOLT" operating voltage, the receiver battery
may be too heavily encumbered by the servos. The
consequence is voltage drops. In this case, use a more
powerful voltage supply in order to achieve maximum
operational safety.
Sensor 1 + 2
Indicates the values of the optional telemetric sensors
1 and 2 in volts and °C, if applicable. A description of
these sensors can be found in the appendix.
RX SERVO
the channel set here.
RX SERVO
OUTPUT CH:
REVERSE
CENTER
TRIM
LIMIT–
LIMIT+
PERIOD
01
OFF
1500sec
–000sec
150%
150%
20msec
Before any programming on this display page,
observance of the notices on page 208 is mandatory.
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
OUTPUT CH Channel selection 1 … depending on
receiver
REVERSE
Servo reversal
OFF / ON
CENTER
Servo center in μs if active (inverse),
dependent on
control position
TRIM
Trim position in μs -120 … +120 μs
deviating from the
CENTER position
LIMIT–
Travel limit for %
servo travel
30 … 150 %
LIMIT+
Travel limit for %
servo travel
30 … 150 %
PERIOD
Cycle time in ms
10 or 20 ms
OUTPUT CH (channel selection)
If applicable, select the line "OUTPUT CH" with the
arrow keys. Press the SET key of the right touch pad.
The value ﬁeld is shown inversely. Now set the desired
channel (e. g. 01) with the arrow keys of the right touch
pad. The following parameters are always based on
Reverse (servo reversal)
Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to the
selected servo channel: ON / OFF
CENTER (servo center)
The active value ﬁeld (inverse representation) in the
"CENTER" line shows the current impulse time of the
control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line in μs.
The displayed value depends on the current position
of the control inﬂuencing this control channel and, if
applicable, the position of its trimming.
A channel impulse time of 1500 μs corresponds to the
standard center position and thus the conventional
servo center.
In order to change this value, select the "CENTER" line
and press the SET key. Now move the corresponding
control, joystick and/or trim lever to the desired position
and save the current control position by pressing the
SET key again. This position is saved as the new neutral
position.
TRIM (trim position)
In the "TRIM" line" you can carry out the ﬁne adjustment
of the neutral position of a servo connected to the
control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line using
the arrow keys of the right touch pad in 1 μs increments.
The value in the "CENTER" line can be adjusted by the
TRIM value set here in a range of ±120 μs.
Factory setting: 0 μs.
LIMIT–/+ (travel limit -/+)
This option is provided for the adjustment of a sidedependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder
throw) of the servo connected to the control channel
selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line.
The setting for both directions takes place in a range of
30 … 150 %.
Factory setting: 150 % each.
PERIOD (cycle time)
In this line you determine the time interval of the
individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for all
control channels.
With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of 10 ms
can be set..
In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos,
20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter can
otherwise be "overstrained" and react with "shaking" or
"quivering" as a result.
RX FAIL SAFE
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 01
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: HOLD
F.S.POS. : 1500sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1500sec
The description of this menus necessitates a few words
of warning in advance:
"Do nothing" is the absolute worst thing to be done in
this regard. "HOLD" is prescribed in the base setup
model of the HoTT receiver.
In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the
model ﬂies straight ahead for an indeﬁnite amount of
time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without
causing signiﬁcant damage! However, if something like
this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the
Detail program description - Control adjust 211
model may become uncontrollable and "tear" across the
ﬂight ﬁeld completely out of control, putting the pilot and
spectators at risk.
Therefore, it would obviously be beneﬁcial to program
the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to
prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of an
experienced pilot in order to ﬁne a "logical" setting for
your model.
And then another brief notice regarding the three
possible versions of the mc-32 HoTT transmitter for
the setting of Fail Safe:
The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe settings
is the use of the "Fail Safe" menu, which can be
reached from the multifunction list, see page 196.
Similarly, in order to achieve the same result somewhat
more laboriously, the "FAIL SAFE ALL" option described
on the following pages is also available.
In addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods
of the of the individual adjustment using the options
"MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY". The description of
these variants begins with the "MODE" option further
below.
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
OUTPUT CH Output channel
1 … depending on
(servo connection receiver
of the receiver)
INPUT CH
Input channel
(channel
coming from the
transmitter)
1 … 12
212 Detail program description - Control adjust
MODE
Fail-Safe mode
HOLD
FAIL SAFE
OFF
F.S.POS.
Fail-safe position
1000 … 2000 μs
DELAY
Reaction time
(delay)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75
and 1.00 s
FAIL SAFE
ALL
Save of the Failsafe
Positions of all
control channels
NO / SAVE
POSITION
Display of the
saved Fail-safe
position
Between approx
1000 and 2000 μs
OUTPUT CH (servo connection)
In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH (servo
connection of the receiver) to be set.
INPUT CH (selection of the input channel)
As already mentioned on page 208, the control functions
of the mc-32 HoTT transmitter can be arbitrarily
distributed to multiple receivers, if necessary, or even
assigned to multiple receiver outputs with the same
control function. For example, this might be used in
order to be able to control two servers for each aileron
ﬂap or an oversized rudder with linked servos instead of
an individual servo.
Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers the
advantage of not having to use a long servo cable, e. g.
for large models. In this case, bear in mind that only the
receiver selected in the line "TEL.EMPF." through the
"Telemetry" menu can be addressed!
The 12 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mc-32
HoTT can be appropriately managed through so-called
"Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) whereby
a different control channel is assigned to the servo
connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for the
receiver in the INPUT CH line. ATTENTION: If, for
example, you have speciﬁed "2AIL" for the transmitter
side in the line "Aile/ﬂaps" in the "Base setup model"
menu, the Control function 2 (Aileron) is already
distributed to the Control channels 2 and 5 for the left
and right aileron. The corresponding INPUT CH of
the receiver, which must also be mapped, would be
the channels 02 and 05 in this case; see the following
example.
Examples:
• You would like to control each aileron ﬂap with two or
more servos for a large model:
• You would like to control each aileron ﬂap with two or
more servos for a large model:
Assign one of the two standard aileron control
channels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the corresponding
OUTPUT CH (servo connections) depending on the
left or right bearing surface.
• You would like to control the rudder with two or more
servos for a large model:
Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) to the
corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections). In
this case, this is the standard rudder channel 4.
MODE
The settings of the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and
"DELAY" determine the behavior of the receiver in the
event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter to
receiver.
The setting programmed under "MODE" is always based
on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line.
The factory setting for all servos is "HOLD".
For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the
receiver) you can choose between:
• FAI(L) SAFE
With this selection, in the event of a failure the
corresponding servo moves to the position shown in
the "POSITION" line for the remainder of the failure
until the "Delay time" set in the "DELAY" line has
lapsed.
• HOLD
With a setting of "HOLD", in the event of a failure
the servo maintains the last correctly received servo
position for the duration of the failure.
• OFF
With a setting of "OFF", in the event of a failure
the receiver discontinues the retransmission
of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the
respective servo output for the duration of the failure.
In other words, the receiver switches the impulse line
"off".
ATTENTION: Analog servos and even some digital
servos no longer put up any resistance against the
previous control pressure during the failure of the
control impulse and are more or less pushed out of
their position as a result.
F.S.POS. (Fail-Safe position)
For each OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the
receiver), set the respective servo position, which the
servo should assume in the event of a failure in "FAI(L)
SAFE" mode, in the line "F.S.POS." after activation of
the value ﬁeld (inverse representation) by pressing the
SET key in the right touch pad and with the arrow keys
of the right touch pad. The adjustment takes place in
10-μs increments.
Factory setting: 1500 μs (servo center).
Important notice:
The function "F.S.POS." has an additional meaning in all
three modes, "OFF", "HOLD" and "FAI(L) SAFE" in the
event that the receiver is switched on, but (still) does not
receive a valid signal.
The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position
predeﬁned in the "Position" line. In doing so, the landing
gear, for example , is is prevented from retracting of the
receiver is accidentally switched on while the transmitter
is switched off. In normal model mode, on the other
hand, the corresponding servo behaves in accordance
with the set "MODE" in the event of a failure.
DELAY (fail-safe reaction time or delay)
Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos
should move to their predetermined positions in the
event of a signal interruption. This setting is adopted
for all channels and only pertains to the servos
programmed to the "FAI(L) SAFE" mode.
Factory setting: 0.75 s.
FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)
This submenu allows you to determine the fail-safe
positions of Servos with a "push of a button" in a similar
manner to the "Fail Safe" described on page 196.
Switch to the line "FAIL SAFE ALL" and activate the
value ﬁeld by pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad. "NO" is represented inversely. Then adjust
the parameter to "SAVE" with one of the arrow keys of
the right touch pad. Now, using the operating elements
of the transmitter, move all servos to the desired fail-
safe position you assigned or want to assign in the line
"MODE" "FAI(L) SAFE". The current position of the
control for the channel which was just set is shown in
the bottom "Position" line:
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 01
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1500sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE
POSITION : 1670sec
After pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, the display switches back from "SAVE" to "NO".
The saved the positions of all servos affected by this
measure and adopted them in parallel to the line
"F.S.Pos." and the display then immediately shows
the following for the current OUTPUT CH (servo
connection):
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 01
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1670sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670sec
Switch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe
positions based on the servo throws.
"Fail Safe" in combination with "Channel Mapping"
In order to ensure that the mapped servos – that is
to say servos which are controlled from a common
control channel (INPUT CH) – react the same way even
in the event of a failure, the corresponding settings of
the INPUT CH determine the behavior of the mapped
servos!!!
Detail program description - Control adjust 213
Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a
receiver are mapped with one another, whereby the
OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08 are
assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective control
channel "04"...
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 06
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: OFF
F.S.POS. : 1670sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670sec
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 07
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: OFF
F.S.POS. : 1230sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670sec
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 08
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: HOLD
F.S.POS. : 1770sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670sec
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 04
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1500sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1500sec
This is also the case, for example, if this is mapped with
INPUT CH 01:
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 04
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1500sec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1500sec
In this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn,
react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01.
The reaction or delay time set in the "DELAY" line, on
the other hand, always applies uniformly for all channels
set to "FAI(L) SAFE".
RX FREE MIXER
RX FREE MIXER
MIXER
: 1
MASTER CH: 00
SLAVE CH : 00
S–TRAVEL–: 100
S–TRAVEL+: 100
RX WING MIXER
TAIL TYPE: NORMAL
… the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behavior of
these three servos connected to the control channel 4
completely independently of the individual settings of the
respective OUTPUT CH:
214 Detail program description - Control adjust
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
MIXER
Mixer selection
1, 2 or 3
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
MASTER CH Signal source or
source channel
0, 1 … depending
on receiver
SLAVE CH
Target channel
0, 1 … depending
on receiver
S-TRAVEL–
Admix negative
0 … 100 %
S-TRAVEL+
Admix positive
0 … 100 %
RX WING
MIXER
Tail unit type
(TAIL TYPE)
NORMAL,
V-TAIL (V-LW)
ELEVON
(vertical/horizontal
mixer for delta and
ﬂying wing)
MIXER
Up to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously.
Switch between Mixer 1, Mixer 2 and Mixer 3 through
"MIXER".
The following settings in this display always for just the
mixer selected in the "MIXER" line.
Important notice:
If you have already programmed mixer functions
in the "Wing mixer" or "Free mixer" menu, make
absolutely sure that these mixers do not overlap
with those in the menu "RX FREE MIXER"!
MASTER CH ("from")
According to the same principles described in the
section "Free mixer" on page 180, the signal applied
at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel)
is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target
channel).
Select "00" if no mixer should be set.
RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)
The following model types are also available in the "Tail"
line of the "Model type" menu, page 82 and should,
preferentially, be pre-set there. In this case, always leave
the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL.
However, if you would prefer to use the mixer integrated
in the receiver, you can select the already preadjusted
mixer functions for the corresponding model type:
• NORMAL
This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type
with rear tail unit and separate rudder and elevator.
No mixing function is necessary for this model type.
• V-TAIL (V-tail unit)
With this model type the elevator and rudder control
functions are connected, so that each of the two
tail unit ﬂaps – each controlled with a separate
servo – assume both the elevator and rudder function.
The servos are normally connected at the receiver
as follows:
OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servo
OUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servo
If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please
RX CURVE
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
TYPE
CURVE2 CH
TYPE
CURVE3 CH
TYPE
02
03
04
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
CURVE1, 2
or 3 CH
Channel
1 … depending on
assignment of the receiver
respective curve
setting
TYPE
Curve type
A, B, C
see ﬁgure
TYPE A
Expo = –100%
DR = 125%
–100% 0 +100%
Control travel
–100%
Servo travel
+100%
Servo travel
+100%
Servo travel
+100%
–100% 0 +100%
Control travel
TYPE C
Expo = +100%
DR = 70%
TYPE B
linear
–100%
TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)
With the settings of these two lines the percentage of
the admix is speciﬁed in relation to the MASTER signal
separately for each direction.
observe the notices on page 57.
• ELEVON (delta/ﬂying wing models)
The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume
the aileron and elevator function. The servos are
normally connected to the receiver as follows:
OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical
OUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/vertical
If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please
observe the notices on page 57.
–100%
SLAVE CH ("to")
The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel) is
mixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target channel).
The degree of mixture is determined by the percentages
entered in the lines "TRAVEL–" and "TRAVEL +".
Select "00" if no mixer should be set.
–100% 0 +100%
Control travel
Normally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is
used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3)
and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also
correspond to the factory settings. ATTENTION: This
assignment only applies if "2HRSv3+8" is not speciﬁed
in the line "Tail Unit" in the "Basic Settings" menu
and "2AIL" or 2AIL 2FL" is not speciﬁed in the line
"Ail./Flap"! Otherwise the control function 3 (elevator)
which is already in the transmitter is split to the control
channels 3 + 8 or the control function 2 (aileron) is split
to the control channels 2 + 5 for left and right aileron.
The corresponding control channels (INPUT CH) of the
receiver in these two cases would be the channels 03 +
08 or 02 + 05.
Therefore, if you have speciﬁed "2AIL", for example, on
the transmitter side and would like to utilize the option RX
CURVE to be addressed here instead of the individually
adjustable menu "Dual Rate / Expo", page 108, of the
transmitter mc-32 HoTT, two curves must be set:
Detail program description - Control adjust 215
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
TYPE
CURVE2 CH
TYPE
CURVE3 CH
TYPE
RX SERVO TEST
02
05
04
Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different
control characteristics.
With the RX CURVE function you can manage the
control characteristics for up to three servos:
• CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH
Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of the
ﬁrst servo.
The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the
channel selected here.
TYPE
Select the servo curve:
A: EXPO = -100 % and DUAL RATE = 125 %
The servo reacts strongly to movements of the
joystick around the neutral position. As the rudder
throw increases, the curve becomes ﬂatter.
B: Linear setting.
The servo follows the joystick movement linearly.
C: EXPO = +100 % and DUAL RATE = 70 %
The servo reacts weakly to the joystick movements
around the neutral position. As the rudder throw
increases, the curve becomes steeper.
Notice:
The control characteristics programmed here also affect
the mapped receiver outputs.
216 Detail program description - Control adjust
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: STOP
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
ALL-MAX
Servo travel on
the "+" side for all
servo outputs for
the servo test
1500 … 2000 μs
ALL-MIN
Servo travel on the
"-" side for all servo
outputs for the
servo test
1500 … 1000 μs
TEST
Test procedure
START / STOP
ALARM VOLT Alarm threshold
of the receiver
undervoltage
warning
3,0 … 6,0 V
factory setting:
3.8 V
ALARM
TEMP+
Alarm threshold for
excessively high
temperature of the
receiver
50 … 80 °C
Factory setting:
70 °C
Alarm threshold
for excessively low
temperature of the
receiver
-20 … +10 °C
Factory setting:
-10 °C
ALARM
TEMP–
CH OUTPUT Channel sequence ONCE, SAME,
TYPE
SUMI, SUMO
ALL-MAX (servo travel on the "+" side)
In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the plus
side of the control travel for the servo test.
2000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs
corresponds to the neutral position.
Make sure that the servos do not overrun mechanically
during the test routine.
ALL-MIN (servo travel on the "-" side)
You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus side
of the control path for the servo test in this line.
1000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs
corresponds to the neutral position.
TEST
You start and stop the servo test integrated in the
receivers in this line.
By pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
you activate the input ﬁeld:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: STOP
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
With one of the arrow keys of the right touch pad, you
now select START:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
By pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
you now start the test run. The input ﬁeld is shown as
"normal" again:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
To stop the servo test, reactivate the input ﬁeld as
described above, select STOP and conﬁrm this selection
with the SET key of the right touch pad.
ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)
The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM
VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0
and 6.0 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut,
an acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/
short) and "VOLT.E" blinks in the top right of all "RX …"
displays:
RX SERVO
OUTPUT CH:
REVERSE
CENTER
TRIM
TRAVEL–
TRAVEL+
PERIOD
VOLT.E
01
OFF
1500sec
–000sec
150%
150%
20msec
The parameter "R-VOLT" is also represented inversely
in the "RX DATAVIEW" display:
RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E
S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM
S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C
L PACK TIME 00010msec
R-VOLT
:03.7V
L.R-VOLT:03.5V
SENSOR1 :00.0V
00°C
SENSOR2 :00.0V
00°C
ALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature
monitoring)
These two options monitor the receiver temperature. A
lower threshold "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C) and an
upper threshold "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C) can be
programmed. When these speciﬁcations are exceeded
or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous peep tone)
sounds and "TEMP.E" appears in the top right of all
receiver displays. In addition, the parameter "R-TEM" is
shown inversely on the " RX DATAVIEW" display page.
Make sure that your receiver remains within the
permissible temperature range during all ﬂight
conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).
CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)
Here you select how the receiver outputs are controlled.
• ONCE
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
operated in a cycle of 20 ms – with a 12-channel
receiver (Order No. 33512) 30 ms – regardless of
what is set or displayed in the "PERIOD" line in the
"RX SERVO" display!
• SAME
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SAME
The servo connections of the receiver are controlled
in parallel in blocks of four. That means the channels
1 to 4, 5 to 8 and 9 to 12 each receive the control
signals simultaneously.
This is recommended for digital servos when multiple
servos are used for one function (e.g. aileron), so
that the servos can run absolutely synchronized.
When only using digital servos, we recommend
setting the "PERIOD" line of the "RX SERVO" to 10
ms in order to be able to utilize the fast reaction of
digital servos. With the use of analog servos or in
mixer mode, "20 ms" must be selected!
With this setting, pay particular attention to the
sufﬁcient dimensioning of the receiver current
supply. Since up to four servos can always operate
simultaneously, the requirement is higher.
• SUMO (sum signal OUT)
The servo connections of the receiver are controlled
successively. This is recommended for analog servos.
With this setting the servos are automatically
Detail program description - Control adjust 217
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUTPUT TYPE:SUMO
A HoTT receiver conﬁgured as SUMO permanently
generates a so-called sum signal from the control
signals of all of its control channels and provides this
by default to the accompanying GR-24 receiver at
servo connection 8.
On receivers whose display shows "SUMO" at the
top right, an additional two-digit number appears ...
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 08
… the active ﬁeld changes after conﬁrmation of
"SUMO" by brieﬂy pressing the central SET key
of the right touch pad for the channel selection.
With this selection you specify the highest of the
transmitter channels contained in the SUMO signal:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 08
You can conﬁrm the default by pressing the SET key
218 Detail program description - Control adjust
of the right touch pad again or by selecting one of
the other channels between 04 and 06 with the arrow
keys and conﬁrming with SET.
The receiver outputs are controlled successively in a
cycle of 20 ms (30 ms with the receiver GR-24, Order
No. 33512,), even if 10 ms is set in the "PERIOD" line
of the the "RX SERVO" display page.
Primarily intended for the "Satellite mode" of two
HoTT receivers, as described in the following, the
generated sum signal deﬁned by the receiver as
SUMO can be used for the control of ﬂight simulators;
this is also the case for the control of ﬂyable systems,
insofar as they have the corresponding input or the
adapter cable with Order No. 33310.
In …
Satellite mode
… two HoTT receivers are connected to one another
through a three-wire connecting cable (Order No.
33700.1 (300 mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm)) at receivertype-speciﬁc servo connections. Receivers of the
type GR-16 and GR-24, for example, are to be
connected with one another at servo output 8. More
detailed information can be found on the internet at
www.graupner.de.
Through this connection, all channels of the HoTT
receiver which was conﬁgured as SUMO and
identiﬁed as a satellite receiver are transmitted to the
second HoTT receiver, the main receiver, which is to
be programmed as ...
• SUMI (sum signal IN)
Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000sec
ALL–MIN
: 1000sec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 70°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SUMI
The receiver deﬁned as SUMI, however, only uses
the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of
a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI is
programmed to fail-safe.
If the receiver programmed as SUMO satellite
receiver has a failure of receipt, the servos connected
to this receiver assume the fail-safe positions
programmed in the satellite receiver completely
independently of the main receiver.
On the other hand, if a failure of receipt takes place
with two receivers simultaneously, the receiver
software current at the time of the printing of
this manual falls back on the fail-safe settings of
SUMO. In the individual case, however, interactions
cannot be ruled out, which is why we urgently
recommend performing an appropriate test
BEFORE commissioning a model.
This receiver combination is recommended, if, for
example , one of the two receivers is installed in
the model at an unfavorable position for receiving
or as a result of nozzles, carbon ﬁber material or
the like, there is the danger that the receipt signal
is weakened due to the ﬂight position, so that
interruptions of the range must be taken into account.
Therefore, make sure to connect the most important
control functions to the main receiver programmed
as SUMI, so that, in the event of a failure, the model
remains controllable when the SUMO satellite
receiver no longer receives a signal.
Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the onboard
electricity supply, on the other hand, is only sent to
the transmitter by the satellite receiver conﬁgured
as SUMO. Therefore, telemetry sensors are to be
connected to the satellite receiver (SUMO).
Each receiver should be connected with its own
supply line from the common voltage supply. With
receivers with a high current load, it may even be
beneﬁcial to connect them with two supply lines to
the same current supply.
On the other hand, if each of the two receivers
red
should be supplied from
its own voltage source,
the center cable must
be removed from one of
the two plugs of the satellite cable; see ﬁgure.
If you would like to carry out additional programming,
such as fail-safe settings, disconnect the threepole satellite connection between the two receivers
and switch on only the relevant receiver. It may be
necessary to also change the connection sequence.
Detail program description - Control adjust 219
SENSOR SELECT
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad…
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
rcv ch1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… and then pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad, the selected submenu opens:
SENSOR SELECT
RECEIVER
GENERAL MODULE
ELECTRIC AIR.MOD
VARIO MODUL
GPS
Here, after selection of the desired line with the arrow
keys cd of the left of right touch pad and then
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
activate ( ) or deactivate ( )the data output of the
sensor connected to a receiver with active telemetry
connection. It is only possible to select one sensor, e. g.:
SENSOR SELECT
RECEIVER
GENERAL MODULE
ELECTRIC AIR.MOD
VARIO MODUL
GPS
This selection is required to show the sensor in the "VOICE
TRIGGER" submenu and for the display of the telemetry
data in the corresponding graphic displays, page 32.
220 Detail program description - Control adjust
RF STATUS VIEW
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad …
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
rcv ch1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… and then pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad, the selected submenu opens. This provides
a visualization of the quality of the connection of
transmitter and receiver:
R100%
S 90%
SD 40
10
RD 51
4.8VC
4.8VM 0123456789ABCDE
Top row:
Reception power of the channels 1 ...
75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming
from the receiver to the transmitter.
Bottom row:
Reception power of the channels 1 ...
75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming
from the transmitter to the receiver.
reception power since switching on the transmitter
or the resetting of the display by simultaneously
pressing the keys cd or ef of the right touch pad
(CLEAR).
Additional ﬁgures are shown to the left of the graphic
representation of the reception power. These mean:
Value
Explanation
Signal quality in % of the signal
received from the receiver
Signal quality in % of the signal
received by the receiver
SL
Reception power in dBm
Number of lost data packages of the
receiver
RL
Reception power in dBM of the signal
received by the receiver
RS
Current operating voltage of the
receiver in volts
RM
Lowest receiver operating voltage
since last startup, in volts
Comments:
• Since the reception power is measured and
represented in dBm, the reception power is
increasingly worse the higher the bar is and vice
versa; for this purpose, see also "Reception power
(S-dBm)" on page 224.
• Mark the points above the columns with the poorest
Detail program description - Control adjust 221
VOICE TRIGGER
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad …
TELEMETRY
TEL.RCV
rcv ch1
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… and then pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad, the selected submenu opens:
REPEAT
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
1SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
–––
–––
–––
In order to be able to start the voice output through the
headphone connection, at the very least the "REPEAT"
line must be assigned to a switch. The takes place as
described in the section "Switch and control switch
assignments" on page 52:
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
1SEC –––
Move
TRIG desired switch
–––
to
ON position
VARIO
–––
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
222 Detail program description - Control adjust
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
5SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
–––
–––
With this switch you can have the last respective voice
trigger repeated for the duration of the time set to the left
of the switch, as long as the assigned switch is closed:
TRIG
With a switch assigned to this line, preferably one of
the two pushbuttons SW 1 or SW 9, switch to the next
voice output in the rotation selected in the options
"TRANSMITTER", "RECEIVER" and "SENSOR" as
described in the following.
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
5SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
–––
VARIO
If you activate the "VARIO MODULE" line( ) in the
"SENSOR SELECT" submenu, described on page 220,
you can use the headphone connection to activate a
switch assigned to this line completely independently
of the other voice triggers, in other words voice triggers
triggered by changes in altitude, such as "Slow climb/
descent", etc.
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
5SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
SENSOR
TRANSMITTER
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad...
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
5SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
SENSOR
… and then pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad, the selected submenu opens:
TX VOLT:
MODEL TIME:
BATTERIETIME:
TIMER(GE.)TOP:
TIMER(GE:)CENTER:
TIME:
Here, after selection of the desired line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad and then
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the data output of the
selected voice trigger:
the "SENSOR SELECT" submenu:
TX VOLT:
MODEL TIME:
BATTERIETIME:
TIMER(GE.)TOP:
TIMER(GE:)CENTER:
TIME:
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
5SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
SENSOR
RECEIVER
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad …
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
5SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSFER
RECEIVER
SENSOR
… and then pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad, the selected submenu opens:
TEMP:
STRENGHT:
RX VOLT:
LOWVOLT:
If, for example, the "VARIO" sensor was selected, after
selection of the "SENSOR" line and then pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad, the following
display appears:
ALTITUDE:
MAXALT:
MINALT:
VOLT MINIMUM:
As described in the left column, you can also activate
( ) or deactivate ( ) the voice trigger of the desired
line after pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad.
Notice:
The selection made here is completely independent of
the "VARIO" voice triggers.
Here, after selection of the desired line with the arrow
keys cd of the left or right touch pad and then
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the selected voice
trigger.
SENSOR
This line only appears if a sensor was ﬁrst activated in
Detail program description - Control adjust 223
General settings
Basic transmitter settings
Using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll
to the "Basic Settings" menu item of the multifunction
menu:
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Ser vo display
Ser vo test
Code lock
info display
By brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, this menu item opens:
BASIC SETTINGS
Own
Stick mode
PPM10
DSC Output
back
Pitch min
Contrast
unlim.
Display light
yes
Power-on beep
Ni-MH
Batterie type
4.7V
Batterie war ning
Power on war n.
unlim
Touch Sense
Region
Euro
Voice volume
Beep volume
General basic settings are entered in this menu …
speciﬁc to the transmitter, such as the owner's name
and defaults for new model memories.
The settings saved in this menu in the lines ...
• "Stick mode",
• "DSC Output",
224 Detail program description - Control adjust
• "Pitch min"
… have no inﬂuence whatsoever on already existing
model memories; they are only defaults, which are
automatically adopted to newly initialized model
memories and can be changed there on an individually
basis at any time in the "Basic model settings"
and "Helicopter type" menus. A change to the
"speciﬁcations" in this menu, therefore, only inﬂuences
model memories created at a later time.
Notice:
Settings in this menu are only assigned once for
transmitters. After opening this menu in another model
memory, therefore, the last valid settings always appear.
Select the appropriate line with the arrow keys cd of
the left or right touch pad and then press the central
SET key of the right touch pad. In the inverse value ﬁeld
you can now change the respective speciﬁed value with
the arrow keys of the right touch pad and complete your
entry by pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad.
Own(er)
BASIC SETTINGS
Own H. J. Sandbr unner
Stick mode
PPM10
DSC Output
Pitch min
back
Up to 15 characters can be used to specify the owner's
name. Change to the next screen page ( ) by
pressing the SET key of the right touch pad:
!"#$%&’() +,–./012
?@ABCDE
3456789:;
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk
Owner H-J Sandb
Select the desired characters with the arrow keys of
the left touch pad. Switch to the next position by brieﬂy
pressing the arrow key f of the right touch pad of the
SET key to be able to select the next character. A blank
space can be entered by simultaneously pressing the
keys cd or ef of the right touch pad (CLEAR).
You can reach any arbitrary character position within the
input ﬁeld with the ef keys of the right touch pad.
You return to the previous menu page by brieﬂy pressing
the central ESC key of the left touch pad.
Stick mode (speciﬁcation)
As a basic principle, there are four different ways to
assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator,
rudder and throttle or brake ﬂaps for winged models as
well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for
helicopter models to the two joysticks. The model pilot
determines which way to do so according to individual
preferences.
With the arrow keys cd of the left or right touch pad,
select the "Stick mode" line. The selection ﬁeld is shown
in a box:
Helicopter model stick mode
BASIC SETTINGS
Own H- J S a n d b r u n n e r
Stick mode
PPM10
DSC Output
Pitch min
back
SEL
“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)
left aileron
left rudder
left aileron
left rudder
left rudder
left aileron
left rudder
left aileron
roll
tail rotor
tail rotor
right rudder
idle
pitch axis
throttle
pitch axis
throttle
tail rotor
throttle
roll
tail rotor
roll
Motor/Pitch
tail rotor
elev. down
right aileron
idle
roll
full throttle
right rudder
right aileron
elev. up
pitch axis
roll
Motor Vollgas
pitch axis
throttle
pitch axis
DSC Output (speciﬁcation)
In the line with the same name in the "Base setup
model" menu you can determine which of the three
available modulation types should be provided for the
DSC socket separately for each model memory. This
selection primarily inﬂuences the number of maximum
control channels available at the DSC socket and
thus for a ﬂight simulator or LS system connected at
this socket. With the selection of "PPM10", this is the
channels 1 ... 5, with "PPM18" the channels 1 ... 9 and
with "PPM24" the control channels 1 ... 12.
elev. up
“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)
elev. down
pitch axis
tail rotor
idle
throttle
tail rotor
right aileron
idle
elev. down
right rudder
right aileron
right rudder
elev. up
full throttle
roll
“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)
full throttle
throttle
“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)
roll
Winged model stick mode
elev. down
tail rotor
pitch axis
Brieﬂy press the SET key. The current stick mode is
shown inversely. Now, using the arrow keys of the
right touch pad, select the alternative you use most
frequently, from 1 to 4. In the future this will be used for
newly initialized model memories, but can be changed
on an individual basis for up to 24 model memories.
After simultaneously pressing the keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display returns to stick
mode "1"
By pressing the SET key again, you deactivate the
selection ﬁeld in order to switch lines.
“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)
throttle
roll
pitch axis
elev. up
memory in the line "DSC Output" the same way as with
"Stick mode".
If necessary, using the arrow keys cd of the left or
right touch pad, switch to the "DSC Output" line and, by
brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, activate the value window:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
R12
R08
Rcv Ch Map
RF transmit
OFF
99sec
RF Range Test
DSC output
PPM10
SEL
In this "General settings" menu, you can determine
which of the three possible "Modulation types" should
be adopted as the default to a newly initialized model
BASIC SETTINGS
Own H-J Sandbr unner
Stick mode
DSC Output
PPM10
Pitch min
back
SEL
Now you case choose between the three possible
modulation types "PPM10", "PPM18" and "PPM24"
using the arrow keys of the right touch pad. By pressing
the central SET key of the right touch pad again, you
complete the entry.
Simultaneously pressing the keys cd or ef of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) returns to "PPM10".
(Default) Pitch min
(only relevant for helicopter models)
Enter your preferred actuation direction for the throttle/
pitch joystick analogously to the "Stick mode" and "DSC
Output" options described above, in order to be able
to ﬁnd it for newly initialized model memories in the
future. The functions of all other options of the helicopter
program depend on this setting, insofar as they pertain to
the throttle and pitch function, in other words the throttle
curve, idle trim, Channel 1 ¼ tail rotor mixer, etc.
The following meanings apply:
"front": minimum front pitch setting, the pitch joystick
(C1) points away from the pilot.
Detail program description - Control adjust 225
"rear":
minimum rear pitch setting, the pitch joystick
(C1) points towards the pilot.
Simultaneously pressing the keys cd or ef of the
right touch pad (CLEAR) switches to "rear"
Notice:
The stick mode of the C1 joystick in the winged model
program for "Throttle min front/rear" can be individual
changed in the "Model type" menu.
Contrast
In order to guarantee the optimal visibility of the display
of the mc-32 HoTT in any weather and at any
temperature, you can adjust its contrast:
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
2:22h
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«nor mal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
0:00
Stop
Flt
0:00
«nor mal »
K78 HoTT
5.5V
For this purpose, using the arrow keys cdof the left or
right touch pad, select the "Contrast" line:
BASIC SETTINGS
Stick mode
DSC Output
PPM10
back
Pitch min
Contrast
SEL
Then brieﬂy press the central SET key of the right touch
pad. Now you can adjust the display contract in a range
of ±20 using the arrow keys of the right touch pad in the
inverse value ﬁeld.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef
of the right touch pad (CLEAR) resets the inverse ﬁeld
to "0".
Display light
In this line you can determine how long the backlight of
the display should remain switched on after switching on
the transmitter or the last key actuation.
The available options are "unlim(ited), "30 s", "60 s" and
"120 s".
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef
of the right touch pad (CLEAR) sets the inverse ﬁeld to
"unlimited".
Power-on beep
In this line you can switch the power-on beep of the
transmitter on ("yes") and off ("no").
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef
of the right touch pad (CLEAR) switch the inverse ﬁeld
back to "yes".
Battery type
BASIC SETTINGS
Contrast
Display light
unlim.
yes
Power-on beep
Ni-MH
Batter y type
SEL
In this line you indicate to the transmitter whether its
power supply is provided from a four-cell NiMH battery
or a single-cell LiPo battery. Depending on this setting,
you are offered a suitable voltage range in the (next) line
"Battery warning".
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) switches back to "Ni-MH"
in the inverse ﬁeld.
Battery warning threshold
BASIC SETTINGS
unlim.
Display light
yes
Power-on beep
Ni-MH
Batter y type
4.7V
Batter y warning
SEL
You can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for the
display ...
batter y
needs
chargi ng
… – depending on the selection of the battery type in
the line above it – in increments of 0.1 volt between 4.5
and 5.5 V (NimH battery) or 3.4 and 4.2 V (LiPo battery.
226 Detail program description - Control adjust
Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too
low, so that you still have sufﬁcient time to safely land
your model in the event of a battery warning.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef
of the right touch pad (CLEAR) switches back to the
factory default values 4.7 or 3.4 V in the inverse ﬁeld.
Touch sensitivity
BASIC SETTINGS
Batterie type
Ni-MH
4.7V
Batterie war ning
Power on war n.
unlim
Touch Sense
SEL
Power-on warning
BASIC SETTINGS
yes
Power-on beep
Ni-MH
Batterie type
4.7V
Batterie war ning
Power on war n.
unlim
SEL
In this line you can determine how long the transmitter
should wait after the last actuation of an operating
element until the activation of an optical and acoustic
power-on warning before the transmitter switches off
automatically one minute later.
The values "unlim(ited)", "30 s" and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 and
60 minutes are optional selections.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) switches to "unlimited" in
the inverse ﬁeld.
Notice:
In order to be able to restart the transmitter after
automatic shut-off, slide the power switch of the
transmitter ﬁrst towards the display, to the "OFF" position
and, after approx. ﬁve seconds, back towards the
antenna to the "ON" position.
Voice volume
BASIC SETTINGS
Power on warn.
unlim
Touch Sense
Region
Euro
Voice volume
SEL
In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the
touch pads in a range from 1 to 10.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) resets to "2" in the inverse
ﬁeld.
The volume of the voice output through the earpiece
connection is deﬁned in a range of "0" to "10" in this line.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) resets to "3" in the inverse
ﬁeld.
Region
Beep volume
BASIC SETTINGS
4.7V
Batterie war ning
Power on war n.
unlim
Touch Sense
Euro
Region
SEL
BASIC SETTINGS
Touch Sense
Euro
Region
Voice volume
Beep volume
SEL
The region is needed for compliance with various
regulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for example,
the operation of a remote control is only permitted within
a limited frequency band. Therefore, the region setting of
the transmitter MUST be switched to "France" mode
as soon as it is operated in France. In no case may
the Universal/EURO mode be used in France!
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef
of the right touch pad (CLEAR) resets to "Euro" in the
inverse ﬁeld.
The volume of the transmitter's internal beep generator
is deﬁned in a range from "0" to "6" in this line.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) resets to "3" in the inverse
ﬁeld.
Detail program description - Control adjust 227
228 Detail program description - Control adjust
Detail program description - Control adjust 229
Servo display
Display of the servo position
Scroll to the menu item "Servo display" of the
multifunction menu using the arrow keys of the left or
right touch pad:
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Ser vo display
Ser vo test
Code lock
info display
By brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, you open this menu item.
The visual display of the current servo positions,
however, can be opened both by selecting this menu
and by simultaneously pressing the keys ef left touch
pad directly from the base screen of the transmitter, as
well as nearly all menu positions. By brieﬂy pressing the
central ESC key of the left touch pad, you return to the
respective starting point.
11
–100 %
0%
0%
0%
+100%
0%
10
12
0%
0%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
The current position of a servo is displayed in a bar
diagram between -150 % and +150 % of the normal
path, in consideration of the control and servo settings,
the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay of all active
linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 % corresponds precisely
to the servo center position. This way, you can quickly
check your settings without having to switch on the
receiver. However, this does not absolve you from ﬁrst
230 Detail program description - Control adjust
carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the
model, prior to the ﬁrst operation of the model in order to
eliminate errors!
For winged models the display takes place
according to the following scheme:
Bar 1 = Throttle/brake servo
Bar 2 = Aileron or left aileron
Bar 3 = Elevator
Bar 4 = Rudder
Bar 5 = Right aileron
Bar 6 = Camber-changing ﬂap (left) / free channel
Bar 7 = Right camber-changing ﬂap / free channel
Bar 8 = Free channel / second elevator servo
Bar 9 = Free channel / Left FL2
Bar 10 = Free channel / Right FL2
Bar 11 = Free channel
Bar 12 = Free channel
… and with helicopter models:
Bar 1 = Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servo
Bar 2 = Roll (1) servo
Bar 3 = Pitch (1) servo
Bar 4 = Tail servo (gyro)
Bar 5 = Pitch (2) servo / free channel
Bar 6 = Throttle servo or speed controller
Bar 7 = Gyro sensitivity / free channel
Bar 8 = Speed regulator / free channel
Bar 9 = Free channel
Bar 10 = Free channel
Bar 11 = Free channel
Bar 12 = Free channel
Notice:
• However, please note that the servo display is only
based on the original sequence of servos, so any
switching of the outputs do not take place in either
the "Transmitter output" menu or "Receiver output"
menu.
• The number of channels shown in this menu
correspond to the 12 control channels available in the
mc-32 HoTT transmitter. The number of actually
usable channels, however, depends on the receiver
type as well as the number of servos connected to
it and, therefore, may be considerably lower under
certain circumstances.
• Use this display during the model programming,
because you can immediately check all settings on
the transmitter. However, this does not absolve you
from ﬁrst carefully testing all program steps, as well
as on the model, prior to the ﬁrst operation of the
model in order to eliminate errors!
Servo test
Function test of Servo 1 … 8
Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
the menu item "Servo test" of the multifunction menu:
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Ser vo display
Ser vo test
Code lock
info display
By brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, this menu item opens:
SERVO
time of 0.5 s.
To change the cycle time, select the time input ﬁeld
with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. After
activation of the input ﬁeld by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, the movement cycle
can be changed in 0.5 s increments between 0.5 s and
3.0 s using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.
Brieﬂy pressing the central ESC of the left touch pad or
the central SET key of the right touch pad completes the
time presetting.
SERVO
TEST
TEST
act
off
act
off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0.5s
Any of the inputs 1 ... 8 can be activated for the servo
test by selecting with the arrow keys of the left or right
touch pad and then brieﬂy pressing SET key of the right
touch pad. As soon as you have set only one of the
inputs 1 ... 8 to "active", the following notice appears at
the bottom of the display screen:
SERVO
TEST
act
off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLR=act./deact.
0.5s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HLD = aktivier t
3.0s
SERVO
act
off
TEST
Ser vo test act.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLR=act./deact.
3.0s
Simultaneously press the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) in order to end the test.
Important notice:
The shut-off of the transmitter does not
automatically end an active servo test. Therefore,
always stop a servo test manually BEFORE
SHUTTING OFF the transmitter, because the servo
test is otherwise restarted after switching on the
transmitter again.
The "servo test" function started by simultaneously
pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of the right touch
pad (CLEAR) automatically control all servos as though
the would simultaneously and permanently move the
corresponding control back and forth between -100
% and +100 % in the set time. All active mixing and
coupling functions in the respective model memory,
therefore, are effective and the servos move within the
speciﬁed servo paths and servo delimitations.
As soon as you have started the servo test by
simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR), a window opens:
Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys cd or ef of
the right touch pad (CLEAR) would now start and stop
the servo test for input "1", fo r example, with a cycle
Detail program description - Control adjust 231
Code lock
Locking of the multifunction list
Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to
the menu item ...
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Ser vo display
Ser vo test
Code lock
info display
… of the multifunction menu. By brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad, this menu item
opens:
CODE LOCK
De s i r e d ( n ew)
s e c r e t nu mb e r
(_
1 2 3 4
SET
Access to the multifunction menu can be locked for
unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code comprised
of the numbers 1 to 4, which you enter according to the
scheme shown in the display with the arrow keys of the
left touch pad; for example :
CODE LOCK
De s i r e d ( n ew)
s e c r e t nu mb e r
(123_)
1 2 3 4
CLR
As soon as you not enter the fourth number by pressing
one of the other arrow keys of the left touch pad, the
following notice appears in the display:
232 Detail program description - Control adjust
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
7 8 9 10 11 12
STO
DELAY : 0.25s
By brieﬂy pressing the central ESC key of the left touch
pad, you conﬁrm the secret code and leave the menu.
By brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, on the other hand, you conﬁrm the active CLR ﬁeld
in the bottom right in the display and thereby delete the
number you entered.
Make note of the secret code and keep it safe.
Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to
Graupner Service for decoding.
The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter
is switched on. However, the control remains ready
for operation. Calling the multifunction list and thereby
a model change, for example, is no longer possible
without entering the correct number combination:
CODE LOCK
Desired (new)
secret num ber
(_
1 2 3 4
SET
A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only
possible after the lapse of a time-out.
CODE LOCK
Desi red (new)
Input secret
error number
Time lock (123_)
1 2 3 4
CLR
Deletion of the secret code
If the secret code should be deleted again at a later
point in time, after opening this menu, immediately press
the central SET key of the right touch pad twice :
CODE LOCK
Desi red (new)
secret number
(1234)
1 2 3 4
CLR
The ﬁrst time you press the central SET key of the right
touch pad, the secret code is deleted (CLR):
1.234
firmware ver.
2011/02/01(Mo )
date
time
11:22:33s
2048MB
SD-Card
1234MB
available
And the second time you press the key the empty input
ﬁeld is conﬁrmed (SET). The display shows:
CODE LOCK
D e s ir e d ( n ew)
Memorise
s e c rsecret
e t nu mb e r
¾¾¾¾¾ none ¾¾¾¾¾
(123_)
1 2 3 4
SET
lock, you should, if applicable, remove this menu from
the multifunction list with "Suppress menus" so that
unauthorized persons cannot enter a secret code "on
the sly".
Now leave the menu by brieﬂy pressing the central ESC
key of the left touch pad.
Leaving the menu without input of a secret code
You would like to leave the menu opened out of curiosity
or by accident and have not pressed any other key.
Therefore, the display appears as follows:
1.234
firmware ver.
2011/02/01(Mo )
date
time
11:22:33s
2048MB
SD-Card
1234MB
available
Press the central SET key of the right touch pad once.
The following display appears:
CODE LOCK
D e s ir e d ( n ew)
Memorise
s e c rsecret
e t nu mb e r
¾¾¾¾¾ none ¾¾¾¾¾
(123_)
1 2 3 4
SET
Now leave the menu by brieﬂy pressing the ESC key of
the left touch pad.
Tip:
If you generally want to dispense with a programmer
Detail program description - Control adjust 233
Info display
Transmitter ID, date, time and memory card
With the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll
to the menu item ...
Telemetr y
Basic settings
Ser vo display
Ser vo test
Code lock
info display
… of the multifunction menu. Brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad opens this menu:
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2011/08/01(Mo )
date
11:22:33s
time
0MB
SD-Card
0MB
available
0%
Transmitter-speciﬁc information is shown in this menu
and – insofar as necessary and beneﬁcial – also
changed.
Select the appropriate line with the arrow keys cd
of the left or right touch pad and then brieﬂy press the
central SET key of the right touch pad. In the inverse
value ﬁeld you can now change the respective default
value – insofar as possible and necessary – with the
arrow keys of the right touch pad and complete your
entry by pressing the central SET key again.
234 Detail program description - Control adjust
RFID
Date
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
fir mware ver.
2011/08/01(Mo )
date
11:22:33s
time
0MB
SD-Card
The RF identiﬁcation number of the transmitter is shown
in this line. It is transmitter-speciﬁc, is only issued once
per transmitter and cannot be changed. During the
connection process, this is sent to the receiver, among
other things, so that it is always capable of identifying
the radio signals of "its" transmitter.
Firmware Version
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
fir mware ver.
2011/08/01(Mo )
date
11:22:33s
time
0MB
SD-Card
The current version number of the transmitter software
is shown in this line.
Through a comparison of the number shown here with
the update version offered on the internet download
page of the corresponding product under www.graupner.
de, you can determine whether a current update of the
transmitter operating system is available.
If applicable, the version number is also required for
inquiries with the service department.
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2011/08/01(Mo )
date
11:22:33s
time
0MB
SD-Card
If necessary, select this line with the arrow keys of the
left or right touch pad and, if applicable, the month or
date ﬁeld. After activation of the respective value ﬁeld
by pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
the year, month or date can be set with the arrow keys
of the right touch pad. Pressing the central SET key of
the right touch pad again completes the respective entry.
Years ranging from 2000 to 2135 are available.
The abbreviated day of the week to the right outside in
brackets is automatically generated from the respective
date.
Notice:
• If the transmitter is connected to a PC as described
on page 39, the date and time can also be set
through the PC program provided for the respective
product on the internet page at www.graupner.de.
• The date and time are protected against data loss
due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations
like a battery change, see page 15.
Time
SD card
RFID
ABCDEF12
firmware ver.
1.234
2011/08/01(Mo )
date
11:22:33s
time
0MB
SD-Card
If necessary, select this line with the arrow keys of the
left or right touch pad and the minute ﬁeld, if applicable.
After activation of the respective value ﬁeld by pressing
the central SET key of the right touch pad, the hour or
minute can be adjusted with the arrow keys of the right
touch pad. Pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad again completes the respective entry.
Contrary to this, the seconds display cannot be directly
adjusted; it can only be restarted by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad with "00".
Notice:
• If the transmitter is connected to a PC as described
on page 39, the date and time can also be set
through the PC program provided for the respective
product on the internet page at www.graupner.de.
• The date and time are protected against data loss
due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations
like a battery change, see page 15.
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
fir mware ver.
2011/08/01(Mo )
date
11:22:33s
time
2048MB
SD-Card
In this line the memory capacity of a memory card
inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown in MB.
Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted
micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take
several minutes until the correct value is shown after
switching on the transmitter.
date
2011/08/01(Mo )
time
11:22:33s
2048MB
SD-Card
available
1234MB
60%
As mentioned before, the display of the available storage
space – depending on the capacity of the inserted
memory card – does not appear until some time has
passed after switching on the display.
available
1.234
fir mware ver.
2011/02/01(Mo )
date
time
11:22:33s
2048MB
SD-Card
1234MB
available
Display of the available storage space in MB.
As mentioned before, the display of the available
storage space – depending on the capacity of the
inserted memory card – does not appear until some time
has passed after switching on the display.
The display of the available storage space in relation to
the total memory capacity is shown in the line below:
Detail program description - Control adjust 235
mc-32 HoTT programming
Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged model
Programming models in an mc-32 HoTT …
… is easier than it may appear at ﬁrst!
The basic requirement for "clean" programming,
however, and this applies not only to the mc-32
HoTT, but basically to all programmable transmitters,
is the mechanically correct installation of all remote
control components in the model! Therefore, it should
be ensured no later than on connection of the linkages
that the servos are in their respective neutral position
and their rudder lever is also in the desired position.
Otherwise you should loosen the rudder and re-fasten
it with an offset of a few lobes. If, in the process, the
servos are moved into position using a servo tester,
such as the RC-Tester with Order No. 2894.12, the
"correct" position can be determined very easily.
The possibility of changing the neutral position of a
servo in practically every modern transmitter is only
intended for the ﬁne-tuning. Greater deviations from
"0" can result to further asymmetries in the course of
the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the
same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get
any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to
"straight"!
An additional important point is the adjustment of
the rudder paths: This should take place through
a corresponding adjustment of the steering points,
insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more efﬁcient
than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the
transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve ﬁrst
and foremost for to compensate for the manufacturerstipulated tolerances for the servos and their ﬁne-tuning,
and less for the compensation of carelessness.
If two separate aileron servos are used for a
winged model, the ailerons, controlled through the
236 Detail program description - Control adjust
corresponding activated wing mixer – see the following
pages – can be assigned with both the ﬂap function and
raised with the brake ﬂaps – however this would make
more sense in a glider or electro glider than in a motor
model.
because they have more of a stabilizing and controlling
function than a braking function in this type of crow
system.
A "tip" for seeing the brake effect in this connection:
Spread the ﬂaps and look above and below the surface
from the front. The greater the projected surface of the
protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect.
Outboard ailerons
Inboard camber-changing flaps
In this case the rudder arms – starting from the neutral
position – should be tilted forward one lobe, pointing
toward the nose, set to the respective servo.
The mechanical differentiation achieved through this
asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the
brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with their
deﬂection and, therefore, does not normally require a
greater path upward than downward.
Correspondingly, when planning to operated separately
controlled ﬂap servos, they should also be integrated
into a crow system. Since the brake effect of this ﬂap
position referred to as a "crow position" is inﬂuenced
less by the elevated ailerons than the downward
deﬂection of the ﬂaps, the rudder arms should be
installed somewhat toward the rear in this case, tilted
toward the trailing edge. As a result, there is a greater
available path for the downward deﬂection. With such
a combination of lowered ﬂaps with raised ailerons,
however, the latter should only be elevated moderately,
(Eine ähnlich asymmetrische Montage der Ruderarme
kann z. B. an Spreiz- bzw. Landeklappen auch in einem
Motormodell sinnvoll sein.)
If a model is completed and mechanically attuned in this
respect, you can basically begin with the programming
of the transmitter. The following examples, an attempt is
made to follow the practice of ﬁrst describing the general
basic settings and then ﬁne-tuning or specializing them
in the subsequent steps. After the initial ﬂight and over
the course of the further ﬂying in of a model, it may be
necessary to occasionally adjust some of the settings. As
a pilot's experience increases, however, so does the desire
for enhancements and expansions of settings. For this
reason, the sequence of options is not always adhered to
or some options are even mentioned multiple times.
Of course, just the opposite can also be the case,
that not everyone of the described steps is relevant
for a certain model, just as some users may miss the
description of a certain step for their model …
whatever the case may be, you should consider a logical
assignment of the control mechanisms before you begin
with the model programming.
For models in which the emphasis is on the "motor",
regardless of whether it is powered by an electric
or combustion motor, there should be no problem
in this respect, because the assignment of the two
joystick units essentially lies in the four basic functions
"Power regulation (= throttle)", "Side", "Altitude" and
"Transverse"! However, in the menu …
"Model type"
(beginning 82)
M O D E L T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
… you should determine whether you would like
the minimum throttle position in the "front" or "rear",
because "none (motor)" is entered by the program in the
creation of a model memory as a basic principle.
The difference between "no" and "idle front/rear" is
not only in the effect of the C1 trimming, which is over
the entire joystick path with "none" and with "idle front/
rear" only effects the idle direction. In the process,
the "effective direction" of the C1 joystick is adapted
accordingly, so that with a change from "front" to "rear"
or vice versa, the rotational direction of the throttle servo
or brake system do not have to be adapted as well.
In addition, with an "idle front/rear" setting, a warning
indication appears in the display for safety reasons and
issues a warning beep, if the throttle joystick is too far in
the full-throttle direction:
0:00
GRAUBELE
Stop
#01
0:00
ThrottleFlug
too
high!
50%
5.2V
K78 HoTT
0.0V
2:22h
In any case, you will also have to consider "special
functions".
With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only
occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask
how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain
solutions have shown to be practical and others have
shown to be less practical.
For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have to
release a joystick for the approach of a glider model in
order to be able to appropriately control the spoilers or a
crow position using one of the other controls. It may be
more advantageous to either design the function of the
C1 joystick to be switchable (see Example 4, beginning
on page 247) or to leave the control of the brake system
at the joystick and to control the motor through one of
the other controls or even with a switch! Since this type
of model does not normally have a motor, and just a
"start assistance" function to either "lift" the model in
the sky with full force or, in any case, to "tow" it with
"half" force by a wind ﬁeld, Therefore, the motor can be
switched on and off without having to release one of the
joysticks – even in the approach. The selection is not
difﬁcult with the mc-32 HoTT transmitter.
For the control of the motor you use a two-stage switch
SW 3 or 8 or, even better, one of the two three-stage
switches CTRL 9 or 10. In any case, select a switch
which you can reach easily in order to perform this
option without having to release the joystick. In addition,
this procedure should take place on the transmitter side,
which is modiﬁed for a holding hand with a manual start
of the model. In other words: If the model is started from
the right hand, the motor switch should be assigned to
one of the switches available on the left side and vice
versa.
The idea is the same for the control of ﬂaps, regardless
of whether only ailerons or ﬂaps covering the entire
wingspan (combinations) are raised or lowered.
If everything is now in order, you can begin with the
programming.
Detail program description - Control adjust 237
Initial steps for the programming of a new model
Example: Winged model with two ailerons and – initially – without motor propulsion
In the scope of the initial commissioning of a new
transmitter, in the selection menu …
"General settings"
(page 224)
BASIC SETTINGS
Own H- J S a n d b r u n n e r
Stick mode
PPM10
DSC Output
back
Pitch min
Contrast
unlim.
Display light
yes
Power-on beep
Ni-MH
Batterie type
4.7V
Batterie war ning
Power on war n.
unlim
Touch Sense
Region
Euro
Voice volume
Beep volume
… some basic information should be entered. This
serves various purposes:
In this menu the name of the owner can be entered
and defaults can be entered for new model memories
in the lines "Stick mode", "DSC Output" and Pitch
min". These are then adopted on the activation of a new
model memory in its basic settings, but can be changed
there at any time.
In the "Contrast" line, as an alternative to the line with
the same name in the "Hidden mode" menu, page 28,
you can adjust the display contrast by changing the
standard default "0" in a range of ±20.
The setting in the "Display light" line determines how
long the display lighting remains illuminated after the
238 Detail program description - Control adjust
transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation.
With the selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on beep"
you can determine whether the "Recognition melody",
which sounds when switching on the transmitter, is
switched on or off.
In the "Battery type" line you indicate to the transmitter
whether its power supply comes from a four-cell NiMH
battery or a single-cell LiPo- battery and in the "Battery
warning " line you can determine the corresponding
switching threshold for the battery warning on an
individual basis. Make sure that you do not enter a
value which is too low, so that you do not have sufﬁcient
time to safely land your model in the event of a battery
warning.
In the "Power-on warning" line, you can determine, as
necessary, how long the transmitter should wait after the
last actuation of an operating element until the activation
of an optical and acoustic power-on warning, whereas
the settings in the lines "Touch sensitivity", "Voice
volume" and "Signal volume" are provided for personal
comfort.
On the other hand, the setting in the "Region" is
anything but a matter of taste and is determined by
statutory regulations: Therefore, when in France,
only commission the transmitter with the "France"
setting.
You can leave this menu after completion of your
"General settings" with the central ESC key of the left
touch pad to return to the multifunction list.
For the programming of a new model, now use the
arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the
menu ...
"Select model"
(page 63)
…, and with the select a free model memory location
with the arrow keys of the right or left touch pad:
01
02
03
04
05
06
R12
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
Immediately after pressing the central SET key of the
right touch pad for the conﬁrmation of this selection, the
type of model to be programmed is requested:
Select model type
Since we want to work with a winged model in this
section, the symbol for a winged model is conﬁrmed by
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad. The
display switches back to the base screen.
Notice:
• Of course, you can also use the predeﬁned default
"winged model" supplied with the receiver as model
memory 01 for the programming of your ﬁrst model.
• Once the "Select model type" option has been
opened, the process can no longer be canceled!
Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection
must be made! In any case, you can undo this by
subsequently deleting the respective model memory.
• If the battery voltage is too low, you cannot switch
models for safety reasons. A corresponding message
appears in the display:
not possible now
voltage too low
Once this ﬁrst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the
receiver built into the model to this model memory can
be made in the menu …
""Basic model settings" (page 68 … 73)
. For this purpose, switch to the line "RF bind":
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
GRAUBELE
Mod.name
Stick mode
RF BIND
n/a
n/a
RF transmit
n/v OFF
BD1 BD2
Notice:
After conﬁrmation of the model selection in the base
screen, if you conﬁrm the message appearing in the
screen for a few seconds …
BIND N/A
OK
… by pressing the SET key of the right touch pad, you
automatically come to this line.
In this line you delete the connection process between
model memory and receiver, as described in detail on
page 69. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.
Afterwards, using the arrow keys c of the left or right
four-way pad, move up to the ﬁrst line and begin with the
actual model programming in the "Mod. Name" line:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
Stick mode
RF BIND
bind
n/a
n/a
Rcv Ch Map R12
BD1 BD2
Now enter the "Model name" here by brieﬂy pressing
the central SET key of the right touch pad to switch to
the character map:
!"#$%&’() +,–./012
?@ABCDE
3456789:;
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk
Mod Name GRAUB
If applicable, the defaults adopted from the "General
settings" menu for "Stick mode" and "DSC output"
are also checked and changed as necessary.
In the menu …
"Model type"
"Motor at C1"
• "none"
Trimming works independently of the joystick position
and the "Brake settings" submenu of the "Wing
mixers" menu, beginning on page 146, is available
without limitation.
The "Throttle too high" warning message, see
page 36 and/or 61, and the "Motor stop" option are
deactivated.
• "(Idle) front or rear"
C1 trimming is affected in the front or rear and the
"Motor stop" option is activated.
If the throttle joystick is too far in the full throttle
direction when switching on the transmitter, this is
indicated to you with the warning message "Throttle
too high".
In parallel to this, the "Brake settings" submenu of
the "Wing mixers" menu, beginning on page146,
is only available if "none" is entered in the "Motor"
column for the currently active ﬂight phase in the
"Phase settings" menu, page 128.
In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the
servos in the model is selected and communicated to
the transmitter:
M O D E L T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
… the principle arrangement of the servos in the model
is selected and communicated to the transmitter. The
following selections are available:
M O D E L T Y P E
None
Motor at C1
Normal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
+100% In 1
Brake Off
SEL
Tail type:
"Normal", "V-ta(il)", "Delta/ﬂ" or
"2ELSv3+8"
Detail program description - Control adjust 239
"Aile/ﬂaps":
1 or 2 AIL servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL
servos
Since we want to actuate the brake system of the "Brake
settings" submenu under the "Wing mixers" menu with
the C1 joystick, we will leave the setting to the outer
right in the "Brake off" set to "Input 1". With the "Offset
value" to the left of this, you should only place the mixer
neutral point at the point where the brake system is
retracted or inactive. If, in the process, the offset is not
place completely at the end of the control path, the rest
of the path is "idle travel", which means the mixer is not
inﬂuenced in this range of the joystick movement.
By now, the servos should be plugged into the receiver
in the standard Graupner sequence:
Receiver power supply
Right flap or free or aux. function
Flap or left flap
Right aileron or aux. function
Rudder
Elevator or 1st elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Airbrake or throttle servo
or speed controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
Free or left aileron 2 or aux. function
Comments:
• If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either "high/
low" or "left/right", please observe the information in
the table on page 57 in the right column. The same
process applies for the ailerons and ﬂaps.
• The settings described in the following are based on
a model with "normal" tail unit and "none (motor)".
The settings are adopted for models with a V-tail with
practically no changes at all. However, the transfer of
this information is not so simple for delta/ﬂying-wing
240 Detail program description - Control adjust
models. Therefore, a special programming example
for this model type is provided on page 272.
In the menu …
""Servo setting"
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
(page 90)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
… the servos can now be adapted to the requirements
of the model for "Rotational direction", "Neutral
position", "Servo travel" and "Travel limit".
In this sense, all settings which serve for the
compensation of the servos and minor adaptation to the
model are "necessary".
Notice:
• The maximum possible throw of a Graupner servo
is 150% per side, based on both mechanical and
electrical reasons. For example, if the the sum of the
values of the columns "Center" and "Servo travel"
exceed this limit, the respective servo can no longer
follow the control commands starting from this point.
Therefore, please bear in mind that the mixer and
settings in the "Dual Rate / EXPO" menu also have
an inﬂuence on the servo travel.
• The settings options provided in this menu for
asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for achieving
differentiations for ailerons and/or ﬂaps. There are
options better suited for this purpose in the "Wing
mixers" menu.
In the last column, "Lim. +", the basic settings can and
should be taken back signiﬁcantly from 150% in each
case.
The values entered in this position act as a quasi
"limiter", whereby the setting is actually for which point
of travel the respective servo may not exceed, so that it
does not start up mechanically and thus unnecessarily
draw current. In this case the End of the available
mechanical play on the servo, rudder and/or steering is
crucial for the value to be set.
An example of this would be the selection of a model
with cruciform tail, with which the rudder moves in a
wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In order to prevent
the rudder on the elevator starting up and possibly
blocking it, the travel is normally mechanically adjusted
(at the linkage) so that the rudder does not start with the
full throw of the joystick. As long as the rudder is only
controlled with the corresponding joystick, there will not
be any further problems with this. Currently, however, in
addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer inﬂuences
the rudder, such as an "AI ¼ RU" mixer (aileron to
rudder), and the two signals can combine to have an
excessive effect.
A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely at this
point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical starting
of the rudder. The limit of travel should, however, not be
too small, so that the rudder throw is permanently and
excessively limited.
Of course, the travel on both sides could, of course,
also be reduced to the that a start-up would not even
occur with an addition of the maximum values. With this
method, however, the prevention of an actually occurring
event would result in a permanent reduction of the
normal rudder throw.
The
menu …
"Joystick setting" is not only interesting for pilots of
models with motors.
(page92)
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
with only two servos in the wings, the Multi-ﬂap menu
beginning on page 157 is not shown.
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
0%
Aile.diff.
AI
0% –––
RU
EL
0%
0% –––
AI
nor mal
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
In addition to the generally interesting adjustment
of the increments in the column St" (number of trim
increments for each "Trim lever click") of the digital
trimming – separately adjustable for each of the four
trim levers – in the case of the (later) programming of
ﬂight phases in the second column of this menu you can
select whether the trimming of transverse, altitude and
side should work "globally" in equal measure over all
ﬂight phases or separately in each (ﬂight) "phase".
The "Time" column, on the other hand, is not of interest
for this initial programming.
With the previous settings, you can basically ﬂy winged
and motor models – the latter if you have set the idle
joystick direction correctly in the "Motor at C1" of
the "Model type" . However, the "ﬁne-tuning" is still
missing. The ﬁne-tuning certainly adds to the enjoyment
of ﬂying over the course of time. Therefore, if you can
already ﬂy your model safely, you should delve into the
menu…
"Wing mixer" (page 146 … 163)
… where various options are available depending on the
speciﬁcations made in the "Model type" menu, page 82.
Since in this section we are dealing with a model
Therefore, we will begin with the submenu ...
BRAKE SETTINGS
off
nor mal
nor mal
If this display appears, you model is equipped with
a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section,
and therefore you have selected "front/rear" instead
of "none" in the line "Motor to C1" of the "Model
type" menu, page 82. Therefore, change this setting
temporarily or change the "yes" entry in the "Motor"
column of the " Phase setting " menu, page 128 to "no"
for the currently active ﬂight phase –Phase 1 in this
case.
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
nor mal
– Star t
– Strecke
–
–
Name
¾
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
motor
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow
0%
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
normal
WK2
AILE WK
After this statement about mutual dependencies, back
to the topic:
If the ailerons should be elevated for braking, an
appropriate value is then entered in the "Crow" line
after activation of the value ﬁeld of the "AILE" column.
In addition, a value should always be entered in the
line below it, "D.red." (differentiation reduction), which
corresponds to the value you entered or would like to
enter on the ﬁrst page of the "Wing mixers" menu in
the line "Aile.diff." (see ﬁgure above)! With this entry,
on actuation of the brake joystick, the set aileron
differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order to
increase the downward the throw of the raised ailerons
and thus signiﬁcantly improve its effect in the braking
phase.
A setting of the "Elevat curve" mixer is then only
necessary if the ﬂight speed of the model changes too
dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In any
case, you should try out the setting at a sufﬁcient and
readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus less
on the ﬂight position than on maintaining the "normal"
ﬂight speed of the model. Otherwise there is the risk that
the model plunges when engaging the brake system,
because it became too slow in the meantime:
…
Detail program description - Control adjust 241
EL
Brake
Cur ve on
Input
–19%
Output
–6%
Point 1
–7%
Normal
After exiting the "Brake settings", the "Aileron
differentiation" can be set:
This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The
downward deﬂected aileron normally generates a higher
level of resistance during the ﬂight than when deﬂected
upward the same distance, whereby the model is pulled
to the "wrong" side. In order to prevent this, with the
input of a differentiation of the travel of the respective
servo deﬂected downward is reduced accordingly. A
value between 20 and 40 %, in this case, seldom arises,
however, the "correct" setting must be sought.
The option "AI ¼ RU" (Aileron ¼ rudder) also serves
a similar purpose, as well as for the comfortable control
of a model. A value around 50 % is a practical value
to start with. However, this function should be made
switchable with the assignment of a switch if you ever
have aerobatic ﬂight ambitions. (The author, for example,
switches off this mixer "automatically" when switching
to the "Speed" ﬂight phase, in which he assigns both
options to the same switch accordingly.)
The last option of the "Wing mixers" menu, "EL ¼ AI"
mixer, is not currently of interest.
If the model-speciﬁc settings were made thus far,
the initial start can be considered. If course, at ﬁrst
you should perform a "dry run", meaning you should
carefully check all the settings once again on the
ground. Incorrect programming can damage more than
242 Detail program description - Control adjust
just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice of an
experienced model pilot.
If you should ﬁnd during the testing that one or multiple
settings must be made for the adjustment of the rudder
effects to your control habits, the control throws are too
long or short on the whole, you should adjust this in the …
""Dual Rate / Expo"
menu (page 108)
… to your own requirements and habits.
With "Dual Rate" the relationship of the joystick travel to
control travel is adjusted, see page 108:
––– 100%
Ail
Ele ––– 100%
Rud ––– 100%
DUAL
SEL
On the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK and
only the reactions around the center position are to
strong for more sensitive controls, then the "exponential"
functions comes (additionally) into play:
"Channel 1 curve"
(page 116)
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
With this option, one or multiple points of the control
curve of the throttle/brake joystick can be inﬂuenced in
such a way that a pleasant or even purposeful behavior
is guaranteed.
An example of this would be the "dead" travel of
spoilers. The ﬂaps ﬁrst pass through this after a certain
"idle travel" of the brake joystick from the wing. With a
corresponding "bending" of the curve, the "dead' travel
is covered more quickly. The spoilers come out from
the wing earlier and then the remaining travel can be
controlled with greater sensitivity. (This also applies for
the control of a motor in the same manner, which can be
controlled through C1 as an alternative.)
–––
Ail
0%
0%
Ele –––
0%
Rud –––
EXPO
SEL
If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take place
between two dual-rate/expo settings during the ﬂight.
This is similar for the option …
After this, you must deﬁne the behavior of the receiver in
the event of a failure in the …
"Fail safe"
menu (page 196)
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
1 2 3 4 5 6
DELAY : 0.25s
STO
… because "doing nothing" is the worst thing which can
be done for a winged model.
In the transmitter's home position, "Hold" is speciﬁed
and "Hold" means that the receiver continuously sends
the last correctly recognized control impulse to the
servos in the model. In the best case scenario the
model ﬂies straight ahead for an indeﬁnite amount of
time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without
causing signiﬁcant damage! However, if something like
this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the
model ma y become uncontrollable and "tear" across the
ﬂight ﬁeld completely out of control, putting the pilot and/
or spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be
beneﬁcial to program the the function "Motor off" at the
very least, in order to prevent such risks.
With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe
setting "motor off" can also be used, for example, for
outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller
by immediately switching off the transmitter after the
landing.
The author usually prefers a "braking ﬁnish" within
eyeshot to ﬂoating off "somewhere else".
Detail program description - Control adjust 243
Integration of an electric drive into the model programming
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL
GL
GL
GL
–––
–––
–––
–––
typ
An electric drive can be controlled in different ways:
The simplest method to integrate one such drive into
the model programming is with the use of a throttle/
brake joystick (C1). However, since this is already
speciﬁed for the brake system in the course of the model
programming described above, either the switchable
solution described beginning on page 247 or even the
use of an alternative control is possible.
As such, one of the two three-stage switches CTRL 9
or 10 is better suited than the proportional rotary control
CTRL 6 ... 8. (Unlike rotary controls, switches can be
operated with one ﬁnger without having to release
the joystick). An alternative would also be one of the
two-stage switches. Basically, the switch should be
positioned conveniently within reach.
Before we turn to the individual examples, it is important
must be noted that all inputs in the Control adjust menu
can be selectively programmed as ﬂight-phase speciﬁc
("PH" in the "Type" column) or model memory speciﬁc
("GL" in the "Type" column)!
However, since the drive should usually be available
depending on the current ﬂight phase, we recommend
leaving the standard default "GL" ("global") in the "Type"
column which your are using.
244 Detail program description - Control adjust
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
A common option in the following examples 1 ... 5, the
automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in the power
ﬂight, should also be mentioned at the beginning of this
section:
If it becomes apparent after the initial power ﬂights
that the model must be continuously corrected with the
elevator while the motor is switched on, this situation
can be corrected by setting a free mixer and adjusting it
accordingly. For this purpose, switch to the menu ...
""Free mixers"
… and program one of the linear mixers M1 … 8 or, if
applicable, also one of the curve mixers K9 … 12 from
"channel controlling the motor" according to "Ele", e. g.
of "8 ¼ Ele":
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
??
??
??
??
typ fr
EL
??
??
??
??
to
On its second screen page, the required – usually
low – correction value is entered:
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+4%
+4%
Offset
0%
SYM
ASY
EL
Notice:
The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in detail in
the section "Channel 1 curve" starting on page 116.
Example 1
Use of a proportional rotary control
CTRL 6 … 8
If one of these controls is used, the connection is very
simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has to
be connected to a free servo connection 5 ... 12 of the
receiver.
Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and
number of aileron and ﬂap servos, the output 2 + 5 or 6
+ 7 are already linked.
Therefore connect your speed controller to the next free
input and assign the selected input – for example, "Inp.
8" – one of the proportional rotary controls CTRL 6 ... 8.
For example, CTRL 7. This is carried out in the menu ...
""Control adjust"
(page 96)
With the arrow keys cd of the left or right touch pad,
select the desired line. Then, by pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, you active the "Switch
and control assignment". Now turn the knob of the
proportional rotary control. After a short time, the entry,
e.g. "Control 7", appears in the inverse ﬁeld.
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct7
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Since the drive should usually be available depending
on the current ﬂight phase, if applicable, you should
leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type"
column – as already mentioned earlier in this section.
If applicable, for the necessary adjustment of the
appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed
control), use one of the arrow keys to switch to the right
from the "Offset" column to the "- Travel +" column.
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
??
??
??
??
typ fr
EL
??
??
??
??
to
If you now switch to the eServo display" by
simultaneously pressing the keys of the left touch pad
and then actuate the rotary control, you will see the
columns of Channel 8 "wander from one side to the
other and back.
However, if you rotate the proportional rotary control
too fast – in practice – the resulting abrupt motor startup can brieﬂy strain the entire drive string. You should
deﬁnitely counteract this effect ahead of time with an
appropriate value in the "Time" column for such cases.
Therefore, using one of the arrow keys, switch one
column to the right, to the "Time" column and then move
the selected control close to "Full throttle" so that the
marking frame is only placed around one value ﬁeld.
Now enter a value of at least 1 s, ...
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
nor mal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
""Servo adjustment" (page 90)
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
– time +
… with which a movement of the proportional control
in the "ON" on direction which is too fast is processes
move gently, and you can check immediately this by
switching to the "Servo display".
Notice:
• No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the
drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This
does not additionally stress the drive, because it
merely "runs down".
• If you have deﬁned ﬂight phases in the "Phase
setting" and "Phase assignment" menus, the
settings described above must be made in the same
manner for each active ﬂight phase. Otherwise, you
may wonder why the drive motor begins running at
half power after a phase change, but does not react
to movements or the rotary knobs …
The adjustment of the appropriate control travel and
directions for the motor control (speed controL) is
normally carried out in the "Control adjust" menu in the
"- Travel +" column. Alternatively, you can also carry out
these settings in the menu ...
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev centr
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
Example 2
Use of a three-stage switch CTRL 9 or 10
This variant realizes a three-stage speed setting, such
as Motor OFF, "half" and full power.
A corresponding motor control (speed control) is
required on the receiver side.
The required settings are basically the same as those
described under Example 1. Therefore, the same
comments and recommendations also apply.
Apart from the inﬁnitely variable motor control under
Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this
example, the selection of the two control types only has
an effect on the type of clock control, see page 252.
Notice:
• By shifting the neutral position and then adjusting the
travel so that the offset value on the side to which the
neutral point was shifted is subtracted from the travel
and added to the other, the "Half throttle position"
can be inﬂuenced in the "Control adjust" menu.
Therefore, with an offset value of -20 %, for example:
+80 % on the minus side of the travel setting and
+120 % on the plus side and vice versa.
• If you have deﬁned ﬂight phases in the "Phase
Detail program description - Control adjust 245
setting" and "Phase assignment" menus, the
settings described above must be made in the same
manner for each active ﬂight phase. Otherwise, you
may wonder why the drive motor begins running at
half power after a phase change, but does not react
to movements or the switch …
Example 3
Use of a two-stage switch SW 2, 3 or 8
This variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function.
On the receiver side, either a simple electronic
switch or – if a gentle motor start-up, for example, is
desired – an appropriate motor control (speed control)
is required.
With the exception of the assignment of a different
control, the settings required for this are essentially the
same as those described under Example 1. Therefore,
the same comments and recommendations also apply.
Apart from the inﬁnitely variable motor control under
Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this
example, the selection of the two control types only has
an effect on the type of clock control, see page 252.
Only the type of representation of the selected switch in
the dispay of the menu …
""Control adjust"
description there.
Input
Input
Input
Input
(page 96) differs from the
GL
GL
GL
GL
typ
–––
–––
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
246 Detail program description - Control adjust
Like with example 1, you also switch to the line of a free
input, activate the "Control and switch assignment" in
the third column and then move the selected control,
in this case Switch "2" from the desired Motor OFF
position to Motor ON.
In this case – as already mentioned earlier in this
section – you leave the standard default "GL" in the
"Type" column.
The setting of the appropriate control travel for the
motor control (speed control) is made in the "- Travel +"
column. If the motor should up gently with the use of a
motor control (speed control), an appropriate delay time
can be set – as described in Example 1 – in the "- Time
+" column:
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
nor mal
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
– time +
All other settings - as already mentioned earlier in
the example - take place analogously to Example 1.
Therefore, the same comments and recommendations
apply.
Notice:
• No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the
drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This
does not additionally stress the drive, because it
merely "runs down".
• If you have deﬁned ﬂight phases in the "Phase
setting" and "Phase assignment" menus, the
settings described above must be made in the same
manner for each active ﬂight phase. Otherwise, you
may wonder why the drive motor begins running at
half power after a phase change, but does not react
to movements or the switch …
Control E-motor and crow alternatingly with C1 joystick
Example 4
Before we discuss the programming of this fourth
example or turn the to the expansion of the previously
described basic programming, a few words should be
said about the position of the throttle/brake joystick
with "Motor OFF" or "Brake OFF". Normally the C1
control joystick is moved forward for the throttle control
and backward for the extension of the brake. If, in this
"classic" assignment, you switch to the brake system
with Motor "OFF" (= joystick "back"), for example,
"full brake" would be applied after the switch time you
speciﬁed in the "Phase setting" menu, or vice versa,
if you switch to drive with the "brake retracted" the
motor would be switched to "full power" within this time
range...
A "glider pilot" can make the best of this
"Emergency" – normally with "brake retracted = front" –
by switching to motor "ON" only if necessary and then
the power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully you
will not forget to push the C1 joystick "forward" again
when switching back). A typical "motor pilot", on the
other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only
switching to the brake if necessary, etc... You can also
combine the "Zero point" of both systems to avoid
confusion, whereby a "glider pilot" would tend prefer the
"front" and a "motor pilot", on the other hand", would
likely prefer the "rear".
Whatever the case may be, the mc-32 HoTT
transmitter enables both variants. In the following text,
however, the combination of the two "OFF" positions
to "front" is assumed. However, if you have a different
preference, it is not a problem: The only difference
from the described version lies in the logical selection
of "Throttle min rear/front" and, if applicable, of a
corresponding brake offset in the menu ...
""Model type"
(beginning on page 82)
Here you ﬁrst specify in the "motor" line whether the
throttle minimum position (= Motor "OFF" position)
should be at the "front" or "rear" - as already discussed:
In the following programming example, "Motor OFF" and
"Brake OFF" are combined at "front":
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
front
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
2AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
Notice:
With the selection of "Throttle min front/rear" the
trimming will then only have an effect in the "idle"
direction of the motor and is not the same as with the
"none" entry, having the same effect at every position of
the C1 joystick. Since the C1 trimming is not normally
used with electric drives, however, this has no further
relevance.
You adjust the "according to your model, in this case
"normal".
In the "Aileron/ﬂaps" line you enter the correct number
of aileron and ﬂap servos – in this example "2 AIL".
In the last line you leave the standard entries for the
selection of "Brake retracted = rear". On the other hand,
if you prefer "Brake retracted = front", select the "Brake
offset" line and deﬁne the offset point – as described on
page 83 – as "front":
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
vor ne
Normal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
2AIL
–90% In 1
Brake Off
STO SEL
In the process, if the offset point is not placed
completely at the end of the control travel, the remainder
of the travel is "idle" up to this limit. This idle path
ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", even
with minor deviations from the limit of the brake ﬂap
control. At the same time, the effective control path is
automatically spread to 100 %.
For this reason, in the next step it must be ensured that
the inﬂuence of the C1 joystick on the motor can be
inﬂuenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu ...
"Phase setting"
(page 128)
... and assign a meaningful name, such as "normal",
from the list for "Phase 1" after activation of the selection
ﬁeld in the "Name" column. The asterisk in the second
column indicates which phase is currently active.
As long as no phase switches are assigned, this is
always Phase 1. Give "Phase 2" the name "Landing" in
accordance with the example.
In the "Ph.Tim" column you can assign a so-called ﬂight
phase timer for the measurement of the motor running
time and/or the gliding times as necessary for each
phase. You could, for example, assign one of the "Timers
1 ... 3" to the "Normal" ﬂight phase in order to measure
the total motor run time through the C1 joystick:
Detail program description - Control adjust 247
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Nor mal
– Landing
– Strecke
–
–
Name
¾
Clk 1
ph.Tim.
Then the timer is controlled through a corresponding
control switch to be deﬁned on the C1 joystick. As soon
as you switch to the "Landing" ﬂight phase, this ﬂight
phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden in the
base screen. More about this can be found on page 142.
Now move the marking frame over the "Ph.Tim" column
to the "Motor" column to the right. Here you can decide
with "yes/no" in which phase the motor is controlled by
the throttle/brake joystick and the brake system to be
adjusted in the "Brake settings" submenu of the "Wing
mixers" menu should be shut off (= "yes") and vice
versa (= "no"):
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Nor mal
– Landing
– Strecke
–
–
Name
¾
yes
no
motor
Now move the marking frame once more to the right and
enter an appropriate switching time after activation of
the value ﬁeld of the "Sw.Time" column; for example:
248 Detail program description - Control adjust
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Nor mal
1.1s
1.1s
– Landing
0.1s
– Strecke
0.1s
–
0.1s
–
Name Sw.time
¾
Then you must assigned these two ﬂight phases to a
switch with which you can switch between the two ﬂight
phases during the ﬂight. In this case, a single switch is
sufﬁcient. It should be easy to reach, however, so that
you can still switch between "motor" and "brake" during
a landing approach, for example, without having to
release a joystick.
The assignment of the selected switch takes place in the
menu ...
"Phase assignment"
(page 134)
Select the switch symbol under "C" with one of the arrow
keys. After brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the
right touch pad, actuate the desired switch, such as
"SW 2".
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
1 Nor mal
Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and OFF ( )
are initially assigned in the bottom right of the display to
the phase "1 normal". With one of the arrow keys, select
this value ﬁeld and then, by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, activate the selection list
of the phases which you set up in the "Phase setting"
menu. For example, you name the phase for the front
switch position "normal" and "landing" for the rear
position (or vice versa):
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
2 Landing
These phase names then appear in all ﬂight-phase
dependent menus and, of course, also in the base
screen of the transmitter.
Now switch to the "Landing" ﬂight phase and in the
"Crow" line of the submenu ...
""Brake settings"
(page 160)
BRAKE SETTINGS
0%
Crow
0%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
Landing
WK2
AILE WK
… of the "Wing mixers" menu, set the desired throw of
the ailerons with actuation of the C1 joystick ("brake")
upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the "FL" column
in order to specify the desired through of the ﬂaps with
C1 actuation downward (hidden in the ﬁgure above).
This ﬂap position is referred to as "Crow position" or
"Butterﬂy; see also page 160.
In the line "D.red" (differentiation reduction), enter a
value which corresponds to the value you entered or
enter on the ﬁrst page of the "Wing mixers" menu in the
line "Aile.diff."
With the "Elevat curve" mixer the normally occurring
"Upward tilting" of the model on the raising of the
ailerons can be automatically suppressed. The suitable
correction values for the respective value must be
tested out through ﬂight. Set this mixer so that the ﬂight
speed of the model does not change too much with the
brake system extended in comparison with the "normal"
ﬂight speed. Otherwise, there is the risk, among other
things, that the model plunges when the brake system
is retracted, e. g. for the extension of a landing approach
which is too short.
If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is
controlled with the C1 joystick in the "normal" ﬂight
phase, whereas this should be switched off in the
ﬂight phase "landing" (Servo 1 in "Servo display"
independently of "Throttle min front/rear" to -100% or
adequately for a servo travel setting deviating by 100
%, if necessary). In this ﬂight phase the C1 joystick
then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if
applicable, the lowering of the ﬂaps with the neutral
point in the C1 control position selected per offset.
Detail program description - Control adjust 249
C1 joystick switchable between E-motor and spoiler
Example 5
If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding Example
4, the model has additional spoilers or only spoilers,
they can be incorporated into the control of the model by
means of the following programming.
For this purpose, program the menus "Model type",
"Phase setting" and "Phase assignment" in the same
manner as described under Example 4. The settings
described there in the "Brake settings" submenu of
the "Wing mixers" menu, on the other hand, are only
relevant if you would like to use an additional crow
system in parallel to your spoilers.
With the settings described under Example 4, the
control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a
crow system will function as usual. Only the control
of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must
additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch to
the menu …
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… and switch to the ﬂight phase "normal". Now, using
the arrow keys, switch to the "Offset" column of the
line "Inp. 8". After activation of the value ﬁeld by brieﬂy
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
change the offset value in the now inverse value ﬁeld of
Input 8 until your spoilers are "retracted" again:
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
–––
–––
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
–100%
offset
Conﬁrm this setting by brieﬂy pressing the central ESC
250 Detail program description - Control adjust
key of the left key pad or the central SET key of the right
touch pad and then switch to the center column to the
left. Now switch to the ﬂight phase "Landing" and then
brieﬂy press the central SET key of the right touch pad.
The display shows the window ...
Input 5
–––
0%
Eing.
––– switch0%
Move 6desired
Eing.
0%
–––
or control
adj.
–––
Input 8
–100%
Landing
offset
Now move the C1 joystick As soon as this is recognized,
"Ct1" appears in the display instead of "---":
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Landing
–––
–––
–––
Ct1
0%
0%
0%
–100%
offset
Leave the offset value in this ﬂight phase
to "0 %". If necessary, however, you may have to change
the leading symbol of the travel setting to reverse the
control direction by switching the travel setting from
+100 % to -100 % in the "Travel" column.
Now we are practically ﬁnished. Check the programming
in the "Servo display" menu, which you can reach from
the base screen of the transmitter as well as nearly
every other menu position by simultaneously pressing
the keys ef of the left touch pad. You will discover that
"Servo 1" (motor control) is controlled in the "normal"
phase and in the "landing" phase only the spoiler is
controlled at "Servo 8" and, if applicable the aileron and
ﬂap servos – just as we intended.
Detail program description - Control adjust 251
Timer conﬁrmation with control or switch
Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pages
If you have decided to continue with the model
programming on described on the previous pages for
Example 4, page 247 or 5, page 250 or you intend to
use the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) for the power
regulation completely independently of this example
programming, you can use a control switch for the
automatic starting and stopping of the timer. For this
purpose, ﬁrst switch to the menu …
"Control switches"
(page 123)
… and select the line of a control switch which has not
been assigned yet with the arrow keys. After activation
of the control assignment by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, the following window
appears:
CONTROL SWITCH
Gb1 desired
–75%
–––
G1 Move
Gb1 +75%
G2 control
–––
adj.
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
Now simply move the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick)
from the motor "OFF" position in the motor "ON"
direction.
The switch to the column above STO using the
appropriate arrow key and move the C1 joystick near the
motor "OFF" position and deﬁne the switch point at the
selected position by brieﬂy pressing the central SET key
of the right touch pad. The switch status is shown to the
right of the control number:
252 Detail program description - Control adjust
CONTROL SWITCH
–––
C1 Ct1 –85%
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
In order to assign the control switch you just crated to
the desired timer, switch to the menu ...
""Timers (gen.)" (page 138 … 141)
…, and, with the arrow keys, select the line "Top", to
which the "Tim(ers)" are assigned by standard. In this
line, move the marking frame over the "Timer" column to
the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using
the appropriate arrow key of the left or right touch pad.
Now press the central SET key of the right touch pad
twice: Pressing once activates the switch assignment
and tapping again opens the list of the "expanded
switches":
0:34h –––
Model time
Akkuzeit
Control/fix sw 1:23h
Oben:
Stopp
C1 C2
C3 C4 0sFX–––
Mitte:
Flug
FXi C1i C2i C3i0sC4i–––
SEL
Alar m
Now select the previously programmed control switch,
Ct1 in the example, and assign it to the timer by brieﬂy
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad:
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr :Flight
SEL
0:34h –––
1:23h
0s C1
0s –––
Alarm
The timer in the base screen now starts with movement
of the C1 joystick toward full throttle and stops if you pull
the C1 joystick back over the switching point.
Example 1 of the preceding pages
If you have decided to continue with the model
programming described on the previous pages in
Example 1 on page 244, ﬁrst switch to the menu ...
"Control switches"
(page 123)
… and select the line of a control switch which has not
been assigned yet with the arrow keys. After activation
of the control assignment by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, the following window
appears:
CONTROL SWITCH
Gb1 desired
–75%
–––
G1 Move
Gb1 +75%
G2 control
–––
adj.
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
Now simply move the respective proportional rotary
control, e.g. CTRL 7, from the motor "OFF" position in
the motor "ON" direction.
The switch to the column above STO using the
appropriate arrow key and move the selected control
near the motor "OFF" position and deﬁne the switch
point at the selected position by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad. The switch status
is shown to the right of the control number:
CONTROL SWITCH
–––
C1 Ct6 –85%
C2
0%
–––
–––
C3
0%
C4
0%
–––
STO SEL
Notice:
Now place the switching point; but do not put it at the
limit position of the control, because safe switching is
not assured when doing so.
Ct1 used in the example here should be "closed" in the
"full throttle" direction and "open" below the switching
point.
Now switch to the menu ...
""Timers (gen.)" (page138 … 141)
…, and, with the arrow keys, select the line "Top", to
which the "Tim(ers)" are assigned by standard. In this
line, move the marking frame over the "Timer" column to
the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using
the appropriate arrow key of the left or right touch pad.
Now press the central SET key of the right touch pad
twice: Pressing once activates the switch assignment
and tapping again opens the list of the "expanded
switches":
0:34h –––
Model time
Akkuzeit
Control/fix sw 1:23h
Oben:
Stopp
C1 C2
C3 C4 0sFX–––
Mitte:
Flug C2i C3i0sC4i–––
FXi C1i
SEL
SEL
0:34h –––
1:23h
0s C1
0s –––
12:34h –––
1:23h
5:00
0:00
Timer
Alar m
Now select the previously programmed control switch
"Ct1" and then press the central SET key of the right
touch pad.
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr :Flight
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr :Flight
Model time
Batt. time
Top : Stop
Centr :Flight
SEL
0:34h –––
1:23h
30s C3
0s –––
Alarm
Alar m
The timer in the base screen now starts with movement
of the proportional rotary control toward full throttle and
stops if you pull it back over the switching point.
Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pages
If you control your motor with a switch, on the other
hand, you do not need the described control switch
described above. It is completely sufﬁcient if you assign
the same switch to the timer, so that it also begins to run
when you switch on the motor.
Tip:
If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the
battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count
down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time
in the "Timer" column, e.g. "5 min", and brieﬂy before
the expiration of the permissible time, e. g. "30 s" before,
have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal:
Detail program description - Control adjust 253
Servos running in parallel
A second servo running in parallel is often required,
such as when brake ﬂaps or spoilers installed in the
wings or the left and right elevator or a double ﬁn should
be actuated by a servo or a large rudder ﬂap should
be simultaneously controlled by two servos due to high
throw forces.
In principle, this task could also be solved by connecting
the servos together on the model side using V-cable.
However, this has the disadvantage that the servos
combined in this manner can no longer be adjusted
individually and separately from the transmitter – the
advantage of a ﬁnely tuned adjustment of the respective
servos to one another by a computer remote steering
system would no longer be provided. This is similar
for the so-called "Channel Mapping" described in the
scope of the "Telemetry" menu: In comparison to the
adjustment possibilities of the transmitter, there are also
limitations with this process.
The ﬁrst example, therefore, describes the coupling of
two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes the
operation of two or more throttle servos and the third
describes the coupling of two elevator servos.
The "two rudder servos" example on the next page
describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas
Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this type,
because with the use of a "cross-mixer", because this
is quicker and easier to program. Contrary to this, the
second variant, also permits asymmetric and/or nonlinear curves with the use of the "Free mixer" menu.
Two brake or spoiler servos
For the operation of your brake ﬂaps and/or spoilers in
each wing half you have installed a servo and kept the
default linear control characteristics unchanged in the
"Channel 1 curve" menu.
254 Detail program description - Control adjust
Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1,
provided for this purpose by standard, and the second
to an arbitrary free receiver connection 5 ... 12, such as
Output "8". Now switch to the menu …
" Control adjust"
(page 96)
… and, using the arrow keys, assign the "Control 1" in
the line of Input 8:
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct1
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Leave the standard settings for the remaining values.
If necessary, carry out the required servo travel
adjustments in the "Servo adjustment" menu. There
you can also adjust the travel of servo 1 and 8 to one
another, if necessary.
Important notice:
If you have deﬁned ﬂight phases in the "Phase setting"
and "Phase assignment" menus, the settings must be
made in the same manner for each active ﬂight phase.
Otherwise, you may wonder why only one spoiler can
be moved as intended and the other remains in its half
extended position …
Multiple-motor aircraft
As described above, a model can also be operated with
two or more motors.
The ﬁrst throttle servo and/or the ﬁrst motor control is
connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and each
additional throttle servo and/or each additional motor
control is connected to a free (receiver) Output 5 ...
12. The inputs of the corresponding assigned control
channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for
example :
Input 8
Input 9
Input10
Input11
GL
GL
GL
GL
typ
Ct1
Ct1
Ct1
Ct1
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Important notice:
Since the motor control unit should be available
regardless of a currently active ﬂight phase, make sure
to leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column.
Two elevator servos
Two elevator servos should be switched in parallel.
According to the receiver assignment plan, see page 57,
the receiver output 8 is intended for the connection of
the second elevator servo.
This would be taken into account on the software side in
the preconﬁguration of a corresponding mixer. You can
ﬁnd this in the ...
"Model type" menu
(page 82)
In this menu switch to the "Tail" line using the arrow
keys, activate the value ﬁeld by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right key pad and select the entry
"2ELSv3+8":
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
2ELSv3+8
Tail type
Aile/flaps
1AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
Then carry out the ﬁne-tuning of the travel of the two
servos "as accustomed" in the "Servo adjustment"
menu.
Two rudders
We want to switch two rudders "in parallel". The second
rudder is located at the free receiver output 8.
Variant 1
In the menu …
"Cross-mixer"
(page 194)
… select one of the cross-mixers and enter "8" and "RU"
in its left and center value ﬁelds, as shown in the ﬁgure:
DUAL MIXER
Mixer1
8 RU
Mixer2 ??
??
Mixer3 ??
??
??
Mixer4 ??
Typ
zu
0%
0%
0%
0%
Diff.
The same deﬂection "cc", which would take place
through "Input 8" may not have an effect here. Therefore,
you should make absolutely sure in the …
"Control adjust"
menu (page 96)
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
nor mal
GL
GL
GL
GL
–––
–––
–––
–––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
… that "Input 8" is set to "free" so that the control
function is separate from the control channel.
Alternatively, You can set Input 8 in the "Only mix
channel" to "no control", regardless of the ﬂight phase,
by setting Channel 8 to "only mix":
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
only
nor mal
7 8 9 10 11 12
Then switch to the graphic screen and set a symmetric
mixture of +100%.
RU
L.MIX 1
Mix input
+100% +100%
Offset
0%
SYM
ASY
"Input 8" should also be programmed to "free" here in
the "Control adjust" - in all ﬂight phases, if applicable.
However, control function "8" can be separated from
control channel "8" more easily in the ﬂight-phase
independent menu "Only mix channel", page 193:
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
only
normal
7 8 9 10 11 12
Variant 2
With this variant a mixer, "Tr Rudd 8" should be set in
the menu …
" Free mixers "
(page 181)
¼. In the "Type" column, select the setting "Tr" so that
the rudder trimming affects both rudder servos:
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Tr
ty
RU
??
??
??
??
fr
??
??
??
??
to
Detail program description - Control adjust 255
Use of ﬂight phases
Up to seven different ﬂight phases (ﬂight statuses)
can be programmed with settings independent of one
another within one of the model memories.
Each of these ﬂight phases can be called with a switch
or a switch combination. This makes it possible to switch
between different settings for the various ﬂight statuses,
such as "Normal", "Thermal", "Speed", "Distance", etc.,
simply and conveniently. However, with the ﬂight phase
programming you can also make slight modiﬁcations,
e. g. of mixers, to try out by switching during the ﬂight in
order to ﬁnd the optimal settings for each model more
easily.
Before you begin with the actual programming of
ﬂight phases, you should consider whether the digital
trimming of transverse, altitude and side should have
be "global" – in other words, the same for all ﬂight
phases – or per "Phase" – in other words, each ﬂight
phase is individually variable.
If you decide in favor of a phase-speciﬁc trimming of the
elevator, for example, switch the menu …
"Joystick setting" (page 92)
… and change the standard "global" default accordingly.
The same applies for the number
of trimming steps in the column "St":
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
PH
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
256 Detail program description - Control adjust
Example 1 ...
… continuing with the previous programming of an
electric glider with 2 aileron servos.
AI
EL
RU
AI
The control of the E-drive takes place independently of
the C1 joystick with one of the two proportional rotary
controls CTRL 7 or 8 or with one of the two three-stage
switches CTRL 9 or 10. The motor control is connected
to receiver Output 9 according to the description
beginning on page 244 and Examples 1 and two which
serve as the basis of this continuation. In the "Model
type" menu, therefore, "None" was selected in the
"Motor to C1" line, which has the consequence, among
other things , that the "Motor" column in the "Phase
setting" menu is hidden and the "Brake settings"
submenu of the "Wing mixers" menu is available
without limitation.
1. Step
"Phase setting"
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
(page 128 )
Nor mal
+ Ther mal
+ Speed
+ Launch
–
Name
¾
ph.Tim.
Initially, one or multiple ﬂight phases are provided with
a speciﬁc identiﬁcation ("Name") for the respective
ﬂight status. This identiﬁcation has no inﬂuence on the
programming of the transmitter; it only serves for an
improved differentiation of the individual ﬂight phases
and is shown later in all ﬂight-phase dependent menus
and in the base screen.
The selection of the respective line, a name and the
setting of the switching time take place, as "usual", by
pressing the corresponding key(s) of the two four-way
touch pads.
Notice:
With the exception of Phase 1, which should always
be assigned with the name "Normal" since it is
always active, if the ﬂight phases are deactivated, it is
completely irrelevant which name is assigned to which
phase!
In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum of
four ﬂight phases are usually completely sufﬁcient:
• "Start" with the climb settings
• "Thermal" for "Flying high",
• "Normal" for normal conditions and
• "Speed" for high gear.
In the "Sw.time" column (switching time) ...
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Normal
+ Thermal
+ Speed
+ Launch
–
Name
¾
4.0s
3.0s
2.0s
1.0s
0.1s
Sw.time
… you can deﬁne the time for the "cross-fading" when
switching from any other ﬂight phase to this one in order
to enable a "smooth" transition of the various servo
positions. Thus, an increased stress of the model under
certain circumstances with a "hard" change of rudder
or ﬂap positions, for example, is prevented The "Status"
column shows you the currently active ﬂight phase with
an asterisk "¾".
2. Step
In order to actually be able to switch between the
individual ﬂight phases, the assignment of one or
multiple switches is necessary. One of the two threestage switches (CTRL 9 or CTRL 10) is best suited for
switching of up to three ﬂight phases.
Each of the two switch limit positions is assigned to
one of the ﬂight phase switches A ... F, starting from
the center position. The assignment of the switch takes
place in the menu ...
"Phase assignment" (page 134)
First select "C" with the marking frame. The brieﬂy press
the central SET key of the right touch pad and move
the switch from the center position to a limit position, for
example, downward:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
1 Nor mal
Move the switch back to the center position and then
select "D", and after activation of the switch assignment,
move the switch to the other limit position, for example,
to the top:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
prior
combi
C D E F
A B
6 7
2 Thermal
1 Nor mal
Now the three-stage switch is programmed.
Now and additional switch could be assigned for the
"start" ﬂight phase, if applicable. In this case under "A",
so that the "start" phase is always switched to from
every other ﬂight phase in parallel to the switching-on of
the motor:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
1 Nor mal
Then the respective switch positions must be assigned
corresponding ﬂight phases (names). Although you have
already assigned names for some ﬂight phases, the
phase name "1 normal" still appears in the right of the
display; see the ﬁgures above.
First move the three-stage switch to the limit position,
for example to the top, and switch with the marking
frame in the display down to the right to the value ﬁeld
for the ﬂight phase name. Brieﬂy press the central SET
key of the right touch pad for the activation of the input
ﬁeld and select the desired ﬂight phase for this switch
position, in this example "2 Thermal", with the arrow
keys:
Proceed in the same manner for the other switch limit
position, which is assigned the name "3 Speed".
If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch
combination the name "4 Start".
Brieﬂy pressing the central ESC of the left touch pad or
the central SET key of the right touch pad completes the
time name assignment.
The ﬂight-phase dependent model settings made before
the assignment of phase switches are now in the ﬂight
phase "1 Normal". This is the phase which is called
with the open "Start" switch in the center position of the
three-stage switch.
3. Step
In order to not have to carry out all previously made
settings for the model in the "new" ﬂight phase from
the ground up, we recommend ﬁrst copying the already
tested programming of the ﬂight phase "Normal" to the
other ﬂight phases. This is carried out in the menu …
"Copy / Erase"
Erase model
Copy model–>model
Expor t to SD
Impor t from SD
Copy flight phase
(page 64)
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
Detail program description - Control adjust 257
Here, select the menu item "Copy ﬂight phase" with the
arrow keys and then brieﬂy press the central SET key of
the right touch pad.
In the appearing window, "Copy from phase", "1 Normal"
is selected ...
Copy from phase:
2 Ther mal
1 Normal
4 Launch
3 Speed
=>
=>
… and then brieﬂy press the central SET key of the
right touch pad, whereby the display switches to
"Copy to phase". Now the target is selected (initially "2
Thermal") and conﬁrmed by pressing the central SET
key of the right touch pad again. After conﬁrmation of
the subsequent safety query, all settings are copied
according to the selection.
Proceed in the same manner with the other two phases
("1 Normal" to "3 Speed" and "1 Normal" to "4 Start").
4. Step
Now three or four phases are programmed, the settings
are also copied and there is even a "soft" transfer, but ...
there are still no ﬂight-phase speciﬁc settings.
Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the ﬂap positions to
the different requirements of the individual ﬂight phases,
in the menu ...
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… the standard default "GL" is ﬁrst changed to "PH" for
"Phase" in the type column:
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Nor mal
PH
GL
GL
GL
–––
–––
–––
–––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Then switch to the "Offset" column and make the
settings deviating from the "Normal" ﬂight phase for the
ailerons. However, switch to the desired ﬂight phase
beforehand, whose name is shown at the bottom in
the display, appropriate to the switch position. Both
positive and negative throw changes are possible. These
settings are to be made separately for each ﬂight phase:
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Nor mal
PH
GL
GL
GL
typ
–––
–––
–––
–––
–7%
0%
0%
0%
offset
5. Step
Any necessary phase-speciﬁc trimming of the elevator is
made with the help of the digital trimming of the elevator
joystick. This requires that you have at least set the
elevator trimming to "Phase" in the "Joystick setting"
menu - as already shown in this programming example.
Alternatively, you can also carry out these settings in the
"Phase trim" menu ...
Normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
¿ Thermal
Speed
Launch
Thermal
ELEV
QR
6. Step
In the menu …
"Wing mixers"
(beginning on page 146)
… the ﬂight phase name of the newly activated ﬂight
phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If
the switch position is now changed, the name of the
ﬂight phase selected with the switch appears, but
with the previously copied settings of the ﬂight phase
"Normal". Here you set you values phase-speciﬁcally
for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture
of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture
of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the agility
over the transverse axis when "Turning".)
WING MIXERS
Brake sttings
33%
Aile.diff.
AI
55% –––
RU
EL
FL
0%
0% –––
Thermal
Notice:
The list of displayed options depends on the number of
servos entered in the "Ailerons/ﬂaps" line in the "Model
type" menu.
Now switch to the submenu …
258 Detail program description - Control adjust
0%
0%
0%
0%
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow +30%
0%
0%
D.red +33%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
Nor mal
WK2
AILE WK
… and enter how wide the ailerons should be raised in
the "Crow" line.
With "D.red" (differentiation reduction), you should enter
the value previously set in the aileron differentiation line
in order to suppress it again while breaking.
In the "Elevat curve" submenu, enter a correction value
for the elevator, see page 162.
Notice:
The "Brake settings" submenu of the "Wing mixers"
menu is switched "off" if "yes" is entered for the current
ﬂight phase in the "Model type" menu, page 82 "Motor
at C1 front/rear" and in the "Motor" column of the
"Phase setting" menu, page 128. Change the ﬂight
phase, if applicable.
Detail program description - Control adjust 259
Use of ﬂight phases
Example 2 …
Glider with four ﬂap wings, two large ﬂaps and tow
coupling
AI
FL
EL
RU
FL
AI
The following example is based on the assumption that
you have already mechanically preadjusted the model
and you have already ensured the correct deﬂection of
all rudders or checked this again in the scope of this
programming and made adjustments, if applicable,
through servo switching at the receiver and/or through
the "Servo setting" menu.
This programming example is based on an assignment
of the receiver connections in accordance with the
following diagram:
Free or aux. function
Aero-tow release or free or aux. function
2nd airbrake servo or 2nd elevator or aux. funct
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Right flap
Flap or left flap
Right aileron
Rudder or right rudder / elevator
Elevator or left rudder / elevator
Aileron or left aileron
1st airbrake servo
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
260 Detail program description - Control adjust
Begin with the new programming of the model in a free
model memory location.
In the menu "Base setup model", connect your receiver
to the transmitter, enter a model name and select or
check, if applicable, the stick mode. Later, before the
ﬂight operation, also activate the range test in this menu.
In the menu …
"Model type"
(page 82)
… leave "Motor to C1" at "None" and the tail type at
"Normal". In the "Aile/ﬂap" line, on the other hand, set "2
AIL 2 FL".
In the "Brake" line, program or leave "In1", because the
brake and spoiler ﬂap servos connected to 1 + 8 should
be activated later with the corresponding C1 joystick as
the control:
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
2AIL2FL
Brake Off
+90% In 1
STO SEL
The setting in the "Brake offset" value ﬁeld deﬁnes
the neutral position of all mixers of the "Brake settings
submenu of the "Wing mixers" menu. Place this neutral
point at approx. +90%, insofar as the brake ﬂaps should
be retracted in the front position of the C1 joystick. The
remaining path between +90 % and the full throw of
the joysticks, +100 %, is then assigned as idle travel.
This assures that the rudders or ﬂaps addressed by
the mixers of "Brake settings" remain in their "Normal"
position, even with slight deviations from the limit
position of the C1 control. At the same time, the effective
control path is automatically spread to 100 %.
In the menu …
"Control adjust"
(page 96 )
… assign a switch to Input 9, for example, for the
operation of the tow coupling. In order for this switch
to work independently of the ﬂight phase, leave the
standard default "GL" in the "Type" column of this input.
With "– Travel +" you can adjust the control travel for the
switching of the switch:
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
By simultaneously pressing the keys ef of the left
touch pad, the setting in the "Servo display" can be
checked.
Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8
simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link through
the menu "Control adjust".
For this reason, also switch to the line before and assign
"Control 1" to Input 8.
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct1
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
However, please note in this connection, that a nonlinear control curve programmed in the "Channel 1
curve" menu has as little effect on this input as brake
offset set to less than 100 %, which you can check very
easily in the "Servo display" menu. You can reach this
from nearly every menu position by simultaneously
pressing the keys ef of the left touch pad:
The travel and, if applicable, the directions of rotation
of the spoiler servos 1 and the second spoiler servo
connected to Output 8 can be adjusted in the menu …
Servo adjustment
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
(page 90)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
+100%
+100%
+50%
0%
AILE
ﬂ.pos.
FLAP
In the …
cAId
Ail-tr
Diff.
line you deﬁne the percentage with which
the two ﬂap pairs "AI and "FL" should follow
the aileron control. Also check whether the
ailerons are deﬂected in the right direction
during the adjustment of the parameter
values.
The adjustment range from -150 % …
+150 % enables the correct throw direction
adjustment regardless of the direction of
rotation of the servos.
Here you determine the percentage with
which the aileron trimming should affect the
AI and FL.
Here you specify the differentiation of the
aileron control on the AI and FL ﬂaps. For
the signiﬁcance of the differentiation, see
page 148.
The adjustment range from -100 % …
+150 % enables the correct differentiation
direction adjustment regardless of the
direction of rotation of the aileron and ﬂap
servos.
In this line you set the ﬂight-phase speciﬁc
ﬂap positions for all ﬂaps available on the
respective model. In the process, you can
determine the positions the ﬂaps assume for
each ﬂight phase.
Notice:
The values appearing in this line are based
on the same data set as in the comparable
position in the "Phase trim" menu, which
is why changes always take effect in both
directions.
Notice:
The parameter values shown here are model-dependent
and must be determined by test ﬂights.
...
In the Multi-ﬂap menu of the ...
"Wing mixers" menu
(beginning on page 146)
… you now enter the ﬁrst mixer values for the four wing
ﬂaps; for example:
+66%
+66%
+33%
0%
cFLc
Since all inputs in the "Control adjust"
menu are set to "free" by default, neither the
ailerons nor the ﬂaps can be actuated in this
standard setting. In this respect, you also
leave the default entry here.
However, if you would like to be able to
vary the ﬂap positions with a switch or
proportional rotary control by the position
speciﬁed in the "ﬂ.pos." line, assign the
desired control to Input 6 in the "Control
adjust" menu and set the desired reaction to
the movement of the control selected for this
purpose over the percentage in this lane.
EL¼FL This mixer incorporates the ailerons (AI) and
ﬂaps (FL) with elevator actuation.
The mixing direction is to be selected so that
all ﬂaps are deﬂected downward with the
elevator pulled up and deﬂected upward with
the elevator pushed down (= hydroplane).
The mixing proportion is normally in the low
double-digit range.
Now switch to the "Brake settings" within the "Wing
Detail program description - Control adjust 261
mixers" menu ...
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow +44% +66%
0%
D.red +77% +55%
0%
Elevat cur ve
QR
WK
WK2
Notice:
The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if "yes"
is entered for the currently active ﬂight phase in the
"Model type" menu, page 82, "Motor to C1 front/rear"
and in the "Motor" column of the "Phase setting" menu,
page 128. If applicable, switch to the ﬂight phase
Crow
D.red
Further above we designated the C1 joystick
for the brake ﬂap control.
In this line you determine the share with
which the AI and FL should be included
on actuation of C1 in the manner that both
ailerons are deﬂected "slightly" upward and
both ﬂaps are deﬂected as far downward as
possible.
By simultaneously pressing the keys ef of
the left touch pad, you switch to the "Servo
display" menu so that you can observe
the servo movement and, in particular, that
there is no inﬂuence on the ﬂaps above the
adjusted brake offset, e.g. +90 %, up to the
throw limit of the controller C1; see above
("Idle travel" of the C1 joystick).
In the line "Differentiation reduction" you
should enter the value previously set in
the ailerons differentiation line in order to
262 Detail program description - Control adjust
suppress it again during braking.
Elevat curve In this line you set another correction
value for the elevator, see page 162.
Insofar as necessary, check and adjust all ﬂap throws,
the servo center, the servo travel and the travel limitation
through the menu "Servo adjustment".
It may also be time to start the initial ﬂight testing,
insofar as all global settings - that is to say, all ﬂightphase independent settings - are completed.
Two additional ﬂight phases should be set up in
the following, each of which requires a somewhat
different ﬂap position.
Therefore, switch to the menu …
"Phase setting"
(page 128)
… and activate the assignment of phase names in the
"Name" column by brieﬂy pressing the central SET key
of the right touch pad:
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
nor mal
– Star t
– Strecke
–
–
Name
¾
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Normal
– Thermal
– Speed
–
–
Name
¾
ph.Tim.
Now move the marking frame over the column "ph.Tim."
to the right to the column "Sw.time" and set a "switching
time" from any other phase to the respective phase in
order to avoid an abrupt phase change ; in other words
erratic changes of ﬂap positions. Now try out different
switching times. In this example we have speciﬁed 1 s in
each case:
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
Pha5
Normal
+ Thermal
+ Speed
–
–
Name
¾
1.0s
1.0s
1.0s
0.1s
0.1s
Sw.time
Now assign the corresponding switches for these ﬂight
phases in the menu ...
ph.Tim.
Now give Phase 1 - the "Normal phase" - that is also
the phase which includes the previous settings, the
name "Normal", which you select with the arrow keys.
Phase 2 receives the name "Thermal" and Phase 3
receives the name "Speed". Now conclude your entry by
brieﬂy pressing the ESC key of the left touch pad or the
SET key of the right touch pad:
"Phase assignment"
(page 134)
… with which you can switch between the three phases.
Since no special priority is necessary, assign the switch
"C", for example, in the display and select one of the two
limit positions of one of the two three-stage switches,
CTRL 9 or 10 as the switch. Then move the selected
switch back to the center position, activate the switch
assignment under "D" and move the selected threestage switch from its center position to the other limit
position in order to:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
1 Nor mal
After the switch assignment is complete, use the arrow
keys to switch to the bottom right and activate the
assignment of phase names by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad.
Now close "SW 7" by moving the selected three-stage
switch upward.
Assign the name "<2 Thermal>" to this switch position
and leave the name "<1 Normal>" in the "OFF position"
of this switch.
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
2 Ther mal
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
3 Speed
The phase names selected in the programming are now
shown, depending on the switch status, in all ﬂightphase dependent menus, see the table on page 268.
Since we have already made some settings in ﬂightphase dependent menus, such as in the "Wing mixers"
menu, we will now copy these settings to the "Thermal"
ﬂight phase. For this purpose, open the menu ...
"Copy / Erase"
(page 64)
… and switch to the "Copy ﬂight phase" line:
Erase model
Copy model–>model
Expor t to SD
Impor t from SD
Copy flight phase
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
2. By brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad, switch the window to the entry of the
target memory "Copy to phase".
3. Select phase "2 Thermal" as the target:
Copy to phase:
2 Thermal
1 Normal
3 Speed
=>
=>
4. Conﬁrm the selection by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad.
5. A security query follows, who should be conﬁrmed
with "Yes":
Phase to:
2 Thermal
1 Normal
to be copied?
NO
YES
6. Then repeat the process with ﬂight phase "3 Speed".
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
6 7
1 Nor mal
Then move the three-stage switch down toward "SW
6" and assign the name "<3 Speed>" to this switch
position:
The maximum seven ﬂight phases are listed in "Copy
from phase":
1. Select the ﬂight phase to be copied, "1 Normal".
Copy from phase:
2 Ther mal
1 Nor mal
3 Speed
=>
=>
Now we will program the required settings in the
ﬂight phase "Thermal" as an example.
In order to also be able to vary the camper changing ﬂap
position in the "Thermal" phase, in the menu …
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… you assign an operating element to Input 6 – as
described on page 96 .
If you assign one of the two proportional rotary controls
to this input, independent of the ﬂight phase if applicable
(CTRL 7 in the example, the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber
Detail program description - Control adjust 263
changing ﬂaps (6 + 7) are moved continuously with a
mixer proportion to be set in the "Wing mixers menu.
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
–––
Ct7
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
If you assign the still free second three-stage switch to
Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL positions
of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing ﬂaps (FL) as
well as three elevator positions (Elev) in the "Thermal"
ﬂight phase, see the following page. (These three switch
positions correspond to the center position and the two
limit positions of the previously mentioned proportional
rotary control.)
Notice:
The FL and AIL ﬂap positions in the two limit switch
positions or in the switch center depend on the value set
in the column "- Travel +" as well as the offset value and
the mixer proportion set in the "Multi-ﬂap menu" of the
"Wing mixers" menu, see further below.
We will leave the (control) "- Travel +" at the standard
settings of symmetric + 100 % and the offset value at
0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for
smooth switching between the three switch positions - in
the example "1.0 s 1.0 s" - in the column "- Time +" is
recommended:
264 Detail program description - Control adjust
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Nor mal
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
In the "Multi-ﬂap menu" of the …
+60%
+60%
+33%
–14%
+15% +15%
0%
0%
FLAP
"Wing mixers" menu
(beginning on page 146)
… change only the values for "FL-pos" and "cFLc" in
the "Thermal" ﬂight phase:
FL-pos
Here you position the AIL and FL in the
"Thermal" ﬂight phase in case the assigned
control (proportional rotary control or threestage switch) is in its neutral or center
position in the ﬂight.
cFLc In this line you specify the percentage at
which the aileron and camber changing
ﬂap servos should be moved as camber
changing ﬂaps with the selected control (see
above) or with the three-stage switch:
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Thermal
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Thermal
+100%
+100%
+55%
–9%
+10% +10%
0%
0%
AILE
Simultaneously pressing the key combination cd or
ef of the right touch pad (CLEAR) resets changed
values back to the standard settings.
Notice:
Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of
mixture should be set so that the camber changing ﬂaps
are slightly "lower" than the ailerons.
By simultaneously pressing the keys ef of the left
touch pad, you can check the reaction of the AIL and FL
servos with actuation of the selected camber changing
ﬂap servo in the "Servo display". (Push the C1 joystick
to the front position so that the "AIL" and "FL" ﬂap
positions can be better followed on actuation of the
corresponding control.)
Attention:
With actuation of the ailerons, the bars of the "Servo
display" move in the same way and the opposite
way with the actuation of the camber changing
ﬂaps:
• In the control center position, only
the – example – "FL-pos." setting of +10 % for the AIL
and +15 % for the FL work.
• In the one limit position of the control, AIL and FL are
back in their neutral position, because the degree
of mixture speciﬁed for the example compensates
directly for the FL-pos. setting, whereas …
• … in the other limit position, AIL and FL reach the
maximum downward offset prescribed by the mixer
percentage.
In order to set a – corrective – admix for the elevator, exit
the "Multi-ﬂap menu" and return to the base screen of
the "Wing mixers" menu:
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
FL
EL +5% +5% –––
Thermal
In the two limit positions of the three-stage switch the
elevator is moved symmetrically in this example with
+5 % (true to side). If, on the other hand, you use a
proportional rotary control, the elevator is deﬂected
according to the degree for the control position.
Then make the settings for the "Speed" ﬂight phase in
the same manner.
Notice:
• The digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side
work independently of these settings – depending on
the setting selected in the "Joystick setting" menu,
page 92 – "Global" or for each "Phase".
• All setting values are model-dependent. Carry out
the settings on your ﬁnished model and/or during the
ﬂight.
Detail program description - Control adjust 265
Control of temporal processes
using time delay and curve mixers
A useful, but less known capability of the mc-32
HoTT software is the ability to activate nearly any servo
movements with a maximum duration of 9.9 seconds
using a switch.
The programming for this should be shown on the
basis of some examples in the following. Additional
applications can certainly be found once you become
familiar with these capabilities.
The programming is begin in the menu …
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… and in order to be able to approach any point of
the control curve during the programming, ﬁrst assign
one of the proportional rotary controls to the desired
control channel – in this example CTRL 8 to the Input
9. However, leave the standard default "GL" in the
"Type" column so that this setting is effective for all
ﬂight phases analogously to the free mixers to be
programmed in the following.
The input of a time delay in the "- Time +" column should
also be dispensed with initially:
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct8
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Then in the menu …
"Only mix channel"
(page 193)
… of the selected control channel, "9" in this case, is set
to "Only MIX":
266 Detail program description - Control adjust
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
only
nor mal
7 8 9 10 11 12
It is mandatory that this is set to "Only MIX", because
the control curves of the curve mixers described in the
following example only function on the output of the
same channel as desired if there is no direct connection
between the control and output! Only then can the linear
control signal be manipulated almost arbitrarily around a
curve mixer and to the appropriate output.
Therefore, in the next step, switch to the menu …
"Free mixers"
(page 181)
… and program a curve mixer for the same channel,
e.g. from "9" to "9":
M8
C9
C10
C11
C12
ty
??
??
??
??
fr
??
??
??
??
to
On this second screen the desired path of the control
curve is then set, whereby the following examples
should only be "food for thought" for the design of your
own control curves.
For example, the control curve could be for …
… delayed lighting of a headlight after the beginning
of the extension of the landing gear:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
+50%
Input
–100%
Output
Point 1 –100%
normal
… the control of a landing gear ﬂap which closes
again after the landing gear is extended:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve off
–100%
Input
–100%
Output
Point L –100%
normal
… a smooth motor start-up or the extension of a
self-launch …
C.MIX 9
Cur ve on
–100%
Input
–100%
Output
Point L –100%
normal
… triggered by the same switch, but with a delayed
startup of the drive motor connected to Output 10:
C.MIX10
Cur ve on
–100%
Input
–100%
Output
Point L –100%
nor mal
10
Input 9
Input10
Input11
Input12
9.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
9.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
– time +
The function you programmed functions as desired
according to these suggestions – which you can verify
at any time after switching to the "Servo display" by
simultaneously pressing the keys ef of the left touch
pad – then to, complete the programming, an arbitrary
switch, such as "SW 8" is assigned in the menu …
Notice:
In the course of the switch assignment, always bear in
mind that you can also trigger multiple functions with
one switch! For example , with the same switch a landing
gear connected to Output 6 can be started and, as
shown here as an example, the time-controlled landing
gear ﬂaps connected to Output 9 and/or the headlight,
etc.
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… to the control channel used instead of the selected
proportional rotary control – in in these examples
"CTRL 8" to channel "9" – and the desired symmetric
or asymmetric time span is set in the "- Time +" column
for the amount of time in which the function should
ultimately take place:
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Detail program description - Control adjust 267
Eight-ﬂap wing
By standard the mc-32 HoTT supports the
comfortable control of up to eight servos for the aileron/
camber changing ﬂap functions.
In the following we will consider a model without motor
drive and without spoilers in the wings. The example
is also based on the assumption that you have already
mechanically preadjusted the model and you have
already ensured the correct deﬂection of all rudders or
checked this again in the scope of this programming
and made adjustments, if applicable, through servo
switching at the receiver and/or through the "Servo
adjustment" menu.
The servos should be connected to a suitable receiver
as follows:
11
10
12
Rudder
Receiver output
Aileron
2+5
Aileron 2
11 + 12
Camber changing ﬂaps
(exterior)
6+7
Camber changing ﬂaps 2
(interior)
9 + 10
Elevator
Rudder
268 Detail program description - Control adjust
For the control of all ﬂaps, up to two additional
proportional rotary controls are required in addition to
the two joysticks or, alternatively up to two two-stage
switches (SW).
In order to be able to control all servos, ﬁrst switch to the
menu …
"Model type"
(page 82)
… and select "4AIL 4FL" in the "Ailerons/ﬂaps" line.
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Nor mal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
4AIL4FL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
In order to also be able to actuate the camber changing
ﬂap servos 6 + 7 (FL) and 9 + 10 (FL2), if applicable, in
the Multi-ﬂap menu of the menu …
"Wing mixers"
(beginning on page 146)
… set the corresponding values for the aileron control of
the two camber changing ﬂap pairs in the line "cAILd"
and in the line "Ail-tr." for the adoption of the aileron
trimming:
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Nor mal
+77%
+77%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Normal
+55%
+55%
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP2
You can check the previous settings in the "Servo
display" menu, which you can reach from nearly any
menu position by simultaneously pressing the keys ef
of the left touch pad:
• The servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 now move for
the aileron control exactly like the servos 2 + 5. The
aileron trimming lever also affects all these servos.
• The C1 joystick only actuates the servo connected to
receiver output 1.
Attention:
With aileron actuation the bars of the "Servo
display" move in the same manner and in the
opposite manner with camber changing ﬂap
actuation.
The necessary ﬁne-tuning of the servos is carried out in
the …
"Servo adjustment" menu
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
(page 90),
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
… if necessary.
In doing so, the basic programming of the eight-ﬂap
wing is completed.
Camber changing ﬂap positioning and ﬂight changes
First program two or more ﬂight phases in the "Phase
setting" and "Phase assignment" menus. On this
occasion, also change the standard default "Global"
to "Phase" in the "Joystick setting", page 92 for the
effect of the digital trimming, if applicable, on your
individual requirements.
An example of ﬂight phase programming can be found
on page 256.
One camber changing ﬂap setting per ﬂight phase
If one camber changing ﬂap position per ﬂight phase is
sufﬁcient for you, then in the Multi-ﬂap menu" of the …
"Wing mixers" menu
(beginning on page 146)
… in the line "FL-pos" adjust the camber changing ﬂap
position(s) of the servo pair "AIL" (2 + 5), "AIL2" (11 +
12), "FL" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) to your preferences
in each of the programmed ﬂight phases:
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Ther mal
+100%
+100%
+33%
–5%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
AILE
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Ther mal
+90%
+90%
+33%
–7%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
AILE2
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Ther mal
+77%
+77%
0%
–9%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Ther mal
+55%
+55%
0%
–12%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
to set variable camber changing ﬂap positions for
each ﬂight phase with a proportional rotary control,
… you can additionally vary the basic settings of all
eight ﬂaps with a single control speciﬁc to each ﬂight
phase.
For this purpose, in the menu ...
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… the inputs 5, 6 and 11 are assigned for each ﬂight
phase to the same respective control, for example the
proportional rotary control CTRL 7, and in parallel, the
travel is reduced to approximately 50 % or even less
so that the ﬂaps can be trimmed with the appropriate
ﬁne-tuning. With travel settings differing from one
another, you can also attune the throws of the individual
ﬂap pairs to one another speciﬁc to the ﬂight phase in
a menu. For this purpose, you only have to switch the
corresponding inputs from the standard default "GL"
(global) to "PH" (phase):
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Normal
Alternatively, if you would like
–––
–––
–––
–––
typ
FLAP2
Notice:
Whether positive or negative values must be set in the
"FL-pos." line depends on the installation of the servos,
among other things.
PH
PH
GL
GL
Input 9
Input10
Input11
Input12
Normal
GL
GL
PH
GL
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
–––
–––
–––
–––
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Detail program description - Control adjust 269
Input 5 +25%
+25%
Input 6 +25%
+25%
Input 7 +100%
+100%
Input 8 +100%
+100%
Thermal
– travel +
Input 9 +100%
+100%
Input10 +100%
+100%
Input11 +25%
+25%
Input12 +100%
+100%
Thermal
– travel +
Notice:
With the use of a switch, set the respective "Deviation"
of the offset point symmetrically or asymmetrically in the
"- Travel +" column.
Elevator compensator with actuation of the camber
changing ﬂaps
If it should become evident in the ﬂight that a correction
of the elevator is necessary after setting the ﬂaps, this
correction can be made in the ...
"Wing mixers" menu
(beginning on page 146)
WING MIXERS
Multi-flap menu
Brake settings
AI
0% –––
RU
FL
EL
0%
0% –––
Thermal
. For this purpose, select the line "FL ¼ Elev" and enter
an appropriate value independent of the ﬂight phase.
270 Detail program description - Control adjust
If you have assigned the same control to the inputs
5, 6 and 11 – as speciﬁed above – all eight ﬂaps move
simultaneously while the elevator follows the set degree
of mixture.
Camber changing ﬂap movement on elevator actuation
Camber changing ﬂap movement on elevator
actuation – normally only used in "High gear" to increase
the agility over the transverse axis – is also carried out in
the "Multi-ﬂap menu" of the...
"Wing mixers" menu
(beginning on page 146)
. Enter the desired ﬂight-phase dependent values in the
line "Elev->FL":
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Ther mal
+100%
+100%
+33%
–5%
+33% +33%
0%
0%
AILE
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Ther mal
+90%
+90%
+33%
–7%
+33% +33%
0%
0%
AILE2
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Thermal
+77%
+77%
0%
–9%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
AI
Ail-tr
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
Thermal
+55%
+55%
0%
–12%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP2
In addition to the two camber changing ﬂap pairs
(servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10), the two aileron pairs (servos
2 + 5 and 11 + 12) are now tracked with the degree
of mixture corresponding to the camber changing
ﬂaps - normally opposite the elevator.
Brake settings
Notice:
The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if "yes"
is entered for the currently active ﬂight phase in the
"Model type" menu, page 82, "Motor to C1 front/rear"
and in the "Motor" column of the "Phase setting" menu,
page 128 . Change the ﬂight phase, if applicable.
In the "Brake settings" submenu, which is also ﬂightphase speciﬁc, of the "Wing mixers" menu, you can
make the settings so that the aileron pairs 2 + 5 and
11 + 12 extend upward and the camber changing ﬂap
pairs "FL" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) extend downward,
whereas the elevator is trimmed in parallel to this, see
page 162.
In order for the brake system to react to the C1 joystick
as desired, however, the mixer neutral point (offset) of
the brake system must be adjusted accordingly. This
takes place in the menu …
"Model type"
(page 82)
After selection of the line "Brake Off." the C1 joystick is
moved to the position from which the mixer for the brake
system should be set – normally just before the limit
position – and after selection of the appropriate value
ﬁeld, the set point is deﬁned by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad.
If the C1 joystick is not moved over this point toward
the pilot, all mixers of the brake system are carried
along according to their respective degree of mixing.
Below this point the mixer remains inactive, whereas the
selection of "dead travel" is possible.
If the model has additional brake ﬂaps or spoilers and
your receiver has another free Output 1, you can also
control this through the C1 joystick by connecting the
spoiler servo to receiver Output 1.
However, if you control the left and right spoiler each
with its own servo, and not together, the receiver Output
8 is still available for the connection of the second
spoiler servo. In this case, program the connection to
the second spoiler servo as described in the section
"Servos running in parallel" on page 254.
position, you should automatically suppress any
programmed aileron differentiation.
For this purpose, use the "Differentiation reduction"
in the "Brake settings" of the "Wing mixers" menu,
which continuously reduces the degree of the aileron
differentiation to a variable extent when you move the
rudders to the crow position with the C1 joystick. For this
purpose, see page 162.
Reduction of the aileron and camber changing ﬂap
differentiation
For the improvement of the aileron effect in the crow
Detail program description - Control adjust 271
Delta and ﬂying wing models
Of course, the general comments regarding the
installation and the adjustment of the RC system to a
model at the beginning of the wing model programming
on page 236 also applies for delta and ﬂying wing
models! Similarly, the comments for test ﬂying and ﬁnetuning the settings to the programming of ﬂight phases
also apply.
Free or aux. function or right flap 2 / elevat
Free or aux. function or left flap 2 / elevato
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Delta/ﬂying wing of the type: "2AIL"
Free or right flap / elevator
Free or left flap / elevator
Free or aux. function
Free or rudder
Right elevon
Right elevon
Airbrake or throttle servo
or speed controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
left
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Delta/fl
Tail type
2AIL
Aile/flaps
+100% In 1
Brake Off
SEL
Free or aux. function
right
Delta and ﬂying wing models differ signiﬁcantly from a
"normal" ﬂight model due to their unique characteristic
shape and geometry. The differences in the servo
arrangement, on the other hand, are more subtle. For
example, with "classic" delta/ﬂying wing models, only
two rudders are normally provided. They are responsible
for both "transverse" and "height/depth", like the side
rudder/elevator function on a V-tail unit.
With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it
may be the case that one (or two) interior rudders
have only an elevator function and the exterior ailerons
only support the height/depth function, under certain
circumstances. Even with a four or six-ﬂap wing the
use of camber changing ﬂap functions and/or even a
crow system is now entirely possible. In all these cases,
however, the following assignment of the receiver
outputs should be used, see also page 57. Unneeded
outputs a simply left free:
272 Detail program description - Control adjust
According to the assignment of the receiver outputs, in
the menu ...
"Model type"
These settings specifying the model type affect the
available "Wing mixers" ﬁrst and foremost. Therefore,
the options are discussed separately for two-ﬂap and
multi-ﬂap models in the following:
(page 82)
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
None
Delta/fl
Tail type
2AIL
Aile/flaps
+100% In 1
Brake Off
SEL
… the necessary settings are made:
"Motor at C1" "none" or "Throttle min front/rear"
"Tail type"
"Delta/ﬂ"
"Aile/FL"
"2AIL" (appears automatically).
Insofar as necessary, expand the
default "2AIL" with 1, 2 or 4 camber
changing ﬂaps ("1FL", "2FL" or "4FL").
"Brake"
remains or is only of interest with a
delta or ﬂying wing aircraft of the type
"2 AIL 1/2/4 FL". In this case, see
under "Brake offset" on page 83.
In keeping the standard default "2AIL" in the "Aile./
FL" line, the elevator and aileron control, including the
trimming function, are only mixed automatically on the
software side. On the transmitter side, however, you can
inﬂuence the effect of the elevator and aileron joystick in
the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu, page 108.
Settings in the menu …
"Wing mixers"
(beginning on page 146)
… are, if need be, advantageous with the "AIL ¼ FL"
mixers and are "played' with a great deal of "feel" for the
ﬂying behavior with minor differentiation values.
WING MIXERS
Brake settings
+10%
Aile.diff
AI
+50% –––
RU
HR
WK
0%
0% –––
normal
Due to the speciﬁc idiosyncrasies of this model type,
additional settings lead to incompensable moments.
Delta/ﬂying wing of the type: "2 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL"
M O D E L
T Y PE
Motor at C1
None
Delta/fl
Tail type
Aile/flaps
2AIL4FL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
With delta/ﬂying wing constructions with more than
two ﬂaps, more moments can be compensated for. For
example , the "lifting" moment caused by the raising of
the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be compensated for
with camber changing ﬂaps lowered correspondingly
wide ( = hydroplane effect).
If you decide in favor of this model type and have
assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the
connection plan shown above, the aileron function of
the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly
immediately, but not the elevator function of the two
aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber
changing ﬂaps.
This is achieved with the speciﬁcation of "2AIL 1/2/4
FL", if the effect of the elevator control, in the "Multi-ﬂap
menu" of the ...
"Wing mixer" menu
(beginning on page 146)
… is set appropriately in the "Elev ¼ FL" line for
aileron, camber changing ﬂap and, if applicable, camber
changing ﬂap 2:
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
AILE
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
nor mal
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
nor mal
0%
0%
+100% +100%
0%
0%
FLAP2
Notice:
Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see
below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the
set mixer value with the mixer "Elev ¼ FL".
The following settings are model-speciﬁc and may
not be adopted without checking that they are
correct!
In the top line of this "Multi-ﬂap menu", analogously to
"normal" four or six ﬂap wings, the effect of the aileron
joystick on the aileron, camber changing ﬂap and, if
applicable on FL2 is set. In the line "Ail-tr." below this,
on the other hand, the inﬂuence of the aileron trimming
on ailerons and camber changing ﬂaps.
The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to the
model type and should only take place based on a feel
for the ﬂight behavior of the model.
In the line "cFLc", for the sake of safety, you should
set the standard setting +100 % in the "FL" and, if
applicable "FL2" column – as shown – to 0%:
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
normal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP2
In the "Control adjust" menu, all inputs are set to "free"
by default, but if there is ever confusion in regard to the
assignment of a control ... this has little effect at all.
The last line, "Elev¼ FL", has already been addressed
earlier in this section.
In principle, the author of this manual had programmed
a delta model years ago operated with the mc-20
and a crow system as landing assistance … entirely
without tilting moments through correspondingly attuned
wing mixers "Brake ¼ aileron" and "Brake ¼ camber
changing ﬂap", whereby "aileron" refers to the exterior
rudder pair and "camber changing ﬂap refers to the
interior rudder pair.
Detail program description - Control adjust 273
In order to now achieve this with the mc-32 Hott,
switch to the "Brake settings" of the …
"Wing mixers" menu
(beginning on page 146)
… and enter the values for the ailerons to be raised
and the "ﬂaps" to be lowered in the "Crow" line so that
the occurring moments compensate one another and
the altitude of the model remains stable. In the process,
however, you should leave the ﬂaps with enough "play"
for the elevator function!!! Therefore, do not utilize the
entire servo travel for the crow alone; for example:
BRAKE SETTINGS
Crow +55% –44%
0%
D.red
0%
0%
0%
Elevat cur ve
Normal
AILE FLAP FLAP2
You can ignore all other settings in this menu.
Notice:
The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if "yes"
is entered for the currently active ﬂight phase in the
"Model type" menu, page 82, "Motor to C1 front/rear"
and in the "Motor" column of the "Phase setting" menu,
page 128. Change the ﬂight phase, if applicable.
Similarly, a modern, tapered ﬂying wing air craft can
also be operated. With some of these models there
are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in
front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind. A
downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases the
ascending forces and has an elevator effect. An upward
throw has the opposite effect. On the exterior ailerons,
on the other hand, the effect is just the opposite: A
downward throw shows an elevator effect and vice
274 Detail program description - Control adjust
versa. With appropriate adjustment of the "leading"
mixer to the setting of curve mixers in order to achieve a
supporting effect from the external rudder pair with only
extreme joystick deﬂection in the height/depth direction,
"everything" is possible here. The author of this manual
uses a curve mixer for his model, which is deﬁned by a
total of four points:
C.MIX 9
Cur ve on
Input
Output
Point
nor mal
EL
0%
0%
0%
In this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2
are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 %
and the right edge point at -65 %. Then the curve was
rounded by pressing the central SET key of the right
touch pad.
In this case: Regardless of which type of servo
arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation
should be set with caution! On a tail-less model,
differentiations show a single-sided height/depth
elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning
at least the initial ﬂights with a setting of 0 %! Over
the course of the further ﬂight testing, under certain
circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment
with differentiations deviating from zero.
With larger models, rudders in the winglets - the "ears"
mounted on the wing ends - can be beneﬁcial. If these
are controlled with two separate servos, with the use of
one of the mixers in the menu ...
"Cross-mixer"
(page 194)
… the rudder signal can be "split" very easily and even
differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo is
connected to one of the still free receiver outputs. For a
model of the type "Delta/Nf", the receiver output "5" may
still be free, and we want to use it in the following:
DUAL MIXER
+66%
Mixer1
5 RU
Mixer2 ??
0%
??
Mixer3 ??
0%
??
??
Mixer4 ??
0%
Diff.
Typ
zu
In this case a differentiation is necessary, because
the respective exterior rudder ﬂies over a larger curve
radius than the interior rudder, which is comparable to
the wheel position of the front wheels of a car when
traveling on curves.
Notice:
The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed
above!
If these two rudders should also deﬂect outward on the
actuation of a brake system with the C1 joystick, this
can be achieved, for example, by setting an additional
mixer "C1 ¼ 5" with an appropriate travel setting. Set
the offset according to your habits to "front" (+100 %)
or "rear" (-100 %), because the winglet rudder should
deﬂect outward proportionally on extension.
Independently of this, you should, for safety's sake,
uncouple the "false" control function from the control
signal to which the second servo was connected – even
if all inputs are "free" by default in the "Control adjust"
menu – through the ﬂight-independent menu …
"Only mix channel"
(page 193)
... for safety's sake! Corresponding with the above
example, therefore, the control channel 5 should be set
to "only MIX":
MIX ONLY CHANNEL
only
normal
1 2 3 4 5 6
Detail program description - Control adjust 275
F3A model
F3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven
winged models. They are powered by a combustion or
electric motor. Models with electric motors can be used
in both the electric acrobatic class F5A and are also
competitive in the international model acrobatic class
F3A.
for the carburetor can – if necessary – be provided. You
normally use one of the two proportional rotary controls
on the transmitter, which actuates one of the unassigned
auxiliary channels.
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function
Free or aux. function
"Servo adjustment"
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
(page 90)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
Receiver power supply
The basic comments and notices for the mechanical
installation of a remote steering system, which was
already referred to in the ﬁrst programming example on
page 236, also applies, of course, for F3A models and
does not need to be mentioned here again.
Faultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely
neutral ﬂying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good
nature but precisely to control movements without the
individual ﬂight axes inﬂuencing one another.
F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator
and rudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated by a
separate servo. There is also the regulation of the drive
output of the motor (throttle function) and a retractable
landing gear in many cases. The assignment of the
channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not differ from the
previously described winged models.
The additional "Retractable landing gear" function is
to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to
9. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch
without center position. In addition, another mix offset
276 Detail program description - Control adjust
Free or aux. function (mixture)
Free or aux. function (retracts)
Right aileron
Rudder
Elevator or 1st elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Airbrake or throttle servo
or speed controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
With the assignment of auxiliary channels at the
transmitter, we recommend making sure that the
operating elements required for this are easily
within reach, because during ﬂight – especially in
competition – you have "very little time" to release the
joystick.
Programming
Since the basic programming of the transmitter was
already described in detail on pages 236 … 243, only
F3A-speciﬁc tips are added here.
In the menu …
… the settings for the servos are carried out. Experience
has shown that working with at least 100 % servo
throw is beneﬁcial, because the control precision
is signiﬁcantly better if greater servo travel is used.
This should already be taken into account during the
construction of the model in the design of the rudder
linkages. Check the servo's direction of rotation. The
servo center should be adjusted mechanically, insofar as
possible.
Any corrections can be made on the software side in the
third column during the initial test ﬂights.
Through the menu …
"Model type"
(page 82 )
… the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally
"rear", because full throttle is "front"). The trimming then
only works in the idle direction:
M O D E L
T Y P E
Motor at C1
back
Normal
Tail type
Aile/flaps
2AIL
Brake Off
+100% In 1
SEL
The remaining settings are made or left as shown in the
ﬁgure.
After test-ﬂying and trimming of the model, we
recommend reducing the trim travel for the elevator and
ailerons The model has signiﬁcantly less of a reaction
to a movement of the trim lever. "Overtrimming" can
be avoided, because with full trim travel, under certain
circumstances, the movement by just one trimming
step can have too strong of an effect: Therefore, the
model which previously pulled slightly to the left, hangs
somewhat to the right after the trimming. For this
purpose, switch to the menu ...
"Joystick setting"
(page 92)
… and reduce the number of trimming steps accordingly
in the "St" column:
Ch.1
Aile
Elev
Rudd
GL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
It may also be necessary to assign a corresponding
operating element to a speciﬁc input for the activation
of the retractable landing gear and the mixer movement
through the menu …
"Control adjust"
(page 96)
… such as one of the ON/OFF switches to the Input 6
for the landing gear and one of the proportional rotary
controls, e.g. CTRL 7, to the Input 7. However, since
it involves ﬂight-phase independent settings, leave the
standard default "GL" in the "Type" column:
Input
Input
Input
Input
GL –––
GL
GL Ct7
GL –––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
The control travel of the operating elements must be
adapted and can also be reversed with a negative travel
setting.
Notice:
A delay time for the extension and retraction can be
speciﬁed for the retractable landing gear, which does not
work, however, for the landing gear servo C 713 MG,
Order No. 3887.
F3A models ﬂy comparatively fast and thus react
"harshly" to the control movements of the servos.
However, since small control movements and
corrections are not optically perceptible, because this
results in inevitable point deductions in competition, we
recommend setting an exponential control characteristic
of the joystick. For this purpose, switch to the menu …
" Dual Rate / Expo "
(page 108)
Experience has shown positive results with values of
approx. + 30 % on the ailerons, elevator and rudders,
which you set in the right column with the arrow keys.
In order to be able to control the F3A model to run
smoothly and cleanly:
Ail
––– +33%
Ele ––– +33%
Rud ––– +33%
EXPO
normal
SEL
(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential
degree.)
Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly to
movements of the throttle joystick, through the menu …
(page 116)
"Channel 1 curve"
… a "bowed" or, in other words, non-linear throttle
curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots pumps,
in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require a steep
ascension of the curve in the lower speed range.
However, the corresponding values must be adapted.
The C1 control curve for the motor could appear as
follows:
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve on
Input
–50%
Output
0%
Point 1
0%
normal
Only three interpolation points, "L" at -100 %, "H" at
+100 % and "1" at -50 % give the control travel the
rounded curve above.
Detail program description - Control adjust 277
Basic procedure:
• Move the C1 joystick and, along with it, the vertical
line in the graphic display toward idle to -50 % control
travel and brieﬂy press the central SET key of the
right touch pad.
• In order to attain the curve shape shown, raise
this point with the arrow keys to approx. 0 % in the
inverse value ﬁeld of the "Point" line.
• Then round the characteristic curve by moving the
marking frame up to the "Curve" line, brieﬂy pressing
the central SET key of the right touch pad and then
changing the value from "Off" to "On" with the arrow
keys.
If additional interpolation points between the left ("L")
and right ("H") end are necessary, repeat Steps 2 and 3
analogously.
Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos,
experience has shown that it is beneﬁcial to move
both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the
process, the model usually ﬂies somewhat slower and,
ﬁrst and foremost, more steadily for the landing. For this
reason, it is necessary to program mixers through the
menu ...
"Free mixers"
(page 181)
... accordingly.
The ailerons are extended as landing assistance
depending on the position of the throttle stick, starting
from approximately half throttle toward idle. The
further the joystick is moved toward idle, the more the
ailerons deﬂect upward. Just the opposite applies when
"throttling"; the ailerons are retracted again in order to
prevent a sudden rise of the model.
In order to prevent the model from climbing with the
278 Detail program description - Control adjust
aileron landing ﬂaps extended, the elevator must be
mixed in somewhat.
For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown in
the following display. The activation of the mixers takes
place with one and the same switch, such as SW 8,
to which both mixers must be assigned with identical
switching direction.
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
ty
C1
C1
??
??
??
fr
EL
??
??
??
to
Then switch to the second respective display screen in
order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In both
cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control center.
Enter 0 % above the control center after selection of the
ASY ﬁeld for both mixers and below the control center
toward idle for:
MIX 1:
-60 % ... -80 % and
MIX 2:
-5 % ... -10 % .
Example L.MIX 1:
Diff.
fl.pos
FL
EL
FL
nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
FLAP
With this, the base setup model of an F3A model is
concluded.
Compensation of model-speciﬁc errors
Unfortunately, there are nearly always minor modelspeciﬁc "errors" through the mixers of a computer
remote control which must be compensated for.
However, before you begin with these settings, it should
be ensured that the model is faultlessly constructed,
optimally balanced over the longitudinal and transverse
axes and the down thrust and side thrust are correct.
Inﬂuence of longitudinal and transverse axes by the
rudder
The actuation of the rudder often inﬂuences the
behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This
is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge ﬂying,
in which the lift of the model with the rudder deﬂected
should be created by the fuselage alone. In the process,
the model can rotate and change directions as though it
were controlled with the ailerons and elevator. Therefore,
a correction over the transverse axis (elevator) and/
or the longitudinal axis (ailerons) must be made, if
applicable.
This can also be carried out with the "Free mixers"
of mc-32 HoTT. If, for example, the model rotates
away to the right over the longitudinal axis with the
rudder extended in knife-edge ﬂying, the aileron can be
deﬂected to the left with the mixer. Changes in direction
over the transverse axis can be performed analogously
with a mixer on the elevator:
• Correction over the transverse axis (elevator)
L.Mix 3: "Rudd ¼ Elev"
Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be
tested in ﬂight.
• Correction over the longitudinal axis (aileron)
L.Mix 4: "Rudd ¼ AIL"
Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be
tested in ﬂight.
Relatively small mixer values are usually sufﬁcient
in this case, the range lies below 10 %, but can vary
from model to model. With the use of curve mixers, the
mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely to the
corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no values are
indicated for this, because this would be model-speciﬁc.
Vertical ascent and descent
Some models have a tendency to deviate from the ideal
line in vertical ascents and descents.
In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to have a
center position of the elevator dependent on the throttle
joystick position. If, for example, the model begins to
hold off on its own in the vertical descent with a throttled
motor, some elevator must be mixed in at this throttle
position.
For this purpose, program a free mixer "C1 ¼ Elev".
The corresponding mixer values are normally under 5%
and must also be tested in ﬂight.
Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idle
If the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn
away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be
counteracted with the aileron.
However, the more elegant solution is to correct this
effect with a free mixer "C1 ¼ Ail".
The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %)
and the settings should be made in calm weather. It
often sufﬁces to only use the mixer between half throttle
and idle. Therefore program the mixer asymmetrically, if
applicable.
Turning away with the ailerons/landing ﬂaps
extended
If you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the
result is often a turning away over the longitudinal axis
due to various servo paths of the aileron servos or
due to design precisions. Therefore, the model begins
to automatically hang the left or right wing. This is
also easy to compensate for with a mixer "C1 ¼ AIL"
depending on the position of the ailerons/landing ﬂaps.
The mixer must be switched on and off with the same
switch with which you can switch the aileron/landing
ﬂap function on and off (see previous page). Therefore,
it only works with the aileron/landing ﬂap function
activated. The appropriate value must be tested in ﬂight.
One additional comment regarding …
"FAIL-SAFE setting"
You utilize the safety potential of this option by the
safety potential by programming at least the motor
throttle position for combustion models to idle and the
motor function for electrically powered models to stop
for a Fail-Safe case. Then, in the event of a failure,
the model cannot become independent as easily and
cause property damage or even personal injury. If
you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the
rudders to that the model ﬂies in gently sinking circles
in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that
the model even lands relatively gently on its own in the
event of a continuing connection failure. You also have
sufﬁcient time to re-establish the connection if the entire
2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily disrupted.
In the receiver's condition as supplied, however, the
servos maintain their last validly recognized position
("hold") in the event of a fail-safe situation. As described
on page 196, you can deﬁne a "Fail-safe position" for
each of the individual servo outputs of your receiver
(Fail-safe mode).
Summary
The settings described on this page are especially
useful for the "expert" who would like to have an entirely
neutral, precisely ﬂying F3A model acrobatic model at
his or her disposal.
It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort,
instinct and know-how. Experts even program during
the ﬂight. To do this, however, is not suggested for an
advanced beginner who ventures into an F3A acrobatic
model. It would be best to turn to an experienced pilot
and carry out the settings step by step until the model
has the desired neutrality in its ﬂight behavior. Then the
pilot can begin to learn the not always easy to perform
acrobatic ﬁgures with a model which ﬂies faultlessly.
Detail program description - Control adjust 279
Helicopter models
With this programming example, you must have already
covered the description of the individual menus and
you must be familiar with the use of the transmitter.
In addition, the helicopter's mechanical construction
should correspond exactly to the corresponding manual.
The electronic capabilities of the transmitter should by
no means be used to straighten out rough mechanical
imprecision.
As the case often is in life, there are also various ways
and possibilities of achieving a speciﬁc goal with the
programming of the mc-32 HoTT. The following
example should provide you with a clearer structure for
logical programming. If there are multiple possibilities,
the simplest and most clearly arranged solutions are
recommended ﬁrst. In order for the helicopter to function
faultlessly later on, you are, of course, free to try out
other solutions which may be better for you.
also be attained with relatively little (programming) effort.
However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the
enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic
description, you will ﬁnd adjustment information for the
gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the ﬂight-phase
programming.
Notice:
If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter
described here, but a electric helicopter, please continue
reading anyhow! With the exception of the omitted idle
settings, you can practically adopt most of the settings
described in the following unchanged.
Some basic settings of the transmitter are necessary
with the initial commissioning. For this purpose, switch
to the menu …
"General settings
(page 224)
BASIC SETTINGS
Own
Stick mode
PPM10
DSC Output
back
Pitch min
Contrast
unlim.
Display light
yes
Power-on beep
Ni-MH
Batterie type
4.7V
Batterie warning
Power on warn.
unlim
Touch Sense
Region
Euro
Voice volume
Beep volume
… and start with the entry of the "Owner name". Select
the characters for this from an extensive list on the
second display screen, which you can reach through the
symbol by brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of
the right touch pad:
The programming example is based on the clockwiserotating STARLET 50 helicopter from Graupner with
three pivot points each offset 120° of the swashplate
type "3sv(2 Roll)", beginner adjustment without
increased throttle curve; without heading-lock gyro
system and without transmitter-side gyro inﬂuence of the
"normal operating mode" and without speed regulator.
This simple program was also consciously selected to
demonstrate that a helicopter which ﬂies really well can
280 Detail program description - Control adjust
!"#$%&’() +,–./012
?@ABCDE
3456789:;
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk
Owner H-J Sandb
Select the default "Stick mode" according to the criteria
described on page 224.
The same applies for the default "DSC output".
The default "Pitch min" is based on your control habits.
With the creation of a new model memory you can
change these in the adopted defaults "Stick mode",
"DSC output" and "Pitch front/rear" as well as within
the respective model memory location.
The setting the "Contrast" line determines the legibility
of the display under poor light conditions and the setting
in the "Display light" line determines how long the
display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter
is switched on or after the last key actuation.
With "Power-on beep yes/no" you determine whether
the transmitter plays a recognition melody when
switching on.
In the "Battery type" line you specify whether the
transmitter is supplied with current from a "NiMH" or a
"LiPo" battery, and in the "Battery warning" line below
it, you determine the voltage at which the low-voltage
warning of the transmitter should trigger. Do not enter a
value that is too low here, so you have enough time to
land your helicopter.
In the "Power-on warn." line you can adjust how long
the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of
an operating element until it alerts you that it is still
switched on with optical and acoustic warning signals.
With the values of the lines "Touch sense", "Voice
volume" and "Signal volume", you can adjust the
corresponding behavior of the transmitter to your
requirements. And, in the event that you (would like to)
commission your transmitter in France, the setting in the
"Region" line is important: The legal regulations of this
country require the selection of "France" instead of the
default setting "Euro".
If these settings are activated, it continues with the
menu ...
"Model select"
(page 63)
Select a free storage location with the arrow keys ...
01
02
03
04
05
06
R12
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿
…and open this by brieﬂy pressing the central SET
key of the right touch pad. In the subsequently opening
display, with the key f of the left or right touch pad,
select…
Select model typ
… the "Heli" model type. The display immediately
switches to the base screen if you conﬁrm this selection
by brieﬂy pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad.
Notice:
• If the "Select model type" option has been opened,
the process cannot be canceled. Even if you switch
off the transmitter, this selection must be made! In
any case, you can undo this by subsequently deleting
the respective model memory.
• If the "Throttle too high" warning appears, this can
be deleted by turning the proportional rotary control
CTRL 6 counterclockwise until its limit.
• If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover
cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An
appropriate message will appear in the screen:
not possible now
voltage too low
Once this ﬁrst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the
receiver built into the model at this model memory must
be made in the menu …
"Base setup model" (page 74 … 80)
. For this purpose, switch to the line "RF bind":
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Starlet
Mod.name
Stick mode
n/a
RF BIND
n/a
E12 OFF
RF transmit
BD1 BD2
Notice:
After conﬁrmation of the model selection in the base
screen, if you conﬁrm the message appearing in the
screen for a few seconds …
BIND N/A
OK
… by pressing the SET key of the right touch pad, you
automatically come to this line.
In the line"RF Bind." you delete the connection process
between model memory and receiver, as described in
detail on page 74. Otherwise, you cannot address the
receiver.
Afterwards, using the arrow keys of the cleft or right
four-way pad, move up to the ﬁrst line and begin with
the actual model programming in the "Mod. Name" line:
Now enter an appropriate name for the model memory,
Detail program description - Control adjust 281
…
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
Mod.name
Stick mode
bind
RF BIND
n/a
n/a
Rcv Ch Map
R12
BD1 BD2
… which is comprised of the characters available for
selection on the second screen of the "Mod. Name" line:
BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL
ON
RF transmit
99sec
RF Range Test
PPM10
DSC Output
Autorotation
8I
The selected switch should be in a location on the
transmitter which is easily within reach – without
releasing a joystick – e. g. above the pitch joystick.
!"#$%&’() +,–./012
?@ABCDE
3456789:;
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk
Notice:
More more information about the setting of this
"emergency shutoff", see the beginning of the second
following double-page.
Mod Name STARL
Another tip:
Make a habit of giving all switches a common switch-on
direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter prior
to the ﬂight should sufﬁce – all switches off.
After entering the "Model name" the speciﬁcations for
the "Stick mode" and "DSC output" adopted from the
"General settings" are checked again, for which you
can change the storage location, if applicable.
An additional option is activated in the line
"Autorotation". Even if you are not an advanced pilot,
the autorotation switch should at least be set an an
emergency shutoff switch for the motor.
For this purpose, select the line "Autorotation", activate
the switch assignment by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad and move one of the twostage switches, e. g. SW 8, to the ON position:
282 Detail program description - Control adjust
The possible settings of the lines "Automatic C1
position" and "Motor stop" are not of interest at ﬁrst.
Additional settings speciﬁc to helicopters are made in
the menu …
"Helicopter type"
(page 86)
Under "Swashplate type", select the control of the
swashplate and/or the pitch function. In this example:
"3Sv(2rol)".
The lineLinear swashpl." is not of interest at ﬁrst.
In the line "Rotor direct" you deﬁne whether the
rotor - as viewed from above - rotates to the right or left.
In other words, whether it rotates counterclockwise or
clockwise. In this example "right".
With the default "Pitch min" adopted from the "General
settings", it is checked whether the entry "front" or "back"
corresponds to your habits and changed, if applicable:
HELI TYPE
Swashplate
3Sv(2rol)
no
Linear. swashpl.
Rotor direct
right
Pitch min.
back
SEL
"Expo thro lim." in the bottom line of this display is not
of interest yet.
By now, the servos should be plugged into the receiver
in the intended sequence:
Free or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Free or speed governor or aux. function
Free or aux. function
Receiver power supply
Gyro gain
Throttle servo or speed controller
Free or aux. function
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis 1 servo
Roll 1 servo
Collective pitch or roll 2 or
Pitch-axis 2 servo
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
Notice:
Please note that with the newer Graupner mc and
mx remote control systems the ﬁrst pitch servo and
the throttle servo are reversed when compared with the
older systems.
The degrees of mixing and mixing directions of the
swashplate servos for pitch, roll and nick are already
preadjusted to +61 % in the menu ...
"Swashplate mixer" (page 196)
"Joystick setting"
SWASH MIXER
Pitch
+61%
+61%
Roll
Nick
+61%
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
SEL
... If the swashplate mixer should not follow the joystick
movements properly, ﬁrst change the mixing directions
from "+" to "-" before you change the servo directions in
the menu ...
"Servo adjustment"
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Rev cent
(page 90)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
tr v +
... In this menu you can also adjust the travel and the
directions of the individual servos. As a basic rule you
should strive to maintain the servo travel 100 % in order
to attain the best resolution and positioning precision.
The direction of travel is determined with "Rev." and,
in the process, make sure that the direction is correct.
The tail rotor servo must run so that the nose (!) of the
helicopter follows the tail joystick direction.
In the menu …
(page 94)
TL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
… adjust the incremental width for each "click" of the
digital trim keys in the "St" column.
The C1 trimming only affects the throttle servo for the
helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the
particulars of this trimming ("cut-off trim") once again.
For this purpose, please refer to page 54. (Thanks to the
digital trimming, trim values can be automatically saved
with a model changeover and with the mc-32 HoTT
and even with a change of the ﬂight phase).
An additional setting which is speciﬁc to helicopters can
also be made in this menu in which you determine which
function the trim slider on the pitch joystick should have.
For this purpose, the setting "TL" is selected or left in
the "Throttle" line. In doing so, the trim lever corresponds
to the accustomed idle trim. If you "slide" it all the way
to the front, the throttle limiter seamlessly adopts the
throttle release later, which is assigned to "Th.L.12" in
the ...
""Control adjust" menu (page 100 … 107)
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Th.L.12
normal
GL –––
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct6
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
… whereas "free" is speciﬁed for all other inputs.
This input, "Th.L.12" serves as the throttle limiter. It
only has an effect on output "6", where the throttle servo
is located. The left proportional rotary control CTRL 6 is
assigned to the throttle limiter by default.
Once again, as a reminder:
• With the user of the "throttle limiter" function, you
do not have to program a ﬂight phase "throttle
preselection".
• The throttle limiter does not control the throttle servo;
it only limits the travel of the throttle servo in the full
throttle direction according to its position. In general,
the throttle servo is controlled through the throttle
curve(s) set in the "Helicopter mix", which is why
Input 6 must be left "free". In the respect, refer also
to the pages 168 to 170 of the manual.
• The C1 trimming also affects only the throttle servo
for the helicopter. At this point there is no need
to go into the particulars of this trimming ("cut-off
trim") once again. For this purpose, please refer to
page 54. (Thanks to the digital trimming, trim can be
automatically saved values with a model changeover
as well as with a change of the ﬂight phase).
• A detailed description of the idle run base setup
model and the adjustment of idle and throttle limit
can be found beginning on page 104.
Detail program description - Control adjust 283
Then switch to the "Travel" column with the arrow keys
f of the left or right touch pad and increase the now
inversely highlighted value from +100 % to +125 % with
a fully opened throttle limiter after brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad:
Input 9
Input10
Input 11
Th.L.12
normal
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+125%
– travel +
In doing so, it is assured that the throttle limiter releases
the entire throttle travel with the pitch joystick later
during ﬂight.
Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:
Since electric drives do not, by nature, require an idle
setting, in the scope of the base setup of an electrically
driven helicopter it must only be ensured that the
regulating range of the throttle limiter safely exceeds
and undercuts the normally reached adjustment range
of the motor control of -100% to +100 %. If necessary,
therefore, the adjustment of the "travel" setting of
the throttle limiter described above must be modiﬁed
accordingly, for example, to symmetric 110 %. The
further adjustment, however, can take place analogously
to the combustion helicopter described here.
With this process, you have not carried out the basic
settings for the transmitter as they are needed again
later for further model programming.
The actual helicopter-speciﬁc settings take place
primarily in the menu …
284 Detail program description - Control adjust
""Helicopter mix" (page 164 … 179)
Pitch
C1
Throttle
Tail
C1
Throttle
Tail
Roll
Throttle
Roll
Tail
Nick
Throttle
Tail
Nick
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Nor mal
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
The "Pitch" function appears right in the ﬁrst line. By
pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad,
you switch to the corresponding submenu. The graphic
representation of the pitch curve appears here; it is
initially only deﬁned by the points "L" and "H":
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
Output
Point ?
nor mal
0%
0%
0%
Now place point "1" in the center by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
Output
Point 1
normal
0%
0%
0%
Always try to make due with these three points initially;
more points can "over-complicate" the matter and are
more of a burden at this point.
The reference point for the hovering should generally
be the mechanical center position of the pitch joystick,
because this position comes closest to the normal
control feel. Although the curve adjustment enables
other settings, you must know exactly what you
are doing. First set the pitch joystick in the center.
The servos which you had previously set according
to manufacturer speciﬁcations have their levers at
positioned perpendicularly to the servo housing
(normally). The hovering pitch value of 4 ° to 5 ° is now
mechanically set at the control levers for the blades. In
principle, all known helicopters ﬂy with this setting.
Then move the pitch joystick towards maximum pitch
until the limit position. (The vertical line shows you the
current joystick position.) Now change point "H" of the
pitch curve with the arrow keys of the right touch pad so
that the pitch maximum is approximately 9 ° at the rotor
blades of the main rotor. With a value of approximately
+50 % this may be the case:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
+100%
Output
+50%
Point H
+50%
normal
Notice:
A rotor adjustment gauge, such as the Graupner
adjustment gauge, Order No. 61 is very useful in reading
the angle.
Now move the pitch joystick toward the pitch minimum
position until its limit position. Depending on the ability
of the pilot, adjust the value of point "L" so that the blade
angle of approach is 0 to -4 °. Now a slightly pitched line
arises at the hovering points, the so-called pitch curve,
which can appear as follows:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
–100%
Output
–75%
Point L
–75%
normal
Now you can, if you like, move the marking frame
upward with the arrow keys to the "Curve" line and after
activation of the value ﬁeld by brieﬂy pressing the central
SET key of the right touch pad, set the curve function of
the mixer to "on".
Pitch
Cur ve on
–100%
Input
–75%
Output
–75%
Point L
nor mal
If you now switch to autorotation phase – at the bottom
left of the display the ﬂight phase name "Autorot"
appears – the "old" pitch curve is again:
Pitch
Cur ve off
Input
Output
Point ?
Autorot
0%
0%
0%
Now carry out the same setting as before in the normal
phase. Only at point "H" – at pitch maximum – the pitch
angle can be increased by approximately 2 °. In doing
so, you will have somewhat more of an angle to catch
the model later on (1).
After setting the pitch curve, move the autorotation
switch back and return to the helicopter mixer menu
selection by brieﬂy pressing the central ESC key of the
left touch pad. From there, switch to the line
"C1 ¼ Thro" in order to adjust the throttle curve.
First the adjustment range of the idle trim must be
adjusted with the throttle curve. For this purpose, move
the pitch joystick to its minimum position and then set
point "L' to approximately -65 %.
C1 Throttle
Cur ve off
–100%
Input
–65%
Output
Point L
–65%
normal
With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim
completely open, move the pitch joystick back and forth
somewhat at the minimum limit position. The throttle
servo may not move with it in the process. No you have
established a seamless transition from the idle trim to
the throttle curve. The further settings along the throttle
curve must be carried out later in ﬂight.
If you switch from this graphic to the autorotation phase
for testing purposes, the following appears instead of the
accustomed representation:
C1
Throttle
OFF
Autorot
That means that this mixer is switched off and the
throttle servo is switched to a ﬁxed value, which can be
adjusted as follows:
Return to the menu list by pressing ESC. As long as you
are still in the autorotation phase, new submenus are
listed; speciﬁcally:
Detail program description - Control adjust 285
Pitch
Thr setting AR
Tailoffset AR
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Autorot
–90%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
The line "Thr. setting AR" is important. Enter the value
to the right depending on the servo direction to either
approximately +125 % or -125 %.
Pitch
Thr setting AR
Tailoffset AR
Gyro suppress
Swash rotation
Swash limiter
Autorot
–125%
0%
0%
0°
OFF
SEL
In doing so, the motor is safely switched off in the
autorotation phase (in case of emergency). Later, when
you have gained enough experience to practice the
autorotation ﬂight, a more stable idle can be entered
here.
Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:
Since the motor must also be shut off for electrically
powered helicopters in case of an emergency, this
setting is adopted without change.
The further submenus are not important at the moment.
By switching off "autorotation", it returns to the ﬁrst
menu list.
Select the setting screen of "C1 ¼ Tail" in order to
adjust the static torque balance at the tail rotor. In this
case, also work with a maximum of three interpolation
286 Detail program description - Control adjust
points; everything else is reserved for the experienced
pilot. For this purpose, change the presetting intended
for heading lock systems from a uniform 0 % at point
"L" (pitch minimum) to -30 % and at the opposite end, at
point "H" to +30 % (pitch maximum). These values may
have to be corrected in ﬂight. If applicable, you must also
set point "1" in the center when doing so:
C1 Tail
Cur ve off
0%
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
Nor mal
Now, for testing purposes, switch back to the
autorotation phase. Here the setting is also deactivated;
the tail servo no longer reacts to pitch movements
(no torque usually arises when the main rotor is not
powered). All additional interpolation points are not
currently of importance yet.
If, contrary to the speciﬁcation, the gyro has a
transmitter-side sensitivity setting, you still need a free
proportional control, e.g. CTRL 7. In the menu …
"Control adjust" (page 100 … 107)
… you can assign this to the "Gyr" input. Activate the
control assignment by brieﬂy pressing the central SET
key of the right touch pad and then turning the rotary
control until its control number appears in the display:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
normal
GL –––
GL –––
GL Ct7
GL –––
typ
0%
0%
0%
0%
offset
Conclude this entry by brieﬂy pressing the ESC key of
the left touch pad and then switch with the arrow key f
of the left or right touch pad to the "- Travel +" column.
After pressing the central SET key of the right touch
pad, the maximum sensitivity of the gyro, e. g. 50 %, can
now be set in the inverse value ﬁeld. For this purpose,
rotate the selected control to the corresponding screen
so that only one value ﬁeld is represented inversely:
Input 5
Throt 6
Gyro 7
Input 8
Normal
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+50%
+100%
– travel +
Now you have a ﬁxed value as long as the rotary control
is at the right limit position. The correct value must be
adjusted in ﬂight.
In the process, however, always observe the
adjustment instructions accompanying your gyro
sensor, because your helicopter will not be able to
ﬂy otherwise!
To conclude this initial programming, a few words should
be mentioned about the menu …
"Channel 1 curve"
(page 119)
C1 Cur ve
Cur ve off
Input
0%
Output
0%
Point ?
0%
normal
This function is a type of "convenient exponential curve"
for the throttle/pitch joystick and the mixer functions
connected to it.
If ever, this curve should only be applied "cautiously" at
the very end, when all adjustments have been made. It
should never be used for the throttle/pitch adjustment!
The overlappings result in "nasty" effects.
With this, all helicopter-speciﬁc settings which can
be made on the "workbench" are now completed.
The further ﬁne-tuning must take place in ﬂight. The
ﬂight-tested, (hopefully) minor (digital) trim settings are
automatically saved.
Larger deviations should ﬁrst be mechanically adjusted
or adjusted according to the previously discussed
settings.
Further settings
Following this programming example, you have provided
a helicopter with a basic adjustment for the hovering
training and simple trips. Depending on your knowledge
and experience as a pilot, additional functions can, of
course, also be activated.
If you want to ﬂy at different speeds and with different
trimming, you activate the so-called "ﬂight phases",
which can be called with assigned switches as an
alternative to the previously described "normal phase".
For this purpose, ﬁrst open the menu …
"Phase setting" (page 132)
… whereby the symbols appearing in the second
column after the switch assignment in the "Phase
assignment" menu have the following meanings:
"–": No phase switch available
"+": Phase switch available
"¾": Currently active phase
Auto
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
+ Autorot
¾
–
–
–
Name
ph.Tim.
However, you should consider beforehand whether you
want to activate the up to six additional ﬂight phases
with single switches or, more logically, with three-stage
switches in addition to the autorotation phase. The latter
possibility is more logical and usually more clearly laid
out.
In the upper ﬁgure the line "Autorot" is already selected.
When activated, the autorotation phase always has
precedence over any other phases you assign switches to.
However, in the "Name" column you ﬁrst assign
"meaningful" names to Phases 1 to 3, which are
adopted from a list. These identiﬁcations serve for the
better differentiation and are shown later in the base
screen and for all ﬂight-phase dependent menus, for
example:
Auto
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
+ Autorot
Normal
+ Hover
– Speed
–
Name
¾
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
ph.Tim.
Then, in the fourth column, enter the switching time
with which the FROM phase should switch TO the next
respective phase. Approximately 1 s should sufﬁce:
Auto
Pha1
Pha2
Pha3
Pha4
+ Autorot
Normal
+ Hover
– Speed
–
Name
¾
5.0s
1.1s
1.1s
1.1s
0.1s
Sw.time
This value can also be adjusted later according to your
personal preferences. Please observe in the process
that TO the autorotation phase, whose name is deﬁned
as "Autorot", is switched without a time delay. If
necessary, enter the time with which a change FROM
the autorotation phase to a different phase should be
affected.
In order to be able to switch between the individual ﬂight
phases, the assignment of the individual switches or the
three-stage switch is necessary.
Detail program description - Control adjust 287
The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu …
"Phase assignment"
(page 134)
Under "C" and "D" assign the three-stage switches SW
4 + 5, for example:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
4 5
1 Nor mal
Now you must assign the corresponding ﬂight phase
from the "Phase setting" menu to the respective switch
position. Since you have already assigned names, the
name of the phase "1 Normal" appears to the right in the
display. If the already assigned autorotation switch was
activated, the following warning message appears in the
display:
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
Autorot
4 5
1 Nor mal
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
prior
combi
C D E F
A B
4 5
1 Nor mal
Now select the desired ﬂight phase for this switch
position - for example, "2 Hover" ...
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
4 5
2 Hover
… and conﬁrm this selection by brieﬂy pressing the
central SET key of the right touch pad or move the
switch to the other limit position and deﬁne the name for
this switch position, such as "3 Speed".
PHASE ASSIGNMENT
combi
prior
C D E F
A B
4 5
3 Speed
As a reminder:
The autorotation phase has absolute precedence.
Therefore, move the autorotation switch back and then
move the selected switch, in our example the threestage switch SW 4 + 5, to the one limit position. Then
switch to the bottom right with the arrow keys and
activate this input ﬁeld:
288 Detail program description - Control adjust
The switch center then receives the name "1 Normal" as
shown above to the left.
Notice:
Exchanged or different name assignments for the
three switch positions are, of course, also possible.
For example, with the use of one of the rotational speed
controllers programmed according to the description
in the next column, a sequences like "normal / hover /
acro" would be logical.
The model settings made before the assignment of a
phase switch are now in the ﬂight phase "Normal". This
is the phase which is called after the above deﬁnition in
the switch center position.
This normal setting, which was already tested in ﬂight,
can be copied to a different ﬂight phase so that ﬂying
can take place in the same manner in every phase at
ﬁrst. For this purpose, use the menu ...
"Copy / Erase"
(page 64)
Erase model
Copy model–>model
Expor t to SD
Impor t from SD
Copy flight phase
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
With the operation of the ﬂight phases, it is possible
to carry out changes in the phase-dependent menu
for each individual phase. Since the mc-32 HoTT
has digital trimming, in addition to the ﬂight-phase
dependent menu settings in the helicopter program,
the trim positions of roll, nick and tail rotor joystick are
also saved depending on the ﬂight phase, see menu
"Joystick setting" page 94:
Thr.
Roll
Nick
Tail
TL
GL
GL
GL
Tr
St
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
time +
Enhancement recommendation:
Rotational speed regulator
At some point in time you may want to install a
rotational speed regulator in the helicopter, such as
mc-Heli-Control, in order to be able to ﬂy with speeds
automatically kept at a constant. In the process, it is
logical to couple the individual rotational speeds with the
ﬂight phases so that further additional adjustments are
possible.
It is mandatory for the transmitter-side programming
that the rotational speed regulator was installed
and programmed according to the manufacturer's
instructions. Of course, the mc-32 HoTT also enables
further possibilities for the realization of different speeds
in the individual phases. For a practical recommendation
with maintenance of the throttle limiter function, see the
description beginning on page 169.
If you have adjusted your helicopter according to
this programming principle, it is not yet a competition
helicopter, but it already permits sophisticated ﬂying.
You should only activate additional functions if the model
ﬂies faultlessly so that the (desired) improvements
are also easy to follow. Insofar as possible, activate
individual functions on an individual basis so that you
can actually recognize and attribute the change. Bear
in mind that it is not the quantity of functions used that
distinguishes good pilots, but what they can do in terms
of ﬂying with relatively little.
Detail program description - Control adjust 289
Appendix
PRX (Power for Receiver)
Order No. 4136
GPS/Vario module Graupner HoTT
Order No. 33600
Vario moduleGraupner HoTT
Order No. 33601
Highly developed, stabilized receiver current supply with intelligent
power management.
The unit ensures a stabilized and adjustable current supply of the
receiver in order to increase the reliability of the current supply even
further. Suitable for various receiver batteries in order to guarantee
an uncomplicated and wide range of application. Even if the battery
voltage is only interrupted for a short time, this is recorded and
displayed in order to counteract an under-dimensioning or even the
failure of the receiver battery with this notice.
• For the operation of one or two receiver batteries.
(Simultaneous discharge with the operation of two batteries)
• Suitable for ﬁve or six-cell NiMH or two -cell LiPo or LiFe batteries.
Graupner/JR, G3.5, G2 and BEC plug systems.
• Three adjustable levels for the output voltage for the supply of the
receiver (5.1V / 5.5V / 5.9V).
• Two ultra-bright LEDs show the operating statuses of Battery 1 and
Battery 2 separately.
• Integrated high-quality On/Off switch
• High-current resistant design
• Flatter design of the switch and the LEDS in order to not inﬂuence
the appearance and characteristics of the model.
• Linear layout of fastening lugs, LEDs and switches for a simple
installation using an accompanying hole template.
Vario with altitude signals and and ﬁve ascend and descend signal
tones as well as integrated GPS with range ﬁnding, distance
measurement, display of the ﬂight direction and the coordinates
• Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of
ascend and descend in two stages
• Altitude display and memory of the min. and max. altitude.
• Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always
• Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• The GPS/Vario sensor can be connected directly at the telemetry
input of the receiver.
Vario with altitude signals and 5 ascend and descend signal tones
each, altitude display and memory of the min. and max. altitude
• Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of
ascend and descend in two stages
• Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always
• Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• The Vario sensor can be connected directly at the telemetry input of
the receiver.
290 Appendix
Vario technical data:
• Altitude measurement: -500 m … +3000 m
• Resolution: 0.1 m
• Vario sensitivity: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3 s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/1 s, 3 m/s
programmable by tone
• Average calculation: 4 - 20 measurements programmable per
measurement value
Technical data
• Altitude measurement: -500 m … +3000 m
• Resolution: 0.1 m
• Vario sensitivity: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3 s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/1 s, 3 m/s
programmable by tone
• Average calculation: 4 - 20 measurements programmable per
measurement value
General Engine-Module Graupner HoTT
Order No. 33610
General Air-Module Graupner HoTT
Order No. 33611
Electric Air-Module Graupner HoTT
Order No. 33620
General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with
combustion or electric motor:
• 2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Single cell measurement with warning thresholds for min. voltage
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Programmable current limiting
• Current limiting with shunt resistors 2 x 1 mOhm parallel = 0.5 mOhm
• Rotational speed measurement and warning thresholds for min. and
max. rotational speed
• Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25 % increments
(after software update).
• Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always
• Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120 °C or 200 °C and voltage
measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1x rotational speed measurement up to 100,000 rpm with a twoblade propeller
• 1x speed controller/servo input, 1x rotational speed regulatio
n input, 1x speed controller/servo output for rotational speed
regulation
• 1x current, voltage and capacity measurement up to 40 A (pulse 1 s
up to 60 A) and up to 30 V
• 1x single cell monitoring for 2 - 6S lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo, LiFe)
• etc.; see www.graupner.de for the respective product
General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with
combustion or electric motor:
• Vario with altitude signals and ascend and descend signals and
additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of
ascend and descend in two stages
• Altitude display (-500 … +3000 m) and memory of the min. and max.
altitude.
• 2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Single cell measurement with warning thresholds for min. voltage
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Rotational speed measurement with rotational speed regulation
(programmable) and warning thresholds for min. and max. rotational
speed
• Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25 % increments.
• Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always
• Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120 °C or 200 °C and voltage
measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1x rotational speed measurement up to 100,000 rpm with a twoblade propeller
• 1x speed controller/servo input, 1x rotational speed regulation input,
1x speed controller/servo output for rotational speed regulation
• 1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 40 A (pulse
1s: 60 A ) and up to 30 V
• etc.; see www.graupner.de for the respective product
General sensor for Graupner HoTT receiver and models with electric
motor
• Vario with altitude signals, ascend and descend signals as well as
additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of
ascend and descend in two stages
• Altitude display (-500 … +3000 m) and memory of the min. and max.
altitude.
• 2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Single cell measurement 2 ... 14S with warning thresholds for min.
voltage
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always
• Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120 °C or 200 °C and voltage
measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1x speed controller input, 1x speed controller output for single cell
undervoltage correction
• 1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 150 A
(short-term 1 sec 320 A) and up to 60 V
• 1x single cell monitoring for 2 - 14S lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo, LiFe)
• 1x telemetry connection for receiver
Appendix 291
RPM Magnet Sensor Graupner HoTT
Order No. 33616
Graupner HoTT Smart-Box
Order No. 33700
Graupner HoTT USB interface
Order No. 7168.6
RPM Optical Sensor Graupner HoTT
Order No. 33615
Wide-ranging functions combined into one device make the SMART
BOX your future smart companion. Whether it comes to displaying
real-time telemetry data or settings are made on your HoTT system,
8 x 21 characters on a large display enable easy use. An integrated
sounder for the emission of an acoustic signal and warning tone
enhances the ﬂexible use of the BOX even further.
Using the accompanying installation set, the device can be mounted
on brackets of the transmitter and is thus optimally positioned to
enable the reading of real-time telemetry data even while controlling
your model.
The capability of user-installed updates ensures that the SMART BOX
always has the latest software and can be safely expanded with future
functions.
• Transmitter voltage display with • Region setting
adjustable warning threshold
• Range test
• Signal quality
• Receiver temperature
• Receiver voltage
• Servo reversal
• Servo neutral position
• Servo travel
• Cycle time
• Channel switching
• Fail-Safe settings
• Mixer settings
• Servo test
Dimensions: approx. 76 mm x 72 mm x 17 mm (L x W x H)
Weight: approx. 55 g
This USB interface is required together with the separately available
adapter cable, Order No. 7168.6A, for the updating of receivers and
sensors and the mc-32 HoTT transmitter can be updated directly
with the USB cable included in the scope of delivery of the interface.
292 Appendix
Graupner HoTT adapter cable
Order No. 7168.6A
This adapter cable is required together with the separately available
USB interface, Order No. 7168.6, for the updating of receivers and
sensors. The mc-32 HoTT transmitter can be updated directly with
the USB cable included in the scope of delivery of the interface.
FCC Information
Graupner mc-32 HoTT #33124
FCC ID: ZKZ-MC-32
FCC Statement
1. This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
un desired operation.
2. Changes or modiﬁ cations not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user‘s authority to operate the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure
limits set forth for un uncontrolled envirionment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with a
minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna and
your body.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
FCC Information 293
294 Declaration of Conformity
mx-12 HoTT - No. 33112, mx-16 HoTT - No. 33116,
mx-20 HoTT - No. 33124,
GR-12 HoTT - No. 33506, GR-16 HoTT - No. 33508,
GR-24 HoTT - No. 33512
Geräteklasse:
V1.7.1
Stefan Graupner, Managing Director
Stefan Graupner, Geschäftsführer
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
§ 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))
Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums
§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))
Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility
§ 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a))
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a))
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germany
Tel: 07021/722-0
Fax: 07021/722-188
EMail: info@graupner.de
Kirchheim, 09. März 2011
EN 300 328
EN 301 489-1 V1.7.1
EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1
EN 60950:2006
Harmonised standards applied
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:
complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive).
den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen des
FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
Equipment class
declares that the product
erklärt, dass das Produkt:
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Henriettenstraße 94-96
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck
Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal Equipment
Act (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und
Telekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
Declaration of Conformity
Warranty Certiﬁcate
Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente
Graupner -Zentralservice
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96
D-73230 Kirchheim
Service hotline
(+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*
Monday ... Friday
9:30 ... 11:30 & 13:00 ...15:00
Belgie/Belgique/Nederland
Jan van Mouwerik
Slot de Houvelaan 30
NL 3155 Maasland VT
(+31) 10 59 13 59 4
Luxembourg
Kit Flammang
129, route d’Arlon
L 8009 Strassen
(+35) 23 12 23 2
Ceská Republika
Slovenská Republika
RC Service Z. Hnizdil
Letecka 666/22
CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne
(+42) 2 33 31 30 95
Schweiz
Graupner Service
Wehntalerstrasse 37
CH 8181 Höri
(+41) 43 26 66 58 3
Espana
Anguera Hobbies
C/Terrassa 14
E 43206 Reus (Tarragona).
(+34) 97 77 55 32 0
info@anguera-hobbies.com
Sverige
Baltechno Electronics
Box 5307
S 40227 Göteborg
(+46) 31 70 73 00 0
France
Graupner France
Gérard Altmayer
86, rue St. Antoine
F 57601 Forbach-Oeting
(+33) 3 87 85 62 12
United Kingdom
Graupner Service
Brunel Drive
GB, NEWARK,
Nottinghamshire
NG242EG
(+44) 16 36 61 05 39
Italia
GiMax
Via Manzoni, no. 8
I 25064 Gussago
(+39) 030 25 22 73 2
0.14 cent / minute from a
German Telecom land-line.
Calling price variations
possible for calls from cell
phones or from the land-lines
of other providers.
Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von
This product is warrantied for
Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96,
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck provides a warranty for this product
of 24 months from the date of purchase. The warranty is
only valid for the material or functional defects already
present at the time of the purchase of the product. Schäden,
die auf Abnützung, Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder
unsachgemäße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von
der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und
Gewährleistunsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden durch
diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer
Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt genau auf
Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die entstandenen
Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96. D-73230
Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period of
24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee applies only to
such material or operational defects which are present at the time
of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear, overloading,
incompetent handling or the use of incorrect accessories is not
covered by the guarantee. The user´s legal rights and claims
under guarantee are not affected by this guarantee. Please check
the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or
send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for
our cost if the product is found to be free of faults.
La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96,
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie
de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat. La garantie ne
s’applique qu’aux défauts de matériel et de fonctionnement
du produit acheté. Les dommages dus à une usure, à une
surcharge, à l’emploi d’accessoires non compatibles ou à
une manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie.
Cette garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits légaux
des consommateurs. Avant toute réclamation ou retour de
matériel, vériﬁez précisément les défauts ou vices constatés,
car si le matériel est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été
constaté par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de
facturer le coût de cette intervention.
24
Monaten
months
mois
Garantie-Urkunde
Warranty certiﬁcate / Certiﬁcat de garantie
mc-32 HoTT Set
Order No. 33124
Übergabedatum:
Date of purchase/delivery:
Date d’achat :
Name des Käufers:
Owner´s name:
Nom de I`acheteur :
Straße, Wohnort:
Complete address:
Adresse complète :
Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:
Stamp and signature of dealer:
Cachet et signature du détaillant :
Warranty 295
H O P P I N G . T E L E M E T R Y . T R A N S M I S S I O N
GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG
POSTFACH 1242
D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK
GERMANY
http://www.graupner.de
Changes and delivery options reserved. Available only
through dealerships. A directory of suppliers will be
provided. No liability is accepted for print errors.
Printed in Germany PN.PK-01
Although the information provided in these instructions has been carefully scrutinized
for viability, no form of liability can be accepted for errors, omissions or print errors.
Graupner reserves the right to change the described hardware and software features at
any time without prior notiﬁcation.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
GTS PDFX Version                : PDF/X-3:2002
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2011:12:12 11:41:03+08:00
Modify Date                     : 2011:12:12 12:03:50+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:12:12 12:03:50+08:00
Document ID                     : uuid:1A8DEC177324E1119C5DE3D24EFED50D
Instance ID                     : uuid:369c0af5-e125-4def-a2f9-325109a5e6c7
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:4afb78e2-c7bd-4b30-a00b-ec5958913f73
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:844cb096-300e-47e8-8790-7b60879187ca
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 33124_mx20_HoTT_1_EN.indd
Creator                         : wbergbauer
Page Count                      : 296
Author                          : wbergbauer

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Graupner and KG MC-32 ComputerSystem Graupner HoTT User Manual 33124 mx20 HoTT 1 EN indd

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG ComputerSystem Graupner HoTT 33124 mx20 HoTT 1 EN indd

Users Manual

FCC ID Filing: ZKZ-MC-32

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation